Home

RuggedRouter®

1. interfaces 33 2 1 3 Rulesets Rulesets Rule Set ZT Action Rule Set Status Action ES Set s Action attack responses Disable f mise misc M Disable ii smtp Disable backdoor M Enable multimedia x Enable i snmp e Enable bad traffic i Disable E mysql Bi Disable P sql S Disable chat x Enable netbios x Disable R telnet x Disable ddos x Disable ontp x Disable fi tftp x Disable dns Fi Disable i oracle Fi Disable il virus xX Enable dos we Disable i other ids v Disable web attacks x Enable experimental Di Disable i p2p x Enable ii web cgi Bi Disable exploit Bi Disable i policy x Enable i web client C Disable finger x Disable E pop2 x Disable ii web coldfusion x Disable ftp Disable 1 pops Disable web frontpage V Disable icmp D Disable i porn x Enable web iis x Disable icmp info x Enable rpe Pi Disable ii web misc D Disable ima E Disable i rservices v Disable web php vi Disable info x Enable scan x Disable E xii x Disable local Disable F shellcode x Enable E Look up a rule by its Snort ID number Look Up Rule Figure 33 3 Snort Main Menu part 3 The Rulesets section selects the rules to apply on monitored interfaces Each ruleset reflects a collection of rules that are related The link under the Action field wi
2. Snort Network Settings Network Variable Setting Description HOME_NET Donnng IP Addresses in the local subnet EXTERNAL_NET J HOMENET IP Addresses in the exernal subnet DNS_SERVERS HOME_NET Addresses of DNS servers in the local subnet SMTP_SERVERS HOME_NET 200 Addresses of SMTP servers in the local subnet HTTP_SERVERS HOME_NET Addresses of HTTP servers in the local subnet SQL_SERVERS HOME_NET Addresses of SQL servers in the local subnet TELNET_SERVERS HOME_NET Addresses of TELNET servers in the local subnet SNMP_SERVERS HOME_NET Addresses of SNMP servers in the local subnet HTTP_PORTS Bo A single port number or range eg 80 8080 of ports which serve http SHELLCODE_PORTS 80 Ports you want to look for SHELLCODE on ORACLE_PORTS B52 Ports you want to look for ORACLE attacks on AIM_SERVERS 64 12 24 0 23 64 12 28 0 23 64 12 161 0 24 64 Known AIM servers Save Changes Figure 33 5 This menu allows you to configure the IP addresses and ports of servers in the local and external network The Home Net field defaults to ANY and designates the IP subnet of any local ports on the router Reset Changes Snort Network Settings Configuring a specific subnet can reduce the number of alerts generated Revision 1 14 1 273 RX1000 RX1100 33 Configuring the Intrusion Detection System 33 2 3 PreProcessors PreProcessors Snort Preproces
3. Note select two and only two targets Show Differences Figure 34 20 Archive Differences Menu The Archive Difference menu shows the difference between two targets The first target must be an archive while the second target can be either another archive or the current configuration Choose two and only two targets and click the Show Differences button Archive Differences List Differences between archive Archive20080523 1540 and Current Configuration File Name Archive20080523 1540 Current Configuration network interfaces 2008 05 23 15 10 16 2008 05 23 15 47 07 Files only exist in archive Current Configuration File Name Timestamp networkfproxy arp 2008 05 23 15 47 07 Figure 34 21 Archive Differences List The resulting menu shows the differences between the two selected targets Files in this table are sorted by the change time most recent changes first Files that exist in only one of the targets are shown separately Following the links under File Name column will show a files difference between the two targets Revision 1 14 1 291 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router The difference will be shown by two methods The difference between the two targets will be first be shown in a side by side scrollable comparison The difference will also be shown in a window that shows differing lines Show Difference Difference on hosts
4. When to execute Minutes Hours Days Months Weekdays C all all all all all D Selected D Selected Selected Selected C Selected Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday September October November December 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 Note Ctrl click or command click on the Mac to select and de select minutes hours days and months Create Figure 4 7 Creating a Cron Job Begin the creation of a cron job specification by selecting a user to execute as For most purposes root will suffice Enter the user name in the Execute cron job as field Enter the command to execute and any input to the command in the Command field Select the times the script is to run from the When to execute table remember to check the selected button above any column you edit The Active radio button at the top of the menu temporarily disables the job After selecting the Create button the Scheduled Cron Jobs menu will display the job Scheduled Cron Jobs Create a new scheduled cron job User Active Command Move root Yes ifdown eth1 eth2 sleep 1 ifup eth1 eth2 A Yes i i i t Figure 4 8 Scheduled Cron Jobs menu displaying cron jobs Follow the link of a specific job in order to delete the job edit it or test the command part of the job by running it immediatel
5. Module Ind i i jodule Index Edit Webmin User Webmin user access rights Username john Member of group admin si Password Don t change v Im Real name Save ViewLogs Delete Figure 3 2 Edit Webmin User Menu The Username field sets the user name for the Webmin user This user name will be used in the login The Member of group field determines which group the user belongs to Recall that the group is equivalent to the privilege level which determines the user s access level for the Webmin system The Password field sets the password for the user The Real name field sets the real name for the user The Save button will save the changes permanently The View Logs button will display the action logs for this Webmin user The Delete button will delete the current user from Webmin Note When a Webmin user is deleted any current session the user may have established will be terminated 3 6 Current Login Sessions Menu Current Login Sessions Current Webmin session logins are listed below To cancel an existing session and force the user to login again click on its session ID Session ID Webmin user Privilege IP address Logged in at 75d5526567799ff6bbd779d02cf76f17 john john 10 128 10 52 20 May 2008 16 22 View logs f739f759c17e5726e4dc23ed3774b96c root root 10 128 10 23 20 May 2008 14 56 View logs Figure 3 3 Current login sessions menu Revision 1 14 1 41 RX
6. MD MT MR MMC Descriptions Priority Queue 0 0 0 0 Normal Service Normal 0 0 0 1 Minimize Monetary Cost Low 0 0 1 0 Maximize Reliability Normal 0 0 1 1 MR MMC Normal 0 1 0 0 Maximize Throughput Low 0 1 0 1 MT MMC Low 0 1 1 0 MT MR Low 0 1 1 1 MT MR MMC Low 1 0 0 0 Minimize Delay High 1 0 0 1 MD MMC High 1 0 1 0 MD MR High 1 0 1 1 MD MR MMC High 1 1 0 0 MD MT Normal 1 1 0 1 MD MT MMC Normal Revision 1 14 1 194 RX1000 RX1100 20 Traffic Prioritization MD MT MR MMC Descriptions Priority Queue 1 1 1 0 MD MT MR Normal 1 1 1 1 MD MT MR MMC Normal 20 1 2 Prioritization Example A remote site router connects to a private network via a T1 line The router uses OSPF to manage an alternate routing but its primary purpose is to allow access to a switched network of RuggedServers implementing TcoModbus gateways TCP UDP port 502 The router and switches are managed through their Web interfaces but can me managed through SSH as well The RuggedServers are managed through Telnet An SNMP network management polling application tracks the status of all devices It is generally wise to ensure that control and management capabilities are always provided OSPF and SSH Telnet should be assigned to the highest priority queue OSPF packet are small and do not consume much bandwidth SSH and Telnet are not often used but must be available when required TcpModbus traffic is ensured a low latency by assigning it
7. Figure 16 11 IPSec X 509 Roaming Client Example Select A Certificate Authority Begin by constructing the required certificates You may construct the certificates using a RuggedRouter or a third party tool The device that is used to build the certificates is known as the certificate authority There are advantages and disadvantages to using the router itself as the authority It is convenient to use if it is the only router in the network and many clients will be connecting to it On the other hand if the router holds the certificate authority and is compromised all certificates must be constructed again Ensure that the Certificate Authority generates certificates with a reasonable life and generates keys of at least 1024 bits in length 16 2 10 1 Generate X 509 Certificates Use the authority to produce a certificate authority public certification cacert and a certificate for each of the clients and a certificate for the router The certificate authority will require some information that is shared by all certificates e g a Country Name C a State Or Province Name S an Organization name O and some per client information e g a Common Name CN and an Email address E Together this information forms the Distinguished Name DN and is used by the router and client to validate each other Revision 1 14 1 156 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN 16 2 10 2 VPN Networking Parameters The first step is to
8. 2 2 1 1 Ports And Addresses Module Index Ports and Addresses IP addresses and ports Listen on IPs and ports Rind t IP address Listen on port Any address gt Specific pot 10000 zij Same as first gt Save Figure 2 3 Webmin Configuration Menu Ports and Addresses This command allows you to restrict access to Webmin from one particular network interface on your server If your Webmin server has a non routable local address and a routable Internet address you should decide whether anyone will ever need to be able to access the Webmin server from outside of your local network If not simply configure Webmin to listen on the local interface By default Webmin listens on TCP port 10000 for clients It is possible to change this default behaviour Revision 1 14 1 35 RX1000 RX1100 2 Webmin Configuration 2 2 2 Change Help Server Help Change Help Server URL URL of Help Text none Use Upgrade Repository C alternate uRL Note If you specify an alternate URL to host the help text you must install release specific help directories in the form RELEASE html The router currently expects to find an rr1 12 0 html directory there Save Changes Figure 2 4 Webmin Configuration Menu Change Help Server The Web management package provides context sensitive help in each of its menus When a help link is selected the router instructs the browser to o
9. Dial string frogs Dial string to connect to APN Save i Modem Status Type of Modem Edge GPRS Firmware version MC75 REVISION 03 010 Received Signal Strength gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 60 Network Operator Rogers Enhanced Network Operator KORE Network Registration Status Registered roaming SIM Card Indentification 89302370108205044784 Refresh Figure 13 5 Cellular Modem Configuration with an Edge GPRS modem 13 2 2 1 Modem Configuration The Access Point Name APN is necessary only on GPRS networks Edge or HSPA It is the name of the cellular network access point which provides a gateway to the Internet This information will be provided by the wireless network when you register for data service This field is not used for CDMA modems The Dial string is special command to be sent by the cellular modem to the cellular network to establish a data connection For example for GSM GPRS networks this is typically 99 1 This command will depend on the wireless network Please consult the wireless network operator for the correct dial string command for data service A regular telephone number is usually not required to connect to a GSM GPRS network 13 2 2 2 Modem Status The Modem Status section displays information about and the current status of the cellular modem installed in the RuggedRouter Note Cellular modem status information is only collected if a PPP l
10. Rule Interface Subnet Address Protocol Ports 1 eth1 eth2 2 ppp eth2 66 11 180 161 3 ppp 192 168 0 0 24 66 11 180 161 4 wippp eth1 100 1 101 16 5 wippp eth1 100 1 101 16 tcp smtp 1 In this masquerading rule port eth2 is connected to the local network and eth1 is connected to a DSL modem Traffic from the subnet handled by eth2 should be translated to whatever IP is assigned to the modem Internet clients will not be able to determine the router s public address unless some form of dynamic dns is employed Revision 1 14 1 123 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall 2 Inthis SNAT rule a static address of 66 11 180 161 is acquired from the ISP Traffic from the subnet handled by eth2 should be translated to 66 11 180 161 as it sent to the Internet over ppp The at the end of ppp causes Shorewall to match any ppp interface 3 This example is much the same as the previous one only the subnet is explicitly described and could include traffic from any of the Ethernet ports 4 In this SNAT rule traffic from the subnet handled by only port eth1 should be translated to 100 1 101 16 as it sent to the Internet on t1 e1 port w1ppp 5 This example is much the same as the previous one excepting that only smtp from eth1 will be allowed Masquerading and SNAT rules are defined in the file etc shorewall masq and are modified from the Masquerading menu 14 4 6 Rules The default policies can completely c
11. Add Static Route Setting Username Static Route Action luser am f 1 10 31 0 0 16 Delete Lo Figure 12 6 Configure Modem PPP Server The Server IP address field specifies the IP address that the router will use for the PPP interface The Client IP address field specifies the IP address to assign to an incoming PPP client connecton Revision 1 14 1 106 RX1000 RX1100 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem The Client Nameserver field controls which nameserver if any the client should use for DNS lookups The Proxy ARP option makes the router attempt to proxy ARP the remote IP onto a local Ethernet subnet This requires that the Client IP address be set to an IP that would be valid on one of the Ethernet subnets to which that the router is connected If this option is selected other machines on the Ethernet subnet will be able to communicate with the remote PPP system as though it were connected directly to the Ethernet subnet The Idle timeout field controls how many seconds to wait when there is no traffic on the PPP connection before hanging up the connection Setting it to 0 or blank will disable the timeout The Username Password Setting table contains a list of locally defined users that are allowed to connect to the PPP server along with their passwords and a Delete button next to each entry to allow its removal A row of empty Username and Password fields ending with an Add button allows
12. RuggedRouter RX1000 RX1100 User Guide CO Rugged Operating System on Linux RuggedCom Inc 30 Whitmore Road Woodbridge Ontario Canada L4L7Z4 Tel 905 856 5288 Fax 905 856 1995 Toll Free 888 264 0006 http Awww ruggedcom com support ruggedcom com RuggedRouter RuggedRouter User Guide for use with RX1000 RX1100 Products Revision 1 14 1 July 23 2009 RuggedCom Inc 30 Whitmore Road Woodbridge Ontario Canada L4L7Z4 Tel 905 856 5288 Fax 905 856 1995 Toll Free 888 264 0006 http www ruggedcom com support ruggedcom com Disclaimer RuggedCom Inc makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material RuggedCom shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Warranty Five 5 years from date of purchase return to factory For warranty details visit www ruggedcom com or contact your customer service representative ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved The RuggedRouter includes components licensed under the GPL and BSD style licenses The full licences of such are included in an associated document No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of RuggedCom
13. SNMP V3 Trap Destinations No 3 trap destinations are currently defined Add an SNMP 3 Trap Destination Type V3 Trap gt IP Address PO User Name FO Engine ID rc Minimum Security No Authentication sl Authentication Protocol MDS gt Authentication Passphrase PO Privacy Protocol DES Privacy Passphrase OS Add Figure 34 31 Trap Destinations V3 The SNMP V3 Trap Destinations part of the menu allows the creation and deletion of V3 trap destinations The Type field specifies the exchange used with this destination either V3 trap or V3 inform The IP address and User Name fields specify the trap receiver s IP address and user name The Engine ID parameter is necessary for inform type notification destinations only and must be configured by the trap receiver in order to receive these notifications The Minimum Security Authentication Protocol Authentication Passphrase Privacy Protocol and Privacy Passphrase fields are as described above 34 6 6 MIB Support The RuggedRouter supports the following MIBs MIB Name MIB Description IF MIB The MIB module to describe generic objects for network interface sub layers SNMPv2 MIB The MIB module for SNMPv2 entities TCP MIB The MIB module for managing TCP implementations IP MIB The MIB module for managing IP and ICMP implementations UDP MIB The MIB module for managing UDP implementations LLDP MIB The MIB module for managing LL
14. System Logs L Upgrade System Upload Download Files S Logout Figure 1 13 RuggedRouter Web Interface Main Menu Window The index frame presents a number of entries with associated icons The fat icon causes home page window to be redisplayed The icon signifies that the next level contains a menu of menus The E icon signifies that clicking the entry will run a single menu The EN icon logs out of Webmin The menu system entries are composed of the Webmin System Servers Networking and Maintenance menus The Webmin Menu provides the ability to e Configure the sign on password e Specify session timeouts Restrict the Subnet of IP addresses that can login e Configure and view Webmin event logs The System Menu provides the ability to Revision 1 14 1 31 RX1000 RX1100 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router Change the router password Enable and disable applications from running Reboot the router Schedule one time and periodic tasks to run Change the router s name hostname Change the time and date The Servers Menu provides the ability to Control and configure the Serial Protocol DHCP NTP IRIGB and SSH servers The Networking Menu provides the ability to Configure the network interfaces Configure static IP and Multicast Routings and configure a default gateway Select a DNS server and edit local host addresses Configure End To End Backup Configure DDS T1 E1
15. Type of Modem CDMA 1xRTT EV DO Firmware version p2410701 51388 Electronic Serial Number ESN 0x6089E3CA Received Signal Strength gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 61 3 75 dBm Network Carrier ID Verizon Network technology currently in use 1xEV DO0 Revision A Phone number 9499102802 Refresh Reset Figure 13 7 Cellular Modem Status CDMA The Electronic Serial Number ESN is a numeric identifier unique to the cellular modem card This corresponds to the IMEI for GSM networks Network Carrier ID displays the identity of the wireless network provider for which the cellular modem is currently configured Phone Number displays the cellular telephone number associated with the account created to provide service for the modem 13 2 3 Modem PPP Client Connections Modem PPP Client Connections Connection Name Action HeadOffice Edit Add new Parameter Value Description Connect at boot HeadOffice v Which client connection to start automatically at boot Save Figure 13 8 Modem PPP Client Connections To edit an existing connection click the Edit link for that connection To create a new connection click Add new link To have the router automatically dial a connection at boot time and keep it always active select which connection should be used from the drop down list of available connection profiles in the Connect at boot list Revision 1 14 1 116 R
16. You may delete a link backup configuration through the Delete button Note If you delete a link backup configuration that has failed over or is failing over to its backup trunk the link daemon will stop attempting the link backup and restore the main trunk even if the main trunk is still down 18 2 4 Link Backup Logs SR Link Backup Logs Refresh Month Day Time Process Event var log syslog 0 Nov 13 16 12 04 linkd 8529 linkd configured and started war log syslog 0 Nov 13 16 12 04 linkd 8532 Start monitoring link backup set eth1 gt eth3 var log syslog O Nov 13 16 19 50 linkd 8529 linkd received a TERM signal var log syslog 0 Nov 13 16 19 50 linkd 8529 shutting down var log syslog Nov 13 17 03 35 linkd 25541 linkd configured and started var log syslog Nov 13 17 03 35 linkd 25545 Start monitoring link backup set eth1 gt eth3 Refresh Figure 18 5 Link Backup Log The link backup log displays the log of recent backup events Revision 1 14 1 184 RX1000 RX1100 18 Link Backup 18 2 5 Link Backup Status Help Link Backup Status Main Interf Backup Intert Name it eee URES Main Ping Test Time of Last State Change Link Backup State Device Link State Device Link eth2 gt ethi Jeng Up fetht Up 2009 03 18 18 11 58 Main path is active Refresh Figure 18 6 Link Backup Status The link backup st
17. e Superuser account root password admin e SSH and Web Management interfaces are enabled by default All other services including Serial Protocol Server DHCP server NTP server End to End Backup Server VPN Server NFS OSPF RIP protocol and firewall are disabled by default 1 2 Accessing The RuggedRouter Command Prompt 1 2 1 From the Console Port Attach a terminal or PC running terminal emulation software to the RS232 port on the rear of the chassis The terminal should be configured for 8 bits no parity operation at 38 4 Kbps Hardware and software flow control must be disabled Select a terminal type of VT100 Once the terminal is connected pressing lt CR gt will prompt for the user to login as and that user s password Sign in as either the rrsetup or root user The router is shipped with default passwords of admin for either of these accounts 1 2 2 From SSH Use an SSH agent running the version 2 protocol SSH to either the rrsetup or root accounts of the router at one of its IP addresses described above The router is shipped with default passwords of admin for either of these accounts 1 3 The RuggedRouter Setup Shell Signing in as the rrsetup user will automatically enter the configuration shell shown below Quitting the shell with cancel or by entering escape will cause the connection to close RuggedRouter Setup Menu Make one of the following selections Note that modifications
18. By configuring different forwarders low severity and high severity control centers can be set up Each alert is mapped to an alert definition entry which is predefined by a daemon who owns the alert or by a user All alert definition entries are configurable by user An alert filter is a user defined configuration to define the forwarders destination of active alerts Any active alerts with Renotify Interval set to non zero value and matches with the filter level will be forwarded to the defined forwarder destination Revision 1 14 1 275 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 2 1 Alert Main Menu Alerts All Alerts View by All Alerts Higher than Emergency Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Info Debug Category chassis performance interface daemon Alert Name Specific Severity Date Action Chassis 3 3 PS2 out of range Error Fri Oct 5 14 47 25 2007 Clear Alert Power Supply 2 Failure Failure Critical Fri Oct 5 08 33 45 2007 Clear Alert Upgrade made changes Upgrade made changes Warning Thu Oct 4 15 15 48 2007 Clear Alert 2 Alert Configuration Alert Definition Confiquration Figure 34 1 Alert Main Menu This menu displays active alerts and allows you to change alert system configuration and alert definitions Follow the All Alerts link to show all alerts The view of system alerts may be limited by severity by following one of the severity links
19. RE EE Save Figure 9 4 Edit Logical Interface Frame Relay single DLCI This menu allows you to display and configure logical interface fields for Frame Relay The menu is composed of two tables The first table provides link based configuration which affect all DLCIs The second table provides configuration parameters for individual DLCIs After the first DLCI has been configured revisiting that DLCI will display a menu that allows additional DLCls to be configured Edit Logical Interface wifri7 56K 1 Frame Relay Parameters Station Type CPE FR DTE Interface x Signalling type ANSI gt Link Failure Leaves IP interface up v 7391 10 7392 16 N391 6 N392 le n393 4 56K 1 Channel 1 Name DLCI Local Address Netmask Remote Address Description wifri6 16 LLL 255 255 255 255 2 2 2 2 Link 123 wifri7 17 3 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 4 4 4 4 Link 456 Add another DLCI to this channel Save Delete this logical interface Figure 9 5 Edit Logical Interface Frame Relay multiple DLClIs The fields and buttons in this menu are the same as those described in the Editing A Logical Interface Frame Relay section of the Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 chapter Revision 1 14 1 87 RX1000 RX1100 9 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And DDS 9 2 3 Editing A Logical Interface PPP Help Edit Logical Interface w1c1ppp T1
20. Refresh Continuous Display Port Statistics Port Protocol Rx Chars Tx Chars Packet Errors Parity Errors Framing Errors Overrun Errors 1 rawsocket 7446748 9462400 0 D 2 D reset Connection Statistics Remote IP Remote Port Local Port Rx Packets Tx Packets Target Serial Port s Status 10 0 10 2 50001 29705 42 7 ab Active Refresh Continuous Display Figure 24 9 Serial Protocols Statistics Menu This menu presents statistics of serial port activity and established connections The menu also allows you to reset a port forcing call hang up and re establishment The Port Statistics table provides a record for each active serial port The number of historical received and transmitted characters as well as errors will be displayed The Connection Statistics table reflects established TCP connections Network and serial connections can be paired by examining the Target Serial Port s field The Status field describes whether a network connection is established or in the process of being established Note All counts are from the router s perspective The Rx Packets count reflects packets received from the network the contents of which are transmitted at the protocol and reflected in the Tx Chars field The Refresh button will cause the page to be reloaded The Continuous Display button will cause the browser to continuously reload the page showing the differences in statistics f
21. SSH also provides TCP forwarding a means to forward otherwise insecure TCP traffic through SSH Secure Shell 30 1 1 1 Included With SSH Your RuggedRouter software includes scp an SSH utility to perform secure copying of files and directories over the network If you decide to create user accounts the ssh keygen utility can be used to populate the account with SSH keys Revision 1 14 1 257 RX1000 RX1100 30 Configuring SSH 30 2 SSH Configuration 30 2 1 SSH Main Menu SSH Server OpenSSH_3 8 1 209 116 16 ftp xys ww mey K Authentication Networking Access Control Apply Changes Click this button to apply the current configuration and restart the SSHd process Figure 30 1 SSH Server Note that the SSH server is enabled by default and may be disabled via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu When enabled any configuration changes may be made to take effect by selecting the Apply Changes button Note also that when disabling the SSH server any currently active SSH connections to the server will remain active Subsequent connection attempts will not succeeed 30 2 2 Authentication Authentication Login and authentication options Allow authentication by password C Yes No Permit logins with empty passwords yes No Pre login message file None Save Figure 30 2 SSH Server Authentication Menu Allow authentication by password determines whether to allow clear text tunn
22. These services allow you to build secure tunnels through untrusted networks Everything passing through the untrusted network is encrypted by the IPsec gateway and decrypted by the gateway at the other end The result is a Virtual Private Network VPN a network which is effectively private even though it includes machines at several different sites connected by the insecure Internet The IPsec protocols were developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF and are required as part of IP version 6 Openswan is the open source implementation of IPsec used by ROX The protocols used by IPsec are the Encapsulating Security Payload ESP and Internet Key Exchange IKE protocols ESP provides encryption and authentication ensuring that a message originated from the expected sender and has not been altered on route IKE negotiates connection parameters including keys for ESP IKE is based on the Diffie Hellman key exchange protocol which allows two parties without any initial shared secret to create one ina manner immune to eavesdropping 16 1 1 1 IPsec Modes IPSec has two basic modes of operation In transport mode IPSec headers are added as the original IP datagram is created The resultant packet is composed of an IP header IPSec headers and IP payload including a transport header Transport mode is most commonly used between IPsec end stations or between an end station and a gateway In tunnel mode the original IP dat
23. vulnerabilities Snort is a complex system with many capabilities and a large community of contributors and users The interested reader is encouraged to seek more information at the project s web site http snort org http snort org 33 1 1 1 Which Interfaces To Monitor Typically the router will have an interface to an external network and interfaces comprising the local network The firewall will cite these interfaces as belonging to the net and local zones A key decision is whether to monitor traffic outside or inside of the firewall Monitoring traffic outside the firewall on the external network interface has the advantage that attacks the firewall is blocking can be seen This method however will generate a large number of alerts Additionally firewall rules installed to eliminate vulnerabilities will not prevent future alerts since traffic is monitored before the firewall Finally this method will not detect misuse of the local ports Monitoring traffic inside the firewall on all local interfaces has the advantage that the number of alerts decreases as vulnerabilities are eliminated at the firewall It s also good to monitor as much of the internal traffic as possible 33 1 1 2 Snort Rules The router supplies a variety of prepackaged rules Each rule contains a unique Signature Identifier SID The SID is included in reported alerts as part of a Snort unique rule ID a three digit number of the form generator
24. Action Source zone Destination zone Protocol Src Port Dst Port ACCEPT net fw VRRP The order of the firewall rules is significant Any rules that are entered after the Gauntlet rules may not be processed Rules inserted before the Gauntlet rules may compromise the security provided by Gauntlet Note that exposing any protocol or networked service has the potential of being a security risk and should not be done without good reason Contact RuggedCom support for assistance if you wish to add other rules to the set recommended here Note You must ensure that the firewall is configured and enabled when using the Gauntlet Security Appliance 34 4 3 Gauntlet Status Menu Gauntlet integrates tightly with the firewall opening it for communications between vetted clients and critical assets on a demand basis The status menu provides a list of validated open connections Revision 1 14 1 284 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router Status Gauntlet Status current time Fri Jul 20 16 48 04 2007 Gauntlet is up up since Fri Jul 20 15 56 37 2007 AccPac last changed Fri Jul 20 15 04 58 2007 Gauntlet Opened Rules chain Gauntlet proto from to info a fte 192 168 0 211 212 12 12 12 rop dpt 69 2 tcp 192 168 0 211 172 16 44 83 tep dpt 42 Refresh Figure 34 9 Gauntlet Security Appliance Menu 34 4 4 Upgrading Gauntlet During an upgrade the Gauntlet daemo
25. Primary DNS Server for Windows Client Secondary DNS Server for Windows Client Primary WINS Server for Windows Client IEN Secondary WINS Server for Windows Client oo Save and Apply Figure 16 5 L2TPD Configuration Menu The Local IP Address field sets the router s IP address for the PPP connection Note that for all connections the router will use the same local IP address The First Address in Remote IP Address Pool field sets the first IP address of the remote IP address pool IP addresses from this pool are assigned to PPP clients connecting to the L2TPd The Maximum Number of Remote IP address field sets how many simultaneous connections will be allowed The Netmask of Remote IP Address Pool field is always 255 255 0 0 The Primary DNS Server for Windows Client field sets the primary DNS Server IP address to be used by connecting Windows clients The Secondary DNS Server for Windows Client field sets the secondary DNS Server IP address to be used by connecting Windows clients The Primary WINS Server for Windows Client field sets the primary WINS Server IP address to be used by connecting Windows clients The Secondary WINS Server for Windows Client field sets the secondary WINS Server IP address to be used by connecting Windows clients 16 2 4 1 Notes on configuring a VPN connection In addition to configuring L2TP using the menu described above setting up a VPN connection using L2TP requires several other items to
26. e Emergency e Alert e Critical e Error e Warning e Notice e Info e Debug or by category by following one of the category links e chassis e performance e interface e daemon Note that active alerts are volatile and will be regenerated after reboot If you clear an alert manually it will appear if the condition occurs again You may disable the alert permanently by disabling the alert from its entry in the definition menu The Clear Alert link under the Action column allows you to clear the alert Clicking on the Alert Name Specific Severity and Date column headers will sort the alerts by those types Revision 1 14 1 276 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router Select Alert Configuration to change the generic configuration and alert filter configurations Select Alert Definition configuration to change the alert definition entries 34 2 2 Alert Configuration This menu configures the general information and forward filters for the alert system Alert Configuration General Configuration This Router s URL used in email message https 10 128 10 247 10000 Default Filter Level for Webmin Warning Zi Default Filter Level for Command Line Error Ji Save Alert Filters Forward Destination Forward Destination Type Filter Level Comparator Filter Level admin example com EMail Greater Than warning Create New Filter Figure 34 2 Alert Configuration Menu The This Rou
27. gt All programs gt Apache HTTP Server gt Configure Apache Server gt Edit the Apache httpd conf file Search the file for the DocumentRoot variable and change it to the directory where your RuggedRouter releases are kept Restart Apache by clicking Start gt All programs gt Apache HTTP Server gt Control Apache Web Server gt Restart Return to the web browser used earlier to verify Apache and refresh the screen It should now reflect the contents of your RuggedRouter release directory You should now be able to perform an upgrade from a router Revision 1 14 1 322 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix D Installing IIS Web Server On Windows Appendix D Installing IIS Web Server On Windows A number of customers have asked for advice and instructions on setting up an IIS web server on Windows Begin by identifying a host computer that has IIS and its physical and logical location on the network The Repository Server Requirements of the appendix Setting Up A Repository provide some guidance on host requirements Start to install IIS by clicking on Start menu Control Panel Add or Remove Programs Add remove Windows Components In the resultant menu check the Internet Information Services IIS box and select next Windows Components Wizard Same ae Windows Components ir E You can add or remove components of Windows XP To add or remove a component click the checkbox A shaded box means that only part of th
28. A OS daa EIE OE dee E E S EE ET 175 17 16 Network Areas a h AEA EEEE E RE EREE 176 ATS RIBP Menu E 176 1718 AIP Global Parameters ET 177 E Qs EE 179 17 20 RIP Networks siiin e a a a E A aa aa eaaa aa e aaaea A 180 18 14 Link Backup lu 182 18 2 Link Backup Malin En EE 182 18 3 Link Backup RW e Mie lee EE 183 18 4 Edit Link Backup Configuration ici ccs nce eilaneeineeetiviniaesdadiedeapedniak ENEE ENEE 183 18 5 Link BaCkUpsLOG EE 184 18 6 Link Backup EEN 185 ee LINK BACKUP cc Geeta ela ile cot Ah de can etter ws See la ae echt So 1 Osa ne evga ca ha 185 19 1 VRRP Example e eege a aa Aaa ap aeaa EA AAA RAAE ARA a aAa aperti 187 19 2 VRRP Group Example siri m e e A E inna a a Beads 188 19 3 VRRP Mat Meng e a r a EE edd deen NEE Ee 189 19 4 VRRP Configuration Menu NEE 189 19 5 VRRP AS AC s a seve aa a a aa EER 190 19 60 VRRP GOUD EE 191 19 7 VRRP Instances Status serres itseen E 191 20 1 Traffic Prioritization Main Menu cccccccccceecesseesneeeeeeeeeesseeeaeeeeeeeesessesneeeeeeeeeeeessennaaaees 196 20 2 Interface Prioritization Menu age etcctetacr ec caeteudcd otdeaeh chad ee EE NEE 196 20 3 Prioritization Queue Configuration EE 197 20 4 Prioritization Filter Configuration scccast tes 2 chen sects daercened extend ued ean toes on Mdeneaan ted eeaesoadeneasleceeteetiss 197 20 5 neut ENTREE EE 198 21 1 LEDP Summary DISplay ciicc isi cagisacesaakeednceuesiansenagaue E E REE nai teases 199 22 1 GRE Tag
29. IP of public gateway System Identifier Default Private subnet behind system 10 0 0 0 8 System s public key Certificate File router pem Next hop to other system Default Right System Settings Laptop side Public IP Address Automatic System Identifier Default Private subnet behind system 10 0 1 0 24 Assign IP based on client from within this subnet System s public key Entered below cert Derive identity from incoming certificate Next hop to other system Default Apply the configuration to restart the server and create an ipsecO interface 16 2 10 5 Firewall IPSec Configuration Create firewall Zones vpn and net Ensure that the WAN interface here w1ppp and ipsecO interface are present in the Shorewall Network Interfaces The WAN interfaces should be in zone net while ipsecO should be in zone vpn Add the following firewall rules Action Source Zone Destination Zone Protocol Dest Port ACCEPT all fw ah ACCEPT all fw esp ACCEPT all fw udp 500 ACCEPT vpn loc Restart the firewall to install the rules 16 2 10 6 Ethernet Port Configuration Because the remote client will be assigned a local IP address but is reachable only through the IPSec connection proxy ARP must be employed Activate proxy ARP on the Ethernet interface that hosts the local network here eth1 via the Networking Menu Ethernet sub menu boot time entry Proxy ARP setting When a host on eth1 arps for the remote clie
30. IRIGB IEEE1588 Configuration EE 266 32 2 1 IRIGB IEEE1588 Main Menu sisi ccccdiesshcstcteasdinatddiatecnetad lence dedawtennavniausedetiens 266 32 2 2 General Configuration eege eeneg eg 266 32 2 5 IRIGER et e EE 266 32 2 4 IEEE1588 Configuration EE 267 32 2 5 RIGB EE 268 E EE 268 32 2 ANG ENEE eener ees 269 33 Configuring the Intrusion Detection System cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeieeeetenaees 270 38 Ee tele e WEE 270 33 11 Snort Eug E 270 33 2 IDS CONMMGUPATION eseou EA EENS Edge 271 33 2 1 Snort IDS Main Menu EE 271 33 2 2 Network Settings seer gen E aae haere Ra EEEE AEE REE TEE Eas 273 GEES FOE tee eege ee Eeer 274 EE Alerts Ber LOINC ca as cascade te dada pea eects das ce ens auc ca eater ARAE 274 338 25 Edit CONIC EE 274 34 Maintaining The Router seccare EEENER REENEN 275 34 A e ee e EE 275 S42 gt Alert E NEE 275 34 2 1 Alert Main MOU vec ae dened iat ea else aah eae arate asl Ee a nes 276 34 2 2 Alert Configuration EE 277 e TEE ae EE 280 34 3 1 What information is sent to an SEM unit 0 0 2 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 280 34 3 2 Industrial Defender Configuration ccccecceceeeeeeneeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeees 281 34 4 Gauntlet Security EE 282 34 4 1 What And How Gauntlet Protects AEN 283 34 4 2 Gauntlet And The Firewall aise ccs cccacessecceseteuaceazeeaeveaes eyed eenesaseniaeevseaveneeenctenniaes 283 34 4 3 Gauntlet Status Menu ENEE 284
31. IRIGB Options AM Port 1 PTP 1 Output OFF si TIL Port 2 PTP2 Output OFF sl TIL Port 3 PTP3 Output OFF sl Save Figure 32 3 IRIGB Configuration menu Revision 1 14 1 266 RX1000 RX1100 32 Configuring IRIGB And IEEE1588 This menu allow you to configure IRIGB parameters The save button will save the changes of configuration permanently The AM Port 1 PTP1 Output field enables or disables the amplitude modulated output of this port The TTL Port 2 PTP2 Output and TTL Port 3 PTP3 Output fields sets the output formats of these ports to PPS PWM and OFF 32 2 4 IEEE1588 Configuration Help IEEE1588 Configuration IEEE1588 Options IEEE1588 Working Mode Master or Slave ei Preferred Master Clock EI Subdomain Name DefaultPTPdomain 224 0 1 129 sl Sync Interval seconds 2 x The following options determine how IEEE 1588 grandmaster clocks are represented to NTP based upon the quality of their clock source Treat NTP sync d grandmasters as stratum 2 2 12 Treat Local clock sync d grandmaster as stratum 10 2 12 Treat NTP sync d grandmasters as stratum is the stratum number of grandmaster when it does not have GPS locked but have locked with __ remote NTP server Treat Local clock sync d grandmaster as stratum is the stratum number of grandmaster when it only have locked with local clock Save Figure 32 4 IEEE1588 Configuration Menu This menu allows you to configure IEEE 1
32. If you do not return here and accept the configuration when done changing settings the previous configuration will be restored and the router rebooted when the timeout expires The timer is reset everytime a configuration webpage is successfully accessed so you do not have to do all the configuration changes within the timeout you just have to accept the changes within the timeout of the last change you make amp Return to Backup And Restore Figure 34 12 Configuration Rollback menu The Configuration Rollback menu enables the user to define a period of time in which configuration changes can be made and subsequently accepted If the user does not explicitly accept the changes being made then the unit will revert to a configuration snapshot that was taken when the user started the configuration rollback In reverting to this configuration the unit will reboot This enables configuration changes to be made under a safety net If a configuration change effectively blocks the user s access to the unit or has any other detrimental effect the unit not seeing any user acceptance will reboot at the end of the timeout period When activated by pressing the Start Configuration Rollback Monitoring button each subsequent configuration screen will display the line Configuration Rollback is active at the top of the page reminding the user that there is a timeout period in effect and an eventual reboot of the unit if changes are not accepted For
33. Round Trip Times Remote IP Transmitted Received Minimum RTT Average RTT Maimum RTT Std Deviation 115 40 3 8 3 121 22 54 7 3 172 16 0 1 3 76 44 31 3 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms 0 000 ms Refresh Continuous Display o 9 9 o Figure 26 8 GOOSE Statistics Menu This menu presents statistics of GOOSE activity at the Ethernet and Network Layers The Ethernet Statistics table provides a record for each GOOSE tunnel The number of historical received and transmitted characters as well as errors will be displayed The Connection Statistics table reflects UDP connections Network and Ethernet connections can be paired by examining the L2 MAC Address field Note All counts are from the router s perspective The Rx Packets count reflects packets received from the network the contents of which are transmitted at the protocol and reflected in the Tx Chars field The Round Trip Times table reflects the measured RTT to each remote daemon The minimum average maximum and standard deviation of times is presented Wntries with a large difference between the Transmitted and Received fields indicate potential problems The Refresh button will cause the page to be reloaded The Continuous Display button will cause the browser to continuously reload the page showing the differences in stati
34. T3 and ADSL Networking Configure the embedded modem Set up the firewall Set up Virtual Private Networking Configure Routing protocols such as OSPF and RIP Configure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP Configure Traffic Prioritization Perform pings traceroutes host lookups and line tracing The Maintenance Menu provides the ability to Manage the Gauntlet Security Appliance Backup and restore configurations Configure SNMP access Configure RADIUS Authentication View system logs Upgrade the software of the router Upgrade the router type to RX1100 Upload Download files to and from the router 1 5 Using The LED Status Panel The LED status Panel provides the console port indicates the status of hardware software and can initiate a controlled reboot Revision 1 14 1 32 RX1000 RX1100 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router DDD COPPP DATA ALARM 5 6 7 PPP LINK COPOWER1 D 40 ID 42 GPSLOCK POWER 2 13 44 45 46 E CONSOLE 17 48 49 20 E 38400 N 8 1 2D 22 29 24 MODE m 25 26 27 28 g 29 30 31 32 L mm Figure 1 14 LED Status Panel The LEDs are organized into three primary groups the port group GPS PPP group and the Alarm Power Supply group The display possibilities are as follows Table 1 1 Meaning of LEDs LED Name Description LED 1 4 Green link activity on Ethernet port 1 4 LED 5 8 Green link detected on Ethernet port 1 4 R
35. between ArchiveOct 18 2006 1205 and Current Configuration Side by Side Difference Display 127 0 0 1 localhost localdomain localhost rrjc6 127 0 0 1 localhost localdomain localhost ruggedrouter The following lines are desirable for IPv6 capable hosts The following lines are desirable for IPv6 capable hos Eg ip6 localhost ip6 loopback bed ip6 localhost ip6 loopback fe00 0 ip6 localnet fe00 0 ip6 localnet ff00 0 ip6 mcastprefix ff00 0 ip6 mcastprefix ff02 1 ip6 allnodes ff02 1 ip6 allnodes ff02 2 ip6 allrouters ff02 2 ip6 allrouters ff02 3 ip6 allhosts ff02 3 ip6 allhosts Ki d Differing Lines Display lcl lt 127 0 0 1 localhost localdomain localhost rrjc6 gt 127 0 0 1 localhost localdomain localhost ruggedrouter Note lines beginning with lt belong to ArchiveOct 18 2006 1205 lines beginning with gt belong to Current Configuration Copy This File To Current Configuration Figure 34 22 Show Difference for selected file between two targets The Copy This File to Current Configuration button will be present when the destination archive is the Current Configuration It allows user to copy the selected file from the old archive to current configuration Note It is possible to damage your router through use of this feature Ensure that the configuration file copied makes sense in the current version of the router Note that the copying configurations may not make any actual operating ch
36. for example RuggedRouter supports RADIUS authentication for the following services LOGIN PPP lt WEBMIN RuggedRouter provides the option of designating different servers to authenticate LOGIN PPP or WEMBIN services separately or in combination Revision 1 14 1 298 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router The LOGIN Service The LOGIN service consists of the following types of access e Local console logins via the serial port and modem e Remote shell logins via SSH and Telnet e Secure file transfers using SCP and SFTP based on SSH Note that the only two accounts that typically use the LOGIN service on RuggedRouter are root and rrsetup Authentication requests for LOGIN services will attempt to use RADIUS first If no response is received from any configured RADIUS server RuggedRouter will authenticate against the local user database Note RuggedRouter manages both the RADIUS login and ssh services together as LOGIN from the Webmin interface Please refer to RADIUS Server Configuration for details on configuring accounts for these services at the RADIUS server The PPP Service The PPP service represents incoming PPP connections via modem Authentication requests to the PPP service use RADIUS only In the event that no response is received from any configured RADIUS server RuggedRouter will not complete the authentication request The WEBMIN Service The WEBMIN service represents access t
37. none gt as232 Fone Case dd none zi 1 f none dl Fore Save Changes Figure 24 4 Port Settings Menu This menu configures the serial settings and electrical protocol associated with a serial port Changes are made immediately Revision 1 14 1 219 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols 24 2 4 RawSocket Menu Raw Socket Note that changes are made immediately causing call placement to start Port Pack Char Pack Timer Turnaround Call Dir Max Conns Rem IP Rem Port Loc Port h 10 ooo lott OUT gt fe 176 0 101 2 50001 Save Changes Figure 24 5 Raw Socket Menu This menu configures the Raw Socket settings for each port Changes are made immediately The Pack Char field configures the numeric value of the ASCII character which will force forwarding of accumulated data to the network The Pack Char must be between 0 and 255 inclusive or the value off If configured off accumulated data will be forwarded based upon the packetization timeout parameter The Pack Timer field configures the delay from the last received character until when data is forwarded The Pack Timer must be between 5 and 1000 milliseconds inclusive The Turnaround timer field controls the amount of delay if any to insert between the transmissions of individual messages out the serial port The Pack Timer must be between 1 and 1000 milliseconds inclusive of off The Call Dir fi
38. pppd 2857 Using interface ppp12 Aug 18 09 24 00 pppd 2857 Connect pppi2 lt gt eth2 Aug 18 09 24 05 pppd 2857 pap authentication succeeded Aug 18 09 24 05 pppd 2857 peer from calling number 00 90 1A4 40 2A B9 authorized Aug 18 09 24 05 pppd 2857 not replacing existing default route via 10 0 0 253 Aug 18 09 24 05 pppd 2857 Cannot determine ethernet address for proxy ARP Aug 18 09 24 05 pppd 2857 local IP address 216 58 41 159 Aug 18 09 24 05 pppd 2857 remote IP address 192 168 200 1 Aug 18 09 24 05 pppd 2857 primary DNS address 216 58 97 21 Aug 18 09 24 05 pppd 2857 secondary DNS address 216 58 97 20 Refresh Figure 6 9 Display PPP Logs This menu displays the native Ethernet and internal ADSL interface PPPoE connection messages This is mainly useful when trying to debug a PPP connection problem 6 2 8 Current Routes amp Interface Table The table provided by this command is as described in the Networking menu Network Utilities sub menu It is also provided here as a convenience Revision 1 14 1 66 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 7 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Frame Relay and PPP Terminology and Issues e Configuring Frame Relay and PPP Links e Viewing status and statistics e Upgrading Firmware 7 1 1 T1 E1 Fundamen
39. 1 Synchronous Port Settings Menu ciceiedecs ese ceecd enced eetehl eee eee Re eee 227 Revision 1 14 1 8 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 25 2 2 Configuring Raw Socket On Synchronous Serial Ports c ssseeeeeeeeeeeeee 228 25 3 Synchronous Serial Diagnostics j 0 ec cessnccssadacshendeaecresandeseicersedenplaedacdertycevenmeecssaees 229 26 Configuring Layer 2 Tunnels iicsiciceciieabieccceiuic ice SEET peti Derek ER EAECE 230 20 te e geed EE 230 26 1 1 IEC61850 GOOSE Fundamentals sde ggeeieged sde Eed deed 230 26 1 2 Generic Layer 2 Tunnel Fundamentals c cccccesecceeeeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeennees 231 26 2 Layer 2 Tunnel Configuration 5 2 caccachccttescheateeeisinctacienp caeeesdetencuinlscanedscianedatecestuetacetaes 232 26 2 1 Layer 2 Tunnels Main Mengt geet OB eee es ici Bae 232 26 2 2 General Configuration Men ENNEN 233 26 2 3 GOOSE Tunnels Menu EE 233 26 2 4 Generic L2 Tunnels Menu iiccciascectcdiciit sia tades aces ate tnadnaena ian edaeee 234 26 2 5 GOQSE Statistics Men RE 236 26 2 6 Generic L2 Tunnel Statistics Menu ENNEN 237 26 2 7 Activity Trace Menu E 238 27 Configuring The DACP server eet EEER NEEN dee EENS carta EE ee 239 27 21 gt MPOOUCHIOMN EE 239 27 1 1 DHCP lee Enn EE 239 27 1 2 Example DHCP Scenarios And Configurations ceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 241 21 2 DAGP lte IC 244 27 2 1 DHCP Server Main RETTEN 244 27 2 2 DHCP Shared Network
40. 1 Telnet Server Configuration Main Men Au 261 32 1 IRIGB 1588 Main Menu eege Sab e a EEE 266 32 2 IRIGB IEEE1588 General Configuration Menu ceccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeteaeeeeeeneas 266 32 3 IRIGB Configuration Menu EE 266 32 4 IEEE1588 Configuration Menu 22582 ENAOEAE EE eeNEREEENEE EN 267 32 57 ANB GPS Stal chek Sateen ts San aed Tatiana dE eege 268 32 6 EEE1588 Stats eebe eege ated weal meee 268 Revision 1 14 1 16 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter B20 WRIGB GP EE 269 33 1 Snort Main Menu part 1 EE 271 33 2 Snort Mam Men part 2 penera e a A E A a Eat 272 oS ONION M in Men pait EE 272 33 4 Snort R les t e EE 272 33 5 Snort Network E lee EE 273 33 6 Snort ele CEET 274 She AION E EE 274 34 1 Alet Main INORG EE 276 34 2 Alert Configuration Menu eu tegeetiebe r i eege ege cecesnqeant edd deen 277 34 3 Alert Filter Configuration Men uk 277 34 4 Alert Definition Configuration Menu eege Seda abeg sede wcagahncdes acne Si vee eea sda Senses En reng 278 34 5 Change Alert Definition Meng ciescneescassedocevzzeveeccneezcteeshiiny adedecenmnceete ee teens 279 34 6 Industrial Defender Agent Configuration ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeesiaaeeees 281 34 7 Industrial Defender Configuration IP addresses Save 281 34 8 Industrial Defender Configuration key obtained cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeees 282 34 9 Gauntlet Security
41. 1 and host 2 use a gateway of 192 168 3 10 The external side can access the internal side by gateway 192 168 2 10 The VRID_20 and VRID_21 are grouped together Normally the Router 1 will provide both internal and external access gateway as its priority is higher than those on Router 2 When either internal or external side of Router 1 becomes inoperative it will remove the control of both VRIP 192 168 2 10 and 192 168 3 10 and gives the control to Router 2 Central Site Network C VRID_20 VRIP 192 168 2 10 VRID_20 VRIP 192 168 2 10 E vm VRID_20 Priority 50 VRID_20 Priority 100 192 168 2 2 Remote Router 1 192 168 3 2 192 168 2 3 Remote Router 2 192 168 3 3 VRID_21 VRIP 192 168 3 19 VRID_21 Priority 100 VRID 21 RIP 192 168 3 10 Priority 50 Figure 19 2 VRRP Group Example Other VRRP parameters are the Advertisement Interval and Gratuitous ARP Delay The advertisement interval is the time between which advertisements are sent A backup router will assume mastership four advertisement intervals after the master fails so the minimum fail over time is four seconds If a monitored interface goes down a master router will immediately signal an election and allow a backup router to assume mastership The router issues a set of gratuitous ARPs when moving between master and backup state These unsolicited ARPs teach the hosts and switches in the network of th
42. 2 the router will only upgrade from that release The Bandwidth Limiting selector allows you to limit the bandwidth used in the course of upgrading the system software 34 13 4 Automatic Upgrade The router can be programmed to check a server on your network at a specific time each day upgrading to the newest release RuggedCom understands that some administrators may wish to pre test package upgrades on specific machines before performing a network wide upgrade It is also possible to manually control the upgrade process on a per machine and per package basis The upgrade system allows you to restrict the maximum amount of bandwidth consumed by an upgrade Most upgrades will involve relatively modest amounts of data transfer especially over an Ethernet class network But when the router is accessed over a low speed WAN link even a small upgrade can temporarily consume 100 of the links bandwidth This can disrupt mission critical applications The bandwidth limiting feature limits only the upgrading process leaving regular traffic unregulated Automatic Upgrade Upgrades enabled yes No Upgrade Time oi 3p Save Changes Figure 34 45 Automatic Upgrade Check the Upgrades enabled field to activate daily upgrades Use the Upgrade Time fields to select the time to upgrade Selecting different times on each router can be used to even out traffic flows in the network 34 13 5 Upgrading All Packages Upgrade All Packages is used for
43. 3840032131 558453888 210385859 182328223 0 o o o ipsecO 1645008043 3266025576 7851971 8937116 o 1035 12092 11026 ipseci D D D D D D D ipsec2 o o o o jo o o o ipsec3 o 0 o o fo o o o greo o o o o jo o o o Refresh Continuous Display Figure 23 10 Interface Statistics Menu This menu provides basic statistics for all network interfaces The Refresh button will cause the page to be reloaded The Continuous Display button will cause the browser to continuously reload the page showing the differences in statistics from the last display The difference is not a real time rate in bytes or packets per second Note that detailed statistics for T3 T1 E1 DDS and ADSL are available within the menus that configure those interfaces 23 8 1 Current Routing amp Interface Table Current Route amp Interface Table Routing Table Destination Via Device Metric Protocol Source ToS Weight 213 186 238 136 30 wippp kernel 213 186 238 138 203 50 190 88 29 Ta kend Dame TT 192 168 254 0 24 ett kernel 192 168 254 254 11 0 0 0 8 fethi kernel 11 0 0 251 default 213 186 238 137 w1ppp ii Refresh Interface Status Device Link Up Address Netmask Bcast Peer MTU Txqueuelen fethi Yes 11 0 0 251 255 0 0 0 11 255 255 255 1500 1100 eth1 0 Yes 192 168 254 254 255 255 255 0 192 168 254 255 1500 eth2 Yes 203 50 190 89 25
44. 754 Eens Sp ele E ae gt d f 1 1 1 4 f w2ppp A Router 2 i k 1 1 2 2 K VRIP 1 1 2 254 VRIP 1 1 2 254 F Priority 100 Priority 50 IP 1 1 2 101 IP 1 1 2 102 GW 1 1 2 254 GW 1 1 2 254 Figure 17 1 OSPF and VRRP Example 17 1 6 1 Area And Subnets As the OSPF design is simple an area of 0 is used The three point to point T1 E1 links are placed in the area by adding 1 1 1 0 24 to it Router 1 and 2 will include their Ethernet links by adding subnet 1 1 2 0 24 to their area descriptions Router 3 must also include 2 2 2 0 24 in its area description so that its existence is advertised The point to point T1 E1 interfaces and Ethernet interfaces on Router 1 and 2 must be made active The Ethernet interface on Router 3 can be left passive since it does not participate in OSPF advertisements Router 1 and 2 must enable link detect to stop advertising 1 1 1 0 24 in the event of a link failure 17 1 6 2 VRRP Operation Router 1 and 2 have VRRP setup on their Ethernet connection so that they can both function as the gateway for the clients on their network segment Normally Router 1 is the VRRP master and only in case of a link failure to the switch or the router failing will Router 2 take over the virtual IP The virtual IP used as the gateway is 1 1 2 254 Each router also has its own IP on the network so that each can be reached individually If Router 1 or its Ethernet link fail VRRP
45. Appliance Menu ANNE 285 34 10 System Backup And Restore ENEE 285 34 11 Backup and Restore General Configuration 0 c ccccccecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeees 286 34 12 Configuration Rollback Menu WEE 287 34 13 Ethernet main menu while Configuration Rollback is active s ssssseesssernnesrrenrsrrrresere 287 34 14 Configuration Rollback menu ready to accept changes ss sssssseeeeseneeerrersssrrrnnerrnnnesrnne 288 34 15 Archive HIStOry vrienn a aa aa aa a aaea Opa ee eege 288 34 16 Archive Backup meine enano eht ieee taal ae nicer a aa EE Aa A a a ai 289 34 17 Archive Backup Complete lt 2 gedoe geess Eeer exh oes cstisaceteunoas ade dee deed 289 34 18 Archive Restore TER 290 34 19 Start EE 290 34 20 Archive Differences Menu sde Eege 291 34 21 Archive Differences List sscccdhecedeeedectenseeetecacutesseeechequreed utaceusectuacebeduaseasvelatiackiegeuacrenesbitec bee 291 34 22 Show Difference for selected file between two targets ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesenteeeeeseees 292 34 23 SNMP Main Configuration Men 2s icccccsstceperevcsteceatvatacdwnssedieelale ices atugendcadanctenmenataciecead 293 34 24 System Configuration lettre ee EEN 293 34 25 Network Addressing Configuration Menu Client Address ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 294 34 26 Network Addressing Configuration Menu Addresses to listen on 294 34 27 Access Control Menu SNMP V1 and v c 294 34 28 Access Control
46. Configuration ssssssessseesssneresserrnseeenrrrrennnsssrrnnerrrnne 245 27 2 3 DHCP Subnet Configuration kk 246 27 2 4 DHCP Group Configuration seesssseeeseeeesesrrrrererntrsrnrresetrrnsttrnnrntnnnnsstern Edi 246 27 25 Klee e UI e EE 247 27 2 6 DHCP Pool Configuration Stes eect stelsiee secatsaves cabetine elects doen stuns dean cerecleeteeiles 248 TEE 249 28 1 IMTOdUCtON NEE 249 28 1 1 DHCP Relay Fundamentals E 249 28 2 Configuring DHCP i ET 249 e e E de MN A E 251 e A la reen EE 251 29 Als NIP E te Een EE 251 29 2 NTP COMMNQUIATION E 252 29 2 1 NTP Server Main Men ENEE 252 Ee e EE 253 29 2 3 Servers Config ratON erer Eeer 253 29 2 4 He ue HI Le 254 29 2 5 Viewing CET 254 29 2 6 Viewing The NTP LOg EE 255 29 21 NieWwing ETH 256 29 2 8 Viewing The GPS LOG EE 256 EE ele e m EES 257 SIN Ee reen EE 257 E OFM Een 257 30 2 S SF Configuration E 258 30 2 1 SSH Main Menu EE 258 30 2 2 Authentication EE 258 30 23 NGRWOMKING EE 259 30 2 4 ACCESS CONTON eieiei Eege 259 Revision 1 14 1 9 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 31 Configuring The Telnet Server EE 261 es le ee e EE 261 31 2 Telnet Fundamentals sssrinin aces ceeiebekw Ed 261 31 3 Telnet Server Configuration WEE 261 32 Configuring IRIGB And IEEE EE 263 E e eet 263 32 1 1 IEEE1588 Fundamentals sicess cc ciesicteteecotasasedsecdapecdteeei aes SEENEN 263 O22 IRIGB ie EE 264 32 1 3 GPS Cable compensation EE 265 32 2
47. Configuration Openswan version U2 2 0 K2 4 27 10 486 rr No host key appears to listed in the file etc ipsec secrets One must be generated for your system before you can define any VPN connections Generate key for host ruggedrouter Figure 16 1 IPsec VPN Configuration Menu Before Key Generation Upon the first entry to this menu you will prompted to generate a VPN host key Key generation will require about 30 seconds to complete after which the menu appearance will change 16 2 2 VPN Main Menu The new menu appearance will resemble that of the following menu with the exception that you will be warned that VPN networking is not enabled Enable VPN networking via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu Revision 1 14 1 147 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN Help IPsec VPN Configuration Openswan version U2 4 12 K2 6 18 6 gx1 Existing VPN connections No IPsec PN connections have been defined yet Add a new IPsec VPN connection Add defaults for all connections Import connection from file Global options and policies C L C 492 1 f 2 24 Server Confiquration L2TPD Configuration Preshared Keys Show Public Key List Certificates IPsec Status IPsec VPN Networking is currently stopped You may start it via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu Figure 16 2 IPsec VPN Configuration Menu Before After Generation After a VPN connection is created this menu w
48. Configuration Menu Before Key Generation ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeees 147 16 2 IPsec VPN Configuration Menu Before After Generation essssnnssssrneeernerssrrrssrrrnrerrre 148 16 3 IPsec VPN Configuration After Connections Have Been Created 149 16 4 Server Configuration en E gbee gCee geed 149 16 5 Bn PD Gomiigu Een 150 16 6 2 SAOW PUBIC EE 151 16 72 Preshared EE 151 LE ele 151 16 9 Editing A VPN Connection Part 1 EE 152 16 10 Editing A VPN Connection Part 2 e ssssssesssssrssssrrnresernrrsrrrrssttrnnnrtrnnttrtnreserrnnnennnnrenneresene 153 16 11 IPSec X 509 Roaming Client Example eessen ceases et aden EEN 156 Ree a and VARP AE 164 17 2 Dynamic Routing Main Met ege EE 165 17 3 Dynamic Protocol Enable MenU getest EE ee 165 17 4 Gore ET 166 17 5 Gore Global E EE 166 Revision 1 14 1 14 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 17 6 Core Interface Parameters EE 167 17 7 BGP Main Configuration Menu WEE 167 17 8 BGP Global Parameter Menu Cu eel cepactandins peemtiveninedlandinuin Gadus Waekeelelpielonuaeee 168 17 9 BGP INGIWOIKS E EE 169 17 10 BGP Network Neighbor Configuration Menu cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeecaeeeseeeeeeeeenneeees 170 17411 BGP Status Display EEN 171 17 12 View BGP Configuration Menu ss c2 cccascteseidsnendteesesantsceedenciectandensdecehaseredonasatecdeaelatanceaes 172 ATA SPF EE 172 17 14 OSPF Global Parameters cecce naear ae a aAa E aaa a aaa aien decreed 173
49. Console Port 24 D Date Changing Through setup menu 27 Changing Through Webmin 49 DDS Interfaces Configuration 85 Frame Relay Logical Interfaces 87 PPP Logical Interfaces 88 Upgrading Software 90 90 Default Gateway 53 Configuring Through Setup Shell 25 Default Routes 52 DHCP Client Options 239 Examples 241 Fundamentals 239 Option 82 Support 241 DHCP Relay 249 Configuration 249 Fundamentals 249 DNS 56 Domain Changing from console 26 Changing from Webmin 49 Dummy Interface 52 E Email Configuring SMTP 301 End To End Backup 56 Ethernet Interfaces Active 62 Boot Time 63 Proxy ARP 63 F Firewall Fundamentals 118 Frame Relay End to End Keepalive 72 Introduction 67 Link Failure 72 N391 72 N392 72 N393 72 Signaling type 72 Station Type 72 T391 72 T392 72 G Gauntlet 282 Generic Routing Encapsulation Configuring 200 GOOSE Configuration 233 Fundamentals 230 Statistics 236 Tracing Activity 238 GPS cable compensation 265 reference clock 265 H Help Server 36 Host Addresses 56 56 Hostname Changing from console 26 Changing from Webmin 49 l IEEE1588 263 264 IP Core Networking Settings 51 Revision 1 14 1 332 RX1000 RX1100 Index Ignore All ICMP ECHO 51 Ignore ICMP Broadcasts 51 Send ICMP Redirect 51 Syncookie Protection 51 IP Addresses Configuring Through Setup Shell 25 DDS Frame Relay 87 DDS PPP 88 End To End Backup 5
50. Edit the configuration of an existing tunnel by following the link under the Ethernet Interface field or create a new tunnel by clicking Add a new L2 tunnel hag Create L2 Tunnel L2 Tunnel Ethernet Interface eh v Add Ethernet Type ISO v Others Add a new deamon eth4 v Remote IP Replace Sender s MAC address Save Delete 4a Return to L2 Tunnels Figure 26 6 Create an L2 Tunnel Revision 1 14 1 234 RX1000 RX1100 26 Configuring Layer 2 Tunnels This menu configures a generic layer 2 tunnel The Ethernet Interface field configures suitable network interfaces to listen on for L2 Ethernet frames of the specified type You may set this field to none if the intent is simply to relay encapsulated traffic between remote tunnel endpoints The Add Ethernet Type field configures the predefined Ethernet type code that specifies the layer 2 traffic that is to be tunneled If the desired Ethernet type is not in the predefined list select Other and enter the type code in the Others field The Others field configures any Ethernet type code that is not predefined in the list box described above Note that the Ethernet type code must be in hexadecimal format e g 0x8037 for Novell Netware IPX etc Add a new Daemon fields specify the tunnel egress which may be a local Ethernet interface or the IP addresses of a remote daemon Several endpoints may be added with these fields using successive edits o
51. Eoo e EE 306 34 12 1 Syslog Factory Defaults sce ccciecstecetpete ce cdentateldedinuscteneehe teed eal oe eaten 307 34 12 2 ROMOLE Eet Un e EE 307 34 13 Upgrade SV E 309 34 13 1 RuggedRouter Software Fundamentals AA 309 34 13 2 Upgrade to RXW100 irinin erretore duaia EES 310 34 13 3 Change Repository Server eege ege ee Eege eege 310 34 13 A AULOMALIC leie Le 311 34 13 5 Upgrading All Packages EE 311 34 13 6 Installing A New Package 0 sseitariai ten eine eee aa 313 34 13 7 Pre upgrade Post upgrade scripts eeceecceecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneceeneeeess 313 34 14 Uploading And Downloading Files ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeees 314 35 Security Considerations ee ege Eege 316 35 1 INTOdUC ON EE 316 E ee 316 A Setting Up A Repository serrin ear nek sacmatae case reduc gs sshd eceepasuanaedeated teehee tenunierens 317 A 1 Repository Server Requirement AEN 317 A 2 Initial Repository Setup tege eege edeuEERdEE SEENEN dee EE deed 317 A3 Upgrading The ele e EE 318 AA Seenen Up Th Routers tie ecoc deadueont a tee er nnieacieh dee 318 A 4 1 An Alternate Approach 20 eccceccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeneeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeees 318 AA 2 Upgrading Considerations ciissiciaiesidietwiieneliancantin dae eaead neste 319 B Re Flashing Router Software EE 320 e De rte TEL A EE 320 Be SUSE EE 320 B 3 Re flashing The ROX System Softwar
52. FOE Link Statistics ona peria a aa R a A E E EEA AEA aa A 74 7 9 FErame Relay Statistics E 75 TAO PPR ENk Statistics EE 76 Fal le bag ey Eelere Men EE 77 GAZ TVET Deele Te 77 8 1 SHES Trunks Ana JEE eege abe Geert 80 8 2 T3 E3 Network Interface Initial Configuration ce eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaes 80 8 3 T3 E3 Network Interface With Logical Interfaces 2 0 0 2 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesetaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 81 8 4 Edit TS Interiaces esst eer ier detente Ee eee ete ene 81 8 5 EE MSM AGS eege e 82 8 6 Creating a Frame Relay Logical Interface AAA 82 8 7 Edit Logical Interface Frame Relay e 83 8 8 Edit Logical Interface PPP dere etecteiisonesh oe ERAN 83 921 SDDS Trunks And ISP ACES EE 85 O27 DDS WAN IMGT ACES acer cccvstcexezesthcteasinscetegceee ieee aE ne yR e ASE LEPASE AEE ESAERA 86 9 3 DDS WAN Interfaces after logical interface assignment essseessernsserrererrnerssrrrnsrrrrnrrrnne 86 9 4 Edit Logical Interface Frame Relay single DLCI sssssssssssnesssnnrnsserrnrerennntsrnnrsserrnnnrnnnnnnsnne 87 9 5 Edit Logical Interface Frame Relay multiple DC 87 9 6 Edit Logical Interface d NEE 88 927 ODS INK SIAUISHCS 26 act cc Bhat ced Ge ege eege 89 1043 TVEL WAN Interfaces 2 ieEAdNEEdECEA Eege EES 92 10 2 Edit MLPPP Logical Interface Menu siscienchetrenstto ne ttvarheenhateadeenntoarelodiaes avtet art eaadennaetes 92 10 3 MEPPP Link Ee acer R ETEEN 93 WSs F
53. Frame Relay PPP And T3 E3 8 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T3 E3 8 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuring Frame Relay and PPP Links e Viewing status and statistics e Upgrading Firmware 8 1 1 T3 E3 Fundamentals T3 refers to a communications link upon which has been imposed a Digital Signal 3 DS3 signaling scheme The scheme allows 672 time slots of 64 Kbps DSO information to be multiplexed onto a 44 736 Mbps circuit E3 refers to the ITU standard corresponding to the mainly North American T3 standard E3 calls for 512 DSO equivalent time slots multiplexed onto a 34 368 Mbps circuit RuggedRouter provides the ability to operate Frame Relay or PPP over your physical T3 E3 interfaces Note Channel groups and fractional lines are not supported on RuggedRouter T3 and E3 interfaces 8 1 2 Location Of Interfaces And Labeling Unlike the Ethernet ports which are statically located the location of T1 E1 T3 DDS and ADSL ports in your router depends on the number of ports and how they are ordered Refer to the labeled hardware image as presented in the Webmin home page To make labeling easy to understand all T1 E1 T3 E3 DDS and ADSL ports are assigned a unique port number that relates to the LEDs on the status panel 8 1 3 LED Designations RuggedRouter includes two sources of LED indicated information about T3 E3 lines the T3 E3 card itself and the LED Panel One LED is associat
54. Interface 207 23 7 2 Frame Relay Link Layer Trace A WAN Interface cccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 208 23 7 3 Serial Trace A Serial Server Port REENEN 208 23 8 Interface Statistics TEE 209 23 8 1 Current Routing amp Interface Table AEN 209 24 Configuring Serial e e UE 211 24 1 INMTOdUCt N EE 211 24 Aah Sena E e EE 211 24 1 2 Serial Protocols Applications ENNEN 211 24 1 3 Serial Protocols Concepts And ISSUES c ccccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeee 213 24 1 4 TcpModBus Server Application AEN 214 24 1 5 TcpModbus Concepts And Issues ENEE 215 24 1 6 DNP Distributed Network Protocol i si2cck desediccocceeet is teeta iieeteneee Mimiadeds 217 24 2 Serial Protocols Configuration EE 218 24 2 1 Serial Protocols Main Menu EEN 218 24 22 ASSION See EE 219 24 2 3 Port Settings Menu EE 219 24 2 4 RawSocket Menu EE 220 24 2 5 TopModBus MENU sig 3 c2ebssttneedeecseeettia reaches ara aoniu de EEN eta aaas 220 24 26 IN EE 221 24 2 7 Serial Protocols Statistics Mem geet ie tiaheceeeeedtel eed wie ceeded 223 24 2 8 Serial Protocols Trace Men EEN 224 24 2 9 Serial Protocols Sertrace Utility ek 224 25 SYNGCMEOMOUS S nral LC 226 25 1 ee de EE 226 25 1 1 Synchronous Serial Port Features ENNEN 226 25 1 2 Raw Socket Operation On Synchronous Ports eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeee 226 25 2 Synchronous Serial Port Configuration ee Eege elaine casein Agora Eeer 226 25 2
55. LED Panel Four LEDs are associated with the line next to the interface jack Power Green indicates when the card is active and powered Revision 1 14 1 95 RX1000 RX1100 11 Configuring PPPoE Bridged Mode On ADSL Link Green indicates when the DSL link is established TX Red indicates when data is being transmitted over DSL RX Red indicates when data is being received over DSL While connecting the LEDs are flashing sequentially The RuggedRouter also indicates information about ADSL ports on the LED Panel A pair of LEDs will indicate traffic and link status of the port Consult the section Using The LED Status Panel to determine which LEDs correspond to the port 11 2 ADSL Configuration D b a a ADSL ADSL ADSL Interfaces PPP Logs Current Route amp Interface Table Figure 11 1 ADSL Interfaces This menu allows you to display and configure ADSL interfaces The PPP Logs menu will display a log of PPP releated information The Current Routes menu will display the routes and status of the network interfaces 11 2 1 ADSL Network Interfaces ADSL WAN Interfaces ADSL Interfaces Refresh this page ADSL 3 Up Name Description Local Address Netmask Remote Address ppp3 over wads Up Comment 216 58 41 159 255 255 255 255 192 168 200 1 View ADSL 3 Link Statistics Figure 11 2 ADSL WAN Interfaces This menu allows you to display and configure ADSL interfaces and the
56. Menu SNMP Vi 295 34 29 Trap Configuration Menu Trap Options eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeee eee eeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeneaeeeeeeea 296 34 30 Trap Destinations V1 and VAC ii ai eerste SEENEN 296 34 31 Trap Destinations Vin eesngegtege ene a NEE Eege teeta ladanedaearaaslateeeteatemeds 297 34 32 RADIUS Authentication Main Menu et ENEE deeg ai orate alee ee 299 34 33 RADIUS Authentication Server Parameters EEN 300 34 34 Outgoing IMA EE 301 34 35 Chassis Parameters Men eu iegseekci es ar GK EegeE ENEE tiene 301 34 36 PoE pinout on 10 100BaseT ports eegen deeg Aere gea eeu iaGancepee teat cnsarwediaylss 302 34 37 Power over Ethernet ien ged ekuagdegeedueegeetgedh gege dd edd Eege tes obunee 303 34 38 Banner Configuration Menu geed eg Ee EE eege 304 34 39 Webmin Banner Configuration Fields Abu 305 3440 System E 306 34 41 Changing a Syslog entry to log remotely ssosnsnesssnneeeeneeesstrrssrrrnrnrrnnntssrtrnsstrnnnennnnenenne 308 Revision 1 14 1 17 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 34 42 Software Upgrade System csisccvc dieeccntesavsiee ands tare cael ENEE EE 309 Elte E ET 310 34 44 Change Repository Server acc ccc ccccveeiiecntag taueh chedadecdaendvenlankphnes taoneaaveiee aden tienes 310 34 45 Automatic LEO eegene eege dree eege 311 34 46 Upgrading All PACKAGES EEN 312 34 47 Installing A New Faken geseet dech 313 34 48 Upload Download Menu 2 2 2eute EedERedESgEER NEEN deed Ee EE EEN 314 B T
57. NTP servers of the same stratum as the router and are useful when contact is lost with the hosts in the NTP servers menu The per peer configuration information is as described in the previous menu 29 2 5 Viewing NTP Status Hi NTP Status NTP Reference Clock Status Reference Clock Stratum Offset ms Status and Description 208 83 212 8 3 22 562 synchronized system candidate clock LOCAL ak 0 000 not synchronized 192 168 254 253 5 19 575 synchronized system clock currently in use Refresh Figure 29 4 NTP Status The NTP Status menu displays possible sources and currently used reference clocks Revision 1 14 1 254 RX1000 RX1100 29 Configuring NTP 29 2 6 Viewing The NTP Log NTP Log Oct 18 11 29 05 localhost ntpd 4 2 0a 1 4 2 0a stable 2 r Wed Sep 7 18 14 05 UTC 2005 1 Oct 8 11 29 05 localhost precision 3 000 usee Oct 18 11 29 05 localhost Listening on interface wildcard 0 0 0 0 123 Oct 18 11 29 05 localhost Listening on interface wildcard 123 Oct 1e 11 29 05 localhost Listening on interface lo 127 0 0 1 123 Oct 1s 11 29 05 localhost Listening on interface etht 10 0 0 234 123 Oct 1e 11 29 05 localhost Listening on interface eth2 192 168 2 252 123 Oct 1e 11 29 05 localhost Listening on interface wippp 192 168 16 1 123 Oct 28 11 29 05 locathost kernel time syne status 0040 Oct 18 11 29 05 localhost frequency initialized 9 516 PPM from var lib ntp
58. Neighbor IP address Remote AS 200 Remote AS Inbound attributes for the neighbor Metric attribute 20 Metric attribute for the neighbor Local Preference attribute 120 Local preference attribute for the neighbor Weight attribute 30 Weight attribute for the neighbor Outbound attributes for the neighbor Metric attribute moo o o Metric attribute for the neighbor Local Preference attribute Dog Local preference attribute for the neighbor Weight attribute Bs Weight attribute for the neighbor Save Delete lt Return to bap networks Figure 17 10 BGP Network Neighbor Configuration Menu Neighbor IP is the IP address of a BGP neighbor to add A BGP Neighbor is Remote AS is Autonomous System ID of a BGP neighbor The Metric attribute is propagated throughout an AS A path with a lower metric attribute is preferred over one with a higher value The Local Preference attribute is propagated throughout an AS A higher local preference attribute is preferred over a lower one for the entire AS The Weight attribute is defined locally If the router learns more than one route to the same destination the one from the router with a higher weight is preferred Revision 1 14 1 170 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing 17 2 3 4 BGP Status F Status Figure 17 11 BGP Status Display The BGP Status menu displays e A list of routes currently managed by BGP alo
59. Private Networking To A DMZ 00 0 0 e eee e eee ennnaee eee eeeeeeeennneeeeeeees 126 14 6 Firewall Configuration geste deed sde EE ene 126 146 1 NetWork ZONES dee Cette Eed Eege AO ies e AE 128 14 6 2 Network ege 129 14 6 3 Network Zone EE 131 14 6 4 Default Folie 35EEAgetENE ENEE AER KENE ENNEN 131 14 6 5 MASQUGTACIING EE EE 132 14 66 ER 133 DAF le VA crete fe thc deka ee dara Wed E acl taataas tate te ctaandud va ut teu deh E 134 14 6 8 TC Traffic Control Interfaces Classes and Rules cccceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 135 14 6 9 Actions When Stopped eerste eege 135 et een EE 137 15 1 Traffic Control TC Fundamentals AEN 137 15 1 1 Traffic Control Example sssri aaa a a RE 137 15 2 Traffic Control Configuration EE 138 15 2 1 TC Interfaces tedevices EE 138 E e 139 15 2 3 eh TE 141 EE ee le Wine WESC VPN WEE 144 16 1 Introduction NEE 144 Revision 1 14 1 6 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter EA VPN Fundamentals EE 144 16 2 IPsec VPN Configuration EE 147 16 2 1 VPN Main Menu Before Key Generation sssssseessnrnsserennerrenresrerrrssrrrnrerrn 147 16 22 VPN Wale E NEE 147 16 2 3 Server Configuration wercascrcoscnarezeccicatansdecuessaseeceeesd oditaardeehe SEET eg 149 16 2 4 L2TPD Configuration EE 150 16 25 PUBIC Key EE 151 16 2 6 Pre Shared EE 151 16 27 List ewe 151 16 2 8 VPN Connections EE 152 16 2 9 Showing BCEE 154 16 2 10 IPSec X 509 Roaming Client Example ANNE 156 17 Config
60. RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router the directory to download it to You may also decide to create directories cited in the download path at download time set the user group ownership of the file and postpone the download to a specific time The Send files from your current host to the router part of the menu allows you to send files from your host machine directly to the router You need to specify at least one file to send and the directory to upload it to Clicking on a browse button will open a file search dialog box Select the file to upload to the router and close the dialog box Click upon the Send to router button to start the transfer You may also decide to create directories cited in the upload path at upload time set the user group ownership of the file and extract tar or zip files The Upload a file from the router to your host part of the menu allows you to send files from the router a specified your host machine You need to specify the file to send You may specify the files path directly or click on the browse button to open a file search dialog box Select the file to upload and close the dialog box Then click the Upload to your host button Revision 1 14 1 315 RX1000 RX1100 35 Security Considerations 35 Security Considerations 35 1 Introduction This chapter describes actions to take to secure the RuggedRouter 35 1 1 Security Actions 1 11 12 Change the root and rrsetup p
61. RX1100 6 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces 6 2 1 Ethernet Interfaces Help Ethernet Interfaces Current Configuration Name Interface Type IP Address Netmask Staus lethi Auto Negotiation 10 128 10 245 255 0 0 0 Up leth2 Auto Negotiation Up eth2 0001 Ethernet VLAN 192 168 0 2 255 255 255 0 Up eth2 0002 Ethernet VLAN 172 16 0 2 255 255 255 0 Up leth3 Auto Negotiation 2003 3 64 Up etba Auto Negotiation 192 168 14 1 255 255 255 0 Up Boot Time Configuration Name Interface Type IP Address Netmask Activate eth Auto Negotiation 10 128 10 245 255 0 0 0 Yes leth2 Auto Negotiation No IP Address No Netmask Yes eth2 0001 Ethernet VLAN 192 168 0 2 255 255 255 0 Yes eth2 0002 Ethernet VLAN 172 16 0 2 255 255 255 0 Yes leth3 Auto Negotiation 2003 3 64 Yes leth4 Auto Negotiation 192 168 14 1 255 255 255 0 Yes Figure 6 2 Current and Boot Time Ethernet Configuration This menu allows you to display and configure the Ethernet interfaces in the router The Current Configuration table allows you to try out changes on the existing interfaces before making permanent changes Any changes made take effect immediately but will not be present after the next boot The entries in this table can also be used to temporarily disable or re enable an interface The Boot Time Configuration table router allows you make changes to the permanent configuration o
62. Set LOCAL Clock as the current reference clock for PTP Card Mar fe Mar 13 29 16 fusrfsbinfirigb 30328 8 13 33 13 fusrsbin irigb 30328 Sync time from LOCAL Clock to PTP Card Sync time from LOCAL Clock to PTP Card Refresh Figure 32 5 IRIGB GPS Status This page shows whether GPS is locked and the source of the current reference clock 32 2 6 IEEE1588 Status Help IEEE1588 Status Local Clock Port IP MAC 192 168 75 3 00 0a dc 0a 15 42 Time Quality standard deviation 7 ns Local Time Clock BS E OffsetTime Master IP MAC GrandMaster MAC Source Status 10139139 2008 Heen stave O aa oaaao DE 0 000000023 oo oon em _ Od 2ardes05 25 00 Im Teen slave jan pa deaaay DE 9 000000020 WE 0d Oardes05125 00 10 3358 2008 PEEELS ae a IT 0 000000006 r a eet __ O0 0ardes08 28 00 IT pense bat DE 2008 HIT rd 0 000000001 E Em 00 0atde 05 25100 E FEEELS S ae DEE ITT 0000000002 WEE gt 0002 de 05 25 00 ID 2008 Hee ap DEER DE 9 000000008 VE em 2002 de 05 25 00 Show Continuously Reset Time Quality Calculation Figure 32 6 IEEE1588 Status This page shows the historical status of IEEE1588 on the router The line above the table provides the local clock IP address MAC address and the time quality information The table will contain entries made when the clock source or status changes The current local time on the router the IE
63. The system will reboot into a power down Shutdown System shell and wait for 300 seconds during which time it will be safe to remove power After this period the router will reboot into the normal operating mode Figure 4 1 Bootup and Shutdown Part 1 This menu allows you to enable disable services and to perform actions at boot The first part of the menu manages services Check the box for the desired service and click on Start Selected to start the service and have it start at the next boot Click on Stop Selected to stop the service and not have it start at boot The Reboot System button will cause the system to reboot The Shutdown System button shuts down the system in order to remove power Revision 1 14 1 45 RX1000 RX1100 4 Configuring The System Note The RuggedRouter never enters a permanent shutdown state If the RuggedRouter is instructed to shutdown either from Webmin or from a shell command it will reboot into a command line shell that waits five minutes before restarting If you really want the router to remain powered but permanently inactive you must issue the shutdown connect a terminal to the serial port wait for the router to enter the shutdown shell and issue a CTRL C The second part of the menu allows you to program specific actions at boot time The script will be run after all regular boot actions have completed Run On Boot Commands entered below will be run at boot time bin bash ec
64. This menu allows you to configure Frame Relay link and logical interface fields 7 2 3 1 Frame Relay Link Parameters The first table presents the link parameters and applies to all logical interfaces The Station Type field determines whether the router acts as a customer premises equipment or as a frame relay switch When a Frame Relay network provider is used the CPE interface should be chosen When the connection is end to end it is typical to set the central site end to switch and the remote end to be CPE The Signaling type field reflects the Frame Relay link management protocol used which include ANSI T1 617 Annex D LMI and Q 933 signaling The Link Failure field determines whether the IP interface should reflect the state of the T1 connected disconnected If you are using SNMP enable this option as SNMP uses the state of the interface to determine the state of the connection The T391 Link Integrity Verification polling timer is valid at the CPE and indicates the number of seconds between the transmission of In channel Signaling messages The T392 verification of polling cycle timer is valid at the Switch and indicates the expected number of seconds between the reception of In channel Signaling messages transmitted by the CPE The N391 counter is valid at the CPE and defines the frequency of transmission of Full Status enquiry messages The N392 counter is valid at both the CPE and the Switch and defines the number of erro
65. View OSPF Configuration menu display the actual status and configuration file contents of OSPF Revision 1 14 1 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing 17 2 4 1 OSPF Global Parameters RE OSPF Global Parameters Parameter Value Description Possible values default value Enable Password EE Enable password For configuration access string without spaces previous password Telnet Password eeeeeeooeeeo Telnet password For port 2604 access string without spaces previous password ABR Type cisco NA Set OSPF ABR type standard ciscolibm shortcut cisco Auto Cost Reference Bandwidth 100 Calculate OSPF interface cost according to bandwidth 14294967 Mbps 100 Default Information Originate enable Advertise default route disabled Default Metric 20 Control distribution of default information 1 16777214 20 Distance Define an administrative distance unset 1 255 unset not used Distance OSPF External Define an administrative distance external unset 1 255 unset use Distance Distance OSPF Inter area Define an administrative distance inter area unset 1 255 unset use Distance Distance OSPF Intra area Define an administrative distance intra area unset 1 255 unset use Distance Hostname Identifier of router Often the DNS name of the router string without spaces no hostname Opaque LSA
66. access any RuggedRouter service upon authentication Accounts may also be defined to have access to one or several services For more information on these services on RuggedRouter please refer to RADIUS ROX and Services A RADIUS attribute specific to RuggedCom RuggedCom Privilege level is used by Webmin to assign specific capabilities to Webmin users on a per user basis This attribute must be set for user accounts designated to access Webmin Please refer to Webmin User and Group Fundamentals for a complete discussion of privilege levels and their use in ROX The following information is necessary to add support for this attribute to the vendor specific extensions of the chosen RADIUS server e RuggedCom uses Vendor number 15004 e RuggedCom Privilege level is attribute 2 of type string e RuggedCom Privilege level must take one of the following three values e admin e operator e guest User accounts that require access to Webmin must be assigned a RuggedCom Privilege level Accounts that do not require Webmin access access but are to be given shell login or PPP access do not require the privilege level attribute to be set The following two sections illustrate how to add this information to a RADIUS server configuration Revision 1 14 1 325 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix E RADIUS Server Configuration E 1 Webmin Privilege Levels and FreeRADIUS This section describes how to add RuggedCom Vendor Specific RADIUS attri
67. an Area Border router and serves as a gateway 17 1 4 1 Link State Advertisements When an OSPF configured router starts operating it issues a hello packet Routers having the same OSPF Area hello interval and dead interval timers will communicate with each others and are said to be neighbors After discovering its neighbors a router will exchange Link State Advertisements in order to determine the network topology Every 30 minutes by default the entire topology of the network must be sent to all routers in an area If the link speeds are too low the links too busy or there are too many routes then some routes may fail to get re announced and will be aged out Splitting the network into smaller areas to reduce the number of routes within an area or reducing the number of routes to be advertised may help to avoid this problem In shared access networks i e routers connected by switches or hubs a designated router and a backup designated are elected to receive route changes from subnets in the area Once a designated router is picked all routing state changes are sent to the designated router which then sends the resulting changes to all the routers Revision 1 14 1 160 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing The election is decided based on the priority assigned to the interface of each router The highest priority wins If the priority is tied the highest router id wins 17 1 5 Key OSPF And RIP Parameters
68. an identification of the router for VRRP logs This field initially defaults to the current hostname The VRRP instances under the Name column define virtual IP groups Clicking on a link will allow you to edit that instance Revision 1 14 1 189 RX1000 RX1100 19 Configuring VRRP The VRRP groups under the Group Name column define virtual IP groups Clicking on a link will allow you to add members to that group 19 2 3 Editing A VRRP Instance Help D E Edit VRRP Instance Virtual IP Instance Parameters Name ID_20 Interface eth2 v Virtual Router ID 20 Priority 100 Advert Interval 1 Gratuitous ARP Delay 5 Extra Interface to Monitor none ei Virtual IP Address j SSES Virtual IP Netmask 24 Save Delete Figure 19 5 VRRP Instance The Name field is purely for informational purposes The Interface field configures the interface that VRRP packets are sent upon The Virtual Router ID field determines the VRID number Ensure that all routers supplying the same VRIP have the same VRID The value of the VRID varies from 1 to 255 The Advert Interval field configures the time between VRRP advertisements Ensure that all routers supplying the same VRID have the same interval Note The VRRP advertisement interval must be configured to the same value in the master and backup routers The Gratuitous ARP Delay field controls the number of seconds after the router changes between master and backup state that a sec
69. and the modem port 1 1 2 Accounts And Password Management The router provides an rrsetup account which provides a shell that quickly configures such items as passwords addresses date time and services offered by the router It is very useful to sign in to this shell first harden the router and configure network addresses in order that the router be reachable from the network through Web Management Note The rrsetup password should be changed recorded securely and restricted to qualified personnel The root account provides a superuser capability for SSH shell access and the Web server Note The root password should be changed recorded securely and restricted to qualified personnel The root and rrsetup accounts may be also be managed through RADIUS authentication The Web management agent can be accessed through the root account It may also be accessed through a number of RADIUS accounts via RADIUS authentication This offers the advantage of attributing actions in logs to the specific user as opposed to the root user 1 1 3 Default Configuration Your RuggedRouter is shipped from the factory with the following defaults e Ethernet ports are enabled and have an address of 192 168 X 1 where X is the port number e WAN and modem ports are disabled e IRIG B output ports are disabled e Setup account rrsetup password admin Revision 1 14 1 23 RX1000 RX1100 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router
70. attended upgrades of the ROX system software to a newer revision The upgrade process obtains a list of packages from the specified repository server and release version see Change Repository Server automatically determines which packages need to be added or upgraded and performing the necessary package acquisitions and installations Revision 1 14 1 311 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router Upgrade All Packages Resynchronize package list update yes No Only show which packages would be upgraded yes No Upgrade Now Figure 34 46 Upgrading All Packages The Resynchronize package list field selects whether to obtain the full package list from the repository server The list need only be obtained once per upgrade so checking No can save time on the upgrade process if a first pass was performed with the Only show option described below This is especially true if the network link is a low speed WAN link The Only show which packages would be upgraded field controls whether to only show the packages that will be upgraded Yes or to actually perform an upgrade No After setting the two parameters described above click Upgrade Now to begin the upgrade process Note Webmin manages the upgrade of other packages When Webmin must upgrade itself the process requires an extra step You will be requested to start a Webmin only upgrade Webmin will start another program to manage the upgrade and will self term
71. available Ethernet ports It also displays the current status on each port The Port Name column identifies the Ethernet port number The Enabled column allows you to enable or disable the Power over Ethernet function on this port The Power Limit column specifies the monitored power limitation on the port An alarm will be generated if the power is over this limitation The Power Delivery column shows whether the power is delivered on this port The Class column shows the class of the PD device on this port The Voltage Current and Power columns show the voltage current and power value in unit of Volt mill Ampere and Walt respectively when there is power delivery on this port The Status column shows whether there is any error detected on this port Revision 1 14 1 303 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 11 Banner Configuration Help Banner Configuration Login Banner Configuraiton Customize console login messages WARNING You are attempting to access a private computer system Access to this Message before Login system is restricted to authorized persons only This system may not be used for any purpose that is unlawful or deemed inappropriate Access and use of this system is electronically monitored and by entering this system you Information After Login Last Login System Information Router Status Extra Message After Login SSH Banner Configuration Customize ssh login message
72. characters are being received Serial port numbers are as described by the SER labels as shown in the home page chassis diagram 24 1 2 Serial Protocols Applications 24 1 2 1 Character Encapsulation Character encapsulation is used any time a stream of characters must be reliably transported across a network Revision 1 14 1 211 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols The character streams can be created by any serial device The baud rates supported at either server need not be the same If configured the router will obey XON XOFF flow control from the end devices One of the routers is configured to listen to TCP connection requests on a specific TCP port number The other server is configured to connect to its peer on the listening port number The RuggedRouter will attempt to connect periodically if the first attempt fails and after a connection is broken The RuggedRouter can be used to connect to any device supporting TCP e g a host computer s TCP stack or a serial application on a host using port redirection software 24 1 2 2 RTU Polling The following applies to a variety of RTU protocols besides ModBus RTU including ModBus ASCII and DNP The remote router communicates with host equipment through e native TCP connections e another RuggedRouter s via a serial port or a port redirection package which Supports TCP If a RuggedRouter is used at the host end it will wait for a request
73. comes with Webmin is not issued by a recognized certificate authority From a security point of view this makes the certificate less secure because an attacker could theoretically redirect traffic from your server to another machine without you knowing which is normally impossible if using a proper SSL certificate Network traffic is still encrypted though so you are safe against attackers who are just listening in on your network connection If you are initiating the connection to the router and your network is private a VPN or firewalled it should be safe to have your browser permanently accept the certificate If you want to be really sure that the Webmin server you are connecting to is really your own the only solution is to order a certificate from an authority like Verisign that is associated with your router s hostname and will be recognized by web browsers 1 4 3 The Structure of the Web Interface The Web interface presents an web page with two frames The leftmost or index frame selects subsystems to configure and is always displayed The rightmost or configuration frame presents the configuration for the currently selected subsystem or in the case of signing on the home page window The home page window presents an annotated view of the front of the chassis as well as anumber of important system parameters These parameters include e The router uptime and load averages for the past 1 5 and 15 minutes Under normal operati
74. e Enabling Disabling NTP e Setting servers and peers e Setting generic NTP options e NTP Tools 29 1 1 NTP Fundamentals NTP Network Time Protocol is an Internet protocol used to synchronize the clocks of computers to some time reference Variants of NTP such as SNTP Simple NTP a reduced functionality NTP and XNTP Experimental NTP exist NTP itself is available in versions 3 and 4 RuggedRouter includes version 4 NTP is a fault tolerant protocol that allows an NTP daemon program to automatically select the best of several available time sources or reference clocks to synchronize to Multiple candidates can be combined to minimize the accumulated error Temporarily or permanently wrong time sources are detected and avoided The NTP daemon achieves synchronization by making small and frequent changes to the router hardware clock The NTP daemon operates in a client server mode both synchronizing from servers and providing synchronization to peers If NTP has a number of servers to choose from it will synchronize with the lowest stratum server The stratum is a measure of the number of servers to the most highly accurate reference clock A reference clock itself appears at stratum 0 A server synchronized to a stratum n server will be running at stratum n 1 You will generally configure lower stratum NTP hosts as servers and other NTP hosts at the same stratum as peers If all your configured servers fail a configured peer
75. encryption protocols e 3DES Triple DES Uses three DES encryptions on a single data block with at least two different keys to get higher security than is available from a single DES pass 3DES is the most CPU intensive cipher e AES The Advanced Encryption Standard protocol cipher uses a 128 bit block and 128 192 or 256 bit keys This is the most secure protocol in use today and is much preferred to 3DES due to its efficiency 16 1 1 4 Public Key And Pre shared Keys In public key cryptography keys are created in matched pairs called public and private keys The public key is made public while the private key is kept secret Messages can then be sent by anyone who knows the public key to the holder of the private key Only the owner of the private key can decrypt the message When you want to use this form of encryption each router configures its VPN connection to use the RSA algorithm and includes the public signature of its peer The RuggedRouter s public signature is available from the output of the Show Public Keys menu In secret key cryptography a single key known to both parties is used for both encryption and decryption When you want to use this form of encryption each router configures its VPN connection to use a secret pre shared key The pre shared key is configured through the Pre shared Keys menu Note Use of pre shared keys require that the IP addresses of both ends of the VPN connection be staticall
76. example Se Ethernet Configuration Rollback is active Sei Sei Set ii Ethernet Interfaces PPPoE Interfaces PPP Logs Current Route amp Interface Table Figure 34 13 Ethernet main menu while Configuration Rollback is active Please note that the timeout period is re initialized to the value specified in the timeout entry field at each user action Using the above timeout value the user does not have a maximum of 300 seconds Rather each of his actions will reset the timer to 300 seconds The timeout mechanism will be in place from the time the user presses the Start Configuration Rollback Monitoring button until he eventually goes back to the Configuration Rollback menu and presses the Accept Current Configuration button Revision 1 14 1 287 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router Help Configuration Rollback Configuration Rollback is active When you are done changing the configuration and are sure everything is working as desired click to accept the configuration and disable the configuration rollback monitoring Accept Current Configuration amp Return to Backup And Restore Figure 34 14 Configuration Rollback menu ready to accept changes 34 5 3 Archive History Help Archive History Configuration Archives The total size of all archived configurations is 6212624 bytes Click on an archive to download a copy of it Archive Name Version Archive Comment Archive20
77. following procedures e Configuring the IP Address and Subnet Mask e Configuring the Gateway Address e Viewing the Webmin Log 2 2 Webmin Configuration Menu Webmin Configuration Webmin version 1 150 rl IP Access Control Ports and Addresses Logging Authentication Figure 2 1 Webmin Configuration Menu 2 2 1 IP Access Control Module Index IP Access Control The Webmin server can be configured to deny or allow access only from certain IP addresses using this form Hostnames like foo bar com and IP networks like 10 254 3 0 or 10 254 1 0 255 255 255 128 can also be entered You should limit access to your server to trusted addresses especially if it is accessible from the Internet Otherwise anyone who guesses your password will have complete control of your system Access control options Allow from all addresses 127 0 0 1 G Only allow from listed addresses 10 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Deny from listed addresses Resolve hostnames on every request Save Figure 2 2 Webmin Configuration Menu IP Access Control Webmin uses a secure communications method called Secure Sockets Layer SSL to encrypt traffic with its clients Webmin guarantees that communications with the client is kept private But Webmin will provide access to any client that provides the correct password rendering it vulnerable to brute Revision 1 14 1 34 RX1000 RX1100 2 Webmin Configuration fo
78. for the pool with address range 192 168 1 102 192 168 1 102 Click add an option82 client Give the client a unique alpha numeric name for example client0102 Set the remote id to the switch MAC address 00 0A DC 1 1 22 00 in this case Set the circuit id to the switches circuit id identifier to the port 00 01 00 02 for VLAN 1 port 2 on a RuggedCom switch Click Create Click Save Repeat steps 6 through 15 for clients 192 168 1 103 changing the pool address range and circuit id Repeat steps 6 through 15 for port 4 using the address range 192 168 1 151 to 192 168 1 200 and the circuit id for port 4 Restart the DHCP server or apply changes 27 1 2 4 Multiple Subnets On Separate VLANs Using Option82 On One Switch In this example the eth1 interface is provided with IP address 192 168 1 1 24 A switch connected to eth1 and using address 192 168 1 2 24 The switch port 1 is connected to the router while its ports 2 through 8 provide DHCP relay support The switch has its DHCP relay server address set to router s address 192 168 1 1 The switch has all ports in VLAN 1 The switch base MAC address is 00 0A DC 1 1 22 00 The switch port 2 is on vlan2 using subnet 192 168 2 0 24 and should assign addresses 192 168 2 101 to 192 168 2 200 and default gateway 192 168 2 1 The switch port 3 is on vian3 using subnet 192 168 3 0 24 and should assign addresses 192 168 3 101 to 192 168 3 200 and default gateway
79. from the factory image e Network staff may wish to explore how certain features operated in a previous release B 3 Re flashing The ROX System Software The re flashing procedure comprises the following steps 1 Obtain the Flash image of the desired ROX version from RuggedCom support Make the file available to the RuggedRouter in question via a web server 2 If necessary back up the RuggedRouter s configuration and place the configuration archive file in the same location as the image file in the previous step Note again that only a configuration archive that has been saved using the same ROX version as the image that is to be re flashed will be recoverable using the re flashing utility 3 Ensure that the RuggedRouter to be re flashed is able to reach the web server over the network even if that is a direct Ethernet connection Connectivity can be verified using the Webmin Ping Menu 4 Using a serial terminal attached to the RuggedRouter s console port reboot the router and access the Software Re Flash Utility by pressing the Down arrow key repeatedly during the boot process until the following bootloader screen appears Revision 1 14 1 320 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix B Re Flashing Router Software Debian GNU Linux kernel 2 6 26 1 gxl Debian GNU Linux kernel 2 6 26 1 gxl BIST mode Debian GNU Linux kernel 2 6 26 1 gxl recovery mode Software Re Flash Utility Figure B 1 Bootloader
80. from the host encapsulate it in a TCP message and send it to the remote side There the remote RuggedRouter will forward the original request to the RTU When the RTU replies the RuggedRouter will forward the encapsulated reply back to the host end ModBus does not employ flow control so XON XOFF should not be configured The RuggedRouter maintains configurable timers to help decide replies and requests are complete and to handle special messages such as broadcasts The RuggedRouter will also handle the process of line turnaround when used with RS485 24 1 2 3 Broadcast RTU Polling Broadcast polling allows a single host connected RuggedRouter to fan out a polling stream to a number of remote RTUs The host equipment connects via a serial port to a RuggedRouter Up to 32 remote RuggedRouters may connect to the host server via the network Initially the remote servers will place connections to the host server The host server in turn is configured to accept the required number of incoming connections The host will sequentially poll each RTU Each poll received by the host server is forwarded i e broadcast to all of the remote servers All RTUs will receive the request and the appropriate RTU will issue a reply The reply is returned to the host server where it is forwarded to the host Revision 1 14 1 212 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols 24 1 3 Serial Protocols Concepts And Issues 24 1 3 1 Host An
81. hash id 1 name OAKLEY_MD5 hashsize 16 dh group id 2 name OAKLEY_GROUP_MODP1024 bits 1024 dh group id 5 name OAKLEY_GROUP_MODP1536 bits 1536 dh group id 14 name OAKLEY_GROUP_MODP2048 bits 2048 dh group id 15 name OAKLEY_GROUP_MODP3072 bits 3072 dh group id 16 name OAKLEY_GROUP_MODP4096 bits 4096 dh group id 17 name OAKLEY_GROUP_MODP6144 bits 6144 dh group id 18 name OAKLEY_GROUP_MODP8192 bits 8192 curr_cnt total_cnt maxsz context 0 6144 36 trans 0 6144 336 tun 0 204 50 190 91 tun 0 204 50 190 30 openswantest 10 0 0 0 8 204 50 190 89 204 50 190 91 192 168 1 0 24 erouted eroute owner 2997 31 openswantest ike_life 3600s ipsec_life 28800s rekey_margin 540s rekey_fuzz 100 keyingtries 0 32 openswantest policy PSK ENCRYPT TUNNEL PFS UP prio 24 8 interface eth2 33 openswantest newest ISAKMP SA 3093 newest IPsec SA 2997 34 openswantest IKE algorithms wanted 5_000 1 5 5_000 1 2 5_000 2 5 5_000 2 2 flags strict 35 openswantest IKE algorithms found 5_192 1_128 5 5_192 1_128 2 5_192 2_160 5 5_192 2_160 2 36 openswantest IKE algorithm newest 3DES_CBC_192 MD5 MODP1536 37 openswantest ESP algorithms wanted 3_000 1 3_000 2 flags strict 38 openswantest ESP algorithms loaded 3_000 1 3_000 2 flags strict 39 openswantest ESP algorithm newest AES_256 HMAC_SHA1 pfsg
82. higher priority than the low queue Revision 1 14 1 193 RX1000 RX1100 20 Traffic Prioritization 20 1 1 2 Filters For each packet to be transmitted on a prioritized interface the packet is compared against each of the filters on that interface until a match is found The matching filter directs the packet onto a specific queue If no matching filter is found the packets Type of Service TOS bits in its IP header are examined and used It is possible to match on source and destination IP address mask pairs source and destination port numbers and protocols The 0 0 0 0 0 address mask matches any IP address Protocols that can be matched upon include tcp udp icmp ospf vrrp and ipsec 20 1 1 3 TOS Prioritization The priority of an IP packet can be derived from its Type of Service field The TOS field has the following format 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 to 4 4 4 4 F TOS Bits PRECEDENCE MD MT MR MMC O to 4 4 4 4 F The four TOS bits the TOS field are defined as e MD Minimize Delay e MT Maximize Throughput e MR Maximize Reliability e MMC Minimize Monetary Cost As any or all of these bits may be set in a packet at a time there are 16 possible combinations The router maps these combinations into the high normal and low priority queues as shown in the following table
83. hostname field determines whether host entries should use the hosts entry name as the client hostname to provide to the client Within a group you can create hosts 27 2 5 DHCP Host Configuration Note that the menu interfaces for creating a DHCP Host Configuration and for editing an existing one are the same only the title differs Create versus Edit EE SE n Sg qos WEE Host Details Host assigned to a Toplevel gt Host description Host name ethernet mmm None Maximum lease time This server Server name D A RE Lease end for BOOTP clients f Yes No Default Dynamic DNS domain Default ee name Default From client C allow C Deny 8 Ignore Default Hardware Address Fixed IP address Default secs Default secs Default Never Default lease time Boot filename KKK Boot file server Lease length for BOOTP clients ei gt Dynamic DNS enabled Dynamic DNS reverse domain e Dynamic DNS hostname allow unknown clients ate Figure 27 5 DHCP Host Configuration Revision 1 14 1 247 RX1000 RX1100 27 Configuring The DHCP server The Host description field is used to describe the host as desired The Host name field is the unique name to refer to the host within the DHCP configuration The Hardware address field is the Ethernet MAC of the client a
84. identify the key parameters required The router public gateway here vpn xyz com and its gateway interface w1ppp must be known The local network subnet 10 0 0 0 8 and each clients internal network address here 10 0 1 1 must be known All client addresses should be assigned from a subnet of the local network e g 10 0 1 0 24 A number of encryption parameters should be decided upon depending upon the client capabilities Avoid selecting 3DES if possible due to its high overhead 16 2 10 3 Client Configuration Depending upon the client you may be required to produce the certificate in a P12 format and may be required to include an export password as well This password will be required to be known be the personnel that configure the client in order to import the certificate Install the client IPSec software and import the cacert and the clients own certificate and key Configure the client with the router public gateway the clients internal network address and the desired encryption parameters At this point the client should be able to use its Internet connection to ping the public gateway 16 2 10 4 Router IPSec Configuration Transfer the cacert and the router s certificate to the router If your authority prepares a Certificate Revocation List CRL you will want to transfer that as well The cacert file should be renamed cacert pem and installed in etc ipsec d cacerts The CRL file should be renamed to crl pem and in
85. if redistribute static and redistribute kernel are enabled respectively 17 1 5 6 Link Detect Link detection is enabled for active network interfaces which ensures that the appropriate routing daemon is notified when an interface goes down and stops advertising subnets associated with that interface The routing daemon resumes advertising the subnet when the link is restored This allows routing daemons to detect link failures more rapidly as the router does not have to wait for a dead interval to time out Link Detect also causes redistributed routes to start and stop being advertised based on the status of their interface links 17 1 5 7 Configuring OSPF Link Costs Link cost is used when multiple links can reach a given destination to determine which route to use OSPF will by default assign the same cost to all links unless provided with extra information about the links Each interface is assumed to be 10Mbit unless told otherwise in the Core Interface configuration The reference bandwidth for link cost calculations is 100Mbit by default in the OSPF Global Parameters The reference bandwidth divided by the link bandwidth gives the default cost for a link which by default is 10 If a specific bandwidth is assigned to each link the costs will take this into account It is also possible to manually assign a cost to using a link in the OSPF Interface Configuration for each interface for cases where the speed of the link is n
86. instead of the land line modem or the serial card described in the preceding chapter PPP the Point to Point Protocol is used to establish an IP network connection over a cellular radio modem link Depending on local cellular network availability one of three cellular modem types may be ordered e Edge GPRS e CDMA EV DO e HSPA 13 1 1 1 PPP Interface When a PPP connection is established a network interface is created in the system The interface name for both internal and external modem connections is ppp10 Refer to this interface name when configuring firewall rules 13 1 1 2 Authentication IP Addressing and DNS Servers In contrast to the configuration for land line modems described in the preceding chapter username and password might not be required for some cellular data service providers If username and password is not required you can enter none in the username and password fields of the GUI or leave them blank If authentication is required by the cellular data service provider again PPP authentication will automatically use PAP or CHAP Your service provider will provide you with a username and password along with an Access Provider Name APN which must be entered in the GUI The authentication process will provide a local IP address for use on the PPP interface and optionally the addresses of the DNS servers and a default gateway address to use You should generally use these addresses unless you need to provide your
87. it stops attempting to establish a connection If the number is 0 it will never stop and dial until the connection is established Otherwise a Reconnect button will appear in the Modem Main Menu after specified number of consecutive failed connection attempts For Australian A tick compliance a maximum number of 15 attempts is set when the country code is set to Australia when the setting is found to be either 0 or above 15 The Dial Interval field determines how many seconds to wait before re initiating the link after it terminates The Dial on Demand field specifies that this connection is to be designated dial on demand meaning that establishment of the PPP connection is postponed until there is data to be transmitted via the interface Note that both of the addresses described below are mandatory if Dial on Demand is enabled The Local IP Address and Remote IP Address fields specify the local and remote IP addresses respectively to use on the PPP connection Note that one or both of these addresses may be overridden by a remote PPP server when a connection is established 12 2 4 Modem PPP Server Help Modem PPP Server Server Configuration pret Server IP address 192 168 1 1 ClientIP address 192 168 1 2 Client Nameserver 192 168 1 10 Proxy ARP Y Idle timeout 180 Seconds Save Changes take effect next time user connects Username Password Setting Username Password Action luser_one Password Delete
88. kernel routing table based on the routes discovered by other dynamic routing protocols Core is always enabled whenever dynamic routing is enabled as it is required by all other dynamic routing protocols 17 2 2 1 Core Global Parameters Core Global Para meters Parameter Value Description Possible values default value Enable Password Heese Enable password For configuration access string without spaces previous password Telnet Password Litti Telnet password For port 2601 access string without spaces previous password Hostname router214 Identifier of router Often the DNS name of the router string without spaces no hostname Router ID aE eA E ea i d Identifier of router Often the main IP address of the router A B C D highest IP of system Save Figure 17 5 Core Global Parameters The Enable Password field sets the password to be used for the enable command of core This is used by the telnet interface of core to control access to the configuration The Telnet Password field sets the password to be used for telnet access to core This is used as the login password of core when locally telnetting to port 2601 of the router The Hostname field sets the hostname for the core daemon This value is only used as a a reference for convenience The telnet interface prompt will contain this hostname The router s system wide hostname is used if this field is left blank The Router ID field sets
89. line encoding decoding scheme Almost all T1s now use B8ZS The Clocking field selects whether to accept or provide clocks In normal use the central office provides clocks and your setting should be Normal You may also connect to another router by using a cross over cable and selecting a Master clocking option on one of the two routers The Line Build Out field tunes the shape of the T1 pulses and adjusts their amplitude depending upon distances and the desired attenuation 7 2 2 2 E1 Settings The Framing and Line Decoding fields for E1 reflect the European variants The Clocking field performs the same function as that described for T1 Revision 1 14 1 71 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 7 2 3 Editing A Logical Interface Frame Relay Edit Logical Interface wifri6 T3 1 Frame Relay Parameters Station Type CPE FR DTE Interface sl Signalling type ANSI gt Link Failure Leaves IP interface up x 7391 10 7392 16 N391 e N392 6 N393 4 EEK Type Off gt EEK Timer 5 Logical Interfaces on T3 1 Channel 1 Name pict Local Address Netmask Remote Address Description wifrl6 fis 192 168 20 1 255 255 255 255 192 168 20 2 DLC 16 wifrl a7 192 168 21 1 255 255 255 255 192 168 21 2 DLCI 17 Add another DLCI to this channel Save Delete this logical interface Figure 7 6 Editing A Logical Interface Frame Relay
90. matching this route Note that packets routed through the router have their own source address Note that if the sending application decides to it can manually specify the source address The entries under the ToS field reflect the ToS value a packet must match to be routed by this route The entries under the Weight field reflect the relative bandwidth or quality of this link within a multi path route Note that multi path routes are shown with multiple lines for a single destination 23 8 1 1 Interface Status This menu also summarizes the interface status The entries under the Device field reflect the name of the device The entries under the Link up field reflect the current link state of interface The entries under the Address field reflect the local address of interface The entries under the Netmask field reflect the netmask applied to this interface The entries under the Beast Peer field reflect the broadcast address for the interface or the peer address if the interface is a point to point interface The entries under the MTU field reflect the Maximum Transmission Unit size for the interface The entries under the Txqueuelen field reflect the transmit queue length for the interface Revision 1 14 1 210 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols 24 Configuring Serial Protocols 24 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with 24 1 1 RawSockets Applications TCP Modbus Server Applications
91. might wish to do this temporarily to determine if the firewall is responsible for an application problem The Stop Firewall button will stop the firewall Note that you should add an entry to the When Stopped menu to allow access from your management station while the firewall is stopped If you do not do this you lose web ssh access and have to gain access via the console in order to restart the firewall Stopping the firewall will not disable it Disable the firewall via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu The Show Status button presents a variety of information summarizing the status of the firewall and routing system The Check Firewall button tests the current configuration to ensure it is valid Revision 1 14 1 127 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall 14 6 1 Network Zones SE Network Zones The zones listed on this page represent different networks reachable from your system defined by name and type of zone Add a new network zone Zone ID Zone type Move Add fw Firewall system A T E vpn IPsec Tir local IPv4 T tL wan IPv4 Sa te Add a new network zone Manually Edit File Click this button to manually edit the Shorewall file etc shorewall zones in which the entries above are stored Figure 14 3 Firewall Network Zones This menu allows you to add delete and configure zones Add a new zone by selecting the Add a new network zon
92. nu Server fendzendb No No End To End Backup Route Daemon S lipsec No No ms Private Networking Requires a default route to be set keepalived No No VRRP Server I2tunneld Yes Layer 2 tunnels linkd Yes Yes Link Backup lidpd es Yes Link Layer Discovery Protocol Daemon ntp Yes NTP Server openi2tp No No openiztp Daemon No RPC Services Needed by NFS NIS rsh rlogin rexec and rep No flEEE1588StackDaemon PTPCardisrequired No No Serial Server j T si EI portmap serserver Firewall Note To prevent accidentally blocking access to the router disabling shorewall will shorewall No No not disable the firewall until you either reboot the router or click the Clear Firewall button on the Shorewall Firewall menu smcroute No No Static Multicast Router Daemon snmpd Yes snmp Simple Network Management Protocol Yes SSH Server teinetd No No Telnet server Telnetis not encrypted and unsecure strongly suggestto use ssh server instead of telnet server webmin res Yes Web Management Interface Note Stopping Webmin will immediately hang this Web session ssh bi un C ra ttstteratteign Start Selected Now And At Boot Stop Selected Now And At Boot Click on this button to immediately reboot the system All currently logged in users will be disconnected and Reboot System all services will be stopped Click on this button to prepare the system for removing power
93. own The PPP interface s IP address obtained from the PPP server can be either a dynamic or a static IP address Firewall configuration should be performed as is appropriate 13 1 1 3 When the Modem Connects A PPP Client Connection for the cellular modem may be configured to connect at boot time 13 1 1 4 LED Designations The RuggedRouter dedicates two LEDs to indicate cellular modem status Revision 1 14 1 110 RX1000 RX1100 13 Configuring PPP And The Cellular Modem The leftmost LED of the bottom row LED 29 is the Line LED e Solid Green indicates that a PPP link has been established e Flashing green indicates that PPP link negotiation is in progress e Off indicates that the cellular modem is active but a connection to the wireless network has not yet been established e RED indicates that cellular modem is not currently operating The leftmost LED of second bottom row LED 25 is the cellular modem s Activity LED e Off means that there is no data traffic on the cellular modem e Flashing means that there is data traffic on the cellular modem connection 13 2 PPP Cellular Modem Configuration The top level configuration interface menu for the cellular modem and PPP is accessible by clicking on the Cellular Modem link in the Networking folder This menu allows you to display and configure the cellular modem interface Help Cellular Modem e a S re eme Sei Sei A
94. point at the next lowest queue Queue Name Move Add high TL normal GER low TE Prioritization Filters Packets are matched against filters from the following table in ascending order When a match occurs the packet is entered onto the respective target queue If no matches occur the packet s TOS bits are inspected and the packet is entered onto the low normal or high queue Source IP Netmask Source Port Dest IP Netmask Dest Port Protocol Target Queue Move Add Edit 172 168 12 1 32 514 high ki Transmit Queue Length Packets from the above prioritzation queues are collected on to a transmit queue prior to transmission Limiting the size of this queue increases performance by preventing the buffering of a number of lower priority frames Length Remove Prioritization Use the following button to remove prioritization from wippp Delete and Apply Figure 20 2 Interface Prioritization Menu Revision 1 14 1 196 RX1000 RX1100 20 Traffic Prioritization This menu allows you to add delete and configure queues and filters Add a new queue or filter by by clicking on the add above or add below arrows in the Add field You may also edit a manually created queue by following its link under the Queue Name column and edit a filter by following it s Edit link Reorder the queues and filters by clicking on the arrows in the Move field Some restrictions appl
95. restricts the masquerading to the specified IP address Revision 1 14 1 132 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall The Network to masquerade fields determine the interface or subnet on the private network that you wish to masquerade The Except for networks field restricts traffic from the specified subnet The SNAT address field is used to determine whether masquerading or SNAT is being performed If checked the entered IP address is used as a SNAT address 14 6 6 Firewall Rules Module Index Firewall Rules This table lists exceptions to the default policies for certain types of traffic sources or destinations The chosen action will be applied to packets matching the chosen criteria instead of the default Add a new firewall rule Action Source Destination Protocol Source ports Destination ports Move Add ACCEPT Any Host 206 30 180 94 in zone DMZ Any A ke 4 DNAT Host 66 11 180 161 in zone Internet Host 11 0 0 30 in zone Local TCP Any ssh tt ke A ACCEPT An Zone DMZ TCP Any ssh t T tL Add a new firewall rule Manually Edit File Click this button to manually edit the Shorewall file etc shorewall rules in which the entries above are stored Figure 14 11 Firewall Rules This menu allows you to add delete and configure firewall rules These rules are inspected and applied before the default policies are used Add a new rule by selecting the Add a new firewall rule li
96. router will select one or another route to transmit traffic destined to the subnet The end result is that the aggregate of data traffic to the remote subnet is shared among the multiple routes Note the distinction between Multipath Routing and Multilink PPP whereas Multilink PPP effectively multiplies the bandwidth for all traffic by the number of links that comprise a bundle Multipath Routing multiplies the capacity of the route at link native speeds by the number of different routes provided Default Routes A default route is a special instance of a static route The destination network of 0 0 0 0 0 is the most general possible IPv4 network specification Packets destined to an IPv4 subnet that is not Revision 1 14 1 52 RX1000 RX1100 5 Configuring Networking reachable via any other routing entry in the system will be forwarded to the default gateway i e the gateway for the default route Default routes for both IPv4 and IPv6 may be configured 5 3 3 1 Configuring Static Routes Help Static Routes Configured Static Routes Route Network Mask Gateway Interface Metric Comment 1 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 1 10 Active 2 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 254 253 20 inactive 3 192 168 3 0 24 192 168 1 2 Active 4 Save Other Static Routes Network Mask Gateway nterface Metric Action 192 168 2 0124 grel Save to Configured Static Routes Note This router has the followi
97. some command sendmail 7 34 9 Chassis Parameters Help Chassis Parameters Parameter Current value Allowable Range temp 34 0 C 40 C to 85 0 C VCore A 2 54 V 2 37 V to 2 62 V VCore B 1 20 V 1 14 V to 1 26 V 3 3 PS1 3 30 V 3 14 V to 3 47 V 5V 5 05 V 4 76 V to 5 24 V 12V 12 46 V 10 82 V to 13 19 V 12V 11 92 V 13 20 V to 10 80 V vBat 3 01 V 2 40 V to 3 60 V Last Power Down Time Power lost at Fri Sep 21 13 34 07 EDT 2007 Figure 34 35 Chassis Parameters Menu This menu displays the chassis temperature and if hardware version 2 the voltage levels of chassis power supplies and a record of the last power down time The system will highlight red any out of range value The monitored values are described below Revision 1 14 1 301 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router Parameter Description temp Motherboard temperature VcoreA VCoreB Redundant 3 3V power supply voltages 3 3 PS1 3 3 PS2 Redundant 3 3V power supply voltages 5V 5V power supply voltage 12V 12V power supply voltage VBat Battery voltage The last power down time reflects the time power was removed from the chassis as a result of a power failure commanded reboot or an watchdog initiated reboot System alarms will be generated for out of range parameters and watchdog initiated reboots 34 10 Power over Ethernet The IEEE 802 3af standard describes a method known com
98. text fields Date Time Hostname Router Version included in archive name The Archive Aging field specifies how long nightly backup archives are kept Note that the most recently made nightly backup will never be deleted Manually made archives are never aged and must be manually deleted The Configuration Server Options table allows user define the configuration server The Export Method field selects the method of exporting backup archives to a server If the Export Method field is set to FTP the FTP Options are used If the Export Method field is set to SCP the SCP Options are used Revision 1 14 1 286 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router The FTP Option field specifies FTP User name Password or to use anonymous FTP The SCP Option field specifies SCP User name and Bandwidth Limitation when the Export Method is SCP The Show Router SSH Key link will display the ssh public key for this router which can be used in the configuration server to accept SCP from the router The Save Archive Configuration to field specifies the configuration server hostname or IP address and the directory in which to save configuration archives The Save Webmin Configuration to field specifies the configuration server hostname or IP address and the directory in which to save Webmin configuration archives 34 5 2 Configuration Rollback Help Configuration Rollback Timeout 300 seconds Start Configuration Rollback Monitoring
99. the addition of new user entries Note If RADIUS authentication is used to authenticate PPP connection requests the Username Password Setting table will not be displayed and PPP user accounts must instead be configured at the RADIUS server See RADIUS Server Configuration for details Each PPP user entry whether defined on the router or on a RADIUS server may optionally have a list of subnetworks associated with it When the corresponding user establishes a PPP connection with the server the configured static routes are entered into the routing table making the listed subnetworks available via the connected PPP client The Static Route Setting table is displayed whether PPP is authenticated locally or via RADIUS Each row of the table contains a Username a list of Static Route entries to be entered when that user establishes a PPP connnection and a Delete button next to each entry to allow its removal An empty row prompting for Username and ending with an Add button allows the addition of new Static Route entries for that PPP user via the Edit Routes menu described below Edit Routes for user_one Route x x x xiy Action EIER Delete Add Figure 12 7 Add Routes for PPP User The Route x x x x y field lists existing static routes for the listed PPP user with a Delete button next to each entry to allow its removal Static routes are added to the list by entering an IPv4 network address x x x x f
100. the change in network routes when the topology of the network changes It will also increase the load on the router and the links due to higher traffic caused by the increase in messages Lower values will also put limits on the number of routes that can be distributed within an area as will running over slower links Note OSPF will not work properly if the Hello Interval and Dead Interval are not identical on every router in an area 17 1 5 4 Active Passive Interface Default OSPF regards router interfaces as either passive or active sending OSPF messages on active interfaces and ignoring passive interfaces By default newly created interfaces are viewed as passive from OSPF until they are configured active This is more efficient and secure for the router The Revision 1 14 1 161 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing default type for new interfaces is controlled by the passive interface default option in the OSPF Global Parameters Note The default setting of Passive Interface Default means that you must explicitly configure interfaces active before OSPF will attempt to use them 17 1 5 5 Redistributing Routes Routes for subnets which are directly connected to the router but are not part of the OSPF area or RIP or BGP networks can be advertised if redistribute connected is enabled in the OSPF RIP or BGP Global Parameters Static routes and routes handled by the kernel can also be redistributed
101. the current status of the interface including link state and current OSPF status on the interface If an interface is not part of an area it will show up as OSPF not enabled on interface Clicking Remove inactive interfaces purges the list of any interfaces which are no longer configured on the router The Cost field controls the administrative cost of routing over this interface By default the cost is auto calculated as the ospf reference bandwidth divided by the core interface bandwidth By default this is 100Mbit 10Mbit cost 10 The Priority field controls the priority associated with this interface By default the priority of interfaces is 1 The router with the highest priority wins elections for designated router for an area The Hello Interval field controls how often hello packets are sent to other routers in the area This value must match on all router interfaces in an area The Dead Interval field controls how long to wait for hello packets before declaring another router dead This should normally be set to 4 times the hello interval Revision 1 14 1 175 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing The Retransmit Interval field controls the delay between retransmissions The Transmit Delay field controls the estimated number of seconds to transmit a link state update packet This should take into account transmission and propagation delays of the interface The Passive Interface option controls if an inte
102. to 32 RTUs on any of its four ports When a request for a specific RTU arrives the server will route it to the correct port 24 1 4 2 MultiMaster Capability It is possible for multiple masters to simultaneously issue requests for the same RTU The Server Gateway will queue the requests and deliver them to the RTU in turn This multimaster capability allows widely distributed masters to configure and extract information from the RTU Revision 1 14 1 214 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols 24 1 5 TcpModbus Concepts And Issues 24 1 5 1 Host And Remote Roles Client gateways such as that implemented by the RuggedRouter always make the TCP connection to the Server Gateway The Server Gateway can only accept a connection 24 1 5 2 Port Numbers The TCP port number dedicated to Modbus use is port 502 The Server Gateway can also be configured to accept a connection on a configurable port number This auxiliary port can be used by masters that do not support port 502 Note The Server Gateway is capable of creating only one connection on the specified auxiliary port whereas when Modbus is configured to use the default port 502 it may connect to multiple RTUs 24 1 5 3 Retransmissions The Server Gateway offers the ability to resend a request to an RTU should the RTU receive the request in error or the Server Gateway receives the RTU response in error The decision to use retransmissions and the
103. to use to reach the gateway The interface does not need to be active or even exist but the route will not be installed until both are true Specifying an interface is only strictly necessary when a gateway address is not specified The menu provides a list of currently configured interfaces for quick reference Revision 1 14 1 53 RX1000 RX1100 5 Configuring Networking Note A blackhole or null route may be installed by entering nullo in the interface field The Metric field specifies an integer cost metric for the route which is used when choosing among multiple routes in the routing table that most closely match the destination address of a packet being forwarded The route with the lowest metric is chosen as the active route Note Multiple routes to the same destination subnet may also be specified using identical metrics in order to create multipath routes Please refer to Multipath The Comment field shows the status of the static route and provides a basic cause when the route is not installable The Save button below the table will perform the following sanity checks on routing entries that have been added or modified If the tests pass the routes will be saved and immediately installed e A specified Gateway must be reachable and if a network interface is also specified must be reachable via that interface e If a specified network interface exists but is not active the static route will be in
104. towards Network A after a failure of the primary path Packets from router 1 would reach router 2 through the secondary but the responses would disappear in the black hole of the failed path Revision 1 14 1 57 RX1000 RX1100 5 Configuring Networking 5 3 7 1 Configuring End To End Backup End To End Backup This menu configures the end to end backup feature This method assigns two interfaces as a primary secondary backup pair and monitors the primary link to detect a failure After a failure occurs traffic is shunted to the secondary until the primary is restored Note that in order for end to end backup to work the primary interface must act as the default interface End to end backup is not currently enabled it can be enabled through the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu End To End Routes Primary Interface wlppp gt Peer IP Address on Primary 192 168 16 2 Secondary Interface ethl gt Peer IP Address on Secondary 192 168 17 2 Fail Over Time Seconds 1 0 lt Fail Over Time lt 60 Generate Alarms DG ves C No Save Save and Apply Figure 5 9 End To End Backup This menu allows you to display and configure end to end backup In order to start end to end backup at each and every boot you must enable it via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu The menu will remind you if the feature is not enabled The Primary Interface field determines the primary interface The interface se
105. transmitted abort frames missed Tx F Number of receiver CRC errors 0 interrupt d Number of abort frames received O Number of transmit underruns o Number of times receiver disabled 0 Number of abort frames transmitted o Link Alarms In Service GREEN Data mode idle OFF Zero supp code OFF Ctrl mode idle OFF Out of service code OFF Out of frame code OFF Valid DSU NL loopback OFF Unsigned mux code OFF Rx loss of signal OFF Refresh Clear Statistics Figure 9 7 DDS Link Statistics 9 2 4 2 Frame Relay And PPP Interface Statistics Frame Relay And PPP Interface Statistics are as described in the Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 chapter 9 2 5 DDS Loopback When at least one logical interface is configured and that interface is active a DDS Loopback test can be performed This menu can be reached from a link on the DDS WAN Interfaces menu The remote equipment must be able to loop allowing the entire line to be verified If the remote equipment is another RuggedRouter starting a line loopback will verify both cards and the line DDS has no standard for performing digital loopback For more information on DDS loopback refer to T1 E1 Loopback 9 2 6 Current Routes amp Interface Table The table provided by this command is as described in the Networking menu Network Utilities sub menu It is also provided here as a convenience Revision 1 14 1 89 RX1000 RX1100 9 Config
106. tunnel to If set tunneled packets will only be routed via this port and will not be able to escape to another device when the route to the endpoint changes Revision 1 14 1 202 RX1000 RX1100 23 Network Utilities 23 Network Utilities 23 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Pinging hosts e Running a traceroute e Performing a host lookup e Tracing line activity e Showing interface statistics 23 2 Network Utilities Main Menu Help Prr Network Utilities D 203 416 1 dzs 4 m Ip Ip a a kya Baier 492 1 GE SP eil ell amp 3 wi i Bint 2 245 T Ping Ping Check Traceroute Host Trace Interface Current Route amp Statistics Interface Table Hostname Ping Traceroute Host D Ping EL Traceroute It Look Up Figure 23 1 Network Utilities Main Menu The lower part of the menu provides quick pinging tracerouting and lookup of hosts The upper part leads to menus providing more configurable options for these commands Additionally Ethernet WAN and Serial port tracing is provided A summary of interface statistics and the current routing table is provided 23 3 Ping Menu Ping Hostname T verbose Output Lookup Addresses How many Packets 5 Packet Size 56 Time between pings 1 Seconds Pattern s to send Hex Ping It Figure 23 2 Ping Menu Revision 1 14 1 203 RX1000 RX1100 23 Net
107. which makes it unnecessary to repeat the DNP address learning process across a RuggedRouter reboot or accidental power loss An aging timer is maintained per DNP address in the table and is reset whenever a DNP message is sent to or received for the specified address This learning facility makes it possible to configure the DNP3 protocol with a minimum number of parameters a TCP UDP port number a learning network interface and an aging timer 24 1 6 2 DNP Broadcast Messages DNP addresses 65521 through 65535 are reserved as DNP3 broadcast addresses RuggedRouter supports DNP3 broadcast messages DNP broadcast messages received on local serial ports are transmitted to all IP Addresses in the DNP Device Address Table whether learned or statically configured When a DNP broadcast message is received from the IP network it is transmitted on all local serial ports configured as DNP ports 24 2 Serial Protocols Configuration 24 2 1 Serial Protocols Main Menu Help Kemp Serial Protocols RAW i i i i E A 1 O MODE a DHP RAW TCP DHP 492 1 492 1 B DNP 2NI Server SOCKET oe Server e e O TIN RS485 Server 2 24 2 24 Assign Port DNP Device Raw Socket TcpModbus DNP Serial Line Trace Protocols Settings Table Settings Protocols Settings Statistics Restart Serial Protocols daemon Click this button to restart the Serial Protocols daemon This will restart all protocols Figure 24 2 Seri
108. 0015 LED Bo PowerSupplyl 12 10 0008 P1 88 300 DC and 85 264VAC Rev c2 ifboardl 12 11 0002 2 X 10 100TX RJ45 Rev b2 pcil 12 01 0004 Quad T iy Serial card pci213 01 0005 Quad U ed T1 El card Upgrade Inventory Figure 34 43 Upgrade to RX1100 This menu allows you to upgrade your router The display usefully provides a description of the current hardware in the router inventory 34 13 3 Change Repository Server Change Repository Server Repository server ftp y rceng02 eng lan debian386 Release Version mri Use rrX Y to ugrade to that specific release or rrX to upgrade to the latest release Bandwidth Limiting Disabled Save Changes Figure 34 44 Change Repository Server Revision 1 14 1 310 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router This menu defines the server used to upgrade software The Repository server field accepts a URL containing the domain name or IP address of an http or ftp server along with the directory on the server containing the upgrades The release version field accepts a software release string such as rr1 rr1 7 or rr1 7 2 If you configure this field with only a major release number such as rri the router will always pick the latest release at the server As an example if the router is running with release rr1 7 and release rr1 7 2 becomes available the latter will be used If you configure this field with a major minor patch release number such as rr1 7
109. 080523 1547 rr1 13 0 Setup eth1 IP address latestarchive ri 13 0 Setup ethi IP address Archive20080523 1540 1 13 0 Automatic nightly backup at 2008 05 23 15 40 E Archive20080523 1515 rr1 12 4 configuration for rr1 12 4 E Archive20080523 1510 rri 12 4 Automatic nightly backup at 2008 05 23 15 10 E factorydefaults ri 13 0 Factory defaults Remove Selected Archives Webmin Archives The total size of all archived configurations is 15110 bytes Click on an archive to download a copy of it Archive Name Version Archive Comment Webmin20080523 1544 1 13 0 configuration for rr1 13 0 Sietestwebrminerchive 1 13 0 configuration for rr1 13 0 Webmin20080523 1533 rri 12 4 Automatic nightly backup at 2008 05 23 15 33 Remove Selected Archives Upload configuration archives or webmin archives from your current host to this router Archive to upload Browse Upload To Router Figure 34 15 Archive History The Archive History menu displays current system configuration archives including all configurations and Webmin configuration archives only includes Webmin configurations sorted by date most recent first Following the link of an archives under the Archive Name field upload a copy of it Selecting an under the Archive Name field and applying the Remove Selected Archives button will delete the archive Note that only manually backup archives can be deleted Automatic nightly backup archiv
110. 1 Channel 1 PPP Parameters Name Local Address Netmask Remote Address pranie Magie Description wiclppp 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 2 2 2 2 T1 Internet link Save Delete Figure 9 6 Edit Logical Interface PPP The fields and buttons in this menu are the same as those described in the Editing A Logical Interface PPP section of the previous chapter 9 2 4 DDS Statistics When at least one logical interface is configured DDS Link and logical interface statistics will be available These statistics are available from links on the DDS WAN Interfaces menu Link Statistics are provided through the View Link Statistics link at the bottom of each interface table Frame Relay and PPP statistics are available through Statistics links under the interface name column of each interface table Revision 1 14 1 88 RX1000 RX1100 9 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And DDS 9 2 4 1 Link Statistics 56K 1 Link Layer Statistics Receive Statistics Transmit Statistics Number of frames received z Number of frames transmitted la Number of bytes received 160 Number of bytes transmitted 168 Receive Throughput Transmit Throughput lo Received frames discarded too short D D Received frames discarded too long 0 D Received frames discarded link inactive Receive Errors Transmit Errors Number of receiver overrun errors 0 Number of
111. 1000 RX1100 3 Configure Webmin Users This menu allows you to view and delete current login sessions delete login session will force the login user to login again Click on Session link under the Session ID column to cancel a session Click the Webmin user link under the Webmin user column to display the Webmin user edit menu for that user Click the View logs link to display logs for that Webmin user 3 7 Password Restrictions Menu Help Password Restrictions Webmin password enforcement options Minimum password length No minimum C letters Regular expressions passwords must match a zA Z w 5 H Disallow passwords containing username C yes No Number of old passwords to reject No limit on password re use passwords Save Figure 3 4 Password Restrictions Menu This menu allows you to set restrictions for password selection in order to prevent the use of trivial or machine guessable passwords The Minimum password length field sets the minimum length for password The Regular expression passwords must match field sets the regular expression that a new password must match The above example restricts new passwords to begin with an alpha character followed by at least another 5 alphanumeric characters The Disallow passwords containing username field prevents new passwords from containing the user name The Number of old passwords to reject field determines after how many successful passwo
112. 14 1 221 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols The Max Conns field configures the maximum number of incoming DNP connections The Loc Port field configures the TCP UDP port number on which DNP protocol listens DNP devices normally use port 20000 The Device Address field configures a DNP device address whether local or remote The address may be that of a DNP device connected to a local serial port or one available via the serial port of a remote IP host The address may be in the range 1 to 65520 Note that both local and remote serial ports must be properly configured The Rem IP field configures the IP address of the remote host that provides a connection to the DNP device with the configured address Help DNP Device Table Settings Device Address Rem IP Port E E _Add Delete Return to Serial Protocols Device Address Table Device Address Rem IP Port 12 3 3 3 3 Unknown 13 0 0 0 0 2 Figure 24 8 DNP Device Table Settings The Port field configures the serial port to which the DNP device is attached If the entry is for a remote DNP device i e the DNP device is attached to the serial port of remote IP host the value of this parameter is Unknown Device Address Table This table displays all currently known active DNP devices Revision 1 14 1 222 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols 24 2 7 Serial Protocols Statistics Menu Serial Protocols Statistics
113. 17 1 5 1 Network Areas Network areas determine the regions within which routes are distributed to other routers The subnets at a particular router can be added to its OSPF Area The router will advertise these subnets to all routers in its area Note OSPF areas must be designed such that no single link failure will cause the network to be split into two disjoint networks A router can be part of multiple areas and function as a gateway between areas When multiple areas are used on a network area 0 is the backbone area All areas must have a router connecting them to area 0 17 1 5 2 Router ID Defines the ID of the router By default this is the highest IP assigned to the router It is often a good idea to configure this value manually to avoid the router id changing if interfaces are added or deleted from the router During elections for designated router the router id is one of the values used to pick the winner Keeping the router id fixed will avoid any unexpected changes in the election of the master router 17 1 5 3 Hello Interval and Dead Interval The hello interval is the time between transmission of OSPF Hello packets The dead interval is the time to wait without seeing an OSPF Hello packet before declaring a neighboring router dead and discarding its routes It is recommended that the dead interval be at least four times the hello interval for reliable operation Lower values of these settings will help to speed up
114. 17 19 31 chat 3192 Failed NO DIALTONE Mar bh Sick kA pppd 785 Connect script failed Refresh Figure 12 9 PPP Logs This page shows the PPP logs This is mainly useful when trying to debug a PPP connection problem Revision 1 14 1 108 RX1000 RX1100 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem 12 2 7 Modem PPP Connection Logs PPP Connection Logs Refresh Month Day Time Event User Local IP Remote IP Speed Duration Bytes Received Bytes Sent Mar 17 16 03 12 connect user1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 33600 Mar 17 16 03 42 disconnect user1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 33600 0 00 31 OKiB OKIB Refresh Figure 12 10 PPP Connection Logs This page shows a list of PPP connections It shows who connected when they connected and disconnected the connection speed and session traffic 12 2 8 Current Routes amp Interface Table The table provided by this command is as described in the Networking menu Network Utilities sub menu It is also provided here as a convenience Revision 1 14 1 109 RX1000 RX1100 13 Configuring PPP And The Cellular Modem 13 Configuring PPP And The Cellular Modem 13 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuring the cellular modem e Configuring the PPP client e Viewing connection status 13 1 1 PPP and Cellular Modem Fundamentals RuggedRouter may be equipped with an internal cellular modem
115. 192 168 3 1 The switch port 4 is on vian4 using subnet 192 168 4 0 24 and should assign addresses 192 168 4 101 to 192 1 2 gt A 168 4 200 and default gateway 192 168 4 1 Enable eth1 in the Edit Network Interfaces menu Add a new subnet and configure it for network address 192 168 1 0 with netmask 255 255 255 0 Save it Add a new shared network Name the shared network for example eth1 and select the subnet 192 168 1 0 to be included in the shared network Save it Revision 1 14 1 243 RX1000 RX1100 27 Configuring The DHCP server 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Edit the shared network again Add a new subnet and configure it for network address 192 168 2 0 with netmask 255 255 255 0 Save the new subnet and then save the shared network settings Edit the subnet just created and click Edit Client Options Set default routers to 192 168 2 1 and save it Click add an address pool to the subnet Set the address range to 192 168 2 101 to 192 168 2 200 Click Create Edit the pool by clicking on the link for the pool with address range 192 168 2 101 192 168 2 200 Click add an option82 client Give the client a unique alpha numeric name for example subnet0102 Set the remote id to the switch MAC address 00 0A DC 1 1 22 00 in this case Set the circuit id to the switches circuit id identifier to the port 00 02 00 02 for V
116. 20 maximum 1000 Maximum capture time 20 maximum 240 sec Trace It Figure 23 8 Frame Relay Trace Menu Frame Relay tracing uses the wanpipemon utility The Interface to capture on field specifies the interface to show traffic on The Maximum packets captured and Maximum capture time fields limits the amount of traffic captured 23 7 3 Serial Trace A Serial Server Port Serial Trace A Serial Server Port Trace on ports 1 27 af Af All Ports Message RX TX T Hex dump IT Incoming Outgoing Connections IT Maximum packets captured 20 maximum 1000 Maximum capture time 20 maximum 240 sec Serial Trace It Figure 23 9 Serial Server Port Trace Menu The Trace on ports fields specify the serial port to show traffic on The Message RX TX and Incoming Outgoing Connections fields causes data packets and Connection activity to be included in the trace The Hex dump field causes the content of data packets to be displayed The Maximum packets captured and Maximum capture time fields limits the amount of traffic captured Revision 1 14 1 208 RX1000 RX1100 23 Network Utilities 23 8 Interface Statistics Menu Interface Statistics Interface rxbytes txbytes _ rxpackets txpackets rxerrors txerrors ts dropped txpackets dropped ethi 2929760066 1963432594 178990610 190887111 3424 1 7803 i a eth2 2434814540 3980034925 52321546 45735310 189 o 388 o wippp
117. 29 2 8 Viewing The GPS Log GPS Log Refresh Month Day Time Process Event Mar 9 11 38 30 fusrfsbinfirigb 1609 GPS lock locked Refresh Figure 29 7 GPS Log The GPS Log menu displays the log of recent GPS events Revision 1 14 1 256 RX1000 RX1100 30 Configuring SSH 30 Configuring SSH 30 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuring SSH Authentication e SSH Networking And Access Control e Setting SSH Server Options 30 1 1 SSH Fundamentals The Secure Shell protocol provides interactive remote login service remote command execution and file transmission functions It implements strong authentication and secure communications over insecure channels The program that accepts an SSH client s connection is an SSH server The SSH server can be programmed to enforce conditions to increase security These conditions can be imposed upon specific hosts or upon all hosts in general SSH has seen two major revisions of the protocol SSH v1 and v2 SSH v1 supported only the RSA authentication scheme while SSH v2 supports both RSA and DSA Warning SSH v1 is known to be insecure and should generally not be used SSH provides service on TCP port 22 by default If a firewall configured and operating on the router it is advised to leave port 22 or whichever port SSH has been configured to use open in order to allow secure authorized access from outside the firewall
118. 3 Ping Check Menu The main Ping Check menu also contains links to Add a new Ping check or to Edit an existing entry Revision 1 14 1 204 RX1000 RX1100 23 Network Utilities Ping Check Parameter value Description interval 60 waiting time between ping packet in second Pina retries 4 Max ping packets to send before taking action Remote IP address 211 193 21 45 Host to send ping packets to Pre defined action None Pre defined action if ping check failed otner Action logger pcheck action to be done if ping check failed Save a Return to Ping check Figure 23 4 Ping Check Edit Menu The Interval field specifies the time between each successive ping request to the IP host The Ping retries field specifies the number of ping requests that are allowed to go unanswered before taking the configured action The Remote IP address field specifies the IP address of remote host to monitor The Pre defined action drop list may be used to select a pre defined action to be taken if the monitored IP host does not reply within the configured number of ping retries Currently the list contains Restart PPP on Cellmodem if a cellular modem is installed and Restart MLPPP The Other action field accepts any valid shell command as the action to be executed if the monitored IP host does not reply within the configured number of pi
119. 34 4 4 Upgrading Gauntlet ciiccisicecscotncetsaseactanhcnatecta Zeen 285 34 5 Backup Re Bet 285 34 5 1 General Configuration EE 286 34 5 2 Configuration ROMBAGKS EE 287 34 5 3 Archive HIStory simii eina ape RE E 288 349 4 Arhive BaACKUD EE 289 34 5 5 Archive Eegenen aieiaa anaa e A a Aeaee 289 34 5 6 Archive Difference Tool isc ciiceccccsscdenes is acenresaassaedes stanennencactenneuscseceeiedseentennane cs 291 34 6 SNMP Configuration deele REESEN EEN dee ee 292 34 6 1 SNMP Main Configuration Menu 293 34 6 2 System Configuration 22 esesetcs sche eee ten seeecets otis ogee raeiesoal eS a eee teenie ed 293 Revision 1 14 1 10 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 34 6 3 Network Addressing Configuration 294 34 6 4 Access Control NEE 294 34 6 5 Trap Config ratiom siia eek arepe aeee E E aE Aa E ERRE 296 34 60 60 MIB SUD DOR eaa n a a rE E Ta 297 347 RADIUS Authentication nisserne aaee S EEEE EE e AES ea eh ee 298 S rA MPO OUGHION WEE 298 34 7 2 RADIUS Authentication Configuration cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeenetaeeeteeees 299 34 7 3 Edit RADIUS Server Parameters uk 300 34 8 O tgoing ET 301 34 9 Chassis Parameters EE 301 34 10 Power over Ethernet erbei Sue ENEEC EEN dE 302 34 10 1 Power over Ethernet Mem et eines Eu DEAeVERR CES EEENEEEEEEEREE EN gege 303 34 11 Banner Configuration aces cscceeere si ce cecetonncdeceeteceauaiaht neers Wer es eet ead arene bidet dee 304 ATE SYS TC IT
120. 39 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 32 33 34 9012345678901234 176 bytes truncated 16 13 37 144 TCPCONN Rx Data 120b from 10 0 10 2 50001 8964 for serial port 1 Start Trace Figure 24 10 Serial Protocols Trace Menu This menu displays decoded serial port and network activity The desired traffic sources number of messages and length of time to capture are entered and the Start Trace button is pressed The menu will display up to the provided number of messages waiting up to the specified number of seconds The Trace on ports selections feature a list of serial ports with unused entries greyed out The default is All Ports which selects all ports The Message RX TX field allows log entries to be printed for each received or transmitted message and method of packetization If the Hex Dump field is selected the first 64 bytes of packet content is displayed The Incoming Outgoing Connections field allows regular network level entries such as call connections and received transmitted messages to be displayed Note that some unexpected but unusual network messages may be displayed if they occur Note Specifying large numbers of ports entries and capture times can result in a great deal of output Specifying a large capture time may require the web page to wait that interval if activity is infrequent 24 2 9 Serial Protocols Sertrace Utility gt The command line sertrace utility offers the ability to trace the acti
121. 4 4 Alert Definition Configuration Menu This menu displays matched alert definition entries It also allows user to change an alert definition entry or create a new entry An alert definition entry defines an alert which will be monitored by the system The View Alert Definition by Category allows you to display alert definition entries matching with selected category The Create New Definition button allows you to create a user defined alert definition entry Click on one of the link under the Codepoint column allows you to change the configuration for that alert definition entry Revision 1 14 1 278 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 2 2 3 Change Alert Definition Change Alert Definition Alert Definition Parameters Codepoint chassis 3 Category chassis xl Name Power Supply 2 Failure Subsystem chassis Severity Critical vf Alarmable SE Enabled lv Renotify Interval second e Disabled 8 1 86400 seconds Type Simple xf Parameters for Shell Sample Interval 30 86400 seconds Command Comparator Greaterthan Threshold And Repeats 0 1000000 times And Until 0 1000000 seconds Not Cleared Repeats 0 1000000 times Not cleared Until KZ i 0 1000000 times Parameters for RMON Device Name MIB Variable Sample Interval 30 86400 seconds Startup Event Rising Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Save Figure 345 Change Alert Definitio
122. 45 TCPCONN Tx Data from port 1 44b to 10 0 10 236 4991 50002 Revision 1 14 1 225 RX1000 RX1100 25 Synchronous Serial Ports 25 Synchronous Serial Ports 25 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with configuring RuggedRouter to forward data from Synchronous Serial ports over IP using the Raw Socket protocol The RuggedRouter Serial Protocols Server see also Configuring Serial Protocols that forwards data traffic from asynchronous serial ports over IP networks can also be configured to run Raw Socket connections over synchronous serial ports 25 1 1 Synchronous Serial Port Features RuggedRouter Synchronous Serial ports provide the following features e up to four independent synchronous serial ports per RuggedRouter two ports per slot e configurable data rates from 2400 to 230400 bits per second e internal or external clocking modes e RTS CTS hardware flow control e HDLC framing e support for the Raw Socket protocol a means to transport data from a synchronous serial port on the router to a specified remote IP address and TCP port up to eight TCP Raw Socket connections per port e debugging facilities including connection tracing and statistics 25 1 2 Raw Socket Operation On Synchronous Ports The Raw Socket protocol operates somewhat differently on synchronous ports from the way it does on asynchronous ports One important difference is that in the case of outgoing ca
123. 48 MB Normal Irrrrrtrtrtrzt 1 39 MB Low Irrrrrrrzrzrtrttrttttz 2 12 MB Refresh Clear Statistics And Refresh Figure 20 5 Prioritization Statistics This menu displays the percentage of interface traffic that has been transmitted from each priority queue The Refresh button causes the statistics to be updated The Clear Statistics And Refresh button causes the statistics to be cleared and then captured after a one second interval Revision 1 14 1 198 RX1000 RX1100 21 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 21 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP The IEEE standard 802 1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP promises to simplify troubleshooting of enterprise networks and enhance the ability of network management tools to discover and maintain accurate network topologies in multi vendor environments LLDP data are made available to NMS Network Management Systems via SNMP The LLDP service is enabled by default but may be disabled via the Bootup and Shutdown menu under the System folder Note In order to make LLDP information available via SNMP the SNMP service must be configured running and accessible LLDP information can be polled using the standard LLDP MIB 21 1 LLDP Status LLDP status can also be seen directly using Webmin Please note that there is a 30 second delay between updates Pressing the Refresh button will query LLDP for current information LLDP Neighbors ChassisID SysN
124. 5 255 255 248 203 50 190 95 1500 1100 IS Yes 127 0 0 1 255 0 0 0 16436 0 wippp Yes 213 186 238 138 255 255 255 252 213 186 238 137 1500 11 Figure 23 11 Current Routing amp Interface Table Revision 1 14 1 209 RX1000 RX1100 23 Network Utilities This menu displays the current routing table and the state of the router s interfaces Select the Refresh link in order to refresh the display The entries under the Destination field reflect the network or host which can be reached through this route The default entry matches any packet which has not already matched another route The entries under the Via field reflect the address of the gateway to route packets through to reach the target network The field is blank for non gateway routings The entries under the Device field reflect the name of the interface this route belongs to Packets using this route will be sent on this interface The entries under the Metric field reflect the cost of this route The route with the lowest metric matching a destination is used The entries under the Protocol field reflect the system that created the route It is one of kernel default interface routes core dynamic routing protocol routes redirect routes added due to ICMP redirect message or static for manually added routes The entries under the Source field reflect the source address to use when originating a packet to a destination
125. 54 2 Save Delete Figure 5 3 Dummy Interface This menu allows you to configure a dummy interface Normally the router is reachable on any of its interface addresses whether the interface is active or not When OSPF and link detection is used inactive interfaces are not advertised to the network and thus not reachable A dummy interface is always advertised and is thus reachable Pressing the Save button will save the configuration change Pressing the Delete button will remove the dummy interface 5 3 3 Static Routes This menu allows you to configure static routing entries including default routes Each static route specifies how the router can reach a remote subnet It also allows the conversion of other static routes obtained via DHCP for example to permanently configured static routes If IPv6 support is enabled in the Core settings menu IPv6 static routes may also be configured here If multiple gateways are availabe to route to a given remote subnet a static route entry may be entered for each one with the same subnet and different gateway specifications Typically one would also enter a different metric for each route the lowest metric indicating the preferred route Multipath Routes It is also possible to specify the same metric for each one of several alternative routes to the same remote subnet This allows the creation of a multipath route With such a set of redundant routes available to a remote subnet the
126. 588 parameters The 1588 Working Mode field allows configures whether the router will be forced to 1588 slave mode or determine its role by the BMC algorithm The Preferred Master Clock field configures the router to be preferred master clock The Subdomain Name field allows you to choose which domain you want the router to participate in There are four domains available each mapped to a different multicast IP address The Sync Interval field configures the rate at which SYNC messages are issued The router NTP daemon uses GPS as a clock source when it is available and with IEE1588 when GPS is not available The Treat NTP sync d grandmaster as stratum field assigns the stratum number when grandmaster clock synchronized with remote NTP server but not GPS The Treat Local Clock sync d grandmaster as stratum field assigns the stratum number when grandmaster clock synchronized with local clock but not NTP server or GPS Revision 1 14 1 267 RX1000 RX1100 32 Configuring IRIGB And IEEE1588 32 2 5 IRIGB Status IRIGB Log Refresh Mar fusrfsbin irigb 19332 Receive SIGINT signal and exit Mar fe 13 28 42 fusrfsbinfirigb 30328 Mar 8 13 28 43 fusr sbin firigb 30329 GPS lock not locked Set GPS as the current reference clock for PTP Card Mar e 13 28 45 fusr sbin irigb 30328 Set GPS as the current reference clock for PTP Card Mar e 19 29 16 fusr sbin irigb 30328
127. 8 Ethernet Interfaces 63 Lookup By Host file 56 Modem PPP 106 PPPoE 98 T1 E1 Frame Relay 73 Web Access Control 35 Web Browser Address 29 IPv6 Allow Configuration 51 IRIGB Output Formats 264 Reference Clocks 265 K Kernel Settings icmp_echo_ignore_all 51 icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts 51 send_redirect 51 tcp_syncookie 51 L LED Status Panel 32 LEDs ADSL Ports 95 Cellular modem 110 DDS Ports 85 Ethernet Ports 59 211 LED Panel 32 Modem Ports 101 T1 E1 Ports 68 T3 E3 Ports 79 Link Backup Configuration 183 Path Failure Discovery 181 Testing 185 LLDP 199 Status 199 Logging Configuring Webmin Events Logging 36 NTP 255 256 Viewing Webmin Events Logs 38 Login Banner 316 Loopback T1 E1 76 M Modbus Examples 217 Exception Handling 215 MultiMaster Capability 214 Performance 215 Retransmissions 215 RTU Polling Introduction 214 TCP Port Number 215 Modem Configuration 101 Incoming Call Logs 108 PPP Client 105 117 PPP Connection Logs 109 PPP Logs 108 PPP Server 106 Multicast Routing 55 Multilink PPP 91 Configuring 91 Multipath Routes 52 N Network Utilities 203 Ping 203 Ping Check 204 NTP Configuring 251 Fundamentals 200 251 Multicasting 251 NTP Sanity Limit 252 Peers 251 Servers 251 Stratum 251 Utilities 252 O OSPF Active vs Passive Interfaces 161 176 179 Administrative Distances 163 Antispoofing 163 Areas 161 A
128. 8 1 0 with netmask 255 255 255 0 3 Set the assigned address range to 192 168 1 101 192 168 1 200 4 Click Create then edit the subnet just created and click Ed Client Options Revision 1 14 1 241 RX1000 RX1100 27 Configuring The DHCP server 5 6 Set default routers to 192 168 1 1 and save Restart the DHCP server or apply changes 27 1 2 2 Single Network With Static IP Assignment In this example the eth1 interface is provided with IP address 192 168 1 1 24 Assign address 192 168 1 101 to a DHCP client with MAC 00 1 1 22 33 44 01 Assign address 192 168 1 102 to a DHCP client with MAC 00 11 22 33 44 02 Assign address 192 168 1 103 to a DHCP client with MAC 00 1 1 22 33 44 03 The router serves as the default gateway 1 2 oo P Go N 9 Enable eth1 in the Edit Network Interfaces menu Click add a subnet and configure it for network address 192 168 1 0 with netmask 255 255 255 0 Click Create then edit the subnet just created and click Edit Client Options Set default routers to 192 168 1 1 and save it Click add a new host Set the hardware address to Ethernet 00 1 1 22 33 44 01 and the fixed IP to 192 168 1 101 Assign the client a hostname as well Click Create Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other hosts with the appropriate address MAC and hostname for each client Restart the DHCP server or apply changes 27 1 2 3 Single Network With Option82 Clients On On
129. 92 168 1 0 24 Yes net wippp 0 0 0 0 0 No The IPsec protocol operates on UDP port 500 and using protocols ah Authentication Header and Encapsulating Security Payload ESP protocols The firewall must accept this traffic in order to allow IPsec Action Source Zone Destination Zone Protocol Dest Port ACCEPT net fw ah Revision 1 14 1 125 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall Action Source Zone Destination Zone Protocol Dest Port ACCEPT net fw esp ACCEPT net fw udp 500 IPSec traffic arriving at the firewall is directed to openswan the IPSec daemon Openswan then decrypts the traffic and forwards it back to shorewall on the same interface that originally received it You will also need a rule to allow traffic to enter from this interface ACCEPT vpn loc 14 5 2 Virtual Private Networking To A DMZ If the firewall is to pass the VPN traffic through to another device e g a VPN device in a DMZ then establish a DMZ zone and install the following rules ACCEPT net dmz ah ACCEPT net dmz esp ACCEPT net dmz udp 500 ACCEPT dmz net ah ACCEPT dmz net esp ACCEPT dmz net udp 500 14 6 Firewall Configuration Help Shorewall Firewall Shorewall version 4 0 11 mp War e Network Network Zone Hosts AET Preval Gel Static NAT TC Classes TC Fules hes When Stopped TE Zones Interfaces hosts Policies ue nat SE tcclasses terules routestopped zones interfaces policy eu Sg tcdevic
130. A Inthe Edit Profile window under the Advanced tab click the Add button Edit Dial in Profile 2 xI Dialin Constraints IP Multilink Authentication Encryption Advanced Specify additional connection attributes to be returned to the Remote Access server Attributes Figure E 2 IAS Window Edit Profile 5 Inthe Add Attribute window select the Vendor Specific attribute line and click Add Revision 1 14 1 327 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix E RADIUS Server Configuration RM As To add an attribute to the Profile select the attribute and then click Add To add an attribute that is not listed select the Vendor Specific attribute Attribute Tunnel ServerAuthD Tunnel Server Endpt Tunnel Type Cisco AV Pair Allowed Certificate O1D Generate Class Attribute Generate Session Timeout Ignore User Dialin Properties MS Quarantine IPFilter MS Quarantine Session T imeout Tunnel Tag USR ACCM Type USR AT Call Input Filter USR AT Call Output Filter USR AT Input Filter USR AT Output Filter USR AT RTMP Input Filter RADIUS Standard RADIUS Standard RADIUS Standard D ndard Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft U S Robotics Inc U S Robotics Inc U S Robotics Inc U S Robotics Inc U S Robotics Inc U S Robotics Inc Specifies the name used by the tunnel terminator during th Specifies the IP address of the server end of the tunnel A Specifies the tunn
131. AO Es EE kee EE ee dee EEN 96 11 2 ADSL WAN Interfaces merse ENEE REENEN ee a EAA AARE la tani 96 11 3 iEd Logical Interface PPPOE ere hentai deta Ae 97 11 4 Edit Logical Interface Bridged ngesgegegrk garg gen eegegeggeer deg See dech edres eege 98 Wd ADSI le 99 12 1 Modem Configuration Main Men ANEREN 101 12 2 Edit Internal Modem Configuration geegent egene eatin 102 12 3 Edit External Modem Configuration siccscsedescicceaveceneesntens AER seen uzeenipieneeedenysdtand eatecenneeeees 102 12 4 Modem PPP Client Connections ENEE 104 12 5 Configure Modem PPP Client stees ccscktdeceracbetigceieada ceavadseli biases hater enniabaeneets 105 12 6 Configure Modem PPP Server enen See Gegen 106 12 7 Add Ro tes for PPR RTE 107 Revision 1 14 1 13 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 2 BA INGO Call Logs E 108 BE E e EE 108 1271 0 PPP Connection LOGS agre deaa ae a eaka agen le ana EEE AE AAR 109 13 1 Cell lar Modem Interface nsi srn r e a 111 13 2 Cellular Modem Interface CDMA modem not yet activated 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 111 13 3 Over The Air Account ST EE 112 13 4 Manual Account Activation egee eg de eegne deed dees Eed ie cadee 113 13 5 Cellular Modem Configuration with an Edge GPRS modem c cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeees 114 13 6 Cellular Modem Status HSPA GPRS 24 eesgeag deet degen de deeg dceetnsinaedes 115 13 7 Cellular Modem Status CDMA ENEE 116 13 8 Modem PPP Client Connect
132. Assign new MLPPP logical interfaces Edit T1 1 Parameters Figure 10 1 T1 E1 WAN Interfaces Click on Assign new MLPPP logical interfaces to specify the parameters of the MLPPP bundle The bundle can have one or more PPP links over T1 E1 Module Config Edit New Logical Interface MLPPP Parameters Local Address Netmask Remote Address Description 255 255 255 255 MLPPP Channel Setting T1 1 T1 2 IS T1 3 E TA Channel none E Channel none ham none e Channel none v Save Figure 10 2 Edit MLPPP Logical Interface Menu The Local IP address field specifies the IP address of the MLPPP interface e The Netmask field specifies the Network Address mask e The Remote Address field specifies the IP address of the remote end of the MLPPP link e The Default Gateway field specifies the IP address of the default gateway to use while the MLPPP link is active optional e The Description field allows the administrator to store a brief description of MLPPP link e The MLPPP Channel Setting table allows one or more T1 E1 channels to be included in the MLPPP bundle After the fields have been entered click the Save button to create the MLPPP bundle 10 3 Multilink PPP Statistics Once an MLPPP interface is configured interface statistics become available for both the T1 E1 links which comprise the MLPPP bundle and for the MLPPP interface itself The T1 E1 link statistics interface is descri
133. Bootloader MENU et E gege ees re Eeer Eed ege ee ed 321 BZ EE lte POMPE EE 321 C 1 Apache Default Web Page TEE 322 By Te Installing IS een a R Eege ege EARS 323 E 1 IAS Window Edit Remote Access Policy EES 327 E2 1IAS Window Edit Profile ssion setne ea ATOE a iaae aA iSS bii SENKES 327 E 3 IAS Window Re 328 EA IAS Window Multivalued Attribute Information cccecccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeees 328 E 5 IAS Window Vendor Specific Attribute Information c ccccceceeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeees 329 EG IAS Window Configure VSA RFC Compliant cccccccceeeceeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeessaaeeees 329 E 7 Active Directory User Account Properties 0 ccececeeccceeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeenseseees 330 Revision 1 14 1 18 RX1000 RX1100 About this User Guide About this User Guide This guide is concerned with aiding the user in the configuration and operation of the RuggedRouter using the RuggedCom command line setup menu and web management interfaces Specifically this guide details aspects of e Accessing the User Interfaces e Security e Configuring the router e Status determination e Performance measurement e Uploading and downloading files e Dealing with alarms This guide also details operation of the RX1100 Gauntlet security appliance This guide is intended solely for the purpose of familiarizing the reader with the ways that t
134. CCEPT None None vit H net Any DROP None None t A be 4 Any Any REJECT None None bk it E Add a new default policy Manually Edit File Click this button to manually edit the Shorewall file etc shorewall policy in which the entries above are stored Figure 14 7 Firewall Default Policies This menu allows you to add delete and configure default policies Add a new policy by selecting the Add a new default policy link or by clicking on the add above or add below images in the Add field Reorder the policies by clicking on the arrows under the Move field Clicking on a link under the Source zone field will allow you to edit or delete the policy as shown below You may also make changes by manually editing the policy file Revision 1 14 1 131 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall Module Ind H H oe Edit Default Policy Default policy details Source zone Internet gt Destination zone lt Any gt gt Policy DROP DI Syslog level lt Logging disabled gt Traffic limit None Limit Burst Save Delete Figure 14 8 Editing A Firewall Default Policy The Syslog level field causes a log entry to be generated every time the rule is followed The Traffic limit fields allow you to place an upper limit upon the rate at which the rule is applied The Limit field is the steady state rate and is of the form X sec or X min where X is the number of allowed rule followings The B
135. DNP Distributed Network Protocol Configuring Serial ports for RawSocket Viewing Serial Port and TCP Connection status and statistics Resetting Serial ports Tracing Serial Port activity Serial IP Port Features The RuggedCom Serial Server provides the following features for forwarding serial traffic over IP Raw Socket Protocol a means to transport streams of characters from one serial port on the router to a specified remote IP address and TCP port Four independent serial ports per product Bit rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 or 230400 bps Supports RS232 RS422 and RS485 party line operation XON XOFF flow control Supports a point to point connection mode and a broadcast connection mode in which up to 32 remote servers may connect to a central server TCP IP incoming outgoing or both incoming outgoing connections mode configurable local and remote TCP port numbers Packetize and send data on a full packet a specific character or upon a timeout Supports a turnaround time to enforce minimum times between messages sent out the serial port Debugging facilities including connection tracing and statistics 24 1 1 1 LED Designations The Quad TriplePlay Serial card includes transmit and receive LEDs The transmit LED is leftmost when the card is in the top slot and will light while characters are being transmitted The receive LED is rightmost when the card is in the top slot and will light while
136. DP SNMP VIEW BASED ACM MIB View based Access Control Model for SNMP SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB SNMP MPD MIB The SNMP Management Architecture MIB The MIB for Message Processing and Dispatching SNMP USER BASED SM MIB The management information definitions for the SNMP User based Security Model Revision 1 14 1 297 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 7 RADIUS Authentication 34 7 1 Introduction RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service described in RFC 2865 is a protocol designed to allow the centralization of authentication authorization and configuration of various types of services The goal of RADIUS authentication is typically to restrict the distribution of account information and to avoid the replication of security management effort 34 7 1 1 RADIUS Usage The typical mode of operation involves a Network Access Server NAS in this case the RuggedRouter and a remote RADIUS server where account information is stored In the course of attempting to access connection oriented services on the NAS a user presents credentials to the NAS for authentication The NAS forwards these to a configured RADIUS server and accepts from it the determination of whether the user is allowed the requested access In order to protect the security of account information and of both the NAS and the RADIUS server transactions are encrypted and authenticated through the use of a shared secret whi
137. EE1588 status IEEE1588 and UTC time the offset from master in seconds the master IP MAC address and grandmaster MAC address are provided Revision 1 14 1 268 RX1000 RX1100 32 Configuring IRIGB And IEEE1588 32 2 7 IRIGB Log IRIGB Log Refresh 13 28 42 use sbin irigh 30328 GPS lock not locked SC C S SEET Sat GPS as the cumant rafaranca dock for FTP Gard 13 29 16 usr sbin irigh 30328 Sync time from LOCAL Clock to PTP Gard SC S S S ar Mar Mar Mar Mar KKK ia bla Mar Mar Refresh Figure 32 7 IRIGB GPS Status y This page reflects reference clock changes in IRIG B Revision 1 14 1 269 RX1000 RX1100 33 Configuring the Intrusion Detection System 33 Configuring the Intrusion Detection System 33 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuration of Snort as an Intrusion Detection System e Generating a daily snort analysis email 33 1 1 Snort Fundamentals The Snort Intrusion Detection System IDS provides a type of security management system for the router Snort gathers and analyzes information on various network interfaces to identify possible security breaches which include both intrusions attacks from outside the protected network and misuse attacks from within the protected network Snort examines packets received on selected interfaces applies rules from its database and generates alerts to warn of
138. HCP Note that DHCP is selected the local and remote IP addresses are immediately dummied out to 169 254 0 1 and 169 254 0 2 the netmask is set to 255 255 0 0 and default gateway option is suppressed The Local IP Address field defines the IP address for this interface The Netmask field defines the network address mask The value 255 255 255 255 specifies a point to point connection which is almost always correct The Remote IP Address field defines the IP address for other side of this interface As most WAN links are of point to point type there is only one host connected to the other end of the link and its address is known in advance This option is the address of the other end of the link and is usually assigned by the network administrator or Internet service provider Revision 1 14 1 98 RX1000 RX1100 11 Configuring PPPoE Bridged Mode On ADSL The Gateway IP Address field defines the IP address to use as the gateway for sending to other sites This is usually the same as the Remote IP Address 11 2 4 ADSL Statistics ADSL 3 Link Layer Statistics ADSL Statistics Link status Connected Modulation G_DMT Down Rate 1184 kbps Up Rate 544 kbps Local SNR Ratio 22 dB Remote SNR Ratio 3 dB Refresh Figure 11 5 ADSL Link Statistics When at least one logical interface is configured ADSL Link statistics will be available These statistics are available from links on the DDS WAN Interfaces menu The Local SN
139. Inc Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U S and other countries The registered trademark Linux is used pursuant to a sublicense from LMI the exclusive licensee of Linus Torvalds owner of the mark on a world wide basis Gauntlet is the registered trademark of Industrial Defender Corporation RuggedRouter Table of Contents About RTE 19 Applicable Firmware Revision seiisscsisscsasesearteavsdesd ics texsedencedewieestwnnyeudid exes sennseaceeeonneenasuedaanidd 19 Who Should Use This User Aler EE 19 How To Use This User Guide s caccpascnccancoaceacaonnren eccnenanadtacsanaeainenandeneimntdr camp naneereamants 19 Document E On e 20 Quick Start Recommendations acccscacciesievecassendsceedasseantnucanelocacdeseneteareaeed neta geese euteaneeeaxermaadgedss 20 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router scc ccccesessdcncsscndissstcatavestonidaaves adhandtioeiessiedecenecaneds 23 1 1 INrOdUGION cea taecoridamantiecetcircecainnad aces A E A E 23 1 1 1 Access MethodS EE 23 1 1 2 Accounts And Password Management 111 23 1 1 3 Default Configuration EE 23 1 2 Accessing The RuggedRouter Command Prompt sss sssssssssssssrnressnerssrrreserrnnnerrnnnnsrerrseee 24 1 2 1 From the Console E 24 1 2 2 From SSH E 24 1 3 The RuggedRouter Setup EE 24 1 3 1 Configuring E E 25 1 3 2 Configuring IP Address Information ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseaaeeeeeeneeeeeteneneees 25 1 3 3 Setting The Hostn
140. Interface When a PPP connection is established a network interface is created in the system The interface name for both internal and external modem connections is pppO Refer to this interface name when configuring firewall rules 12 1 1 2 Authentication Addresses and DNS Servers PPP authentication will automatically use either of the PAP or CHAP protocols In order to create a PPP client connection in Webmin you will need to obtain a user ID and password along with a telephone number from the operator of the PPP server that you will be dialing The operator might be an Internet Service Provider or a system administrator within your organization The authentication process will provide a local IP address for use on the PPP interface and optionally the addresses of the DNS servers and a default gateway address to use You should generally use these addresses unless you need to provide your own The PPP interface s IP address obtained from the PPP server can be either a dynamic or a static IP address Firewall configuration should be performed as is appropriate In the case of a PPP server configuration you must configure the parameters described above for incoming PPP client connections 12 1 1 3 When the Modem Connects A PPP Client Connection may be configured to connect at boot time 12 1 1 4 PPP Dial on Demand The PPP client can be configured to dial only when there is traffic to be transmitted In order to do that the PPP in
141. Interfaces Fundamentals cccecseceeeeseeeeeeeeeees 60 6 1 4 IPv6 on Ethernet Fundamentals cccccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeneseneees 60 6 1 5 Bridge e un E 60 6 2 Ethernet le tele EE 61 6 2 12 Ethernet Jee r get Re geed Ea eea E E a aE aaa 62 6 2 2 Editing Currently Active Interfaces sssssseeesseeesssrrrrerrrnrtrnnntsstrrnseennnrrnnenenene 62 6 2 3 Edit Boot Time Interfaces wi x esccheset cet eet Seegen E chacteeneed saceecaduateaestaetntenee 63 G22 47 BOGS 2 le EI Le EE 64 6 2 5 PPPoE On Native Ethernet Interfaces oo ecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeenaeeeenees 64 6 2 6 Edit Gi entre EE 65 B27 PPP OS seg taccehe elect es aha oie eda aetna A S 66 6 2 8 Current Routes amp Interface Table ergeet tee hrEeEeceieteEd EE KECEE 66 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And TIET AEN 67 Fides tree Lee EEN 67 Le DN TVET Fundamental sic cccccivcccctccsciacccis cgseeetasevadesiadecitucsssuecevsetvaguosbvageiitacietanteteas 67 Eon WET SC ae UTC EE 68 7 2 1 T1 E1 Network Interfaces esac eegene geleed 69 7 2 2 Editing A T1 E1 Interface es eege 71 7 2 3 Editing A Logical Interface Frame Relay ENNEN 72 7 2 4 Editing A Logical Interface PPP Eege 73 PZ EE 74 VEA OR D ele e EEN 76 7 2 7 Current Routes amp Interface Table euer NEEN dE 78 7 2 8 AI POPACING EE 78 7 2 9 Upgrading Firmware E 78 Revision 1 14 1 4 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 8 Configuring Frame Rel
142. LAN 2 port 2 on a RuggedCom switch Click Create Click Save Repeat steps 8 through 20 for vian3 through vian4 changing the subnet default routers pool address range and circuit id for each vlan Restart the DHCP server or apply changes 27 2 DHCP Configuration 27 2 1 DHCP Server Main Menu DHCP Server ISC DHCPd version 3 0 4 Subnets and Shared Networks f Display nets and subnets by Assignment File structure Name IP address Add a new subnet Add a new shared network f Network Netmask Description Parent CEET 255 255 255 0 Local Network Add a new subnet Add a new shared network Hosts and Host Groups No hosts or groups have been defined i Add a new host Add anew host group Edit Client Options Edit DHCP client options that apply to all subnets shared networks hosts and groups f Edit Network Interface Set the network interfaces that the DHCP server listens on when started i List Active Leases List leases currently issued by this DHCP server for dynamically assigned IP addresses t Apply Changes Click this button to apply the current configuration to the running DHCP server by stopping and restarting it Figure 27 1 DHCP Server Menu Revision 1 14 1 244 RX1000 RX1100 27 Configuring The DHCP server The DHCP Server main menu shows the subnets configured for DHCP as well as any groups and hosts New subnets groups and hosts can be added
143. Login to the test router and visit the Maintenance menu Upgrade Software Change Repository Server sub menu Change the Repository server field to http server xyz net ruggedroutertest and the Release Version field to rr1 You can proceed to upgrade the router manually or wait for the next nightly upgrade to take place After you are satisfied that the upgrade was successful you can proceed to unzip the rr1 2 zip file into your ruggedrouter directory or copy the rr1 dists rr1 2 and rr1 dists current directories into or the ruggedrouter directory Ensure that the remainder of the routers to be upgraded have a Repository server field to http server xyz net ruggedrouter and the Release Version field to rr1 They can now be upgraded A 4 1 An Alternate Approach You can eliminate the need for separate release and test directories by making your routers upgrade to a specific major and minor releases In this approach you will always extract releases to the same directory e g ruggedrouter All routers will be configured with a Repository server field set to http server xyz net ruggedrouter and the Release Version field initially set to rr1 1 When you need to upgrade to rr1 2 you will visit the routers and update the Release Version field This method is simpler but has the disadvantage that you need to visit each of the routers This can become unwieldy when there are many routers to m
144. Menu Select Software Re Flash Utility and press enter 5 The router will prompt for the following information e which Ethernet interface to use 1 2 3 4 e whether to use DHCP or e the static IP address netmask gateway e a URL specifying the location of the image file using a numeric IP address not a DNS name e g http 192 168 1 1 imagerr1 14 1 tar e a URL specifying the location of a configuration archive file if applicable 6 The router will then prompt you to begin the re flashing process Do you want to S tart re flashing change setting 1 2 3 4 or E xit Figure B 2 Re flashing prompt At this point you may revise the settings entered previously start rewriting the flash memory or abort the process 7 On selecting S to start re flashing the router will repartition the Flash memory and install the specified image file followed by the configuration archive if specified Once complete the same prompt above will be displayed Type E to exit and reboot the router 8 Once the router has rebooted into the newly re flashed ROX software image it may be configured in the usual manner via Webmin or by logging in to a local i e serial or remote i e SSH console as the rrsetup user Note The router must not lose power or be interrupted during the re flashing process The process involves a complete rewrite of the operating software image Interruption will require that the router be retur
145. Modem Modem PPP Client Modem PPP Incoming Call PPP Logs PPP Connection Current Route amp Configuration Server Logs Logs Interface Table Modem Connection Status Status No connection Refresh Figure 12 1 Modem Configuration Main Menu This menu allows you to display and configure the modem interface PPP client and server connections Revision 1 14 1 101 RX1000 RX1100 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem 12 2 1 Modem Configuration Modem Configuration Parameter Value Description Dial in Console enable E Enable dial in console access PPP Server enable E Enable incoming PPP connections Radius Authentication enable a Radius Authenticate for incoming PPP connections Rings before answer D Number of rings to wait before answering 1 10 Additional Modem AT Init Codes Any extra AT codes to use when initializing the modem Country code United States gt Set modem country code Speaker Volume 0 gt Set modem speaker volume Speaker Mode Off gt Set modem speaker mode Save Note Changing the country code will cause the modem to reset Active connections will be lost Figure 12 2 Edit Internal Modem Configuration Help Modem Configuration Parameter Value Description Dial in Console enable Enable dial in console access PPP Server enable z Enable incoming PPP connections Radius Authentication enable Radius Authenticate for
146. None When you first create a connection this field is filled in for you with the local system s RSA key If you are filling in this field for the remote system the key can be obtained from the Show Public Key page on that system Select Certificate File and provide a certificate if using X 509 certificates The Next hop to other system fields determine the address to forward traffic to in order to reach the other system Unless you have an unusual network setup this field should be set to Default route Note If you set Next hop to other system to default you must configure a default route You can check for the existence of a default route with the Network Configuration menu Current Routing amp Interface Table icon A default route will be indicated by a default in the Destination column 16 2 8 3 Export Configuration Selecting the Export Configuration button provides a means to capture the connection specification in such a way as to be importable at the remote router 16 2 9 Showing IPsec Status IPsec Status 1 interface lo lo 127 0 0 1 2 interface ethl ethl 10 0 0 253 3 interface eth2 eth2 204 50 190 89 4 interface wlppp wlppp 206 186 238 138 5 myid none 6 debug none 7 algorithm ESP encrypt id 2 name ESP_DES ivlen 8 keysizemin 64 keysizemax 64 8 algorithm ESP encrypt id 3 name ESP
147. Note If the negotiated MTU is different from the requested MTU a warning will be displayed on the Networking ADSL menu 11 2 3 Editing A Logical Interface Bridged Help Edit Logical Interface Interface w ladsl Parameters Convert this interface to PPPoE Description JADSL Bridged Mode vPI 0 Attempt ATM Autoconfiguration IT vcr 35 Use DHCP v Local IP Address 169 254 0 1 Netmask 255 255 0 0 Remote IP Address 169 254 0 2 Use as Default Route 7 Me Gateway Save delete Figure 11 4 Edit Logical Interface Bridged The Description field attaches a description to the logical interface viewable from the network interfaces menu The VPI field determines the VPI number the connection uses The default of 0 is correct for most providers The Attempt ATM Autoconfiguration option causes the router to attempt to automatically determine the VPI and VCI used on the connection This does not work with all providers and may case the connection to fail even if the link light is on If this option is used it should only be used to find out what the correct values are if your provider isn t willing to help you and when the correct values are found it should be disabled with the correct values entered in the VPI and VCI fields instead The VCI field determines the VCI number the connection uses The default of 35 is correct for most providers The Use DHCP field forces the router to fetch its IP address from the peer via D
148. O7aNAewRqYMDA3s Gd j VDQok XnFcnuzj b n UeMSHzvRf Figure 16 6 Show Public Key This menu displays the RuggedRouter s public RSA key 16 2 6 Pre shared Keys Module Index Preshared Keys Remote Address Local Address Pre shared key 201 172 152 6 176 42 67 9 IamApreSharedkey 61 181 222 40 176 42 67 9 AnudderSecretKey Add a new secret key Figure 16 7 Pre shared Keys This menu creates deletes and edits pre shared keys used by VPN connections using secret key encryption Select the links under the Remote Address column to edit or delete a secret key The menu will not allow more than one entry to have a specific pair of IP addresses The menu will not allow a password shorter than eight characters in length 16 2 7 List Certificates Ee List Certificates Certificate Name in Certificate Key file in Secret for certificate in etc ipsec d certs etc ipsec d private etc ipsec secrets laptop ruggedcom com pem exists not configured rcengO2Cert pem not present not configured root pem exists configured Figure 16 8 List Certificates Revision 1 14 1 151 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN This menu lists available certificate files their corresponding key files and details whether a public key for the certificate is configured 16 2 8 VPN Connections The IPsec main menu Add a new IPsec VPN connection link leads to the Create Connection men
149. PPPoE Bridged Mode On ADSL eecccceeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeenaaeeeeenaas 94 Wes le ee Tele EE 94 11 1 1 ADSL Fundamentals psiki inpia inenika aiaa e ek Ea A aa ETE R EESE 94 11 1 2 PPPoE Bridged Mode Fundamentals ccccsceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 94 112 ADSL Configuratio ET 96 11 2 1 ADSL Network EES case accnds az geescht ege geegent sed 96 11 2 2 Editing A Logical Interface 3bReE kerERgkEkeEU NEE REENEN 97 11 2 3 Editing A Logical Interface Bridged iiss Soden cvkedoseauetantenvnisebameiadides 98 112 4 ADSL Statistics nrn eer niae a ena ea ee E EEE EEA ESEESE 99 11 2 5 Current Routes amp Interface Table AAA 99 11 2 6 Upgrading SoftWare sieri iaia ae cadena a EAE aiea aaa EROE AEREA Ra 99 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem AAA 100 12 1 Introduction EE 100 12 1 1 PPP and Modem Fundamentals 2 cecccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeenees 100 12 2 PPP Modem Configuration onseooseeeeeennnesoerrnneernnrrneneesrrrrnretrnnnrtenrnserrrnorernnneeneneeeene 101 12 21 MOOS C nfig r tioM RE 102 12 2 2 Modem PPP Client Connections AAA 104 12 2 3 Modem PPP Client EH 105 12 2 4 Modem PPP Server cscs cpeccetnecetccctecrericereunnienpetstacee RE eege 106 12 2 5 Modem Incoming Call EE 108 12 20 Modem PPP LOGS eriin en a a a E aa A E a E 108 Revision 1 14 1 5 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 12 2 7 Modem PPP Connection Lo
150. R Ratio is an effective indicator of line quality SNR values above 40 db correspond to excellent line quality while values below 10 db result in marginal operation or failure 11 2 5 Current Routes amp Interface Table The table provided by this command is as described in the Networking menu Network Utilities sub menu It is also provided here as a convenience 11 2 6 Upgrading Software For some customers access to remote sites in accomplished solely by an ADSL connection Usually a software upgrade will stop the system being upgraded perform the upgrade and then restart it If ADSL was upgraded in this way the upgrade would fail as the ADSL link was taken down Instead ADSL software upgrades modify only the software on the disk You must schedule a reboot in order to run the new version of ADSL software Revision 1 14 1 99 RX1000 RX1100 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem 12 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuring PPP Client e Configuring PPP Server e Configuring Dial in console e Viewing status 12 1 1 PPP and Modem Fundamentals RuggedRouter may be equipped with an internal modem or with a serial card which will allow connection to an external modem A modem allows connections to be made over standard telephone lines PPP the Point to Point Protocol is used to establish a network connection over a modem link 12 1 1 1 PPP
151. RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall 14 4 ShoreWall Terminology And Concepts This section provides background on various Shorewall terms and concepts References are made to the section where configuration applies 14 4 1 Zones A network zone is a collection of interfaces for which forwarding decisions are made for example Name Description net The Internet loc Your Local Network dmz Demilitarized Zone fw The firewall itself vpn1 IPSec connections on w1ppp vpn2 IPSec connections on w2ppp You may create new zones if you wish For example if all of your Ethernet interfaces are part of the local network zone disallowing traffic from the Internet zone to the local zone will disallow it to all Ethernet interfaces If you wanted some interfaces but not others to access the Internet you could create another zone Zones are defined in the file etc shorewall zones and are modified from the Network Zones menu 14 4 2 Interfaces Shorewall Interfaces are simply the Ethernet and WAN interfaces available to the router You must place each interface into a network zone H an interface supports more than one subnet place the interface in zone Am and use the zone hosts setup See below to define a zone for each subnet on the interface An example follows Interface Zone eth1 loc eth2 loc eth3 Any eth4 dmz wippp net Note In order to improve security the router will create a zone unusd and unused interfac
152. Revision 1 14 1 279 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router The Sample Interval configures how often should the system run configured shell command to get a sample The Command configures the shell command to run The Comparator configures how to compare with the shell command result The Threshold configures the threshold to compare with the shell command result to see whether the condition is true or false The And Repeats configures how many times the condition must be true before the alert is generated The And Until configures how many seconds the condition should be true before an alert is generated The Not Cleared Repeats configures how many times the condition must be false before the alert is cleared The Not cleared Until configures how many seconds the condition must be false before an alert is cleared The Parameters for RMON table allows user to configure additional parameters if the alert definition entry type is RMON type The Device Name configures the name of the device to be monitored The MIB Variable configures the MIB variable being monitored The Sample Interval configures how often samples should be generated The Rising Threshold configures the value that will trigger an event when the value of the variable increments past this value The Falling Threshold configures the value that will trigger an event when the value of the variable decreases past this value The Startup configures the condition t
153. SID revision The generator field reflects the organization that generated the rule official snort rules having values less than 1 000 000 The SID is a unique number to reflect an individual rule while the revision reflects improvements to the rule The main Snort IDS menu provides the capability to disable individual and groups of rules It is also possible to add unique rules to the database and to replace the existing set of rules with more experimental rules from the community Revision 1 14 1 270 RX1000 RX1100 33 Configuring the Intrusion Detection System 33 1 1 3 Alerting Methods Alerts generated by snort are stored by one of two methods as syslog messages or in a specified alert file When the local syslog method is chosen the destination log file may be selected When the alert file method is chosen a daily analysis of the file can be emailed The SIDs referenced in alerts can be used to quickly locate the rule via the main Sort IDS menu The rule itself often contains HTML links to Internet resources such as www securityfocus com http www securityfocus com and cve mitre org These provide more in depth descriptions of the vulnerability 33 1 1 4 Performance And Resources The performance impact of snort varies with the number of interfaces monitored the number of rules enabled the packet rate and the logging method Snort has been empirically determined to use about 20 of the CPU clock cyc
154. SPF Core BGP OSPF RIP Os is Enable Protocols Core BGP OSPF RIP Restart quagga deamon Click this button to restart the quagga daemon This will apply configuration parameters Figure 17 2 Dynamic Routing Main Menu In order to begin dynamic route processing on RuggedRouter one of the protocols RIP OSPF or BGP must be enabled in the Enable Protocols menu under Dynamic Routing The Core menu configures link related items such as link detect and link cost The RIP OSPF and BGP menus configure the corresponding routing protocols 17 2 1 Enable Protocols Help Enable Protocols Enabled Protocol Bcr Border Gateway Protocol er Open Shortest Path First v2 IPv4 Fr Routing Information Protocol IPv4 Apply Settings Click this button to restart the quagga daemon and apply all configuration changes Figure 17 3 Dynamic Protocol Enable Menu Revision 1 14 1 165 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing This menu enables RIP and OSPF for dynamic routing 17 2 2 Core Core f Core f Core Core Core Global Parameters Core Interfaces View Core Configuration Figure 17 4 Core Menu The Core routing daemon handles communications between the kernel of the router and the other dynamic routing protocols The core handles link detection static route monitoring and routes for directly connected interfaces on the router It also manages adding routes to the
155. Shared network f description Network name Default lease time C Default secs Boot filename None 7 Maximum lease time Default secs f Boot file server 7 This server Server name C Default Lease length for BOOTP 3 y Ce Lease end for BOOTP e e i Valiente Forever secs inte Never Dynamic DNS enabled Yes No Default aoe DNS domain C Default f EE DNS EMEESE D Default Dynamic DNS hostname From client C domain Allow unknown clients Allow Deny Ignore Default Server is authoritative m P DOE Nar oF EE e G t for this shared network Yes Default No clients for this shared res Default No i i network i Hosts directly in this shared a Groups directly in this shared a Subnets in this shared 192 168 2 0 f network network network ate Figure 27 2 DHCP Shared Network Configuration The settings specific to the Create Edit Shared network menu are The Shared network description field is used to describe the shared network as desired Revision 1 14 1 245 RX1000 RX1100 27 Configuring The DHCP server The Network name field is a unique name to assign to the shared network It could be the name of the interface the shared network is on for example Within a shared network you can create subnets hosts and groups of hosts 27 2 3 DHCP Subnet Configuration Note that the menu interfaces for creating a DHCP Subnet Configuration a
156. Standard e Enter Vendor Code 15004 Specify whether the attribute conforms to the RADIUS RFC specification for vendor specific attributes No It does not conform Configure Attribute Cancel Figure E 5 IAS Window Vendor Specific Attribute Information 8 Inthe Configure VSA RFC compliant window in the Vendor assigned attribute number edit box enter 2 For Attribute format select string for Attribute value enter the privilege level of the group being created e g operator Configure YSA RFC compliant 2 x Vendor assigned attribute number B Attribute format string 7 Attribute value rool Cancel Figure E 6 IAS Window Configure VSA RFC compliant E 3 PPP CHAP and Windows IAS In order for Windows IAS to authenticate PPP connections that use the CHAP authentication protocol IAS must be made to store passwords using what it calls reversible encryption 1 Ensure that CHAP authentication is enabled in the Remote Access Policy 2 In the Active Directory settings for each PPP user select Store password using reversible encryption Revision 1 14 1 329 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix E RADIUS Server Configuration Jeff Sani Properties 21x Member Of Dial in Environment Sessions Remote control Terminal Services Profile COM General Address Account Profile Telephones Organization User logon name letz nafr local S User logon nam
157. TG TC Classes TC Rules i When Stopped Zones Interfaces hosts Policies Rules masg nat Interfaces teclasses terules Geesen zones interfaces policy rules tedevices Apply Configuration Click this button to activate the current Shorewall configuration with the shorewall restart command Refresh Configuration Click this button to activate just the Blacklist and Traffic Shaping tables with the shorewall ref resh command Clear Firewall eech to clear the Shorewall firewall with the shorewall clear command This will allow access from all hosts without Stop Firewall Click this button to shut down Shorewall with the shorewall stop command This will block access from all hosts except those in p the When Stopped table Show Status Click this button to view Shorewall s tables and rules from the shorewall status command Check Firewall Click this button to have Shorewall validate your firewall configuration with the shorewall check command Figure 14 2 Shorewall Firewall Menu The Apply Configuration button must be used after making configuration changes Itis recommended that the Check Firewall button be used first to verify that any changes made are valid The Refresh Configuration button can be used to activate changes to the blacklisted host and traffic shaping configurations The Clear Configuration button will remove the firewall rules completely and eliminate any protection they offer In some cases you
158. The Source field specifies the source IP address subnet or MAC addresses to match Please refer to the chapter Configuring The Firewall for the formats of MAC and IP addresses supported by Shorewall The Destination field specifies the destination IP address subnet or MAC addresses to match The Protocol field specifies the protocol UDP TCP ICMP etc to match The Source Ports field specifies the source TCP or UDP port number or ICMP type to match The Destination Ports field specifies the destination TCP or UDP port number or ICMP type to match The Test field defines a test on the existing packet or connection mark The packet or the connection mark may be checked for equality or non equality against a reference mark A mask may again be Revision 1 14 1 142 RX1000 RX1100 15 Traffic Control specified in the field to apply to both marks prior to comparison Mark and mask may be in the range 1 255 in decimal or hex The Length field specifies the packet length or length range to match The TOS field specifies the packet TOS value to match A TOS value may be selected from the list or may be specified in decimal or hex by selecting Other It may take on one of the following values e Minimize Delay 16 0x10 e Maximize Throughput 8 0x08 e Maximize Reliability 4 0x04 e Minimize Cost 2 0x02 e Normal Service 0 0x00 15 2 3 1 Hints on optimizing the TC Rule table Every rule is processed i
159. To edit an existing connection click the Edit link for that connection To create a new connection click Add new link To have the router automatically dial a connection at boot time and keep it always active select which connection should be used from the drop down list of available connection profiles in the Connect at boot list 12 2 3 Modem PPP Client Ka Modem PPP Client pppo Connection name Headoffice Disconnect on idle timeout Bo Seconds PPP Username myuser Password Jeegege Dial type DTMF Phonenumber 5551234 Defaultroute Use peer DNS Maximum Dial Attempts km means try forever Dial Interval 1 86400 seconds Bo Dial on demand El Local IP Address 172 165 1 2 Remote IP Address fi721611 Note The Maximum Dial Attemps is the number of consecutive connection attempts the modem dial the phone number before it stops If the Maximum Dial Attemps is 0 it will try forever Otherwise the reconnect button will appear in the Modem Main Menu after specified number of consecutive failed connection attempts The Local IP Address and Remote IP Address are only required for Dial on Demand These IP address will be overwritten if the server side gives any of these IP addresses Save Saving will reset ppp link to update settings delete Figure 12 5 Configure Modem PPP Client The Connection Name field determines the name that will be used to refer to this connection when choosing which connectio
160. X1000 RX1100 13 Configuring PPP And The Cellular Modem 13 2 4 Modem PPP Client ade Modem PPP Client pppo Connection name Headoffice Disconnect on idle timeout fo Seconds PPP Username myuser Password jecocoo ti OCO Dialtype DTMF Phonenumber 5551234 Defaultroute EI Use peer DNS E Maximum Dial Attempts km means try forever Dial Interval 1 86400 seconds bo Dial on demand Local IP Address fl721612 Remote IP Address 17216 11 OOO O Note The Maximum Dial Attemps is the number of consecutive connection attempts the modem dial the phone number before it stops If the Maximum Dial Attemps is 0 it will try forever Otherwise the reconnect button will appear in the Modem Main Menu after specified number of consecutive failed connection attempts The Local IP Address and Remote IP Address are only required for Dial on Demand These IP address will be overwritten if the server side gives any of these IP addresses Save Saving will reset ppp link to update settings delete Figure 13 9 Configure Modem PPP Client The Connection Name field determines what name will be used to refer to this connection when choosing which connection to dial automatically at boot or which connection to use as a backup for another link The PPP Username field determines the user name to use when connecting to the PPP server as specified by your network provider If the username is not required you can ente
161. _3DES ivlen 8 keysizemin 192 keysizemax 192 9 algorithm ESP encrypt id 7 name ESP_BLOWFISH ivlen 8 keysizemin 40 keysizemax 448 10 algorithm ESP encrypt id 11 name ESP_NULL ivlen 0 keysizemin 0 keysizemax 0 11 algorithm ESP encrypt id 12 name ESP_AES ivlen 8 keysizemin 128 keysizemax 256 12 algorithm ESP encrypt id 252 name ESP_SERPENT ivlen 8 keysizemin 128 keysizemax 256 13 algorithm ESP encrypt id 253 name ESP_TWOFISH ivlen 8 keysizemin 128 keysizemax 256 14 algorithm ESP auth attr id 1 name AUTH_ALGORITHM_HMAC_MD5 keysizemin 128 keysizemax 128 15 algorithm ESP auth attr id 2 name AUTH_ALGORITHM_HMAC_SHA1 keysizemin 160 keysizemax 160 Revision 1 14 1 154 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN 16 algorithm ESP keysizemax 256 17 algorithm ESP 18 algorithm IKE 19 algorithm IKE 20 algorithm IKE 21 algorithm IKE 22 algorithm IKE 23 algorithm IKE 24 algorithm IKE 25 algorithm IKE 26 algorithm IKE 27 algorithm IKE 28 algorithm IKE 29 stats db_ops c attrs 0 6144 224 auth attr id 5 name AUTH_ALGORITHM_HMAC_SHA2_256 keysizemin 256 auth attr id 251 name null keysizemin 0 keysizemax 0 encrypt id 7 name OAKLEY_AES_CBC blocksize 16 keydeflen 128 encrypt id 5 name OAKLEY_3DES_CBC blocksize 8 keydeflen 192 hash id 2 name OAKLEY_SHA hashsize 20
162. a large difference between the Transmitted and Received fields indicate potential problems The Refresh button will cause the page to be reloaded The Continuous Display button will cause the browser to continuously reload the page showing the differences in statistics from the last display Note that the difference is not a real time rate in bytes or packets per second Revision 1 14 1 237 RX1000 RX1100 26 Configuring Layer 2 Tunnels 26 2 7 Activity Trace Menu Help Activity Trace Specifying large numbers of protocols entries and capture time can result in a greate deal of output Trace Layer 2 Tunnels Trace on protocols GOOSE M L2Gen All Protocols J Message Decode M Hex dump Iv packets V RTT Measurement Messages le Maximum number of entries to capture 2 Maximum time in seconds to capture over 10 12 40 06 723 GOOSE Received message from eth2 0002 length 56 DST MAC O1 0c cd 01 00 00 SRC MAC 00 19 5b fd 39 fe APP ID 94 0x5e 0l Oc cd O1 00 00 00 19 5b fd 39 fe 88 b8 00 5e BS BE 00 12 00 00 op 00 op 00 op op OO 00 00 00 aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa an 12 40 06 724 GOOSE Transmitted Packet to 172 16 0 1 1311 length 60 Start Trace Figure 26 10 Activity Trace Menu This menu displays captured and decoded network activity on configured layer 2 tunnels The desired traffic sources number of messages and length of time to
163. a teehee 227 25 3 Edit Synchronous Serial Port Parameters AAA 228 25 4 Edit Synchronous Serial Raw Socket Parameters c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 228 26 1 Layer 2 Tunnels Main Menu ssj tetecdereihotateteserniind d ge Eden 232 26 2 General Configuration Menu EE 233 20 36 GOOSE On E 233 26 4 GOOSE Men EE 234 26 5 Generic L2 Tunnels Menu ceicccsasitiactocatioetsintak eau aed xd ceed ede epee cede 234 20 6 Create an L2 TUNNE EE 234 26 7 Edit Generic L2 Tunnel eieiei agegebu desse 235 26 8 GOOSE EE EE Eeer 236 26 9 Generic L2 Statistics Menu esu Tee EEGENEN eens 237 26 10 Activily Trae Kemp gekiert Eege eee clined 238 27 1 DHCP Serwer MODU E 244 27 2 DHCP Shared Network Configuration EEN 245 27 3 DHCP Subnet Configuration ere ECEEAEENEEEENdEeENEEE nne 246 21 4 DACP Group COMMQUCATOM EE 247 275 DACP Host Config ralo kassien e na eaa EE SEES a E A SEARES etii 247 27 6 DHCP Pool Configuration WEE 248 28 1 DHCP Relay Contern 2egtue er Edge ee ER e dE deed ENEE deed 249 29 1 ME 252 29 2 NTP Generic e e EEN 253 PA FERON D N SORIOI eege ee ege Seege Eege eege EEN 253 29 An HE 254 29 5 NTP LOO EE 255 29 6 GPS Stalis derre eee g a E Ea aaae E Ee aS eas Ea eE aE 256 PA WARE Oe Eoo RE 256 30 1 SOM EWEN egene ged ENEE Seed EA EEEE RORE 258 30 2 SSH Server Authentication Menu sissccic tdatceets eebe Rete adie Eege 258 30 3 SSH Server Networking EE 259 30 4 SSH Server Access Control EE 259 31
164. ability as provided by the RuggedCom PTP card When used in conjunction with the cards Global Positioning System GPS receiver the router can provide nanosecond accuracy via IEEE1588 Additionally IEEE1588 may be used in GPS failure situations to synchronize to a remote source and provide accurate time for IRIG B 32 1 1 1 PTP Network Roles The IEEE 1588 standard describes regular clocks as devices having a single PTP port that can issue and receive PTP messages PTP boundary clocks are clocks have multiple PTP ports offering the ability to serve time to more than one subnet at a time The RuggedRouter can serve as a regular clock and communicate with boundary clocks The set of devices that can communicate using the PTP protocol IP multicast transmissions are said to be in the PTP subdomain This is usually a set of PTP devices connected by a switched network or direct links The best clock in the subdomain is known as the master clock The master clock of a boundary clock is known as the grandmaster clock The protocol negotiates among PTP ports to identify the device with the highest quality clock source Ports issuing messages from the master clock are said to be masters while those that will receive the messages are slaves When a port will not participate in the protocol its status is passive When the network architect knows the relative quality their clock s time sources they may configure a specific clock to be the preferred mas
165. action The Service field configures whether the server authenticates LOGIN WEBMIN PPP LOGIN or any combination of these types The Bind Interface field sets the source IP address for RADIUS requests for the WEBMIN service only The IP address of the selected network interface will be used as the source address for these exchanges If none is selected the source IP address will be that of the network interface from which messages are transmitted to the RADIUS server Note again that this setting applies to the WEBMIN service only Revision 1 14 1 300 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 8 Outgoing Mail Outgoing Mail SMTP Settings Forward to Mail Hub 1 72 16 52 63 Belongs to Domain ruggedcom com Hostname routerl3 Save Figure 34 34 Outgoing Mail Outgoing Mail is configured from within the Maintenance menu Miscellaneous sub menu This menu controls where emails originated by the router are forwarded to The Forward to Mail Hub field specifies an IP address or domain name of a host that accept mail from the router The Belongs to Domain field specifies the email domain the router is part of This information is written into the email header upon transmission The Hostname field specifies the hostname to be written into the email header upon transmission Helpful Hint You can generate emails from scheduled commands and scripts with echo To ops myco echo e Subject Hello n
166. add edit or remove traffic classification interfaces and to assign the maximum inbound and outbound bandwidths that the interface can handle Add a new traffic classification interface by selecting the Add a new traffic classification interface link or by clicking on the add above or add below images in the Add column Revision 1 14 1 138 RX1000 RX1100 15 Traffic Control Clicking on a link in the Interface column will allow you to edit or delete a traffic classification interface as shown below The Manually Edit File button also allows you to make direct changes to the TC interface configuration file Edit TC Interface TC interface details Interface ethl In bandwidth 2000 kbit ei Out bandwidth 5000 kbit Save Delete Figure 15 2 Edit TC Interface The Interface field specifies a network interface whose traffic will be controlled by the TC subsystem The In bandwidth field specifies the maximum inbound bandwidth that the interface can handle If the rate exceeds this value packets may be delayed or potentially dropped The Out bandwidth field specifies the maximum outbound bandwidth that the interface can handle Outbound traffic above this rate is delayed or potentially dropped Bandwidth is specified in either kilobytes per second kbps or kilobits per second kbit Note The minimum bandwidth that may be specified to the Traffic Control subsystem for any network device is 10 kilobits per second kbi
167. agram is created normally and then encapsulated into a new IP datagram The resultant packet is composed of an new IP header IPSec headers old IP header and IP payload Tunnel mode is most commonly used between gateways the gateway acting as a proxy for the hosts behind it Revision 1 14 1 144 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN 16 1 1 2 Policy Based VPNs RuggedRouter supports the creation of policy based VPNs which may be characterized as follows e IPsec network interfaces are not created e The routing table is not involved in directing packets to the IPsec later e Only data traffic matching the tunnel s local and remote subnets is forwarded to the tunnel Normal traffic is routed by one set of firewall rules and VPN traffic is routed based on separate rules e The firewall is configured with a VPN zone of type IPsec e As IPsec packets are received they are decoded policy flagged as IPsec encoded and presented as having arrived directly via the same network interface on which they were originally received e Firewall rules must be written to allow traffic to and from VPN tunnels These are based on the normal form of source destination IP addresses and IP protocol and port numbers These rules by virtue of the zones they match use the policy flagging inserted by netkey and route matching data traffic to the proper interface 16 1 1 3 Supported Encryption Protocols Openswan supports the following standard
168. al Protocols Server Main Menu Revision 1 14 1 218 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols Note that the Serial Protocols server is disabled by default and may be enabled via the Bootup And Shutdown menu under the System folder of the main Webmin menu The Assign Protocols menu assigns a serial protocol to one of your serial ports The Port Settings menu configures the serial port and its electrical protocol If any of your serial ports are configured as RawSocket protocol this menu will configure them The Serial Protocols Statistics menu will show you the status and statistics for any established sessions The Line Trace menu will provide a line activity trace for the serial ports 24 2 2 Assign Protocols Menu Assign Protocols Assigning a protocol to a port will make it available for configuration via a menu in the main page Port Type 1 rawsocket v 2 none x 3 none x 4 none x Save Changes Figure 24 3 Assign Protocols Menu This menu associates a protocol with a serial port Unused ports should be left associated with none Changing an association will immediately close the calls of the old protocol 24 2 3 Port Settings Menu Port Settings Note that all changes are made immediately Port Speed DataBits Parity StopBits Flow Control Type Current Protocol 2 esoo lt i fe lt i none dee dees fone 3 fesoo zile lt i none zi 1 lt
169. ame SysDescr Mgmt IP Caps PortID PortDescr Autoneg ChassisID SysName SysDescr Mgmt IP Caps PortID PortDescr Autoneg Interface ethl 00 0a dc 0e 17 40 MAC System Name RS900 HID TXTXTX 192 168 1 2 Bridge E 3 ifName Not received not supported not enabled MAU oper type unknown 0 Interface eth2 00 0a dc 0e 17 40 MAC System Name RS900 HID TXTXTX 192 168 1 2 Bridge E 6 ifName Not received not supported not enabled MAU oper type unknown 0 Refresh Note It may take up to 30 seconds before the neighbor information changes Figure 21 1 LLDP Summary Display Revision 1 14 1 199 RX1000 RX1100 22 Configuring Generic Routing Encapsulation 22 Configuring Generic Routing Encapsulation 22 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Enabling Disabling GRE e Viewing GRE Status 22 1 1 GRE Fundamentals RuggedRouter is able to encapsulate multicast traffic and IPv6 packets and transport them through an IPv4 network tunnel A GRE tunnel can transport traffic through any number of intermediate networks The key parameters for GRE in each router are the tunnel name local router address remote router address and remote subnet ies We w2ppp Router 2 Router 172 16 17 18 YY 172 19 20 21 eth 192 168 1 1 e 192 168 2 1 eth2 192 168 1 0 8 192 168 2 0 8 Figure 22 1 GRE Exampl
170. ame and Domain sessscsisiccesiscsteassecnierexcaenesenaaaeee eaisetteeemennnewere 26 1 3 4 Configuring RADIUS Authentication ezusgegge eg AEE SEENEN 26 1 3 5 Enabling And Disabling The SSH and Web Server ssssssssssssessnesserrnnerrrnnerrressene 26 1 3 6 Enabling And Disabling The Gauntlet Security Appliance 0ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 27 1 3 7 Configuring The Date Time And Timezone EEN 27 1 3 8 Displaying Hardware Information geiergert eeeeege ene 27 1 3 9 Restoring A Configuration sscc conncsseizescssatsvieatdnverdimetionmanienatcutensisdieandentimeiaeeiereeatas 28 1 4 The RuggedRouter Web Interface Au 29 1 4 1 Using a Web Browser to Access the Web Interface ssssnesssseeeeeenenesrernssrrreee 29 1 4 2 SSL Certificate Warnings EE 30 1 4 3 The Structure of the Web Interface AEN 30 1 5 Using The LED Status Panel sccuscececcasesecscessancccascactnnoreesaccetesasantecseeaecedspacdeisnons Ee 32 1 6 Obtaining Chassis Information inicrivesonccesdsccesdigecaieeed eeusceeesea teeta iiete eet nncremnnineadieecadas 33 SEET 34 2 1 WVU E 34 2 2 Webmin Configuration Menu ccccceececeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeecaeeeeeeeneeeeeteneeeeees 34 2 21 P Access e d EE 34 2 2 2 Change Help EE 36 2 29a LOJON RE 36 2 2 4 Authentication EE 37 2 2 5 Webmin EE 38 3 Configure Webmin Users enna ame em ne en ce ener eer erate Ren ee nee ee ee eee ee 39 K Eege DEE 39 3 2 Webmin User and Group Fundamentals cccc
171. anage Revision 1 14 1 318 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix A Setting Up A Repository A 4 2 Upgrading Considerations The RuggedRouter offers you the ability to perform automatic daily upgrades specify the download time and limit the download bandwidth These tools automate the upgrade process and minimize the impact of upgrading on the network When automatic daily upgrades are used you may wish to stagger the upgrade time of the routers If your network has a natural ebb flow period of traffic activity schedule the upgrades during this time As an example if you have 20 routers to upgrade and they must be upgraded over an eight hour period configure each router to start its upgrade 20 minutes after the previous router Be careful with limiting download bandwidth in the router Typical upgrades will involve less than 5 MBytes of traffic If bandwidth limiting is employed and set to 8 Kbps the upgrade will require upwards of 1 5 hours to complete Administrators should also be wary of routers which concentrate locally connected routers as the upgrade bandwidth consumed on the network link could reach the sum of all bandwidth limiting settings Routers using Frame Relay with CIR under subscription may also encounter lengthier downloads because of retransmission Revision 1 14 1 319 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix B Re Flashing Router Software Appendix B Re Flashing Router Software B 1 Introduction RuggedRouter incor
172. and existing entries can be edited or deleted The Edit Client Options button allows you to set global client settings for the DHCP server Settings made here apply to all clients unless overridden at a lower level in the configuration The Edit Network Interface button allows you to select which interfaces DHCP should listen for DHCP requests on Note that you must also have a subnet matching the IP address of the selected interface configured in DHCP in order to actually have DHCP listen for requests on a port The List Active Leases button displays IP leases that are currently assigned to clients from the dynamic IP address pool Note that static MAC address to IP address assignments handled by DHCP are not displayed in this list From this list there is a button labelled List all active and expired leases which will additionally display leases that have been granted that are no longer active The Start Server button starts the server to check the configuration To permanently enable DHCP you should enable it in the bootup and shutdown menu The Apply Changes button applys new settings to the running DHCP server Use this after making any changes to the configuration 27 2 2 DHCP Shared Network Configuration Note that the menu interfaces for creating a DHCP Shared Network Configuration and for editing an existing one are the same only the title differs Create versus Edit imine BEES Ee Shared Network Details f
173. and may be enabled via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu The General Configuration menu changes parameters that apply to all protocols The GOOSE Tunnels and GOOSE Statistics menu configures and display statistics for these tunnels The L2 Tunnels and L2 Statistics menu configures and display statistics for these tunnels The Activity Trace menu provides a capture and trace facility fdor When enabled any configuration changes may be made to take effect by selecting the Restart Layer 2 Tunnels daemon button Revision 1 14 1 232 RX1000 RX1100 26 Configuring Layer 2 Tunnels 26 2 2 General Configuration Menu Help General Configuration Layer 2 Daemon Parameters Daemon UDP Listen Port 1311 Beacon Interval en Seconds Save Changes Figure 26 2 General Configuration Menu This menu configures general settings for the daemon that apply to all supported tunnel configurations The Daemon UDP Listen Port field configures port used by the daemon to communicate with other daemons Note All Layer 2 Tunnel daemons in the network must use the same port number If the router employs a firewall ensure that a hole is opened for each of the remote daemons using this port number The Beacon Interval field configures how often a Round Trip Time RTT measurement message is sent to each remote peer The interval takes the values Off to disable RTT measurement or a time of 10 3600
174. anges until the systems that own them are restarted If the source archive has a file that is not present in the Current Configuration it is possible to view that file and then copy it into Current Configuration 34 6 SNMP Configuration The SNMP menus provide the following configuration features e System information e agent network addresses e Community access to the agent e SNMP trap delivery The SNMP the Simple Network Management Protocol protocol is used by network management systems and the devices they manage SNMP is used to manage items on the device to be managed as well as by the device itself to report alarm conditions and other events Revision 1 14 1 292 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router The first version of SNMP V1 provides the ability to send a notification of an event via traps Traps are unacknowledged UDP messages and may be lost in transit SNMP V2 adds the ability to notify via informs Informs simply add acknowledgment to the trap process resending the trap if it is not acknowledged in a timely fashion SNMP V1 and V2 transmit information in clear text which may or may not be an issue depending the facilities the data is transmitted over and are lacking in the ability to authenticate a user SNMP V3 adds strong authentication and encryption 34 6 1 SNMP Main Configuration Menu SNMP Configuration SNMP System Configuration Network Addressing Access Control Trap Con
175. arms The Extra Message After Login field is displayed after a successful login The SSH Banner Configuration has the same customizations as above except that no message can be displayed prior to the login prompt The Webmin Banner Configuration menu allows you to customize the web based login box seen on connecting to the RuggedRouter s secure web interface The Session Header field is the description displayed at the top of the login box The Session Message field is the message displayed above the username and password prompts The Username and Password fields are the strings displayed at the left side of the login box describes that the input boxes are for username and password respectively The Login Button field is the string displayed at the left button of the login box The Clear Button field is the string displayed at the right button of the login box The following image illustrates the position of each of these fields in the login box Session Header Session Message Username Password 8 Figure 34 39 Webmin Banner Configuration Fields The Message when Login Fails field specifies the message displayed when the login fails The Logout Message field specifies the message displayed upon logout The Message for Session Timeout field specifies the message displayed when the session is timeout Revision 1 14 1 305 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 12 System Logs Sy
176. asswords from the rrsetup shell before attaching the router to the network If RADIUS authentication is being employed configure authentication servers Restrict the IP addresses which Web management will accept connections from See the Webmin menu IP Access Control sub menu Restrict the Ethernet ports which Web management will accept connections from See the Webmin menu Ports and Addresses sub menu Review the IP networking settings provided in the Network Configuration menu Core Settings sub menu You may wish to tighten some settings especially Ignore All ICMP ECHO requests Restrict the users that the SSH server will allow to connect See the SSH Server menu Access Control sub menu If the router is an RX1100 and you wish to use the Snort Intrusion Detection System activate and configure it If the router is an RX1100 and you wish to use the Gauntlet security appliance activate and configure it If SNMP will be used limit the IP addresses which can connect and change the community names Configure SNMP to raise a trap upon authentication failures Only enable the services you need and expect to use The RuggedRouter comes with the following login banner Replace the contents of the file etc issue and etc issue net in order to change it WARNING You are attempting to access a private computer system Access to this system is restricted to authorized persons only This system may not be used for any purpose that is unl
177. at the incoming signal has been corrupted for a number of seconds This equipment will then begin sending a yellow alarm as its outbound signal AIS Alarm Indication Signal or BLUE alarm This alarm indicates the total absence of incoming signal as a series of continuous transitions an all 1 s pattern is received YEL Yellow Alarm This alarm is transmitted to the network and alerts it that a failure has been detected Revision 1 14 1 74 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 OOF Out of Frame This alarm signifies the occurrence of a particular density of framing error events This alarm could signify that the wrong framing mode is configured 7 2 5 2 Frame Relay Interface Statistics w4fr16 Statistics DLCI Receive Statistics DLCI Transmit Statistics Information frames received Information frames transmitted jo Information bytes received Received I frames discarded due to inactive DLCI I frames received with Discard Eligibility DE indicator set I frames received with the FECN bit set olol 0 01010 I frames received with the BECN bit set Frame Relay Trunk Statistics Full Status Enquiry messages sent 51997 Link Integrity Verification Status Enquiry messages sent 0 Full Status messages received D Link Integrity Verification Status messages received o CPE initializations Io Current Send Sequence Number 204 C
178. atus menu displays 18 2 6 Test Link Backup the status of managed link backup sets Help H a Test Link Backup Test duration 5 minutes Name Main Interface Backup Interface Enabled Action Current time 17 20 19 ethi gt eth2 eth1 eth2 yes Start Test Refresh Figure 18 7 Test Link Backup The test link backup menu tests a link backup by discarding all data received on the main interface This convinces the daemon that the main trunk is unusable and forces it to fail over to the backup trunk The Test Duration field controls the amount of time to run before restoring service to the main trunk Please note that this duration must take into account the timing parameters of the backup configuration The duration should comfortably exceed the Ping Interval plus the Ping Timeout multiplied by the Ping retry count plus the Main path down timeout In the case of a dial backup configuration also be sure to take into account the call setup and modem connection times Add to this a time that will allow time to navigate the Webmin menus to observe that Link Backup status link states and routing are all as expected before during and after the Link Backup test Revision 1 14 1 185 RX1000 RX1100 19 Configuring VRRP 19 Configuring VRRP 19 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuring VRRP e Enabling And Starting VRRP e Obtaining VRRP Status 19 1 1 VRRP Fundamentals Th
179. awful or deemed inappropriate Access and use of this system is electronically monitored and by entering this system you are giving your consent to be electronically monitored We reserve the right to seek all remedies for unauthorized use including prosecution If using a firewall configure and start the firewall before attaching the router to the public network Configure the firewall to accept connections from a specific domain Configure remote system logging to forward all logs to a central location Revision 1 14 1 316 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix A Setting Up A Repository Appendix A Setting Up A Repository The RuggedCom software upgrade mechanism requires a repository of software to available The following instructions detail e Requirements for a repository server e Initial set up of a repository e Upgrading the repository to the latest release e Maintain separate releases streams for different groups of routers e Setting up one router to test new releases e Configuring the network routers A 1 Repository Server Requirements In order to establish a repository you will need a host that is accessible to the routers that will be upgraded This host must be able to act as a web server or ftp server The host must also be able to access the RuggedCom web site in order to download new releases of software from RuggedCom The server requirements are fairly modest The principal requirements are for disk space bandw
180. ay PPP And T3 E3 ENNEN 79 Oe ee EE 79 8 1 1 T3 E3 PundamentalS EE 79 8 1 2 Location Of Interfaces And Labeling 18 vive Soascotnnxtevecmieene loadin b s EES 79 8 1 3 LED Designation S vases sseterscenasenvned oe E 79 8 2 EE ne NEE 80 8 2 1 T3 E3 Trunk IMO aCe seiniin ai a aae e eaaa a 80 8 2 2 Editing L gi al mteraces EE 82 Bee E Re 83 8 2 4 Current Routes amp Interface Table ENEE 84 8 2 5 Upgrading e E 84 9 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And DDS EE 85 GE We uge Lu EE EEUNA 85 9 1 1 DDS Fundamentals ego e a as a ASE el et aiden asec s weet ehe eb asaee teasers 85 9 2 DDS Configuration EE 85 9 27 DDS NGIWONK ln EE 86 9 2 2 Editing A Logical Interface Frame Relay ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeee 87 9 2 3 Editing A Logical Interface PPP ss 2cnpcceashtaasstevnsde lt cpaqcecptntccctaansett edd dee r d geg 88 9 2 4 DDS StatiStics ca a R E haute gd see dae epee etal 88 9 2 5 eege 89 9 2 6 Current Routes amp Interface Table ANEN 89 9 2 7 Upgrading Software e a ee ae a sh es ee eva ede Raat cena mee 90 10 Multilink PPP Over TUE sea e DEER Eed ENEE adenine eae 91 10 1 JEE EE eege ee ee emia anemones 91 10 1 1 Multilink PPP lee lun E EE 91 10 1 2 Notes on T1 E1 Channelization 0 cccccecceceeeeeeenneeeeeeeee eset eeneeeeeeteeeeeetenaeeeene 91 10 2 Configuring PPP Multilink over THE srisuctcipiiicid nmiequendee NENNEN Nee ge 91 de VIII PPP bereet gege 92 11 Configuring
181. ay be selected When the alert file method is chosen a daily analysis of the file can be emailed to the user provided in the User Name field Note the you must also visit the Maintenance menu Miscellaneous sub menu Outgoing Mail sub menu in order to configure a mail forwarder 33 2 5 Edit Config File Snort is extremely flexible and not all capabilities have been described in this user guide This menu provides the user with the ability to make raw configuration changes to the snort configuration file from within Webmin Revision 1 14 1 274 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 Maintaining The Router 34 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with Viewing Alerts Configuring and monitoring the Gauntlet Security Appliance Backing up and restoring configurations Configuring SNMP Configuring RADIUS Authentication Configuring Outgoing Mail Chassis Parameters Power over Ethernet Banner Configuration Using System Logs Upgrading Software Using Pre upgrade Post upgrade scripts Uploading and downloading files 34 2 Alert System The alert system provides the following features Generates alerts displaying them locally and or forward them via email messages Alerts are set and cleared by the daemons that own them Active alerts are locally displayed and can be cleared manually Multiple forwarders can be configured a configurable filter level controls alert forwarding to each forwarder
182. ay having a public interface of 213 18 101 62 When a connection request for http port 80 arrives at 213 18 101 62 the NAT gateway could forward the request to either of the hosts or could accept it itself Port forwarding configuration could be used to redirect the requests to port 80 to the first host Port forwarding can also remap port numbers The second host may also need to answer http requests As connections to port 80 are directed to the first host another port number such as 8080 can be dedicated to the second host As requests arrive at the gateway for port 8080 the gateway remaps the port number to 80 and forwards the request to the second host Finally port forwarding can take the source address into account Another way to solve the above problem could be to dedicate two hosts 200 0 0 1 and 200 0 0 2 and have the NAT gateway forward requests on port 80 from 200 0 0 1 to 192 168 1 10 and from 200 0 0 2 to 192 168 1 20 14 3 Shorewall Quick Setup For users familiar with Shorewall the following will serves as a reminder of how to build the firewall New users may wish to read the ShoreWall Terminology And Concepts section before continuing 1 Logically partition your network into zones Will you establish a DMZ Will all Ethernet interfaces need to forward traffic to the public network Which interfaces are to be treated in a similar fashion 2 Assign your interfaces to the zones If using T1 E1 have you created your T1 E1 i
183. be configured Create a VPN connection using the Edit Connection menu described below Set the At IPSec Startup field to Add Connection set Perfect Forwarding Secrecy to No and set L2TP to Yes Set Private subnet behind system to None for both left system and right system settings It is recommended to configure RADIUS in order to authenticate VPN clients Note that the RuggedRouter RADIUS configuration must be set to authenticate PPP services VPN L2TP Configuration in Windows Describes the steps required to configure the VPN client in Microsoft Windows 2000 XP Revision 1 14 1 150 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN Note AES encryption was designed to be more computationally efficient than 3DES AES256 or AES128 are therefore preferred for VPN connections as they require less of the CPU resource AES256 is not supported in Windows XP but is supported in Vista 16 2 5 Public Key Module Index Show Public Key The public RSA key shown below should be copied into the configuration of other systems connecting to this one in the section related to this host OsAQ070i AQbU4M29D6 Jt j rU 4gaj cuRk VXYCf6SPHrhMDXqfZLagTHDhNZKSpF98i VryEf ft shSL6ZOq FBDogAQUR5JC8sS44rx5qQPTZXICGAF9 Cb2d7hyK9EuMOUUrSf rit Za 4g vhivniYadx8CvpZAS4Zv z6eQLZNnAoVD9Jue ADNbuskl HSCh8bmAGWr XdRF6c rh ft QLu4ITOODRoHgBBHrWxcQd3h7alk Xvse3LH 8dd rCDTxebIs4a64t QH7 fif xH22ht Th3iNyElidsnawHAWddOvCBgEE2pj dYb fJ1Dd1ij UyQenuy zbBbj
184. bed in T1 E1 Link Statistics Revision 1 14 1 92 RX1000 RX1100 10 Multilink PPP over T1 E1 The statistics of the PPP links comprising the MLPPP bundle can also be displayed by clicking the Statistics link below the MLPPP interface name e g wicimlppp in the table for each T1 E1 interface Help a wicimlppp Statistics Operational Statistics Number of frames transmitted 0 Number of bytes transmitted 0 Number of frames received 0 Number of bytes received 0 Communication Error Statistics SS ee eS SO RX Stats Number of receiver overrun errors Poo Number of receiver CRC errors i Po Number of receiver Aborterrrs Poo Number of receiver corruption errors bh Number of receiver PClerrrs O Poo Number of receiver DMA descriptor errors D Number of transmitter Please Number of transmitter PCI latency warnings Poo Number of transmitter DMA descriptor errors Po O i sss SsSSS Number of transmitter DMA descriptor length errors 0 8 sss s s S Refresh Clear Statistics Figure 10 3 MLPPP Link Statistics Revision 1 14 1 93 RX1000 RX1100 11 Configuring PPPoE Bridged Mode On ADSL 11 Configuring PPPoE Bridged Mode On ADSL 11 1 Introduction 11 11 11 This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuring PPPoE and Bridged Mode Links e Viewing status 1 1 ADSL Fundamentals An ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line line is a communications link
185. bers of groups field specifies the group in the Unix sense of users allowed to connect by SSH The specification can be followed by a list of group name patterns separated by spaces If specified login is allowed only for users whose primary group or supplementary group list matches one of the patterns and can be used as wild cards in the patterns Only group names are valid a numerical group ID is not recognized By default login is allowed for all groups The account selector Ea button can be used to build up a list of allowable groups The Deny users and Deny members of groups fields specify users and groups to deny connections to Revision 1 14 1 260 RX1000 RX1100 31 Configuring The Telnet Server 31 Configuring The Telnet Server 31 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with configuration of the Telnet server 31 2 Telnet Fundamentals Telnet is an IP network protocol RFC854 that provides remote terminal access to a system on TCP port 23 Telnet is commonly used to refer to both the protocol and to the server and client programs that implement it An important consideration when using telnet is that both the authentication process and the entire session are transmitted in the clear i e unencrypted This makes it possible for an attacker to log the telnet session as it appears on the network and acquire from it the username and password of the account used to log in via telnet alo
186. butes to the FreeRADIUS dictionary so that they may be used in configuring accounts for RuggedRouter 1 Locate the FreeRADIUS dictionary files commonly in the usr share freeradius directory on Linux systems 2 In the dictionary directory open the file named dictionary and add the line S INCLUDE dictionary ruggedcom Note that there are typically many other vendor attribute dictionary files included in the main FreeRADIUS dictionary file 3 Create a file named dictionary ruggedcom in the dictionary directory containing the following ke text The RuggedCom Vendor Specific dictionary Version Id dictionary RuggedCom v 1 3 4 1 2005 11 30 22 17 24 aland Exp For a complete list of Private Enterprise Codes see http www isi edu in notes iana assignments enterprise numbers VENDOR RuggedCom 15004 BEGIN VENDOR RuggedCom ATTRIBUTE RuggedCom Privilege level 2 string END VENDOR RuggedCom 4 Create user accounts in the etc freeradius users file For example in order to create a user john with a password test with operator access to Webmin add the following lines to etc freeradius users john Auth Type Local User Password test NAS Identifier webmin RuggedCom Privilege level operator 5 Restart your freeradius server E 2 Webmin Privilege Levels and Windows IAS This section describes the steps necessary to configure Microsoft Windows IAS Internet Authentication Service
187. c routes to RIP area routers enable disable O 16 disabled unset metric enable Redistribute Kernel Redistribute kernel routes to RIP area routers enable disable O 16 disabled unset metric enable Redistribute OSPF Redistribute ospf routes to RIP area routers enable disable 0 16 disabled unset metric enable Redistribute BGP Redistribute bgp routes to RIP area routers enable disable O 16 disabled unset metric Passive Default enable Set new interfaces passive by default enabled Update Timer 30 Routing table update timer 5 2147483647 30 Timeout Timer 180 Routing information timeout timer 5 2147483647 180 Garbage Collection Timer 120 Garbage collection timer 5 2147483647 120 Send Version av RIP version to transmit to neighbors 1 2 2 Save Key Chains Key Chain Name Action Add Figure 17 18 RIP Global Parameters The Enable Password field sets the password to be used for the enable command of ripd This is used by the telnet interface of ripd to control access to the configuration The Telnet Password field sets the password to be used for telnet access to ripd This is used as the login password of ripd when locally telnetting to port 2602 of the router The Hostname field sets the hostname for the rip daemon This value is only used as a a reference for convenience The telnet interface prompt will contain this hostname The router s system wide hostname is used if this field is left blank The D
188. capture are entered and the Start Trace button is pressed The menu will display up to the provided number of messages waiting up to the specified number of seconds The Trace on protocols selections feature a all to short list of protocols with unused entries greyed out The default is All Protocols The Message Decode field causes received transmitted frame entries to include protocol specific information If the Hex Dump field is selected the first 64 bytes of packet content is displayed The Packets field causes received transmitted packet entries to be displayed The RTT Measurement field displays Beacon messages used for RTT measurement Note Specifying large numbers of ports entries and capture times can result in a great deal of output Specifying a large capture time may require the web page to wait that interval if activity is infrequent Revision 1 14 1 238 RX1000 RX1100 27 Configuring The DHCP server 27 Configuring The DHCP server 27 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e DHCP Server Configuration e Use of Option 82 27 1 1 DHCP Fundamentals Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a method for centrally and consistently managing IP addresses and settings for clients offering a variety of assignment methods IP addresses can be assigned based on the Ethernet MAC address of a client sequentially or by using port identification provided by a DHCP relay agent devic
189. ce are not running but the physical interface itself is still up and running The Virtual IP address field configures the VRIP IP addresses associated with this VRID Multiple virtual IP addresses maximum 200 can be configured in this field Each IP address is separated by a return key The Virtual IP Netmask field configures the Virtual IP address mask The Save button saves the virtual instance The Delete button deletes the virtual instance After you save or delete an instance you must restart the daemon to action your change 19 2 4 Editing A VRRP Group LN Hani Edit VRRP Group Virtual Group Parameters Group Name VGO Group Members Wie R Save Delete Figure 19 6 VRRP Group The Group Name field is only for information purpose The Group Members field determines the group members in this VRRP group At least two members are needed in order to establish a group 19 2 5 Viewing VRRP Instances Status Help SZE VRRP Instances Status Instance Current State Time Of Change To Current State VRRP Interface State Monitored Interface State VRID_20 Master Mon Mar 24 12 16 53 EDT 2008 eth2 is Up none VRID_21 Master Mon Mar 24 12 16 53 EDT 2008 eth3 is Up none Refresh Display Figure 19 7 VRRP Instances Status Revision 1 14 1 191 RX1000 RX1100 19 Configuring VRRP The VRRP Instances Status menu displays the current status of VRRP instances This menu does not update sta
190. ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseaeeeeeesneeeeeeeaees 39 3 3 RADIUS User Access Control Fundamentals c ccccsceeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaaeeeeneaas 39 3 4 Webmin Users leegen 40 3 5 Edit Webmin User Menu EE 41 3 6 Current Login Sessions Men ENEE 41 3 7 Password Restrictions Menu saiicscicccaasgecaicisjnesescaeninietnicrt ae aaa eee ee 42 Revision 1 14 1 3 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 4 Contig ring The SV WEE 44 dE gt IMPOGUCTION S eed e a a a a e E E 44 4 2 Bootup And SAUIGOWMN ikeen ae a aE e 45 4 3 Change Password Command eege d enee 46 4 4 Scheduled Commands EE 47 4 5 Scheduled Cron Jobs esas Lx sic Eeer EEN 47 4 6 System HostName sirenerne aiaee ap aa aaaea Ea E E EPERE e EA ENEE BEE 49 4T A Hi EE 49 5 Configurnng Networking EE 50 Hele IMMOGUCTION BEE 50 5 2 Pye W IEE TEE 50 5 3 Network Configuration sesinin a e e ee se Dees ee serra 50 5 3 1 Gore Settings EE 51 5 3 2 Dummy ee 52 E Static EE 52 53 42 Stalie Multicast ROUUNG EE 55 39 gt DNS GIGI EE 56 5 3 6 FOSIAAGOIESS EE 56 5 3 7 End To End Backup EE 56 5 3 8 Current Routing amp Interface Ta Oar entree cccuaer deadly genneenatntintnededah ome yadannee aware 58 6 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces edtegegeetgeegt etg Getreiweuteckaxgrenetewiausdeaneeaeuntnerostniantieveeeets 59 GEN Ber reel Lee REENEN 59 6 1 1 Ethernet Interface Fundamentals kA 59 6 1 2 VLAN Interface Fundamentals E 59 6 1 3 PPPoE On Native Ethernet
191. ch is never sent in the clear Some administrators set the passwords of existing RuggedRouter accounts e g rrsetup and root uniquely for each router and then employ a common password per account for all routers served by RADIUS The router specific passwords are restricted to a very few personnel A larger set of expert users is granted the rights to SSH login using the RADIUS root account passwords Yet another set of users is granted access via Webmin user accounts 34 7 1 2 RADIUS on ROX RuggedRouter supports RADIUS server redundancy Multiple RADIUS servers usually operating from a common database may be used to authenticate a new session If the first configured RADIUS server does not respond subsequent servers will be tried until a positive negative acknowledgment is received or an attempt has been made to contact all configured servers Each server is configured with an associated timeout which limits the time that RuggedRouter will wait for a response An authentication request could thus require up to the sum of the timeouts of all configured servers RADIUS authentication activity is logged to the authorization log file auth log Details of each authentication including the time of occurrence source and result are included 34 7 1 3 RADIUS ROX and Services RADIUS provides the means to restrict access on a per service basis Accounts may be configured on a RADIUS server to be allowed access only to the Webmin service
192. ck The router can be configured to use the following as reference clocks e GPS IEEE1588 NTP and the local clock e GPS NTP and the local clock e GPS and IEEE1588 e GPS If the router is configured to use multiple reference clocks it will start sending timestamps using the best ever locked reference clock local clock is always locked If better reference clock is locked later the router will step i e suddenly change the time and use the new reference clock If the current reference clock becomes unavailable the router will keep running with its own high precision timing hardware It will use this hardware until the last used reference clock is locked or a higher quality reference clock is available If the router is configured to use only GPS no timestamps will be issued until GPS locks If GPS fails the router will keep running with its own high precision timing hardware When GPS returns the time will be stepped back to the GPS reference clock 32 1 3 GPS Cable compensation GPS signals received by the antenna will be delayed in time depending upon the type and length of the cable to the router This delay will introduce inaccuracy in the calculated time and position The RuggedRouter provides a method to account for this delay The table below gives some examples of the delay that can be expected for a given dielectric type Please note that cable characteristics varies from one manufacturer to the other Dielectr
193. communications between vetted clients and critical assets on a demand basis There are three steps in activating the Gauntlet security appliance 34 4 2 1 Step 1 of 3 Shorewall Configuration Use the RX1000 Installation Guide and RuggedRouter User Guide to set up the RX1100 and gain access to rrsetup via the console port Use Restore a Previous Configuration to Reload Factory Defaults Change passwords port IP address information set the hostname and set the date time and time zone Do not yet use Gauntlet Setup Using Webmin HINT Webmin access from CCC server validates the network connection Visit the Shorewall Firewall menu Network Zones sub menu and add the net and loc IPv4 zones This document defines the zone for WAN interfaces as net and the zone for local interfaces as loc Zone ID Zone type fw Firewall System net IPv4 loc IPv4 Visit the Network Interfaces sub menu and assign interfaces to the zones For example eth1 net eth2 loc Visit the Default Policies sub menu and assign the following policies Source zone Destination zone Policy fw any ACCEPT loc net ACCEPT all any DROP Visit the Firewall Rules sub menu and assign the following rules Gauntlet Actions must have log to syslog level set to lt Don t log gt Action Source zone Destination zone Protocol Src Port Dst Port ACCEPT net fw UDP any 30000 ACCEPT net fw UDP any 30001 Gauntlet net loc any Gau
194. configure them with Frame Relay or PPP connections See the chapter Configuring Frame Relay PPP And DDS for more details If your router is equipped with ADSL interfaces the Networking menu ADSL sub menu will allow you to configure them See the chapter Configuring PPPoE On ADSL for more details If you wish to use PPPOE with an external ADSL modem the Networking menu Ethernet sub menu will configure it If your router is equipped with an embedded modem the Networking menu Modem sub menu will allow you to configure it with PPP or incoming console connections See the chapter Configuring PPP And Modem for more details If your router is equipped with Serial Interfaces the Servers menu Serial Protocols sub menu will allow you to configure them with an operating protocol See the chapter Configuring Serial Protocols for more details If your router is equipped with a Precision Time Protocol Card the Servers menu IRIGB sub menu will allow you to enable and configure its output ports See the chapter Configuring IRIGB for more details Revision 1 14 1 21 RX1000 RX1100 About this User Guide Additional Configuration 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 You may wish to configure a backup interface to use in the event of a failure of your default gateway interface This can be done in the Networking menu Network Configuration End To End Bac
195. ct a response Each device supporting the DNP protocol must have a unique address within the collection of devices sending and receiving DNP messages 24 1 6 1 Address Learning for DNP RuggedRouter implements both local and remote address learning for DNP A local Device Address Table is populated with DNP Addresses learned for local and remote DNP devices Each DNP address is associated with either a local serial port or a remote IP address Revision 1 14 1 217 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols When a message with an unknown DNP source address is received on a local serial port the DNP source address and serial port number are entered into the Device Address Table When a message with an unknown DNP source address is received from the IP network on the IP interface that is configured as the DNP learning interface the DNP source address and the IP address of the sender are entered into the Device Address Table When a message with an unknown DNP destination address is received on a local serial port the message is sent in a UDP broadcast out the network interface configured as the DNP learning interface When a message with an unknown DNP destination address is received from the IP network it is sent to all local serial ports configured as DNP ports UDP transport is used during the DNP address learning phase All learned addresses will be kept in the Device Address Table which is saved in non volatile memory
196. ction as described in the previous table Source Zone The zone the connection originated from Destination Zone The zone the connection is destined for Protocol The tcp or udp protocol type Destination Port The tcp udp port the connection is destined for Source Port The tcp udp port the connection originated from Original Destination IP The destination IP address in the connection request as it was received by the firewall Rate Limit A specification which allows the rate at which connections are made to be limited Revision 1 14 1 124 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall User Group A method of limiting outbound traffic from the firewall to a specific user group of users and a specific application Some examples will illustrate the power of the rules file Rule Action Source Zone Destination Zone Protocol Dest Port Source Original Destination IP Port 1 ACCEPT net 204 18 45 0 24 fw 2 DNAT net loc 192 168 1 3 tcp ssh http 3 DNAT net 204 18 45 0 24 loc 192 168 1 3 tcp http 130 252 100 69 4 ACCEPT fw net icmp 5 ACCEPT net 204 18 45 0 24 fw icmp 8 1 This rule accepts traffic to the firewall itself from the 204 18 45 0 24 subnet If the default policy is to drop all requests from net to the firewall this rule will only traffic from the authorized subnet 2 This rule forwards all ssh and http connection requests from the Internet to local system 192 168 1 3 3 This rule forwards http traff
197. ctory such as ruggedroutertest to be created These directory names will be used in examples in the remainder of this section Ensure that the web server publishes these directories Revision 1 14 1 317 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix A Setting Up A Repository A 3 Upgrading The Repository RuggedRouter releases are obtained from the RuggedCom web site as ZIP files Download the ZIP file to your regular and or test release directories and unzip them You may delete the original ZIP file if desired The ZIP file name will be in the form rrX Y zip The major release number X is changed when major new functionality often hardware related is offered The minor release number Y is increased when minor functionality is added or bug repairs are made The first RuggedRouter upgrade release is rr1 1 zip The zip file will extract to a directory that has the same name as the major release e g mi As subsequent release are made they will also be extracted into this directory A 4 Setting Up The Routers The name of the release directory and the major and minor release names from the zip file tells you how to set up the routers Suppose you have just unzipped rr1 2 zip into ruggedroutertest on a server available to the network at server xyz net The major release is rr1 and the minor release is 2 You have chosen this directory because you want to test the release on a specific machine before propagating it to the network
198. d filters must match a source port Matching is being applied to packets from the service at the well known source port to an unknown and variable destination port number Finally note that the final traffic filter essentially suppresses TOS inspection by directing all unmatched traffic onto the low queue Revision 1 14 1 195 RX1000 RX1100 20 Traffic Prioritization 20 2 Configuring Traffic Prioritization Note Traffic Prioritization is mutually exclusive of Traffic Control Do not enable both of these features at once 20 2 1 Traffic Prioritization Main Menu Traffic Prioritization Interfaces Interface Prioritized Queues Filters Statistics ethi Yes 4 1 ethi Statistics eth2 No wippp Yes 4 2 wippp Statistics Figure 20 1 Traffic Prioritization Main Menu This menu displays network interfaces for which prioritization may be activated Prioritization may be configured by following the Interface column link The statistics of prioritized interfaces may be viewed by following the links in the Statistics column 20 2 2 Interface Prioritization Menu wippp Prioritization Prioritiztion Queues Note that you must have at least a low normal and high priority queue The high queue must be of higher priority than the normal queue which must be of higher priority than the low queue If you delete a priority queue any filters which use that queue will be adjusted to
199. d Remote Roles RuggedRouter can either initiate or accept a TCP connection for serial encapsulation It can establish a connection from field remote equipment to the central site host equipment vice versa or bi directionally Configure RuggedRouter at the host end to connect to the remote when e The host end uses a port redirector that must make the connection e The host end is only occasionally activated and will make the connection when it becomes active e A host end firewall requires the connection to be made outbound Connect from the remote to the host if the host end accepts multiple connections from remote ends in order to implement broadcast polling Connect from each side to other if both sides support this functionality 24 1 3 2 Use Of Port Redirectors Port redirectors are PC packages that emulate the existence of communications ports The redirector software creates and makes available these virtual COM ports providing access to the network via a TCP connection When a software package uses one of the virtual COM ports a TCP connection is placed to a remote IP address and TCP port that has been programmed into the redirector Some redirectors also offer the ability to receive connections 24 1 3 3 Message Packetization The server buffers received characters into packets in order to improve network efficiency and demarcate messages The server uses three methods to decide when to packetiz
200. d give up control of a VRIP if that interface goes down In the following network host 1 uses a gateway of 1 1 1 253 and host 2 uses a gateway of 1 1 1 252 The 1 1 1 253 gateway is provided by VRID 10 In normal practice router 1 will provide this virtual IP as its priority for VRID 10 is higher than that of router 2 If router 1 becomes inoperative or if its w1ppp link fails it will relinquish control of VRIP 1 1 1 253 to router 2 In a similar fashion host 2 can use the VRID 11 gateway address of 1 1 1 252 which will normally be supplied by router 2 Central Site Network wlppp Remote Router 1 1 1 1 200 w2ppp Remote Router 2 1 1 1 201 VRID 10 VRIP 1 1 1 253 VRID 10 VRIP 1 1 1 253 VRID 10 Priority 100 VRID 10 Priority 50 VRID 10 Monitor wi ppp VRID 11 VRIP 1 1 1 252 VRID 11 VRIP 1 1 1 252 VRID 11 Priority 100 VRID 11 Priority 50 VRID 11 Monitor w2ppp Figure 19 1 VRRP Example In this example traffic from host1 will be sent through router 1 and traffic from host2 through router 2 A failure of either router or its wan link will be recovered by the other router Note that both routers can always be reached by the hosts at their real IP addresses Two or more VRRP instances can be assigned to be in the same VRRP Group in which case they can fail over together Revision 1 14 1 187 RX1000 RX1100 19 Configuring VRRP In the following network both host
201. d then the System s public key of each of the Left System s Settings and Right System s Settings sections must include an RSA Revision 1 14 1 152 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN signature string or an X 509 certificate must be in use If secret is selected then the Preshared key menu must contain a key indexed by the Public IPs of the Left and Right systems The Phase 1 Encryption Protocols fields select the encryption protocols used for Phase 1 aka ISAKMP SA If Default is selected the value in the Defaults for all connections record is used If allow only is selected only the selected protocols among aes256 aes192 aes128 and 3des will be included in the list of protocols to be negotiated At connection time the two peers will compare their capabilities and select the strongest allowed common protocol In decreasing order of cryptographic strength they are AES256 AES192 AES128 and 3DES The Phase 2 Encryption Protocols fields select the encryption protocols used for Phase 2 aka IPSec SA If Default is selected the value in the Defaults for all connections record is used If allow only is selected only the selected protocols among aes256 aes192 aes128 and Sdes will be included in the list of protocols to be negotiated At connection time the two peers will compare their capabilities and select the strongest common protocol Th
202. dary Clock hops is the number of IEEE1588 devices the original time source is relayed through and not Ethernet hops and is always 1 or higher The measured network jitter factor is O if jitter is higher than 1 microsecond and 1 if less than 1 microsecond PTP Identifier Stratum reported to NTP GPS 1 Number of Hops 1 if low jitter NTP user configurable value default 2 Number of Hops 1 if low jitter DFLT user configurable value default 10 Number of Hops 1 if low jitter The stratum number reported will be limited to a range of 1 to 16 to comply with NTP As an example a directly connected PTP clock having a GPS clock source and low jitter would report a stratum of 1 With defaults a 2 hop away PTP clock having a NTP clock source and high jitter would report a stratum of 4 32 1 2 IRIGB Fundamentals IRIGB outputs are provided by the Precision Time Protocol Card option The Inter Range Instrumentation Group IRIG IRIG B standard details the format of an output signal containing information for the current day hour minute and second in UTC format broadcast at the start of each second The RuggedRouter complies to IRIG Standard 200 04 generating formats IRIGB002 and IRIGBOO3 PWM and IRIGB122 and IRIGB123 AM 32 1 2 1 IRIGB Output Formats The router provides three ports by which the signal is distributed namely e An Amplitude Modulated AM sinusoidal output port PTP1 e Two TTL vo
203. dary backup pair The primary interface serves as the gateway If connectivity to the target is lost from the primary interface traffic is migrated to the secondary interface When connectivity is restored on the primary path traffic will be restored to it 3 Network A A d F P A wlppp T 192 168 16 2 eth1 eeng 192 168 17 3 Network B A O Lk e T Figure 5 8 End To End Backup Example The backup is end to end because connectivity is determined by the availability of an interface on the target system and not a local link In the above figure interface w1ppp acts as the primary interface and eth1 acts as the secondary interface The router tests the primary path by probing 192 168 16 2 on router 2 A failure of the either wippp network A or the remote link on router2 will render the primary path as failed If the primary path fails the routing table will be modified to direct packets out the secondary eth1 in the above figure Presumably the secondary is a higher cost and perhaps lower throughput path In the initial deployment of this feature the secondary path was implemented with Ethernet CDMA modem The modem featured a low latency connection time initiated by the reception of packets but had a low bandwidth capability and high monetary cost Note that the feature must be implemented at both routers If the feature is only implemented at router 1 the second router s gateway will still point
204. ding and Source NAT SNAT are forms of dynamic NAT Masquerading substitutes a single IP address for an entire internal network Use masquerading when your ISP assigns you an IP address dynamically at connection time SNAT substitutes a single address or range of addresses that you been assigned by your ISP Use SNAT when your ISP assigns you one or more static IP addresses that you wish to one or more internal hosts The masquerading SNAT entries are defined in the file etc shorewall masq and are modified from the Masquerading menu Each entry is of the form Interface Subnet Address Protocol Port s Interface is the outgoing WAN or Ethernet interface and is usually your Internet interface Subnet is the subnet that you wish to hide It can be an interface name such as eth1 or an subnetted IP address Address is an optional IP address that you wish to masquerade as Note The presence of the Address field determines whether masquerading or SNAT is being used Masquerading is used when only Interface and Subnet are present SNAT is used when Interface Subnet and Address are present Protocol optionally takes on the name of protocols e g tcp udp that you wish to masquerade Ports optionally takes on the ports to masquerade when protocol is set to tcp or udp These can be raw port numbers or names as found in file etc services Some examples should illustrate the use of masquerading
205. e 27 1 1 1 DHCP Network Organizations The information to assign addresses in DHCP is organized to deal with clients at the host group subnet pool and shared network level Hosts entries assign specific settings to a client based on its Ethernet MAC address Groups allow identical settings to be created for a group of hosts making it simpler to manage changes to the settings for all the hosts contained within the group Groups contain hosts Pools contain ranges of IP addresses to hand out to clients with access rules to determine which clients should receive addresses from that pool Subnets control settings for each subnet that DHCP serves A subnet can include a range of IP address to hand out to clients Only one subnet can contain dynamic IP address ranges without any access restrictions on any given physical port since DHCP doesn t know which subnet a client should belong to when the request is received Subnets contain groups pools and hosts Shared networks are used when multiple subnets should be served by a single physical port This applies both when using a DHCP relay agent connected to the port with additional subnets behind the relay agent or when multiple virtual networks exist on one physical interface Each subnet then gets its own subnet definition inside the shared network rather than at the top level Shared networks contain subnets groups and hosts 27 1 1 2 DHCP Client Options The following options apply to s
206. e When the ACCEPT policy is used a connection is allowed When the DROP policy is used a request is simply ignored No notification is made to the requesting client When the REJECT policy is used a request is rejected with an TCP RST or an ICMP destination unreachable packet being returned to the client An example should illustrate the use of policies Source Zone Destination Zone Policy loc net ACCEPT net all DROP all all REJECT The above policies will e Allow connection requests only from your local network to the Internet If you wanted to allow requests from a console on the RuggedRouter to Internet you would need to add a policy of ACCEPT fw zone to net zone e Drop ignore all connection requests from the Internet to your firewall or local network and e Reject all other connection requests Note that a client on the Internet that is probing the RuggedRouter s TCP UDP ports will receive no responses and will not be able to detect the presence of the router A host in the local network on the other hand will fail to connect to the router but will receive a notification Revision 1 14 1 122 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall Note that order of policies is important If the last rule of this example were entered first then no connections at all would be allowed Policies are defined in the file etc shorewall policy and are modified from the Default Policy menu 14 4 5 Masquerading And SNAT Masquera
207. e In the above example Router 1 will use a GRE tunnel with a local router address of 172 16 17 18 a remote router address of 172 19 20 21 and a remote subnet of 192 168 2 0 24 Note If you are connecting to a CISCO router in place of Router 1 in the example above the local router address corresponds to the CISCO IOS source address and the remote router address corresponds to the destination address You may also set a cost for the tunnel If another method of routing between Router1 and Router2 becomes available the tunneled packets will flow through the lowest cost route You can optionally restrict the packets by specifying the local egress device in the case of router1 w1ppp Revision 1 14 1 200 RX1000 RX1100 22 Configuring Generic Routing Encapsulation 22 2 GRE Configuration 22 2 1 GRE Main Menu SE Generic Routing Encapsulation Tunnels Tunnels Se ee a a ey Figure 22 2 GRE Main Menu This menu displays configured GRE tunnels The tunnel status will read active if the tunnel was created successfully 22 2 2 GRE Configuration Menu Gees New Tunnel Configuration new tunnel This menu will prefix gre to the tunnel name upon saving legal tunnel names are 12 characters or less in length and contain only a z or 0 9 Tunnel Name 1 Tunnel IP address 10 0 10 1 Remote Net 192 168 2 0 24 Multicast Local IP 172 16 17 18 Remote IP 172 19 20 21 Cost Local Egr
208. e link or by clicking on the add above or add below images in the Add field The Zone Type field controls the type of traffic carried in the zone The Firewall system zone type is built in to the fw zone A zone type of IPSEC is used with policy based VPNs A zone type of IPV4 is used with normal traffic and route based VPNs Reorder the zones by clicking on the arrows under the Move field Note If you define a VPN zone whose traffic is received via a network zone it is essential that the VPN zone be declared before the network zone Clicking on a link under the Zone ID field will allow you to edit or delete the zone Note that if you delete a zone you should remove any rules that reference it Note There must be exactly one zone of type firewall Do not delete this zone You may also make changes by manually editing the zone file Revision 1 14 1 128 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall 14 6 2 Network Interfaces Module Index Network Interfaces Each of the network interfaces on your system that you want Shorewall to manage should be listed on this page and associated with the zone that it is connected to The loopback interface Lo must never be listed Add a new network interface Interface Zone name Broadcast address Options Move Add wippp net Automatic None A T ethi loc Automatic None e Ae eth2 dmz Automatic None T A Add a new network interface Man
209. e Starting the restore results in the following display Restoring Are you sure you want to restore configuration with archive Archive20080523 1547 Note The chassis will restart immediately after the restore is complete Start Restore Figure 34 19 Start Restore To begin the restoring process click the Start Restore button Revision 1 14 1 290 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 5 6 Archive Difference Tool Help Archive Differences Select Configuration Archives to Show Differences Archive Name Version Archive Comment T archive20080523 1547 rr1 13 0 Setup ethi IP address IT latestarchive rr1 13 0 Setup ethi IP address archive20080523 1540 rri 13 0 Automatic nightly backup at 2008 05 23 15 40 archive20080523 1515 ri 12 4 configuration for rr1 12 4 TI Archive20080523 1510 rr1 12 4 Automatic nightly backup at 2008 05 23 15 10 E factorydefaults 1 13 0 Factory defaults E Current Configuration ri 13 0 Current Configuration on router Note select two and only two targets Show Differences Select Webmin Configuration Archives to Show Differences Archive Name Version Archive Comment E Webmin20080523 1544 1 13 0 configuration for rri 13 0 IT latestwebminarchive rr1 13 0 configuration for rri 13 0 in Webmin20080523 1533 rri 12 4 Automatic nightly backup at 2008 05 23 15 33 E Current Configuration rri 13 0 Current Configuration on router
210. e pre Windows 2000 Mare Jetzen Logon Hours Log On Io F Accountis locked out Account options I User cannot change password J Password never expires 8 Store password using reversible encryption Account is disabled gt Account expires Never C End of Thursday September 27 2007 Cancel Apply Figure E 7 Active Directory User Account Properties Revision 1 14 1 330 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix F VPN L2TP Configuration in Windows Appendix F VPN L2TP Configuration in Windows This section describes how to set up a VPN L2TP connection on Windows XP 2000 There are two ways to establish a connection in Windows using a pre shared key in the case of Windows XP or using a certificate for either Windows XP or Windows 2000 Here are the steps to establish a connection with a pre shared key 1 Start the New Connection Wizard accessed via the Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Communications menus On the Network Connection Type page select the option Connect to the network at my workplace On the Network Connection page select the option Virtual Private Network Connection On the Connection Name page enter a name for the new connection On the Public Network page select either Do not dial the initial connection or Automatically dial this initial connection according to your re
211. e Clocking field selects whether to accept or provide clock signal In normal use the central office provides the clock signal in which case the setting should be Normal It is also possible to connect to another router for example by using a cross over cable and selecting Master on one of the two routers to provide the clock signal The link Convert this interface to T3 reconfigures the interface for use as a T3 trunk 8 2 2 Editing Logical Interfaces 8 2 2 1 Editing A Logical Interface Frame Relay Help Edit T1 Interface Interface T1 1 Parameters Convert this interface to El Framing ESF X Line Decoding B8ZS Clocking Normal Line Build Out CSU OdB X Save Figure 8 6 Creating a Frame Relay Logical Interface This menu allows you to display and configure logical interface fields for Frame Relay The menu is composed of two tables The first table contains configuration parameters that apply to all DLCIs in the Frame Relay link The second table configures network parameters of individual DLCIs The fields and buttons in this menu are the same as those those described in the section on Editing A Logical Interface Frame Relay in the Chapter 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 chapter Once the first DLCI has been configured revisiting the link to that DLCI from the Trunks And Interfaces page will display a menu that allows additional DLCIs to be configured Revision 1 14 1 82 RX1000 RX1100 8 Conf
212. e Compress data fields will select whether data should be compressed prior to encryption If Default is selected the value in the Defaults for all connections record is used The Perfect Forward Secrecy fields will enable PFS causing keys to be exchanged in a manner which provides attackers that have compromised a key with no advantage in decoding previously intercepted packets or with subsequent packets Not all clients support PFS The Connection key lifetime fields determine how long a particular instance of a connection should last from successful negotiation to expiry Normally the connection is renegotiated before it expires The L2TP field determines whether this connection uses L2TP Note ROX supports only DH group 1024 bits or greater for both Phase 1 and Phase 2 Please ensure that your client is configured not to use DH group sizes of less than 1024 bits 16 2 8 2 Left Right System s Settings Left system s settings Public IP address 7 From default route Automatic Ssany Address or hostname 206 73 193 8 System identifier Default None IPaddress Hostname S rie None behind system within system 10 0 0 078 epg cas None Entered below Automatic any Certificate File OSAQNIQUBPv rCaWwrNMFLEPViQzPh23qgiy6ExWgWaobpBBNkASkC6hI cj u ioMiPzFYEEgX1JAwyOR EswGiFpfSXNLNMypCwywdLT1JcSxDRrj jB7iTacj 55uGOJOHRWkZMEBxD focOxw4ilgbNz aZxf7o0Sjb tiXZXRugbTOm7 aACTOndHLZ7NA
213. e EE 200 22 2 GRE M in MQM EE 201 22 3 GRE Tunnel Configuration Men ENEE 201 23 1 Network Utilities Main Menu eust teggedeset renge Sege ede NEEN ENEE EEe EENS di 203 23 2 PINO MENU acta aaa die lace tate Radi ease tant nee At Gee tithe tiene Lee Ta A ag ees 203 23 9 FING Check MIN EE 204 23 4 Ping Check Edit Menu EE 205 23 5 lracero te Men lese a E E E EEE E ERER 205 23 0 x OST t MENU tae a era n a a a peaa aa a a a a a 206 23 1 Tepdump MENU EE ANTERA T AAEE EKE ei 207 23 8 Frame Relay Trace Menu E 208 23 9 Serial Server Port Trace Menu eseu ged dc scetensescla ce canil ndeasdiae adoamndenindendectetane 208 23 10 Interfa e Statisties MEM ergeet tee eech ceil ele eeneg 209 23 11 Current Routing amp Interface Table AEN 209 Revision 1 14 1 15 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 24 1 Sources of Delay and Error in an End to End Exchange c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenees 216 24 2 Serial Protocols Server Main Menu ENEE 218 24 3 Assign Protocols On E 219 24 4 POM SOU SSI EE 219 245 Raw Socket MeN ET 220 24 6 TCPMOGDUS EE 220 24 7 RN EE 221 24 8 DNP Device Jelli eege ect e Ed ERR 222 24 9 Serial Protocols Statistics Menu 2egute egegegdedegg seed Eed ed aad 223 24 10 Serial Protocols Trace MON EE 224 25 1 Synchronous Serial Main Menu iciiiscsestsaseeschesecchancisadicextedartacebueat NEESS dE 227 25 2 Synchronous Port Settings Menu tc2 sas suckin bane nat tne co aenrs a hee Beane ay Ua aaa om
214. e Firewall e Elements of Firewall design e How to configure the Firewall e Checking Firewall configuration 14 2 Firewall Fundamentals Firewalls are software systems designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from private networks Firewalls are most often used to prevent unauthorized Internet users from accessing private networks intranets connected to the Internet When the RuggedRouter firewall is used the router serves a gateway machine through which all messages entering or leaving the intranet pass The router examines each message and blocks those that do not meet the specified security criteria The router also acts as a proxy preventing direct communication between computers on the Internet and intranet Proxy servers can filter the kinds of communication that are allowed between two computers and perform address translation 14 2 1 Stateless vs Stateful Firewalls Firewalls fall into two broad categories stateless and stateful session based Stateless or static firewalls make decisions about a traffic without regard to the history simply opening a hole for the traffic s type based upon TCP or UDP port number Stateless firewalling is a relatively simple affair easily handling web and email traffic Stateless firewalls suffer from disadvantages however All holes opened in the firewall always open there is no opening and closing connections based on outside criteria Static IP filters offer no form of authenticatio
215. e Switch In this example the eth1 interface is provided with IP address 192 168 1 1 24 A a switch connected to eth1 and uses address 192 168 1 2 24 The switch port 1 is connected to the router while its ports 2 through 8 provide DHCP relay support The switch has its DHCP relay server address set to router s address 192 168 1 1 The switch has all ports in VLAN 1 The switch base MAC address is 00 0A DC 1 1 22 00 Assign a client at switch port 2 address 192 168 1 102 Assign a client at switch port 3 address 192 168 1 103 Assign multiple clients at switch port 4 dynamic addresses 192 168 1 151 through 192 168 1 200 The router serves as the default gateway 1 2 Enable eth1 in the Edit Network Interfaces menu Add a new subnet and configure it for network address 192 168 1 0 with netmask 255 255 255 0 Enable the Disable NAK of option82 clients for this subnet option to prevent confusing some DHCP clients due to the client being on the same network as the DHCP server and the DHCP relay agent the switch Revision 1 14 1 242 RX1000 RX1100 27 Configuring The DHCP server BONO P 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Save it then edit the subnet just created and click Edit Client Options Set default routers to 192 168 1 1 and save it Click add an address pool to the subnet Set the address range to 192 168 1 102 to 192 168 1 102 Click Create Edit the pool by clicking on the link
216. e Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP eliminates a single point of failure associated with statically routed networks by providing automatic failover using alternate routers The RuggedRouter VRRP daemon keepalived is an RFC 2338 version 2 compliant implementation of VRRP 19 1 1 1 The Problem With Static Routing Many network designs employ a statically configured default route in the network hosts A static default route is simple to configure requires little if any overhead to run and is supported by virtually every IP implementation When dynamic host configuration protocol DHCP is employed hosts may accept configuration for only a single default gateway Unfortunately this approach creates a single point of failure Loss of the router supplying the default route or the router s WAN connection results in isolating the hosts relying upon the default route There are a number of ways that may be used to provide redundant connections to the host Some hosts can configure alternate gateways while others are intelligent enough to participate in dynamic routing protocols such as Routing Information Protocol RIP or Open Shortest Path First routing protocol OSPF Even when available these approaches are not always practical due to administrative and operation overhead 19 1 1 2 The VRRP Solution VRRP solves the problem by allowing the establishment of a virtual router group composed of a number of routers that provide a speci
217. e advertised The Redistribute Static fields control the distribution of static routes When enabled BGP will advertise static routes created using the Network Configuration Routing and Default Route menu to other BGP routers in the area Normally only routes that fall within the scope of the network areas will be advertised The Redistribute Kernel fields control the distribution of kernel routes When enabled BGP will advertise routes from the kernel routing table which includes static routes entered by the administrator to other BGP routers in the area Normally only routes that fall within the scope of the network areas will be advertised The Redistribute OSPF fields control the distribution of routes learned by OSPF When enabled BG will advertise routes learned by OSPF The Redistribute RIP fields control the distribution of routes learned by RIP When enabled BGP will advertise routes learned by RIP The AS ID is the Autonomous System ID used between BGP routers Note that for BGP routers connected to the Internet these numbers are controlled by IANA the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority The Router ID field sets the router id to use for the BGP daemon This value is used as a unique identifier for the dynamic routing protocol to identify which router sent which route advertisement By default it uses the highest IP assigned to an interface on the router It is recommended that this value be set to a unique fixed IP on each
218. e and forward the buffered characters to the network e Packetize on Specific Character e Packetize on timeout and e Packetize on full packet If configured to packetize on a specific character the server will examine each received character and will packetize and forward upon receiving the specific character The character is usually a lt CR gt or an lt LF gt character but may be any ASCII character If configured to packetize on a timeout the server will wait for a configurable time after receiving a character before packetizing and forwarding If another character arrives during the waiting interval Revision 1 14 1 213 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols the timer is restarted This method allows characters transmitted as part of an entire message to be forwarded to network in a single packet when the timer expires after receiving the very last character of the message This is usually the only packetizer selected when supporting ModBus communications Finally the server will always packetize and forward on a full packet i e when the number of characters fills its communications buffer 1024 bytes 24 1 3 4 Use of Turnaround Delays Some RTU protocols such as ModBus use the concept of a turnaround delay When the host sends a message such as a broadcast that does not invoke an RTU response it waits a turnaround delay time This delay ensures that the RTU has time to process the broadcast message be
219. e client should use Static routes Static routes the client should use Time servers The IPs of the time servers the client should use Lesser used client options include Subnet mask The subnet mask the client should use Rarely needed Broadcast address The broadcast address the client should use Rarely needed Log servers The IPs of the LOG servers the client should use Swap server The IP of the swap server the client should use Normally only used for diskless network booted clients Root disk path The path the client should use for its root device Normally only used for diskless network booted clients NIS domain The NIS domain the client should use NIS servers The IPs of the NIS server the client should use Font servers The IPs of the font servers the client should use Normally only used for X terminals XDM servers The IPs of the XDM servers the client should use Normally only used for X terminals NetBIOS name servers The IPs of the Netbios name servers the client should use NetBIOS node type The NetBIOS name resolution method the client should use NetBIOS scope The NetBIOS scope the client should use Time offset The offset from a time server the client should be using Custom options allows you to add additional DHCP options required by a client BOOTP and Dynamic DNS related options include Boot filename The filename the client should request from a tftp server to boot from This only applies
220. e componentwill be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components Internet Information Services IIS 13 5MB O 4 Management and Monitoring Tools 2 0 MB CO Message Queuing 0 0MB wi MSN Explorer 207MB vi 39 Networking Services 03MB Description Includes Web and FTP support along with support for FrontPage transactions Active Server Pages and database connections Total disk space required 68 0 MB Space available on disk 1027 3 MB Figure D 1 Installing IIS Download the desired release e g rr1 9 0 zip from the RuggedCom website Create the directory ruggedcom under the IIS root directory C Inetpub wwwroot Unzip the rr1 9 0 zip file within C Inetpub wwwroot ruggedcom Start to enable IIS by clicking on Start menu Control Panel Administrative Tools Internet Information Services Right click on Internet Information Services Connect and enter the host computer s IP address e g 192 168 0 1 Verify the IIS web server by opening a web browser on another host on the network and entering the URL http followed by the IP address IIS was installed with followed by ruggedcom e g http 192 168 0 1 ruggedrouter Revision 1 14 1 323 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix D Installing IIS Web Server On Windows Visit the router you wish to upgrade and visit the Maintenance menu Upgrade System sub menu Click on the Change Server button and set the Repositor
221. e current MAC address and port associated with the VRIP The router will issue a second set of ARPs after the time specified by the Gratuitous ARP delay Revision 1 14 1 188 RX1000 RX1100 19 Configuring VRRP 19 2 VRRP Configuration 19 2 1 VRRP Main Menu VRRP VRRP Configuration VRRP Instances Status Restart VRRP daemon Click this button to restart the VRRP daemon This will apply configuration parameters Figure 19 3 VRRP Main Menu Note that VRRP is disabled by default and may be enabled via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu VRRP can be configured through the VRRP Configuration link before the daemon is started When enabled any configuration changes may be made to take effect by selecting the Restart VRRP daemon button The VRRP Instances Status link presents the status VRRP instances existing as of the last restart of keepalived 19 2 2 VRRP Configuration Menu Help VRRP Configuration Router Identification Router Name rrjc2 Save RRP Virtual IP Instances Name VRID Interface Monitored Interface Virtual IP address Virtual IP Netmask Local Interface IP VRID 20 20 eth2 192 168 2 10 24 192 168 2 2 VRID 21 21 eth3 192 168 3 10 24 192 168 3 2 Add a new instance VRRP Virtual IP Groups Group Name Group Members VGO WRID_20 VRID_21 Figure 19 4 VRRP Configuration Menu Set the Router Name field to supply
222. e email addresses should be separated by comma The Filter Level Comparator configures the way to match with defined filter level The Filter Level configures what filter level is to be compared Note that Emergency has the greatest filter level and Debug has the lowest filter level 34 2 2 2 Alert Definition Configuration Alert Definition Configuration View Alert Definition by Category chassis Refresh Codepoint Category Name Subsystem Severity Enabled Alarmable Renotify Interval second Type chassis t chassis Inventory Problem chassis error yes yes o simple chassis 2 chassis Power Supply 1 Failure chassis critical yes yes o simple chassis 3 chassis Power Supply 2 Failure chassis critical Joes Joes o simple chassis 4 chassis Ledboard Push Button chassis error yes yes D simple chassis 5 chassis Ledboard chassis error yes yes D simple chassis 6 chassis Modular slot 1 chassis error yes yes o simple chassis 7 chassis Modular slot 2 chassis error yes yes D simple chassis 8 chassis Ethernet interface module 1 chassis error yes yes o simple chassis 9 chassis Ethernet interface module 2 chassis error yes yes o simple chassis 10 chassis PCI slot 1 chassis error yes yes 0 simple chassis 11 chassis PCI slot 2 chassis error yes yes D simple chassis 12 chassis Chassis chassis error yes yes o simple Create New Definition Figure 3
223. e new SEM IP address and restarting the idefender process The above steps takes care of the configuration All that is left to do now is to start the Industrial Defender Agent itself by enabling the idefender entry in the Bootup and Shutdown menu A properly configured SEM unit will now be receiving data from the RuggedRouter Please note that when the idefender process is stopped the remote syslog entry to the SEM unit is automatically removed 34 4 Gauntlet Security RX1100 owners can use the Gauntlet security appliance to restrict access to critical assets This section details how to activate Gauntlet and determine currently negotiated sessions Details and Revision 1 14 1 282 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router recommendations on applying the Gauntlet system to networking may be found in texts referenced in the About This Guide section of the user guide 34 4 1 What And How Gauntlet Protects Gauntlet protects against unauthorized access to critical assets including the router itself Gauntlet allows connection from known management devices to assets behind the firewall operating on known TCP UDP port numbers Gauntlet does not encrypt communications which occur in the clear such as sessions using the Telnet protocol Protocols such as SSH and HTTPS offer their own encryption and are suitable for use with Gauntlet 34 4 2 Gauntlet And The Firewall Gauntlet integrates tightly with the firewall opening it for
224. e nk 320 C Installing Apache Web Server On Windows AAA 322 D Installing IIS Web Server On Windows gedd eed ENEE ENEE KEE EEN e rnent 323 E RADIUS Server Configuration EE 325 E 1 Webmin Privilege Levels and FreeRADIUS AAA 326 E 2 Webmin Privilege Levels and Windows IAS ANEN 326 e PPP CHAP and Windows EE 329 F VPN L2TP Configuration in ENEE EE EE Ee 331 JEX ee Eege SE 332 Revision 1 14 1 11 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter List of Figures 1 1 RuggedRouter Setup Main Menu ENNEN 24 1 2 RuggedRouter Setup Password Change Menu ANEN 25 1 3 RuggedRouter Interfaces Setup Menu zesssretgeessendiesgegehe ge soe eee tees 25 1 4 RuggedRouter DNS Client Menu j s ccciacsctoenciseceetsatesteneseamnceavsateunewnnyiuerenestuszeunneianedebaccnnntatce 25 1 5 Hostname and Domain Configuration Menu sssssssssssseessserrssrrrnrerrnntrsnrresetrnnnrtnnnrstnrenserrn nnet 26 1 6 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu scciiccceiccscstvccssntstenessencnntevencteciasueeateadsentenaveleneddeestbeeatnueens 26 1 7 Ga ntlet Setup E 27 1 8 RuggedRouter Date Time Timezone Menu EEN 27 1 9 RuggedRouter Hardware Information Menu ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeseneaeeeeeeeeeeeneeaees 28 1 10 Selecting a configuration to reload sccccitecheceesstdancaseetteeeech anid neces anteater 29 1 11 Selecting a previously Made configuration ENNEN 29 1 12 Signing On To The Router With A Web Browser ssssssesssesienesenresserrnnerrrnnnsr
225. e rrl 9 0 on hostname completed gt tmp mail echo To controlcenter ruggedcom com gt gt tmp mail echo Software upgrade for Release rrl1 9 0 on hostname completed at daten gt gt tmp mail echo gt gt tmp mail cat tmp mail ssmtp controlcenter ruggedcom com rm f tmp mail 34 14 Uploading And Downloading Files Upload Download Files To The Router Download files from the specified URLs to this router URLs to download File or directory to download to LI create directory if needed Owned by user m Owned by group G Default on Download mode Immediately and show progress In background at date is 7 Apr EIS 006 Sal and time is 52 Download URLs to router Send files from your current host to the router Files to upload Browse _Browse BE BE Bees File or directory to upload to Eal Create directory if needed Owned by user Owned by group Default C Pee Extract ZIP or TAR files eee Yes then delete Cp Yes No Send to router Upload a file from the router to your host Upload to your host Figure 34 48 Upload Download menu The Upload Download Files menu provides a means to transfer files to and from the router The Download files from the specified URLs to this router part of the menu allows you to have the router download files from ftp and http servers You need to specify at least the file URL and Revision 1 14 1 314
226. e to RX1100 Gain access to the RX1100 feature set including Intrusion Detection Systems and Gauntlet Security Upgrade To RX1100 Change Repository Server The router currently upgrades from http rceng02 eng lan debian386 release rridevel and does not use bandwidth limiting The router is currently operating release software rri Change Server Automatic Upgrade The router is not configured to automatically upgrade Change Settings Install a New Package Select the location to install a new package from From local file za From uploaded file Browse From ftp or http URL Install Upgrade All Packages Resynchronize package list update Fre K ANS Only show which packages would be upgraded 5 yes No Upgrade Now Figure 34 42 Software Upgrade System The Software Upgrade system provides the following features e Upgrading from either HTTP or FTP servers e Upgrade traffic bandwidth limiting to prevent disruption to mission critical applications e Automatic daily upgrades from a central server at a scheduled time e Manually initiated upgrades from a central server e Manually initiated upgrades of new versions for testing purposes e Manually initiated installs of new packages for testing purposes 34 13 1 RuggedRouter Software Fundamentals You may be required to upgrade the router in order to take advantage of new features security improvement and bug repairs Your RuggedRouter sof
227. e two routers are connected by lower speed WAN and higher speed Ethernet links packets on subnets native to the WAN will still be forwarded via Ethernet because of cost If antispoofing is enabled the packet will be discarded at the peer OSPF router Note Ensure that Antispoofing is disabled if you are constructing the above described type of OSPF network Antispoofing can be disabled in the Network Configuration menu Core Settings sub menu 17 1 5 11 Administrative Distances The router may work with different routing protocols at the same time as well as employing local interface and statically assigned routes An administrative distance from O to 255 is a rating of the trustworthiness of a routing information source For a given route the protocol having the lowest administrative distance will be chosen By default the distances for a connected interface is 0 and for a static route is 1 By default OSPF will set an administrative distance of 110 and RIP will set a distance of 120 17 1 6 OSPF And VRRP Example Network This network consists of three routers connected in a ring with T1 E1 links Router 1 and 2 and the switched network represent a remote site in which the routers supply a redundant gateway to the hosts via VRRP and the T1 E1 links supply a redundant network connection to the rest of the network Revision 1 14 1 163 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing IP 2 2 2 101 GW 2 2 2
228. each trunk s physical and logical interface is shown The menu presents connection status but note that it does not update in real time Click on the Refresh this page link to update the status display Each T3 E3 trunk may be configured as a Frame Relay link with one or more DLCls or as a single PPP link Select Assign a New Frame Relay logical interface or Assign a new PPP logical interface respectively The contents of the menu will change after the creation of logical interfaces providing links to logical interface configuration and statistics and overall trunk statistics as seen below Revision 1 14 1 80 RX1000 RX1100 8 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T3 E3 T3 1 Down Firmware version 11 w1fr20 Down Statistics w1fr30 Down Statistics Northeast o 200 30 1 255 255 255 255 haas Edit T3 1 Parameters View T3 1 Link Statistics North 10 200 20 1 255 255 255 255 10 200 21 14 Figure 8 3 T3 E3 Network Interface With Logical Interfaces 8 2 1 1 Naming Of Logical Interfaces RuggedRouter names the logical interfaces that are created for T3 E3 Trunks but allows you to provide a description All interfaces start with a w to identify them as wan interfaces followed by the interface number The next part of the identifier is either ppp or fr and the frame relay DLCI number 8 2 1 2 T3 Interface Parameters The Edit T3 X Parameters link from the T3 E3 WAN Interfaces menu links to
229. ecifies the priority with which this class is serviced Please note that lower value priority classes will be serviced first and hence with lower latency The lower priority classes are also the first to be allocated any leftover bandwidth after all classes have been provided with their minimum bandwidth Priority may be in the range 0 255 The default option field sets the current class as the default class for the interface Please note that you must define exactly one default class per interface The tos minimize delay option field specifies that a packet with the minimized delay ToS ToS bit 3 set belongs to this class The tos maximize throughput option field specifies that a packet with the maximize throughput ToS ToS bit set belongs to this class The tos maximuze reliability option field specifies that a packet with the maximize reliability ToS ToS bit 5 set belongs to this class Revision 1 14 1 140 RX1000 RX1100 15 Traffic Control The tos minimize cost option field specifies that a packet with the minimize cost ToS ToS bit 6 set belongs to this class The tcp ack option field specifies that a tcp ack packet with size lt 64 belongs to this class This is useful for speeding up bulk downloads Please note that the size of the ack packet is limited to 64 bytes because this option is intended to only match packets with no payload This option is only valid for one class per interface The tos option field all
230. ed link failure on Ethernet port 1 4 LED 9 12 Green link activity on WAN port 1 4 LED 13 16 Green link detected on WAN port 1 4 Red link failure on WAN port 1 4 LED 17 20 Green link activity on WAN port 5 8 LED 21 24 Green link detected on WAN port 5 8 Red link failure on WAN port 5 8 PPP DATA Green link activity on PPP Modem port PPP LINK green link detected on PPP Modem port GPS LOCK Green The PTP card has acquired a GPS satellite lock ALARM Red A Major Alarm exists POWER 1 Green Power Supply 1 is working properly Red failure detected in Power Supply 1 POWER 2 Green Power Supply 2 is working properly Red failure detected in Power Supply 2 The software will cause the ALARM LED to become active for various reasons Any condition that causes the ALARM LED to become active will activate the critical fail relay The Web interface displays the alarms Pressing the pushbutton for more than five seconds will reboot the router 1 6 Obtaining Chassis Information The chassis displays the hardware inventory at boot time This information is captured in the var log messages file after boot The Web Management interface home page displays the chassis serial number Revision 1 14 1 33 RX1000 RX1100 2 Webmin Configuration 2 Webmin Configuration 2 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with configuring the router through the Webmin menu and describes the
231. ed Commands This menu allows you to schedule a command to run in the future Begin by selecting the time and date you wish to run the command at using the Run on date and Run at time fields Use the Run in directory field to enter a directory to run the command in or simply use Finally enter the command to execute in the Commands to execute field Note that the command will remain scheduled after reboot After the command is entered the Scheduled Commands menu will display any commands and allow you cancel them Scheduled Commands Job ID Run as user Bun at Created on Commands to execute D root Sat May 28 03 00 00 2005 Fri May 27 11 45 42 2005 reboot Figure 4 5 Scheduled Commands Displaying a Command 4 5 Scheduled Cron Jobs Cron is a service that allows flexible regular scheduling of system commands A Cron job is the set of a command to run and a definition of the times at which to run it The Scheduled Cron Jobs menu allows you to create edit and delete these jobs Scheduled Cron Jobs There are no cron jobs on this system Create a new scheduled cron job Figure 4 6 Webmin Scheduled Cron Jobs Revision 1 14 1 47 RX1000 RX1100 4 Configuring The System Initially there will be no scheduled jobs Follow the create link to create one Create Cron Job Job Details Execute cron job as froot A Active DG Yes No Command daan eth1 eth2 sleep 1 ifup eh et Input to command
232. ed with each line next to the interface jack This LED is red when the link is disconnected flashes green when the link is connecting and remains solid green when the link is established The RuggedRouter also indicates information about T3 E3 ports on the LED Panel A pair of LEDs will indicate traffic and link status of the port Consult the section Using The LED Status Panel to determine which LEDs correspond to the port Revision 1 14 1 79 RX1000 RX1100 8 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T3 E3 8 2 T3 E3 Configuration T3 E3 T3 E3 e dessem T3 E3 Trunks And Interfaces Current Route amp Interface Table Lia Figure 8 1 T3 E3 Trunks And Interfaces This menu allows you to display and configure T3 E3 Trunks as well as display the routes and status of the network interfaces 8 2 1 T3 E3 Trunk Interfaces Help T3 E3 WAN Interfaces T3 E3 Trunks Channels and Logical Interfaces Refresh this page T3 1 Not Running Firmware version 11 ne Remote Name Description Local Address Netmask Address Assign a new Frame Relay logical interface Assign a new PPP logical interface Edit T3 1 Parameters Figure 8 2 T3 E3 Network Interface Initial Configuration This menu allows you to display and configure T3 E3 Trunk parameters A table is presented for each interface Interface numbers are as described by the WAN labels as shown in the home page chassis diagram The status of
233. efault Information Originate field when enabled causes the router to advertise its default route to the RIP network The Default Metric field sets the default metric to be used for RIP routes which don t have another metric specified Revision 1 14 1 177 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing The Distance field sets the administrative distance to use for all routes unless overridden by other distance settings The Redistribute Connected fields control distribution of connected routes When enabled RIP will advertise routes to directly connected interfaces to other RIP routers in the area Normally only routes that fall within the scope of the network areas will be advertised The Redistribute Static fields control the distribution of static routes When enabled RIP will advertise static routes created using the Network Configuration Routing and Default Route menu to other RIP routers in the area Normally only routes that fall within the scope of the network areas will be advertised The Redistribute Kernel fields control distribution of kernel routes When enabled RIP will advertise routes from the kernel routing table which includes static routes entered by the administrator to other RIP routers in the area Normally only routes that fall within the scope of the network areas will be advertised The Redistribute OSPF fields control distribution of routes learned by OSPF When enabled RIP will advertise routes lea
234. efault of 35 is correct for most providers The Attempt ATM Autoconfiguration option causes the router to attempt to automatically determine the VPI and VCI used on the connection This does not work with all providers and may case the connection to fail even if the link light is on If this option is used it should only be used to find out what the correct values are if your provider isn t willing to help you and when the correct values are found it should be disabled with the correct values entered in the VPI and VCI fields instead The PPPoE Username field determines the username to use when connecting to the PPPoE server as specified by your provider The Password field determines the password provided to the PPPoE server The Default Route checkbox enables automatically setting a default route using this interface whenever it connects If this is your primary connection you probably want this option enabled The Use peer DNS checkbox enables automatically setting the DNS server entries that the PPPoE server recommends Enable this option unless you provide your own name servers The MTU field defines the MTU size to request when connecting to the PPPoE server In some cases the PPPoE provider may provide a smaller MTU in which case the smaller setting will be used or it may refuse to alter the MTU and use whatever it considers to be the default Revision 1 14 1 97 RX1000 RX1100 11 Configuring PPPoE Bridged Mode On ADSL
235. eld configures whether to accept an incoming connection place an outgoing connection or do both The Max Conns field configures the maximum number of incoming connections to permit when the call direction is incoming The Remote IP field configures the address used when placing an outgoing connection The Remote Port field selects the TCP destination port used in outgoing connections The Local Port field selects the local TCP port to use to accept incoming connections 24 2 5 TcpModBus Menu This menu configures the TcpModbus settings for each port Changes are made immediately Help TcpModbus Port Response Timer Pack Timer Turnaround Retransmits Max Conns Loc Port 2 50 200 off 0 l RTU List 2 234 Save Changes Figure 24 6 TcpModbus Menu Revision 1 14 1 220 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols The Response Timer field configures the maximum time from the last transmitted character of the outgoing poll until the first character of the response If the RTU does not respond in this time the poll will have been considered failed The Pack Timer must be between 50 and 1000 milliseconds inclusive The Pack Timer field configures the maximum allowable time to wait for a response to a Modbus request to complete once it has started The Pack Timer must be between 200 and 1000 milliseconds inclusive Note The Modbus specification states the minimum time is about 640 character
236. eled passwords If set to Yes the user will be allowed to enter a password for authentication if it can not be done using a public key Permit logins with empty passwords valid when authentication by password is allowed specifies whether the server will allow login to accounts with empty passwords Pre login message file specifies the name of a file to use as a banner preceding the passphrase or password prompt during the login process e g etc issue net Revision 1 14 1 258 RX1000 RX1100 30 Configuring SSH 30 2 3 Networking Networking Networking options Listen on addresses Alladdresses Entered below Address Port Default Listen on port Default 22 22 Accept protocols ssHvi SsH v2 Disconnect if client has z z A z Forever 600 crashed ves No Time to wait for login SECH Allow TCP forwarding g vo Allow connection to forwarded e ports Save Figure 30 3 SSH Server Networking The Listen on addresses fields determine an IP addresses and port upon which SSH will accept a connection The Listen on port field determines the port number SSH will listen on assuming Listen on addresses is set to All addresses The Accept Protocols fields determine which versions of SSH will be allowed The Disconnect if client has crashed field determines whether the SSH server should periodically check to see if the client is still alive The Time to wait f
237. eling protocols used he support of eta Specifies the Cisco AV Pair VSA Specifies the certificate purpose or usage object identifiers Specifies whether IAS automatically generates the class al Specifies whether IAS automatically generates the session Specifies that the user s dial in properties are ignored Specifies the IP traffic filter that is used by the Routing anc Specifies the time in seconds that the connection can rer Description not yet defined Description not yet defined Description not yet defined Description not yet defined Description not yet defined Description not yet defined Description not yet defined Attribute name Figure E 3 IAS Window Add Attribute 6 Inthe Multivalued Attribute Information window click the Add button Multivalued Attribute Information RES Vendor Specific Attribute number ee oo Attribute format jo ctetString Attribute values Move Up Move Down TETIOYE Edit 3 DE Cancel Figure E 4 IAS Window Multivalued Attribute Information 7 Inthe Vendor Specific Attribute Information window select Enter Vendor Code and enter 15004 Select Yes It conforms and click the Configure Attribute button Revision 1 14 1 328 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix E RADIUS Server Configuration endor Specific Attribute Information 2 x Attribute name Vendor s pecific Specify network access server vendor Select from list RADIUS
238. enable Enable Opaque LSA capability disabled Passive Default enable Set new interfaces passive by default enabled Refresh Timer 10 Set refresh timer 10 1800 Seconds 10 RFC 1583 Compatibility enable Enable compatibility with obsolete RFC1583 OSPF current is RFC2178 disabled enable Redistribute Connected metric type av Redistribute routes for directly connected interfaces to OSPF area routers enable disable U2 0 16777214 disabled 2 unset metric enable Redistribute Static mettic type av Redistribute static routes to OSPF area routers enable disable V 2 0 16777214 disabled 2 unset metric enable Redistribute Kernel metric type 2 v Redistribute kernel routes to OSPF area routers enable disable V 2 0 16777214 disabled 2 unset metric enable Redistribute RIP metric type av Redistribute rip routes to OSPF area routers enable disable V 2 0 16777214 disabled 2 unset metric enable Redistribute BGP metric type av Redistribute bgp routes to OSPF area routers enable disable 2 0 16777214 disabled 2 unset metric Router ID Identifier of router Often the main IP address of the router A B C D highest IP of system Save Note The router id is automatically picked as the highest IP address assigned to the unit at startup unless the config contains a router id to use The router id change only updates the config and takes effect on restart Figure 17 14 OSPF Global Parameters The Enable Passw
239. er will respond from If All addresses is selected then the router s telnet server will be reachable via Revision 1 14 1 261 RX1000 RX1100 31 Configuring The Telnet Server any configured IP address If All addresses is not selected then the telnet server will only respond from highlighted addresses in the list below The Save button will commit the configuration change If the telnet server is not running the configuration will be saved but will not start the server If the telnet server is running the configuration will take effect immediately The Start Telnet Server button allows you to start telnet server This is the same as starting the telnet server from the Bootup and Shutdown menu Note that if the telnet server is running the Stop Telnet Server button will be shown instead of the Start Telnet Server button Note also that if the telnet server is stopped currently active telnet connections will not be terminated Revision 1 14 1 262 RX1000 RX1100 32 Configuring IRIGB And IEEE1588 32 Configuring IRIGB And IEEE1588 32 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e IEEE 1588 Configuration e IRIGB Configuration e Viewing IRIGB and IEEE1588 Status 32 1 1 IEEE1588 Fundamentals The IEEE 1588 working group Precise Timing Protocol PTP standard details a method of synchronizing a clocks over networks including Ethernet The RuggedRouter provides a special hardware assisted PTP cap
240. er will download the scripts from the same location as is configured via the Change Repository Server page The script files named e pre upgrade user will be downloaded by the router and executed immediately prior to beginning the upgrade process Note that in the case where a two stage upgrade procedure is required the pre upgrade script will only be executed immediately prior to the second stage of the upgrade e post upgrade will be downloaded by the router and executed immediately after the upgrade process has completed The scripts must start with bin bash or usr bin perl in order to use one of either the BASH or PERL command interpreters on the router and be designed to produce consistent results in the event that they are run more than once consecutively It is possible for example for an upgrade to be interrupted after the pre upgrade script runs and restarted at a later date Revision 1 14 1 313 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router The result of running the pre upgrade script is included in the upgrade output If run through the automatic upgrade the scripts output can be viewed by through the View Log File of Last Upgrade button on the Software Upgrade System page 34 13 7 1 Example Of A post upgrade Script The following post upgrade script will send an email notification when an upgrade completes assuming SMTP is configured properly bin bash echo Subject Software upgrade for Releas
241. erface For example if a DHCP server is running on eth and eth1 is subsequently made a member of the bridge br1 the DHCP configuration must be changed to refer to br1 Note Bear in mind that RuggedRouter s Ethernet bridge is implemented in software and the CPU resource is needed to perform forwarding of broadcast multicast and unicast traffic alike on the bridge Note If the router is running as a firewall the routeback option must be enabled for the bridge interface in the Edit Network Interface submenu under the Firewall menu 6 2 Ethernet Configuration DES Ethernet Ethernet Interfaces Bridge PPPoE Interfaces PPP Logs Current Route amp Interface Table z e Click this button to activate the current boot time interface and routing settings as they normally would be after a reboot Warning this Apply Configuration 3 5 f may make your system inaccessible via the network and cut off access to Webmin Figure 6 1 Ethernet Menu This menu allows you to configure Ethernet interface Bridge PPPoE and display the routes and status of all network interfaces Select the Ethernet Interfaces icon to configure Ethernet interfaces The Network Interfaces menu lets you edit the permanent configuration of Ethernet interfaces or simply try out changes The Apply Configuration button serves to restore the permanently saved changes and restart Ethernet networking Revision 1 14 1 61 RX1000
242. ernet interfaces are to be part of the bridge interface The Save button will save the configuration changes Please note that the changes will be effective immediately after clicking the save button 6 2 5 PPPoE On Native Ethernet Interfaces This menu allows you to display and configure the PPPoE interfaces on all available Ethernet ports Revision 1 14 1 64 RX1000 RX1100 6 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces PPPoE Interfaces PPPoE Interfaces Ethernet Interface Name MTU Use Peer DNS Default Route Status eth1 Add PPPoE interface eth2 ppp12 1452 Enable Enable Inactive eth3 Add PPPoE interface eth4 Add PPPoE interface Figure 6 7 List PPPoE Interfaces The PPPoE Interfaces table allows you to add a PPPoE interface on an Ethernet ports or change PPPoE interface parameters of created interfaces Only one PPPoE interface can be created on each Ethernet port The Ethernet field shows all available Ethernet ports The Interface Name field shows created PPPoE interfaces and provides a link to edit the existing configuration or create a new one The MTU Use Peer DNS and Default Route fields are the configured information for PPPoE interfaces The Status field shows the current PPPoE link status 6 2 6 Edit PPPoE Interface This menus allows you to edit a PPPoE interface Edit PPPoE Interface on eth2 Interface Parameters PPPoE Username jusername ruggedcom Pass
243. es Click this button to start Shorewall with the current configuration with the shorewall start command This will start Shorewall providing a Start Firewall report on the activation After Shorewall starts cleanly cause it to start at boot time by enabling it through the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu Check Firewall Click this button to have Shorewall validate your firewall configuration with the shorewall check command Figure 14 1 Starting Shorewall Firewall Menu The above figure shows the firewall menu prior to configuration Configure the firewall through the provided menus The Check Firewall button can be selected after each menu configuration to check the existing configuration and provide notice of items still to be configured When the firewall is fully configured the Start Firewall button may be selected Starting the firewall in this way will provide more detail in the event of a problem If the firewall starts cleanly the menu appearance will change to that of the figure below In order to start the firewall at each and every boot you must enable it via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu Revision 1 14 1 126 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall Help Shorewall Firewall Shorewall version 4 0 11 amp ep x 4 7 ay SO ENESE bad d m D bad 3 Network Network Zone Hosts Default Firewall Masquerading Static NAT
244. es to this zone when Shorewall starts A policy is also installed that blocks access from unusd to all other zones Interfaces are defined in the file etc shorewall interfaces and are modified from the Network Interfaces menu Revision 1 14 1 121 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall 14 4 3 Hosts Shorewall hosts are used to assign zones to individual hosts or subnets on an interface which handles multiple subnets This allows the firewall to manage traffic being forwarded back out the interface it arrived on but destined for another subnet This is often useful for VPN setups to handle the VPN traffic separately from the other traffic on the interface which carries the VPN traffic An example follows Zone Interface IP Address or Network local eth3 10 0 0 0 8 guests eth3 192 168 0 0 24 Interfaces are defined in the file etc shorewall hosts and are modified from the Network Hosts menu 14 4 4 Policy Shorewall policies are the default actions for connection establishment between different firewall zones Each policy is of the form Source zone Destination zone Default action You can define a policy from each zone to each other You may also use a wildcard zone of all to represent all zones The default action describes how to handle the connection request There are six types of actions ACCEPT DROP REJECT QUEUE CONTINUE and NONE The first three are the most widely used and are described her
245. es will automatically aged out The latestarchive and factorydefaults archives will never be deleted The Archives to upload fields select archives to upload to the router The Browse button will allow you to select an archive Applying the Upload to Router button will upload the specified archive to the router Revision 1 14 1 288 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 5 4 Archive Backup Help Archive Backup Backup type ki Configuration Archive Webmin Archive Archive Comment Comments entered into the following field will be stored in the archive m Backup archive file name Specify the archive name here do not specify the file extension as it will be automatically generated larchive20080523 1 041 Start Backup Figure 34 16 Archive Backup This menu allows the user to manually create a configuration archive or Webmin archive The Backup Type field determines which type configuration archive or Webmin archive of archive you want to backup The Archive Comment field sets a comment which will be included in the archive file The Backup archive file name field allows you to input the candidate archive file name Starting the backup results in the following display Archive Backup Created Archive20080523 1547 tgz Upload A Copy Of This Archive Figure 34 17 Archive Backup Complete The archive created can be immediately uploaded if desired by following the Upload A Copy Of This Arch
246. ess Port any e Save and Apply Figure 22 3 GRE Tunnel Configuration Menu This menu allows you to add or edit a tunnel The Tunnel Name field will be presented if the tunnel is being created The tunnel name is purely for informational purposes A network interface device with this name will be created In order that the name not collide with those used by other interfaces it will be prefixed with gre The Tunnel IP address field optionally configures and IP address on the gre network interface The Remote Net field configures the target network at the ingress egress at the remote end of the tunnel whose traffic is forwarded through the tunnel It may be an individual IP address or an IP subnet address e g 192 168 0 0 24 A given Remote Net must not be used by another tunnel Setting the Multicast option enables multicast traffic on the tunnel interface The Local IP field configures the IP address of the local end of the tunnel The Remote IP field configures the IP address of the local remote of the tunnel Revision 1 14 1 201 RX1000 RX1100 22 Configuring Generic Routing Encapsulation Note Each tunnel must have a unique combination of local and remote addresses or it will not be activated The Cost field configures the routing cost associated with networking routing that directs traffic through the tunnel The cost will default to zero if left unset The Local Egress Port configures a port to bind the
247. ess than 10 bytes in length and complete for this example in 1 and 10 ms at the client and server Assuming the RTU responds quickly the total latency will approach 35 ms It is also necessary to take account such factors as the possibility of line errors and collisions between masters at the server The server may be configured to recover from a line error by retransmitting the request Given a maximum frame transmission time of 250 ms and an RTU latency of 100 ms it would be wise to budget 350 ms for each attempt to send to the RTU Configuring a single retransmission would increase the end to end delay from about 650 ms to about 1000 ms The server can already be busy sending a request when the request of our example arrives Using the figures from the above paragraph the server being busy would increase the end to end delay from 1000 to 1350 ms The preceding analysis suggests that the Master should time out at some time after 1350 ms from the start of transmission 24 1 6 DNP Distributed Network Protocol RuggedRouter supports DNP 3 0 commonly used by utilities in process automation systems DNP3 protocol messages specify source and destination addresses A destination address specifies which device should process the data and the source address specifies which device sent the message Having both destination and source addresses satisfies at least one requirement for peer to peer communication since the receiver knows where to dire
248. et as desired The Network address and Netmask fields define a subnet containing a span of addresses to assign Within a subnet you can create hosts groups of hosts and address pools 27 2 4 DHCP Group Configuration Note that the menu interfaces for creating a DHCP Group Configuration and for editing an existing one are the same only the title differs Create versus Edit Revision 1 14 1 246 RX1000 RX1100 27 Configuring The DHCP server Module Index WS zz zu Se BE Group Details Group description Hosts in this group H Group assigned to a i Toplevel gt Use name as client hostname KI Default C secs Default secs Yes No Default Default lease time None 7 Maximum lease time This server Server name KG e 3 Boot filename e e Boot file server f Lease length for BOOTP i clients Dynamic DNS enabled e Yes No Default Forever secs Lease end for BOOTP clients Dynamic DNS domain name gt gt Default f Never d Default _ Dynamic DNS reverse domain i Dynamic DNS hostname From client i Default 7 C Allow Deny v Ignore Default t Allow unknown clients Create Figure 27 4 DHCP Group Configuration The settings specific to the Create Edit Host Group menu are The Group description field is used to describe the group as desired The Use name as client
249. evant information is cut and pasted from window to window This module also includes tools to export and import the connection data The configuration can thus be generated at one router exported and imported at the remote router Revision 1 14 1 146 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN 16 1 1 9 IPsec and Router Interfaces The IPsec daemon requires router interfaces to exist before it starts If none of the interfaces needed by IPsec exist IPsec will check for them every minute until at least one does Note that in the unlikely event that IPsec uses multiple network interfaces a stop of any of those interfaces will cause all tunnels to stop IPsec may have to be manually restarted after configuring network interfaces when multiple tunnels exist 16 1 1 10 L2TPD L2TP stands for Layer Two Tunneling Protocol The main purpose of this protocol is to tunnel PPP packets through an IP network although it is also able to tunnel other layer 2 protocols On RuggedRouter L2TPd is used in conjunction with Openswan and PPP to provide support for establishing a secure private connection with the router using the Microsoft Windows VPN L2TP client Note L2TPD listens on UDP port 1701 The firewall will need to be configured to allow connections to L2TPD via IPSec but to prevent connections to L2TPD directly without using IPsec 16 2 IPsec VPN Configuration 16 2 1 VPN Main Menu Before Key Generation IPsec VPN
250. f Default is left selected the DHCP DNS or local resolv conf setup will be used Otherwise the address supplied will be used The Timeout field specifies the maximum time to wait before abandoning a lookup 23 7 Trace Menu The Trace Menu contains three sections providing the capability to trace network interfaces frame relay interfaces and serial server interfaces The latter two menus will appear only if you have configured frame relay or serial server interfaces Revision 1 14 1 206 RX1000 RX1100 23 Network Utilities 23 7 1 Tcpdump A Network Interface Tcpdump A Network Interface Interface to capture on wlppp Ka Maximum packets captured 20 maximum 1000 Maximum capture time 20 maximum 240 sec IT DNS Look up addresses IT Display link level header perform HEX ASCII dump verbosity off 1 2 M3 ignore hostname x protocols l ssh webmin traffic all traffic Ignore protocols l tcp upp J icmp arp vere ramp J ospr esp an Ports to trace 500 50 25 53 Tcpdump It Figure 23 7 Tcpdump Menu The Interface to capture on field specifies the interface to show traffic on The Maximum packets captured and Maximum capture time fields limit the amount of traffic captured The Lookup addresses field causes IP addresses to be resolved into domain names This can make tcpdump behave very slowly if DNS is not properly configured The Display link level header field causes this header t
251. f any interface The Network Configuration menu Apply Configuration button applies permanent changes and restart Ethernet networking If only temporary changes have been made the permanent configuration will be re applied In either table edit the desired interface by clicking on its link under the Name column 6 2 2 Editing Currently Active Interfaces Edit Active Interface Active Interface Parameters None 192 168 3 1 24 eth3 IP AddressiMask eu 20a dceff fe0a 1540 64 Status e Up Down Proxy ARP Yes No Media Type Auto Negotiation z Virtual Lan interfaces 0 Add virtual lan interface Save Delete Figure 6 3 Editing a Network Interface Revision 1 14 1 62 RX1000 RX1100 6 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces This menu allows you to make changes to the currently active interfaces The Save button will activate any changes and will not affect the permanent configuration The IP Address Mask field sets the IP address and mask for this interface You can assign multiple IPv4 or IPv6 addresses to the interface one on each line Please note that IPv6 address fe80 20a dcff fe0a 1540 64 in this example is the automatically assigned link local IPv6 address The Status field provides a way to disable the interface or bring it back into service The Proxy ARP fields display whether the interface has proxy arp activated The Media Type field displays the current media type Cop
252. f the cellular modem with respect to the cellular network Possible values are e Registered home e Registered roaming e Unregistered SIM Card Identification displays the ID of the SIM card currently installed in the cellular modem HSPA GPRS Modem Status The HSPA GPRS cellular modem lists mostly the same information as the Edge GPRS modem with some differences Modem Status Last updated on Thu Jul 16 19 39 36 2009 Type of Modem GSM GPRS EDGE UMTS HSDPA HSUPA Firmware version KI oz Gap mei 552974020848230 Received Signal Strength gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 54 8 79 dBm Network Operator Rogers Wireless 2 Network technology currently in use UMTS Network Registration Status Registered roaming SIM Card Indentification 89302370200990049290 Figure 13 6 Cellular Modem Status HSPA GPRS The IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity is a numeric identifier unique to the cellular modem card The Network technology currently in use field displays which network technology out of the ones listed as being supported in the Type of Modem field is currently in use between the modem and the network CDMA Modem Status The CDMA cellular modem lists several of the same fields with some additional differences Revision 1 14 1 115 RX1000 RX1100 13 Configuring PPP And The Cellular Modem Modem Status Last updated on Fri Jul 17 15 40 13 2009
253. f the tunnel configuration The Replace Sender s MAC address option signals the daemon at the tunnel egress to replace the sender s Ethernet MAC address in tunneled frames with the MAC address of output Ethernet interface By default the source MAC address of all tunneled frames remain intact Help Edit L2 Tunnel L2 Tunnel Ethemet Interface ethl v Ethernet Type ISO Add Ethernet Type None v Others Remote Daemon eth4 Add a new deamon None vf Remote IP Replace Sender s MAC address Save Delete amp Return to L2 Tunnels Figure 26 7 Edit Generic L2 Tunnel The menu to edit a Generic L2 Tunnel configuration adds only two fields to the creation menu described above The existing list of configured Ethernet Types for the tunnel and a list of Remote Daemon items Note that in this context a Remote Daemon may be either the IP address of a remote daemon or the name of a local Ethernet interface Revision 1 14 1 235 RX1000 RX1100 26 Configuring Layer 2 Tunnels 26 2 5 GOOSE Statistics Menu Help GOOSE Statistics Refresh Continuous Display Ethernet Statistics Interface L2 MAC Address Rx Frames Tx Frames Rx Chars Tx Chars Errors eth2 0002 01 0c cd 01 00 00 0 D D D D Connection Statistics Interface L2 MAC Address Remote IP Rx Packets Tx Packets Rx Chars Tx Chars Errors eth2 0002 01 0c cd 01 00 00 172 16 0 1 0 D D D D
254. fic default route VRRP uses an election protocol to dynamically assign responsibility for the virtual router to one of the routers in the group This router is called the VRRP Master If the Master or optionally its WAN connection fails the alternate i e backup routers in the group elect a new Master The new master provides the virtual IP address and issues a gratuitous ARP to inform the network of where the gateway can be reached Because the host s default route does not change and MAC address is updated packet loss at the hosts is limited to the amount of time required to elect a new router 19 1 1 3 VRRP Terminology Each physical router running VRRP is known as a VRRP Router Two or more VRRP Routers can be configured to form a Virtual Router Each VRRP Router may participate in one or more Virtual Routers Revision 1 14 1 186 RX1000 RX1100 19 Configuring VRRP Each Virtual Router has a user configured Virtual Router Identifier VRID and an Virtual IP address or set of IP addresses on the shared LAN Hosts on the shared LAN are configured to use these addresses as the default gateway One router in the Virtual Router Group will be elected as the Master all other routers in the group will be Backups Each router in the group will run at a specific Priority The router with the highest priority is elected Master The value of Priority varies from 1 to 255 VRRP can also monitor a specified interface an
255. figuration Configuration Figure 34 23 SNMP Main Configuration Menu Configuring SNMP on RuggedRouter requires that the SNMP daemon be running Enable snmpd the snmp daemon via the use the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu Note Prior to ROX 1 10 0 SNMP was manually configured used the com2sec group view and access directives If so configured the SNMP menu will prompt you to convert the configuration to one it can manage 34 6 2 System Configuration System Configuration System Variables System name RMS 0 System location Maint shed3 System contact Dept SL System description former 15 27 mgmt Save Figure 34 24 System Configuration Menu The System name System location System contact and System description fields configure descriptive parameters for the router Revision 1 14 1 293 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 6 3 Network Addressing Configuration For reference the set of currently configured and active IP addresses is listed near the top of the page Client IP Address Source IP IP Address Figure 34 25 Network Addressing Configuration Menu Client Address The Client address Source IP field specifies the address from which snmpd will send notifications If the field is blank the default behaviour will be to transmit the notification from the IP address of the interface from which the message leaves the router Snmpd will re
256. file Search Figure 2 7 Webmin Events Log This menu allows you to search the Webmin log for changes made by yourself or other administrators Revision 1 14 1 38 RX1000 RX1100 3 Configure Webmin Users 3 Configure Webmin Users 3 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuring Webmin users e Displaying and removing existing login sessions e Setting up password restrictions 3 2 Webmin User and Group Fundamentals When the Webmin package is installed for the first time an account for the user root exists on the router Besides the root account three groups or privilege levels are defined admin operator and guest e Users belonging to the admin group have full access to all Webmin modules e Users belonging to the operator group have full access to most Webmin modules with the following exceptions e Webmin Configuration e Webmin Event Log e Webmin Users e Scheduled Commands e Scheduled Cron Jobs e System Hostname e System Time e SSH Server e Backup And Restore e Upgrade System e Upload Download Files e Users belonging to the guest group can only view configuration and statistics but can not change them Besides this limitation they also have no access to the modules forbidden to the operator group listed above The root user must always be defined New Webmin users can be created and deleted and must belong to one of the three afore
257. for the IP datagram This reduces the MTU of PPPoE interfaces to 1492 bytes Packets received by hosts via Ethernet that are sized to the Ethernet MTU will be too large for the PPPoE connections MTU and will be fragmented Large packets from hosts on the Internet will be fragmented by the ISP The router will re assemble these packets but at the cost of increased latency Configuring smaller MTUs at your hosts may reduce latency 11 1 2 3 Bridged Mode In bridged mode the router simply employs the ADSL interface as a carrier of Ethernet frames The interface will be created at boot time with a 1500 byte MTU No authentication information is required for bridged mode Your ISP will provide you with one or more IP addresses and an appropriate subnet mask Your ISP will also suggest a DNS server which you can configure via the Networking Network Configuration DNS Client menu 11 1 2 4 Location Of Interfaces And Labeling Unlike the Ethernet ports which are statically located the location of ADSL ports in your router depends upon the number of ports and how they were ordered Refer to the labeled hardware image as presented in the Webmin home page To make labeling easy to understand all T1E1 T3 DDS and ADSL ports are assigned a unique port number that relates to the LEDs on the status panel 11 1 2 5 LED Designations The RuggedRouter includes two sources of LED indicated information about ADSL lines the ADSL card itself and the
258. fore it has to receive the next poll When polling is performed network delays may cause the broadcast and next poll to arrive at the remote server at the same time Configuring a turnaround delay will enforce a minimum separation time between each message sent out the port Note that turnaround delays do not need to be configured at the host computer side and may be disabled there 24 1 4 TcpModBus Server Application The TcpModbus Server application is used to transport Modbus requests and responses across IP networks The source of the polls is a Modbus master a host computer that issues the polls over a serial line A TcpModbus Client application such as that implemented by the RuggedServer accepts Modbus polls on a serial line from a master and determines the IP address of the corresponding RTU The client then encapsulates the message in TCP and forwards the frame to a Server Gateway or native TcpModbus RTU Returning responses are stripped of their TCP headers and issued to the master The TcpModbus Server application accepts TCP encapsulated modbus messages from Client Gateways and native masters After removing the TCP headers the messages are issued to the RTU Responses are TCP encapsulated and returned to the originator A native TcpModbus master is one that can encapsulate the Modbus polls in TCP and directly issue them to the network 24 1 4 1 Local Routing At The Server Gateway The Server Gateway supports up
259. frame will be transmitted with the highest 802 1p priority level p4 Packets received from the network will also be forwarded to any other remote daemons included in the group 26 1 2 Generic Layer 2 Tunnel Fundamentals The Layer 2 Tunnel Daemon also supports a generic mode of operation based on the Ethernet type of Layer 2 data traffic seen by the router Multiple tunnels may be configured each one with e Ethernet type e Tunnel ingress Ethernet interface e Tunnel egress either another locally connected Ethernet interface or the remote IP address of another Layer 2 Tunnel daemon instance running on another RuggedRouter 26 1 2 1 Generic Tunnel Implementation Details For each tunnel configured the daemon monitors the specified Ethernet interface for Ethernet Layer 2 frames of the specified type If the configured egress is another local Ethernet port frames are simply forwarded on that port unmodified If the configured tunnel egress is a remote IP address the daemon encapsulates the frames and forwards them to that address where a corresponding Layer 2 Tunnel Daemon must be configured to receive tunneled frames for local retransmission Encapsulation headers are stripped in order that the retransmitted frames are identical to those received at the tunnel ingress Other notes e Source and destination Ethernet MAC addresses are preserved whether they are forwarded locally or remotely e Packets received from the net
260. g settings The Allow IPv6 Configuration field determines whether IPv6 may be configured via Webmin The Ignore All ICMP ECHO field corresponds to the kernel icmp_echo_ignore_all setting Setting Ignore All ICMP ECHO to yes will cause the kernel to reject incoming ICMP ECHO request packets The Ignore ICMP Broadcasts field corresponds to the kernel icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts setting Setting Ignore ICMP Broadcasts to yes will cause the kernel to reject incoming ICMP ECHO request packets if their destination address is a broadcast address The Syncookie Protection field corresponds to the kernel tcp_syncookie setting Setting Syncookie Protection to yes will cause the kernel to protect against SYN flood attacks The Send ICMP Redirect field corresponds to the kernel send_redirect setting Consider a networked host H1 sending an IP datagram to a remote host H2 H1 is on the same network segment as two routers R1 and R2 If host H2 is reachable via R2 and H1 sends an IP datagram to H2 via R1 then Revision 1 14 1 51 RX1000 RX1100 5 Configuring Networking assuming that R1 has a route to H2 via R2 R1 will send an ICMP redirection message to H1 informing it that the route to H2 is via R2 Setting Send ICMP Redirect to no will cause the kernel not to send an ICMP redirect message even if one would normally be sent 5 3 2 Dummy Interface Help Dummy Interface Dummy Interface Parameters IP Address 172 165 2
261. gs EE 109 12 2 8 Current Routes A Interface Table AEN 109 13 Configuring PPP And The Cellular Modem AAA 110 E Ee VEC UOT EE 110 13 1 1 PPP and Cellular Modem Fundamentals ccccccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeteeneeees 110 13 2 PPP Cellular Modem Configuration ANEN 111 13 2 1 Cellular Modem Account Activation 111 13 2 2 Cellular Modem Configuration EE 113 13 2 3 Modem PPP Client Connections eeugrggiegeeresegued eege dee eEuN eege SCC 116 13 2 4 Modem PPP Client EE 117 13 2 5 PPP Logs PPP Connection Loge sisi crcscnsasichedausadvnebed naiiten cia cedesamapernieresiest 117 13 2 6 Current Route and Interfaces Table AAA 117 14 Configuring Tie TUE 118 Ae Te EEN eege EE Oa Ee ee ee Maret 118 14 2 Firewall Fundamentals iste secs a eeticatenacetenteicceciats cteteensteateteenscadsensacetearomacernde canted 118 14 2 1 Stateless vs Stateful Firewalls AANEREN 118 14 2 2 Linux netfilter iptables And The Shoreline Firewall ccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 118 14 2 3 Network Address Translation c cccccceeeeeeseececeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeseesseeeneeeeeeeees 119 14 2 4 Port ForwatdiNg Stegen ee ei 119 14 3 Sh rewall Quick Set D EE 120 14 4 ShoreWall Terminology And Concepnts A 121 VASAT Ee 121 EE E ehn 121 TAA H e 122 DAA e EE 122 14 4 5 Masquerading And SNAT A 123 144 6 RUES i Eed EES 124 14 5 Configuring The Firewall And EE 125 14 5 1 Policy Based Virtual Private Networking A 125 14 5 2 Virtual
262. guration Figure 34 6 Industrial Defender Agent Configuration The Industrial Defender Agent depends for proper functionality on a key retrieved from an SEM unit The Webmin Industrial Defender Agent General Configuration page provides a three step approach to configure the Industrial Defender Agent by e Configuring the IP addresses of the SEM unit and RuggedRouter e Launching a key exchange sequence with the SEM e Helping to configure remote system logging operation 34 3 2 1 Configuring Industrial Defender Addresses Industrial Defender Agent General Configuration IP addresses saved Industrial Defender Parameters Appliance Address 10 159 9 6 Source Address 10 159 9 8 Save Changes Industrial Defender requires an agent key for the current Appliance address Enter the required password and select Obtain a new key to obtain one from the Appliance address listed above Password Obtain anew key No key was found a key must first be obtained before enabling remote system logging to a SEM unit Add remote system logging to the SEM unit Return to Industrial Defender Agent Figure 34 7 Industrial Defender Configuration IP addresses saved Revision 1 14 1 281 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router The Appliance Address is the IP address of the SEM unit The IP address of the RuggedRouter must also be specified as Source Address Once this is done save these addresses by clicking on
263. hat key Revision 1 14 1 178 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing 17 2 5 3 RIP Interfaces RIP Interface Configuration ethi Parameter Value blank default Description Possible values default value Passive Interface passive Control interface passive setting not passive Receive Version 12 ei RIP version to accept from other routers 1 2 1 2 both 1 2 Send Version 2 si RIP version to transmit to other routers 1 2 1 2 both 2 8 None Authentication P String ruggedcom Authentication to use None Specified string Specified key chain None Key Chain main gt Authentication Text Mode of authentication to use Plain text MDS RFC compliant MDS old ripd Mode compatible Text Use Split Horizon Yes with poisoned reverse gt Use a split horizon No Yes Yes with poisoned reverse No Save Figure 17 19 RIP Interfaces Parameters specific to one interface are configured here Each interface on the router is listed Clicking on settings displays a menu of configuration options for that interface Clicking Remove inactive interfaces purges the list of any interfaces which are no longer configured on the router The Passive Interface option controls if an interface is active or passive Passive interfaces do not send RIP updates to other routers The Receive Version field controls which versions of RIP messages will be accepted from Ei
264. hat will cause the initial event 34 3 Industrial Defender RX1100 owners can use the Industrial Defender security appliance for central monitoring The central monitoring facility is called a Security Event Management SEM unit This section details how to activate the Industrial Defender Agent on a RuggedRouter so that it can periodically report to an SEM unit Details and recommendations on using the Industrial Defender system can be found in the Industrial Defender documentation 34 3 1 What information is sent to an SEM unit The Industrial Defender Agent will currently forward the following information to an SEM unit on a periodic basis e Temperatures e Voltages e User logins logouts e Network Interface traffic Revision 1 14 1 280 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router e CPU load e Disk usage In addition when syslog is properly configured the SEM will be able to collect system logging information for further processing These include but are not limited to e Webmin logins both attempted and complete e Webmin actions e SSH logins 34 3 2 Industrial Defender Configuration Help D Industrial Defender Agent 492 1 2 248 Industrial Defender Agent General Configuration Industrial Defender Log The Industrial Defender daemon needs to be configured with the security manager agent key Restart Industrial Defender Agent Click this button to restart the Industrial Defender Agent with the current confi
265. he RuggedRouter can be used to support routing over Ethernet T1 E1 T3 ADSL DDS and Frame Relay as well as act as a Serial server and time synchronization device Applicable Firmware Revision This guide is applicable to RuggedRouter ROX 1 14 1 software revision Who Should Use This User Guide This guide is to be used by network technical support personnel who are familiar with the operation of networks Others who might find the book useful are network and system planners system programmers and line technicians How To Use This User Guide Each chapter has been prepared with a feature description an application section and a description of the default mode of operation It is recommended that you use this guide along with the following applicable documents RuggedRouter Installation Guide Rugged MediaConverter Installation Guide RuggedCom Fiber Guide Gauntlet Command and Control Center CCC User Manual Gauntlet Virtual Polling Controller VPC User Manual Gauntlet System Installation Manual Gauntlet System Best Practices Revision 1 14 1 19 RX1000 RX1100 About this User Guide Document Conventions This publication uses the following conventions Note Means reader take note Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in this guide Helpful Hint This type of note often indicates useful shortcuts or methods employed by other RuggedCom customers Quick S
266. he range of services that communicate solely via Layer 2 protocols i e at the level of Ethernet by tunneling them over routed IP networks The Layer 2 Tunnel Daemon supports the IEC61850 GOOSE protocol as well as a generic mechanism for tunneling by Ethernet type This chapter familiarizes the user with 26 1 1 Configuring GOOSE tunnels Configuring generic Layer 2 tunnels Viewing tunnel status and statistics Tracing tunnel activity 1IEC61850 GOOSE Fundamentals IEC61850 is an international standard for substation automation It is a part of the International Electrotechnical Commission s IEC Technical Committee 57 TC57 architecture for electric power systems An important feature of IEC61850 is the fast transfer of event data Transfers of Generic Substation Events GSEs are accomplished through the GOOSE Generic Object Oriented Substation Event protocol IEC61850 uses Layer 2 multicast frames to distribute its messages and hence is incapable of operating outside of a switched Ethernet Network The GOOSE tunnel feature provides a capability to bridge GOOSE frames over a WAN GOOSE tunnels provide the following features GOOSE traffic is bridged over the WAN via UDP IP One GOOSE traffic source can be mapped to multiple remote router Ethernet interfaces in mesh fashion To reduce bandwidth consumption GOOSE daemons may be located at each of the legs and at the center of a star network The centrally located daemon wi
267. he upgrade would fail as the T1 E1 link was taken down Instead T1 E1 software upgrades modify only the software on the disk You must schedule a reboot in order to run the new version of T1 E1 software 7 2 9 Upgrading Firmware RuggedCom T1 E1 interfaces reside upon PCI interface cards These cards contain FLASH memory which from time to time will be required to be upgraded The upgrade process will take down the T1 E1 links upgrade the firmware and then restart the interfaces Note The upgrade process requires upwards of 15 minutes for each PCI interface card Because of the lengthy duration required to upgrade the interfaces RuggedCom does not automatically perform the firmware upgrade Instead the scheduling of the upgrade is left to the user The upgrade can be performed by signing on to the platform via the console or ssh and running the command usr sbin update wanfirmware If the ssh connection has been made over an active T1 E1 interface the connection will fail but the upgrade will continue The upgrade can also be scheduled for a specific time by using the System menu Scheduled Commands sub menu Set the Commands to execute field to usr sbin update wanfirmware proceed set the Run in directory field to root and set the Run at time field to the desired upgrade time After the upgrade completes alarms recommending an upgrade will be cleared Revision 1 14 1 78 RX1000 RX1100 8 Configuring
268. hell Accessing through Console port 24 SSH 24 Shutdown 46 SNMP 292 Access Control 294 Configuration 293 MIB Support 297 Network Addressing 294 System 293 Trap Configuration 296 SSH Access Control 259 Authentication 258 Configuring 257 Fundamentals 257 Listen on address 259 Networking 259 TCP Forwarding 259 SSL Certificate Warnings 30 Static Routes 52 53 T T1 E1 Interfaces Configuration 68 Converting between T1 and E1 71 E1 Settings 71 Frame Relay Logical Interfaces 72 Revision 1 14 1 334 RX1000 RX1100 Index PPP Logical Interfaces 73 W T1 Settings 71 wanpipemon 208 Upgrading Firmware 78 Web Interface 29 Upgrading Software 78 78 Web Server 323 T1E1 Interfaces Upgrading Software 90 90 T3E3 Interfaces Configuration 80 Editing E3 Parameters 82 Editing T3 Parameters 81 Frame Relay Logical Interfaces 82 PPP Logical Interfaces 83 Upgrading Software 84 Tcpdump 207 Telnet 261 Fundamentals 261 Server Configuration 261 Time Changing Through setup menu 27 Changing through Webmin 49 Timezone Changing Through setup menu 27 Traffic Control 137 Classes 139 Fundamentals 137 Interfaces 138 optimizing 143 Rules 141 V Virtual Lan Interfaces Adding 63 Supported Functions 60 VPN Configuring 144 Connections 152 152 Encryption Protocol 145 Fundamentals 144 159 NAT Traversal 149 Policy Based 145 Pre shared Keys 151 Public Key 151 151 Server C
269. hgRyUj Lhv2raPa4SF59sd9aa5 LrNiyRyHU3t ECxOGwb r4MGmHXx bDU8xSLTYn wrk ps 7peQs4JpoxJ j sORwGaQwWRrLSbYiS9zJ2gQdAMvbaKgM ABMZS2uE4xXj FnYLtFW J41YVsj j JerEwygqHefUYESA7ikKngGHscYKPpi4g8Gw8e2qeI5 SE Default Automatic Default route IP address Figure 16 10 Editing A VPN Connection Part 2 The Public IP address fields determine the IP address of the side of the connection being edited Check the Address or hostname field and provide a fixed IP address or hostname If this side reflects a remote client whose IP address changes select Automatic any Use From default route if the host s IP is dynamically assigned Revision 1 14 1 153 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN The System identifier fields provide IPsec with a way to determine which section of the connection applies to which host Left to Default the parameter will use the public IP address from above Set to None the router will use an empty id You can override these with an IP address or hostname The Private subnet behind system fields determine if this system has an internal network connected to it that the other host should be granted access to Enter an IP network address and mask into this field If you enter a subnet of 0 0 0 0 0 in this field this connection will serve as a default route for all traffic The System s public key fields provide an RSA key if RSA keying is to be used If you want to use secret keying select
270. his can be done in the Servers menu SSH Server Networking sub menu The router s local hostname may configured in the System Menu System Hostname sub menu The router may be configured to log to a remote server by the Maintenance menu System Logs sub menu See the chapter Maintaining The Router for more details The router s DNS settings may configured in the DNS Clients sub menu You may also specify the IP addresses of frequently used hosts See the chapter Configuring Networking for more details Physical Interface Related 17 20 21 22 23 24 Ethernet port parameters may be changed in the Networking menu Ethernet sub menu The Ethernet Interfaces sub menu will configure the IP address subnet mask gateway address proxy arping and media type of each interface See the chapter Configuring Ethernet Interfaces for more details If your router is equipped with T1 E1 WAN interfaces the Networking menu T1 E1 sub menu will allow you to configure them with Frame Relay or PPP connections See the chapter Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 for more details If your router is equipped with T3 WAN interfaces the Networking menu T3 sub menu will allow you to configure them with Frame Relay or PPP connections See the chapter Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T3 for more details If your router is equipped with DDS interfaces the Networking menu DDS sub menu will allow you to
271. ho Subject Router hostname rebooted gt tmp mail echo To controlcenter ruggedcom com gt gt tmp mail echo Reboot ocurred on date gt gt tmp mail echo gt gt tmp mail cat tmp mail ssmtp controlcenter ruggedcom com rm f tmp mail Save Save And Run Now Figure 4 2 Bootup and Shutdown Part 2 The actions may be a series of commands that can be executed at the command line Each entered line is executed independently of the previous line so change directory commands will not be effective Always specify the absolute path of files used in commands Selecting Save And Run Now will run the script and show its output allowing you to debug it 4 3 Change Password Command Change Password Change Password This module can be used to change the root password used to login with webmin ssh and console rootlogin password Leave unchanged Set to prre Save Re enter Figure 4 3 System Menu Change Password Command This command changes only the root account password used to login to Webmin and the root account via the serial console or SSH Revision 1 14 1 46 RX1000 RX1100 4 Configuring The System 4 4 Scheduled Commands Scheduled Commands New scheduled command Run as user sea Run on date 27 May 2005 Runattime po Current date 27 May 2005 Current time 10 10 Run in directory j Commands to execute Create Figure 4 4 Schedul
272. hostname ER Distance Define an administrative distance unset 1 255 unset not used IP Mask sbi E enable Always comparing MED from different neighbors enable disable disable Defaut local Local preference value high value means preferred in IBGP 0 4294967295 100 preference Keep Gen bs ciel Feb MED path among paths advertised from neighboring AS enable disable SE enable Redistribute Redistribute routes for directly connected interfaces to BGP area routers Connected Lo enable disable 0 16 disabled unset erable 1 Redistribute Static Redistribute static routes to BGP area routers enable disable 0 16 disabled unset metric erable fo Redistribute Kernel Redistribute kernel routes to BGP area routers enable disable 0 16 disabled unset metric enable Redistribute OSPF Redistribute ospf routes to BGP area routers enable disable 0 16 disabled unset metric fenanie Redistribute RIP metric Autonomous System ID vc Note When AS ID is changed all BGP configurations related to this AS will be removed Identifier of router Often the main IP address of the router A B C D highest IP of Router ID system Save Redistribute rip routes to BGP area routers enable disable 0 16 disabled unset Figure 17 8 BGP Global Parameter Menu The Enable Password field sets the password to be used for the bgpd enable command This is used by the telnet
273. ic Type Time Delay in ns m ns ft Solid Polyethylene 4 62 1 54 Foam Polyethylene FE 3 81 1 27 Foam Polystyrene FS 3 36 1 12 Revision 1 14 1 265 RX1000 RX1100 32 Configuring IRIGB And IEEE1588 Dielectric Type Time Delay in ns m ns ft Air Space Polyethylene ASP 3 45 3 63 1 15 1 21 Solid Teflon ST 4 38 1 46 Air Space Teflon AST 3 39 3 60 1 13 1 20 32 2 IRIGB IEEE1588 Configuration 32 2 1 IRIGB IEEE1588 Main Menu Help IRIGB IEEE1588 ry sk ES g EES zb Mee MG e E KS m RS m RS General Configuration IRIGB Configuration IEEE1588 IRIGB Status IEEE1588 Status IRIGB LOG Configuration Figure 32 1 IRIGB 1588 Main Menu This menu allows you to configure IRIGB and IEEE1588 display its current status and review historical changes 32 2 2 General Configuration General Configuration Reference Clock Selection GPS IEEE1588 NTP LOCAL Cable Compensation 3 nanoseconds Save Figure 32 2 IRIGB IEEE1588 General Configuration menu This menu allow you to configure general parameters The Reference Clock Selection field selects the order in which to prefer reference clocks The Cable Compensation field specifies the value in nanoseconds that will be used to compensate for the cable type and length The compensation is done using integer nanosecond values Fractional decimal values will be truncated 32 2 3 IRIGB Configuration Help IRIGB Configuration
274. ic from 204 18 45 0 24 which was originally directed to the firewall at 130 252 100 69 to the host at 192 168 1 3 in the local zone If the firewall supports another public IP address e g 130 252 100 70 a similar rule could map requests to another host 4 and 5 These rules allow the firewall to issue icmp requests to the Internet and to respond to icmp echo requests from the authorized subnet Rules are defined in the file etc shorewall rules and are modified from the Firewall Rules menu 14 5 Configuring The Firewall And VPN 14 5 1 Policy Based Virtual Private Networking Begin configuration by creating local network and vpn zones Identify the network interface that carries the encrypted IPsec traffic and make this interface part of zone ANY in the interfaces menu as it will be carrying both traffic for both zones Visit the Zone Hosts menu and for the network interface that carries the encrypted IPsec traffic create a zone host with zone VPN the correct subnet and the IPsec zone option checked If you plan to have VPN tunnels to multiple remote sites ensure that a zone host entry exists for each or collapse them into a single subnet Create another zone host for the same interface with a network zone using a wider subnet mask such as 0 0 0 0 0 It is important that the vpn zone be declared before the net zone since the more specific von zone subnet must be inspected first Host Zone Interface Subnet IPsec Zone vpn wippp 1
275. ication widely used in PPP and enables a point to point connection to be established in the normally multipoint architecture of Ethernet As your PPPoE connection is established a PPP interface will be created The name will be pppX where X is the same as the interface number Use this interface name in firewall rules 1 2 1 Authentication Addresses and DNS Servers PPP authentication utilizes PAP or CHAP Your ISP will provide you with a user ID and password which you will enter in the GUI The authentication process will assign a local IP address and Revision 1 14 1 94 RX1000 RX1100 11 Configuring PPPoE Bridged Mode On ADSL addresses of the ISPs DNS servers to the router You should use these DNS servers unless you wish to provide your own You will obtain either a dynamic or static IP from your ISP Firewall configuration should be performed as is appropriate 11 1 2 2 PPPoE MTU Issues The use of PPPoE introduces a limitation of the maximum length of packets The maximum Ethernet frame is 1518 bytes long 14 bytes are consumed by the header and 4 by the frame check sequence leaving 1500 bytes for the payload For this reason the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU of an Ethernet interface is usually 1500 bytes This is the largest IP datagram which can be transmitted over the interface without fragmentation PPPoE adds another six bytes of overhead and the PPP protocol field consumes two bytes leaving 1492 bytes
276. icrosoft System Installer Version e g apache_2 0 55 win32 x86 no_ssl msi as well as platform specific notes Download and install this version Verify the web server by opening a web browser on another host on the network and entering the URL http followed by the IP address Apache was installed with Note that you may also verify Apache from a browser on the web server itself by browsing http localhost http localhost If properly set up the Apache default web page will be shown If you can see this it means that the installation of the Apache web server software on this system was successful You may now add content to this directory and replace this page Seeing this instead of the website you expected This page is here because the site administrator has changed the configuration of this web server Please contact the person responsible for maintaining this server with questions The Apache Software Foundation which wrote the web server software this site administrator is using has nothing to do with maintaining this site and cannot help resolve configuration issues The Apache documentation has been included with this distribution You are free to use the image below on an Apache powered web server Thanks for using Apache eZ APACHE Figure C 1 Apache Default Web Page Apache serves the web pages contained in the directory known as the DocumentRoot You must change the document root by from the desktop clicking Start
277. idth and the ability to serve an adequate number of http sessions Each software release will require approximately 50 Mb of disk space Note that this figure includes an entire software image most upgrades will involve the transfer of only a small fraction of this amount A large number of such releases could easily be stored on a system of only modest capabilities In practice only one or two releases are usually all that need be kept The bandwidth requirements are determined by the many factors including the number of routers size of upgrade when the routers upgrade bandwidth limiting at each router and network bandwidth capability Most web servers can serve files to the limit of the network interface bandwidth so even a modest e g 486 class machine would prove acceptable The server should be able to accept at least as many http or ftp connections as there are upgradable routers in the network In practice you will configure the routers to have staggered upgrade times in order to minimize the impact of upgrading on the network A large upgrade or a low bandwidth limiting value at each router may cause all the routers to be upgrading at any one time A 2 Initial Repository Setup You must create a directory on the web server to hold the releases for the router The directory can have any name such as ruggedrouter Some administrators like to designate one router to test the impact of new software This will require a dire
278. ields control distribution of connected routes When enabled OSPF will advertise routes to directly connected interfaces to other OSPF routers in the area Normally only routes that fall within the scope of the network areas will be advertised The Redistribute Static fields control the distribution of static routes created using the Network Configuration Routing and Default Route menu When this parameter is enabled OSPF will advertise these static routes to other OSPF routers in the area Normally only routes that fall within the scope of the network areas will be advertised The Redistribute Kernel fields control distribution of kernel routes When enabled OSPF will advertise routes from the kernel routing table which includes static routes entered by the administrator to other OSPF routers in the area Normally only routes that fall within the scope of the network areas will be advertised The Redistribute RIP fields control distribution of routes learned by RIP When enabled OSPF will advertise routes learned by RIP Revision 1 14 1 174 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing The Redistribute BGP fields control distribution of routes learned by BGP When enabled OSPF will advertise routes learned by BGP The Router ID field sets the router id to use for the ospf daemon This value is used as a unique identifier for the dynamic routing protocol to identify which router sent which route advertisement If it is not se
279. iguring Frame Relay PPP And T3 E3 Edit Logical Interface wifri6 T3 1 Frame Relay Parameters Station Type CPE FR DTE Interface Signalling type ANSI v Link Failure Leaves IP interface up v T391 10 T392 16 N391 6 N392 6 N393 4 EEK Type Off gt EEK Timer 5 Logical Interfaces on T3 1 Channel 1 Name DLCI Local Address Netmask Remote Address Description wifrl6 16 192 168 20 1 255 255 299 299 192 168 20 2 DLCI 16 wifri7 17 192 168 21 1 255 255 255 255 192 168 21 2 DLCI 17 Add another DLCI to this channel Save Delete this logical interface Figure 8 7 Edit Logical Interface Frame Relay 8 2 2 2 Editing A Logical Interface PPP Help Edit Logical Interface w1c1ppp T1 1 Channel 1 PPP Parameters Local Address Netmask Remote Address pranie Mape Description wlclppp 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 2 2 2 2 T1 Internet link Save Delete Figure 8 8 Edit Logical Interface PPP The Local IP Address field defines the IP address for the PPP interface The Netmask field displays the network address mask The value 255 255 255 255 indicates that the connection is point to point The Remote IP Address field defines the IP address for other side of the link This address is usually assigned by the network administrator or Internet service provider The Description field attaches a description to the logical interface viewable from the netw
280. ile of RIP Revision 1 14 1 180 RX1000 RX1100 18 Link Backup 18 Link Backup 18 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuring link backup e Obtaining system status e Testing link backup 18 1 1 Link Backup Fundamentals Link backup provides an easily configured means of raising a backup link upon the failure of a designated main link The main and backup links can be Ethernet CDMA or Dial Modem TE1 DDS ADSL or T3 The only requirement is that the main link be a permanent link raised at boot time The feature can back up to multiple remote locations managing multiple main backup link relationships When the backup link is a modem many profiles of dialed numbers can exist each serving as a distinct backup link The feature can back up a permanent high speed WAN link to a permanent low speed WAN link This is used when OSPF cannot be employed such as on public links The feature can be used to migrate the default route from the main to the backup link The time after a main link failure to backup link startup and the time after a main link recovery to backup link stop are configurable The status of the system and a method of testing fail over is provided 18 1 1 1 Path Failure Discovery In order to discover the failure of a primary path here through Network A the link backup daemon will both inspect the link status of the main link and send a regular ping to a designated hos
281. ill display an icon for the connection as shown in the next view of the VPN Configuration menu The Add defaults for all connections link allows you to create a profile that will apply to all connections for items such as key type encryption protocol and compression These defaults can then be overridden on a per connection basis The Add a new IPsec VPN connection link creates a new connection and its icon The Import connection from file link creates new connections from imported data Select the Server Configuration icon to configure server parameters Select the L2TPD Configuration icon to configure L2TP parameters Select the Pre shared Keys icon to create delete and edit pre shared keys Select the Show Public Keys icon to display the server s public key Select the IPsec Status icon to display information about the server s capabilities and any current connections After a VPN connection is created this menu will include a Start Connection button that can start or restart VPN connections This button is shown in the next view of the VPN Configuration menu The Apply Configuration button restarts the server to activate any configuration changes that have been made restarting VPN connections Revision 1 14 1 148 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN IPsec VPN Configuration Openswan version U2 2 0 K2 4 27 10 486 rr Existing VPN connections Sg e e e Defaults for all connecti
282. ime Enabling the PPP Client at the same time as the Dial in Console and or PPP Server is not recommended Rings before answer controls how many times to let the modem ring before answering a call if either of Dial in console or PPP Server is enabled Additional Modem AT Init Codes allows extra AT command codes to be entered if required Note that care must be taken to ensure the correctness of any AT command codes entered here as the router does not verify them A selection of supported AT codes for the Internal modem follow For equivalent codes for an external modem please refer to the documentation for the external modem used Blind dial XO Ignore dialtone busy signal Blind dial X4 Monitor and report dialtone busy signal default Guard tone control amp GO Disable guard tone default amp G1 Enable guard tone at 550Hz amp G2 Enable goard tone at 1800HZz Pulse dialing control amp PO Make break ratio of 39 61 at 10 pulses second default amp P1 Make break ratio of 33 67 at 10 pulses second amp P2 Make break ratio of 39 61 at 20 pulses second amp P3 Make break ratio of 33 67 at 20 pulses second Compression control CO0 Disable data compression negotiation C1 Enable MNP5 compression negotiation C2 Enable V 42bis compression negotiation Revision 1 14 1 103 RX1000 RX1100 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem C3 Enable MNP5 and V 42bis compression negotiat
283. imum assured bandwidth and a maximum permitted bandwidth The combined minimum of the classes on an interface must be no more than the total outbound bandwidth specified for the interface Each class is also assigned a priority and any bandwidth left over after each class has received its minimum allocation if needed will be allocated to the lowest priority class up until it reaches its maximum bandwidth after which the next priority is allocated more bandwidth When the specified total bandwidth for the interface is reached no further packets are sent and any further packets may be dropped if the interface queues are full Packets are assigned to classes on the outbound interface based on either a mark assigned to the packet or the ToS type of service field in the IP header If the ToS field matches a defined class then the packet is allocated to that class Otherwise it is allocated to any class that matches the mark assigned to the packet and if no class matches the mark then the packet is assigned to the default class Marks are assigned to packets either by the TC Rules based on any of anumber of parameters such as IP address port number protocol packet length and so on or by mapping an 802 1p VLAN CoS value to a MARK in the VLAN configuration of the incoming port Marks are also used to map back to an 802 1p CoS value on an outbound VLAN port 15 1 1 Traffic Control Example The goal of this example is to operate Ethernet por
284. inate Webmin will automatically restart after the upgrade completes after which time you may log back in 34 13 5 1 Notes on Software Upgrade Procedures ROX upgrades that involve a new Major release number generally require a router reboot after completion of the upgrade Minor releases will never require a reboot The release notes accompanying the upgrade will state whether a reboot will be necessary If a reboot is required a notice will appear to that effect upon clicking Upgrade Now and before beginning the upgrade The exception is the case of an unattended Automatic Upgrade If the upgrade must be done in two stages a notice to this effect will appear The first stage will consist of an upgrade to Webmin only After completion of the first stage of the upgrade launch the second stage of the full upgrade process by again running Upgrade All Packages Additional notifications may appear depending on the old and new ROX versions and on router hardware options Note If the currently installed version of ROX predates release 1 14 1 the upgrade procedure must be done in two stages While the first stage Webmin upgrade is in progress there will be no visual feedback from the system since the web interface itself will be shut down This upgrade lasts up to 5 minutes after which time it is recommended to click refresh to verify that the Webmin upgrade has completed correctly Once the upgrade has completed it may be necessa
285. inations Please refer to Section 34 12 2 Remote Logging for more detail on log destinations Two links Add a new system log are provided above and below the list in order to configure new system logs Each entry in the list displays information for a particular log managed by syslog e Log destination displays the location or logging method of the log e Active displays whether syslog is logging messages to the log e Messages selected displays the filtering criteria used to include messages in the log ROX implements a set of default system logs as described in Syslog Factory Defaults In support of remote syslogging the Remote Syslog Source IP Bind Interface field makes it possible to bind the selected network interface s IP address to syslog Syslog messages transmitted by the router will have the selected interface s IP address as their source If none is selected the source IP address will be that of the network interface from which messages are transmitted to the remote syslog server Any changes made using this menu including adding or modifying system log configurations or changing the IP Bind Interface address require clicking Apply Changes in order to take effect If the syslog daemon is not yet running the button will instead read Start Syslog Server Revision 1 14 1 306 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 12 1 Syslog Factory Defaults Although new logs can be created and the type of informat
286. incoming PPP connections Rings before answer H Number of rings to wait before answering 1 10 Additional Modem AT Init Codes Any extra AT codes to use when initializing the modem Save Figure 12 3 Edit External Modem Configuration These menus allow you to configure modem settings and usage features The Dial in console field allows the modem to answer incoming calls and present a login screen in the same way that the console serial port does The login used for the Dial in console is the same as that used for SSH and serial console logins Note If RADIUS authentication is enabled the Dial In Console login will be in the LOGIN group and not in the PPP group See the section RADIUS Authentication for details The PPP server field configures the router to answer incoming modem calls and negotiate a PPP connection to the calling system to provide network access Revision 1 14 1 102 RX1000 RX1100 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem The RADIUS Authentication field will cause incoming PPP connections to be authenticated against the RADIUS servers configured in the Maintenance menu RADIUS Authentication sub menu Note The Dial in Console and PPP Server can be enabled at the same time The router will automatically detect whether an incoming call is PPP or console only If PPP Client mode is active it will try to maintain the PPP link at all times and hence block incoming calls most of the t
287. ing The Hostname and Domain The Set Hostname command sets the hostname and the domain Rf ruggedcom com Figure 1 5 Hostname and Domain Configuration Menu 1 3 4 Configuring RADIUS Authentication The Set RADIUS Authentication command configures the address of a RADIUS server if one is available Figure 1 6 RADIUS Server Configuration menu The Hostname IP field configures the RADIUS server s IP address The Port Number field sets the port number used by the RADIUS server The default port for RADIUS is 1812 The Shared Secret field configures a unique password used to authenticate communications with this server Note that the shared secret must also be configured on the RADIUS server for the router being configured The Timeout field sets the maximum time in seconds to wait for responses from the RADIUS server before aborting a transaction The entry created for both LOGIN and PPP Login can be changed from the web interface 1 3 5 Enabling And Disabling The SSH and Web Server By default SSH and Web Management are enabled The Disable SSH and Disable Web Management commands allows these services to be disabled The servers will be immediately Revision 1 14 1 26 RX1000 RX1100 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router stopped If access to the shell has been made through ssh the session will continue but no new sessions will be allowed Upon disabling the services the titles in the main menu wil
288. ingle hosts subnets of hosts pools potentially discontinuous ranges of addresses shared networks a single physical networks for which distinct subnets of hosts coexist and request addresses and groups The meaning of each option is the same in each case while the type of target determines which clients it applies to In DHCP settings at a more specific level overrides higher levels For example you can configure a DNS server for all clients the create a group that overrides the setting This allows defaults to be set at a high level to apply to most clients while exceptions can be places just where they are needed Revision 1 14 1 239 RX1000 RX1100 27 Configuring The DHCP server Many settings are only supported by certain specific types of clients and are ignored by the majority of clients Basic options you should pay attention to include Address ranges The range of addresses to use for dynamic IP clients Default lease time The default length of leases assigned to clients if the client doesn t request a lease length Maximum lease time The maximum length of leases allowed to clients If a client requests a higher value it will be refused Client hostname The hostname the client should use Default routers The default gateway the client should use Domain name The DNS domain name the client should use DNS servers The IPs of the DNS servers the client should use NTP servers The IPs of the NTP servers th
289. ink is not currently active on the modem If the Refresh button is clicked while a PPP link is active the information displayed is that obtained prior to the establishment of the PPP link In order to obtain current modem status information an active PPP link on the cellular modem must be deactivated i e by selecting none for the Modem PPP Client Connection Connection to establish at boot time The fields and format of the Modem Status display varies among installed cellular modem types The fields displayed for the Edge GPRS modem see above are as follows Revision 1 14 1 114 RX1000 RX1100 13 Configuring PPP And The Cellular Modem Edge GPRS Modem Status Type of Modem lists the cellular network standards supported by the modem currently installed This information may be required by the cellular network provider in order to determine optimal compatibility between the installed cellular modem and the network Firmware version displays firmware revision information for the installed cellular modem Received Signal Strength indicates the signal level received by the cellular modem from the cell site Network Operator displays the identity of the wireless network provider to which the cellular modem is currently connected Enhanced Network Operator displays the name of Mobile Virtual Network MVN that the cellular modem is currently connected to Network Registration Status displays the current registration status o
290. interface to control access to the bgpd configuration The Telnet Password field sets the password to be used for telnet access to bgpd This is used as the bgpd login password when locally telnetting to port 2605 of the router The Hostname field sets the hostname for the bgpd daemon This value is only used as a a reference for convenience The telnet interface prompt will contain this hostname The router s system wide hostname is used if this field is left blank The Distance field sets the administrative distance to use for all routes unless overridden by other distance settings The Always Compare Med field enables the comparison of MED for paths from neighbors in different AS Autonomous System By default MED comparison is only done among paths within the same Revision 1 14 1 168 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing AS Enabling this option BGP will always perform MED comparison regardless of AS The path with a lower MED is preferred to one with a higher value The Default Local Preference field sets the local preference value for the router The Deterministic Med field is used to select the best MED path among paths advertised from neighboring AS The Redistribute Connected fields control the distribution of connected routes When enabled BGP will advertise routes to directly connected interfaces to other BGP routers in the area Normally only routes that fall within the scope of the network areas will b
291. interfaces and to immediately apply those changes if desired The Save button will save changes to the permanent configuration The Proxy ARP Media Type and Virtual Lan Interfaces controls are as described above The IP Address Mask fields allow you to manually specify one or multiple IP address Mask for this interface or to obtain the address from DHCP or from BOOTP You can have both IPv4 and IPv6 if IPv6 is enabled addresses at the same time one on each line The Activate fields allow you permanently disable the interface without actually deleting it The Save and Apply button applies any changes after they have been saved 6 2 4 Bridge Configuration Bridge Configuration Bridge Configuration Parameters O None O From DHCP Enable Bridge Enable O Disable IP Address Mask 192 168 23 1 24 eth1 Ethernet eth2 Ethernet eth3 Ethernet jeth Ethernet E Select Bridge Devices Save Figure 6 6 Creating an Ethernet Bridge This menu allows you to configure the Ethernet bridge interface The Enable Bridge field controls whether the bridge interface is enabled If the bridge interface is disabled the other fields will be ignored The IP Address Mask field assigns the IP address and mask on this bridge interface The bridge interface may similarly use one or more static IPv4 or IPv6 addresses or obtain an address via DHCP The Select Bridge Devices list is used to select which Eth
292. ion default Line quality monitoring control GEO Disable line quality monitor and auto retrain E1 Enable line quality monitor and auto retrain E2 Enable line quality monitor and falloack fallforward default S registers S6 X Wait time for dialtone detection 2 255 seconds default 2 S7 X Wait time for carrier detection 1 255 seconds default 50 S8 X Pause time for comma in dial string 0 255 seconds default 2 S9 X Carrier detect response time 50 255 1 seconds default 6 S10 X Loss of carrier to hangup delay 50 255 1 seconds default 14 11 X DTMF tone duration 50 255 01 seconds default 95 S29 X Hook flash dial modifier time 0 255 01 seconds default 70 The last three options are presented for the Internal modem only Country Code selects which country s dialing system to work with If this is not set correctly the modem might not be able to dial or connect Speaker Volume controls how load the modem speaker is Speaker Mode controls whether the speaker on the modem is on or off 12 2 2 Modem PPP Client Connections Modem PPP Client Connections Connection Name Action HeadOffice Edit Add new Parameter Value Description Connect at boot HeadOffice x Which client connection to start automatically at boot Save Figure 12 4 Modem PPP Client Connections Revision 1 14 1 104 RX1000 RX1100 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem
293. ion 1 14 1 70 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 Note Once a channel is created and an interface is constructed on it the name of the interface will never change This will remain true even if the number of timeslots on the channel is changed This property is desirable since interface names used by features such as OSPF RIP and the firewall can rely on the interface name Channel re assignments can however lead to a non intuitive relationship between channels and timeslots 7 2 2 Editing A T1 E1 Interface Help Edit T1 Interface Interface T1 1 Parameters Convert this interface to El Framing ESF Line Decoding B8ZS v Clocking Normal Line Build Out CSU OdB X Save Figure 7 5 Edit T1 Interface This menu allows you to display and configure T1 or E1 Trunk parameters By default the interface is set for T1 operation The Convert this interface to E1 link will set the interface for E1 operation and allow you to configure its settings If logical interfaces use a channel number larger than 24 an attempt to convert from E1 to T1 will prompt to delete the logical interface first 7 2 2 1 T1 Settings The Framing field determines the framing format used Your line provider will indicate the correct format Modern facilities usually employ Extended Super Frame ESF an enhanced T1 format that allows a line to be monitored during normal operation The Line Decoding field reflects the
294. ion mark with mask in Default sl chain C CONTINUE in Default xf chain Source 0 0 0 0 0 Destination 0 0 0 0 0 Protocol ICMP sl es Source Ports any Destination Ports any Jecho request Test Packet gt mark Length any C f ll o Rangel Tos lt Any gt EN Save Delete Figure 15 6 Edit TC Rule The Mark row determines how the mark value will be assigned for a packet or a connection e The Set field determines whether the packet or the connection is assigned the mark The mark to field specifies the mark value for the rule and the field specifies the mask for the mark value if the field is empty the mark value will be the value set in the mark to field The in field specifies the chain in which the rule will be processed Mark and mask may be in the range 1 255 in decimal or hex e The Modify packet mark by field allows you to change the mark value by an AND or OR value The in field specifies the chain in which the rule will be processed The value may be in the range 1 255 in decimal or hex e The SAVE RESTORE connection mark with mask field allows you to save or restore the connection mark value with an assigned mask value The in field specifies the chain in which the rule will be processed The mask value may be in the range 1 255 in decimal or hex e The CONTINUE in field specifies that no more TC rules be checked if the packet matches and to forward the packet to the specified chain
295. ion on the system the time never appears to be flowing backwards NTP will step the system time when it starts up This is almost always at boot time Stepping the time afterwards can cause protocols such as OSPF that rely upon accurate real time to fail The router deals with this problem by restarting these protocols if they are running when NTP restarts After booting NTP uses slewing to achieve synchronization by making small and frequent changes to router hardware clock If the reference server s clock differs from the local clock by more than 1000 seconds the NTP daemon decides that a major problem has occured and terminates Usually NTP will succeed in synchronizing the clock at boot time If it fails to synchronize the clock perhaps due to a downed WAN link the NTP daemon may terminate The router however will note the termination and will automatically restart the NTP daemon 29 1 1 2 NTP And The Precision Time Protocol Card If the router is equipped with a Precision Time Protocol card NTP will treat the Global Positioning System signals received from the card when GPS locks as a stratum 0 reference clock The router will always preferentially use this reference above all others 29 1 1 3 Included With NTP Your RuggedRouter software includes the ntpq ntpdc ntptrace and ntp keygen command line utilities The ntpq utility program can be used to monitor the NTP daemon operations and determine how well itis running The n
296. ion saved in existing logs changed the factory defaults are as follows e messages This log file catches a wide variety of generic information excluding authentication cron and mail messages This should be the first log you inspect when starting to debug a problem e syslog This log file catches all information with the exception of authentications Syslog contains all that messages contains and more Examine this log if you can not find relevant information in messages e auth log This log file catches authentication requests View auth log when you are trying to debug a problem in which a user is not able to sign on to a service such as web management or ssh critical This log catches reports of critical failures There should never be any messages in this log Your RuggedCom support representative may ask you to inspect this file e kern log This log contains messages issued by the kernel the most central part of the operating system This log always displays messages issued at boot time and should rarely be added to after that Your RuggedCom support representative may ask you to inspect this file e cron log initially disabled This log file contains messages from the cron systems notifying of tasks started through cron Your RuggedCom support representative may ask you to enable and inspect this log e daemon log initially disabled This log file contains messages from daemons programs that run continuously i
297. ions ii icccccsivesieceensdeceetbinndenapestieavesdinaenesdcetsentieniguandieen ates 116 13 9 Config re Modem PPP Client EE 117 14 1 Starting Shorewall Firewall Menu e 126 14 2 Shorewall E RE EE 127 14 3 Firewall Network Zones eege enee ebe dE ee Ee 128 14 4 Firewall Network Interfaces ee ere tae eed Ree ae Alaina 129 14 5 Editing Network Interface s Firewall Settings uk 129 14 6 Firewall Zone a EE 131 14 7 Firewall Default Policies sic saceiiacegectiess teckissuceapiexiaxeaennlgelesreeaadid ageqesatdaaineleehia NEE EEN EE 131 14 8 Editing A Firewall Default Policy xcc iu2scensenctee anthers ora Seceboee date des dense ntbebeeco titans 132 14 9 Firewall Masquerading And SNAT eeeteekgdekkgedEugdEeASdE SEENEN clue teen edd 132 14 10 Editing A Masquerading Rule cc eeeceececeeeee ee eeeneeeeee ee eeeeeeeeneseeeeeeeeeeeeeegeneeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 132 14 11 Firewall RUES morsi araea aa eaea aana a ieee TEA tinned LG elle Seep alte 133 14 12 Editing A Firewall UE 133 1413 State NAT EE 134 14 14 Creating a Static NAT Entry scacecsjctecccacaatdacssesectpagenctcnsbaacedanavs Qoedatespanedansdideanesereaieattiers 135 14 15 Actions When Stopped ssossenessseeneeeenesstrrrnettrnnrttnerntsttrnsterrnnttrnnntsetttnserennneernn ie dek 135 e et lange 138 15 2 Edit TG Interface crer eaa derer 139 TOs KER e E 139 15 4 Edit tege 140 15 5 TO RUIS rniran ts a a a a RTR Anes Meee 141 e me CTS eege eege E E T 142 16 1 IPsec VPN
298. is forwarded successfully to the master It includes the think time for the RTU to process the request and build the response Step 9a represents the possibility that the RTU is offline the RTU receives the request in error or that the Server Gateway receives the RTU response in error If the Server Gateway does not retry the request it will issue an exception to the originator Revision 1 14 1 216 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols 24 1 5 6 A Worked Example A network is constructed with two Masters and 48 RTUs on four Server Gateways Each of the Master is connected to a Client Gateway with a 115 2 Kbps line The RTUs are restricted to 9600 bps lines The network is Ethernet based and introduces an on average 3 ms of latency Analysis of traces of the remote sites has determined that the min max RTU think times were found to be 10 100 ms What time out should be used by the Master The maximum sized Modbus message is 256 bytes in length This leads to a transmission time of about 25 ms at the Master and 250 ms at the RTU Under ideal circumstances the maximum round trip time is given by 25 ms Master gt client 3 ms network delay 250 ms server gt RTU 100 ms Think time 250 ms RTU gt server 3 ms network delay 25 ms client gt Master This delay totals about 650 ms Contrast this delay with that of a quick operation such as reading a single register Both request and response are l
299. is router has the following network interfaces ethi eth2 eth3 eth4 Figure 5 5 Static Multicast Routing This menu allows you to configure static multicast routing The Configured Static Multicast Routes table shows configured multicast routes New routings may be added by completing the bottom row of the table and selecting the Save button Routings may be deleted by clearing the routings Multicast IP Address field and selecting the Save button The Multicast IP Address field specifies the multicast IP address to be forwarded The Input Interface field specifies the interface upon which the multicast packet arrives The Source IP Address specifies the multicast packet s expected source IP address The Output Interface specifies the interface to which the matched multicast packet will be forwarded The Comment field shows the current status of the routing The Note field below the table shows current active interfaces In order to start Multicast routing at each and every boot you must enable it via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu Revision 1 14 1 55 RX1000 RX1100 5 Configuring Networking 5 3 5 DNS Client Help 8 Se DNS Client DNS Client Options SS Resolution order Hosts DNS e DNS servers 192 168 1 1 Search domains None Listed local net Save Figure 5 6 DNS Client This menu allows you to display and configure various DNS client fields The Resolu
300. ivation successful If it displays Actvation Failed please verify the activation dial string or contact the network provider s service personnel 13 2 1 2 Manual Account Activation If the carrier does not support Over the Air Service Provisioning the cellular modem must be programmed via the Manual Account Activation form using settings supplied by the carrier s service personnel Revision 1 14 1 112 RX1000 RX1100 13 Configuring PPP And The Cellular Modem Help e SEN Manual Account Activation Parameter Value Description Activation Master Subsidy Lock code provided by service code provider Phone number 0000009579 Mobile Directory Number provided by service provider D 0000009579 Mobile Indentification Number provided by service provider System ID 2004 System ID provided by service provider Network ID 65535 Network ID provided by service provider Activate Modem Status Type of Modem CDMA 1xRTT EV DO Rev p2410701 51098 Received Signal Strength gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 71 0 69 dBm Network Carrier ID Verizon Network technology currently in use 1xEV DO Revision A Phone number 0000009579 Electronic Serial Number ESN 0x6089E42B Activation status Modem is not activated Refresh Reset Figure 13 4 Manual Account Activation 1 First establish an account with a service representative of the cellular
301. ive link Note If you use the Internet Explorer web browser you must Right click the link and save the file manually Otherwise Internet Explorer will rename the file after uploading preventing its use in a subsequent archive restore 34 5 5 Archive Restore The restore process begins by selecting an archive to restore from Following an archive link will restore the archive and reboot the router Revision 1 14 1 289 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router Help Archive Restore Configuration Archives Restore one of the following configuration archives by selecting its name rchive20 1547 rri 13 0 Setup ethi IP address latestarchive 1 13 0 Setup ethi IP address Archive20080523 1540 1 13 0 Automatic nightly backup at 2008 05 23 15 40 Archive20080523 1515 rr1 12 4 configuration for rr1 12 4 Archive20080523 1510 ret 12 4 Automatic nightly backup at 2008 05 23 15 10 factorydefaults rr1 13 0 Factory defaults Webmin Archives Restore one of the following webmin configuration archives by selecting its name Archive Name o Version Archive Comment sssss S Webmin20080523 1544 rr1 13 0 configuration for rr1 13 0 latestwebminarchive rr1 13 0 configuration for rr1 13 0 Webmin20080523 1533 rr1 12 4 Automatic nightly backup at 2008 05 23 15 33 Figure 34 18 Archive Restore Menu Click on one of the links under Archive Name to start the restor
302. kup sub menu If you are planning to connect your router to the Internet configure the firewall and then activate it This can be done in the Networking menu Shorewall Firewall sub menu The router provides a default event logging configuration You can modify this configuration through the Maintenance menu System Logs sub menu Remote logging can be activated here The routers SSH and Web Management interfaces are enabled by default The routers DHCP server IPsec VPN server NTP server OSPF RIP protocol VRRP protocol and firewall are disabled by default To changes these services visit the System menu Bootup and Shutdown sub menu You can install static IP and Multicast routings for Ethernet and WAN interfaces via the Networking menu Network Configuration Routing and Default Route and Static Multicast Routing sub menus You can configure the NTP server through the Servers menu NTP Server sub menu See the chapter Configuring NTP for more details You can configure SSH through the Servers menu SSH Server sub menu SSH can be set up to issue a login banner from this menu See the chapter Configuring SSH for more details Traffic prioritization can be configured on the network interfaces through the Networking menu Traffic Prioritization sub menu See the chapter Traffic Prioritization for more details SNMP is disabled by default You can configure SNMP by following the instructions in the Appendix on SNMP Y
303. l 2 Cellular Modem Modem Modem Modem a Cellular Modem Configuration Modem PPP Client Connections PPP Logs PPP Connection Logs Current Route amp Interface Table Modem Connection Status Status ie No conne ction Refresh Figure 13 1 Cellular Modem Interface If the installed modem is a CDMA EV DO type and has not yet been activated for use on the cellular network the following top level menu will be seen instead offering two different methods for activating the modem for use on the cellular network see Cellular Modem Account Activation below Help Cellular Modem Modem Over The Air Account Activation Manual Account Activation Figure 13 2 Cellular Modem Interface CDMA modem not yet activated 13 2 1 Cellular Modem Account Activation Prior to use a CDMA type cellular modem must be activated for use on a particular provider s network Once the activation process has been completed the modem will be able to connect to the network without further intervention Two account activation methods are provided by ROX OTA Over the Air and Manual Both activation methods are described in this section Revision 1 14 1 111 RX1000 RX1100 13 Configuring PPP And The Cellular Modem 13 2 1 1 Over The Air Account Activation ROX supports the OTASP Over the Air Service Provisioning mechanism offered by most CDMA cellular service providers for provisioning cellular end stations for use on thei
304. l change to Enable SSH and Enable Web Management to reflect the disabled state Enabling a service automatically restarts it 1 3 6 Enabling And Disabling The Gauntlet Security Appliance The Gauntlet security Appliance requires a pass phrase unique to your network This menu will configure it Figure 1 7 Gauntlet Setup Menu 1 3 7 Configuring The Date Time And Timezone The Set The Date Time And Timezone command allows these parameters to be set Figure 1 8 RuggedRouter Date Time Timezone Menu Once set the router will account for Daylight Savings time 1 3 8 Displaying Hardware Information The Display Hardware Information command describes commissioned hardware Revision 1 14 1 27 RX1000 RX1100 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router Figure 1 9 RuggedRouter Hardware Information Menu 1 3 9 Restoring A Configuration The Restore A Previous Configuration command provides a means to restore a previously taken snapshot of the configuration of the router Note The router will reboot immediately after restoring configuration The user is first prompted to select either the factory default configuration or a previously made archive Note Restoring the factory defaults will reset IP addresses and may make the router impossible to reach from the network Revision 1 14 1 28 RX1000 RX1100 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router Figure 1 10 Selecting a configuration to rel
305. l interface is shown If no interfaces have been configured the menu will provide links to Frame Relay and PPP configuration menus This menu presents connection statuses but does not update them in real time Click on the Refresh this page link to update to the current status The menu will change after assignment of a logical interface providing links to logical interface and link statistics DDS 1 Connecting Name Description Local Address Netmask ZC Address wippp Down Statistics View 56K 1 Link Statistics No description SE 255 255 255 255 GE Figure 9 3 DDS WAN Interfaces after logical interface assignment 9 2 1 1 Naming Of Logical Interfaces Webmin names the logical interfaces for you but allows you to provide a description All interfaces start with a w to identify them as wan interfaces followed by the interface number The next part of the identifier is either ppp or fr and the frame relay DLC number Revision 1 14 1 86 RX1000 RX1100 9 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And DDS 9 2 2 Editing A Logical Interface Frame Relay Edit New Logical Interface 56K 1 Frame Relay Parameters Station Type CPE FR DTE Interface Signalling type ANSI gt Link Failure Leaves IP interface up vf T391 10 1392 16 n391 e N392 e N393 4 New Logical Interface DLC Local Address Netmask Remote Address Description 255 255 255 255
306. lected should be configured to supply the default gateway The Peer IP Address on Primary field sets the IP address to probe for connectivity on the primary interface The Secondary Interface field determines the secondary interface The Peer IP Address on Secondary field sets the IP address to probe for connectivity on the secondary interface The Fail Over Timer field determines the amount of time the primary link must be failed before directing packets down the secondary link The Generate Alarms field determines whether alarms are generated upon configuration problems and link failures The Save button will save changes to the configuration file The Save and Apply button will save changes restart the end to end backup daemon 5 3 8 Current Routing amp Interface Table This menu displays the current routing table and the state of the router s interfaces Consult the Network Utilities chapter for details of this menu Revision 1 14 1 58 RX1000 RX1100 6 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces 6 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces 6 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Reading the Ethernet LEDs e Configuring Ethernet Network Interfaces e Configuring VLANs e Configuring an Ethernet Bridge e Configuring PPPoE 6 1 1 Ethernet Interface Fundamentals RuggedCom manufactures dual Ethernet Interface boards in a variety of formats Some most notably the optical interfaces have the same outward appea
307. les at its maximum processing rate The router is capable of recording about 300 entries second to the local syslog and 500 entries second to the alert file Alerts at rates exceeding the above rates will not be recorded Snort will require 5 Mbytes of system memory to start with an additional 15 Mbytes of memory for each interface monitored 33 2 IDS Configuration 33 2 1 Snort IDS Main Menu This menu configures the Snort IDS and is composed of three sections Note that Snort is disabled by default and may be enabled via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu If snort is running configuration changes must be made active by restarting it The Restart Snort button will restart snort listing the interfaces it is active upon 33 2 1 1 Global Configuration Snort IDS Global Snort Configuration tiie te H g wus e DX ww meg a Network Settings PreProcessors Alerts amp Logging Edit Config File Figure 33 1 Snort Main Menu part 1 The Global Configuration menu section configures parameters that apply to all interfaces Revision 1 14 1 271 RX1000 RX1100 33 Configuring the Intrusion Detection System 33 2 1 2 Interfaces Interfaces jetha Ss x eth2 Disable wippp Enable Figure 33 2 Snort Main Menu part 2 The Interfaces section selects the interfaces Snort will monitor You must restart Snort after changing
308. ll accept GOOSE packets and re distribute them Statistics reports availability of remote GOOSE daemons packet counts and Round Trip Time RTT for each remote daemon When Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP is employed GOOSE transport is improved by sending redundant GOOSE packets from each VRRP gateway 26 1 1 1 GOOSE Tunnel Implementation Details The GOOSE protocol is supported by the Layer 2 Tunnel Daemon The daemon listens to configured Ethernet interfaces and to the network itself i e for tunnel connections from other daemon instances on a configurable UDP port Revision 1 14 1 230 RX1000 RX1100 26 Configuring Layer 2 Tunnels The Media Access Control MAC destination address of frames received from Ethernet is inspected in order to determine which GOOSE group they are in The frames are then encapsulated in network headers and forwarded with MAC source and destination addresses intact to the network as GOOSE packets IEC61850 recommends that the MAC destination address should be in the range 01 0c cd 01 00 00 to 01 0c cd 01 01 ff GOOSE Packets received from the network are stripped of their network headers and forwarded to Ethernet ports configured for the same multicast address The forwarded frames contain the MAC source address or the originating device and not that of the transmitting interface The VLAN used will be that programmed locally for the interface and may differ from the original VLAN The
309. ll disable or enable all of the rules in a ruleset Individual rules in a ruleset may be modified by following the set name link under the Rule Set field resulting in a menu such as the following Edit Ruleset Current Rules in x1 1 rules Rule Signature Status Action alert tcp EXTERNAL_NET any gt HOME_NET 6000 msg X11 MIT Magic Cookie detected Disable 1 flow established content MIT MAGIC COOKIE 1 reference arachnids 396 x Edit classtype attempted user sid 1225 rev 4 Delete p S 5 Disable 2 alert tcp EXTERNAL_NET any gt HOME_NET 6000 msg X11 xopen flow established content 1 00 4 Edit OB op op op op op op op op 00 reference arachnids 395 classtype unknown sid 1226 rev 4 paata Delete Add Rule Figure 33 4 Snort Ruleset Edit Revision 1 14 1 272 RX1000 RX1100 33 Configuring the Intrusion Detection System Each rule can be individually enabled disabled or deleted Most rules will include a reference link to more information about the vulnerability the rule detects It is possible to add your own rule or one obtained from the open source community e g www bleedingsnort com http www bleedingsnort com 33 2 1 4 Rule Lookup by SID The Look Up Rule button accepts a SID and displays its rule You may elect to disable the rule or learn more information about it 33 2 2 Network Settings Network Settings
310. ll hosts This page allows you to define hosts or networks that will still be accessible Add a new stopped address Interface Accessible addresses Add wippp 204 56 67 98 TE Add a new stopped address l Manually Edit File Click this button to manually edit the Shorewall file etc shorewall routestopped in which the entries above are stored Figure 14 15 Actions When Stopped Revision 1 14 1 135 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall This menu allows you to control which addresses the firewall will accept connections from after it has been stopped Add a new translations by selecting the Add a new stopped address link or by clicking on the add above or add below images in the Add field Reorder the translations by clicking on the arrows under the Move field Clicking on a link under the Interface field will allow you to edit or delete the rule as shown below You may also make changes by manually editing the rule file Revision 1 14 1 136 RX1000 RX1100 15 Traffic Control 15 Traffic Control 15 1 Traffic Control TC Fundamentals Traffic Control is a subsystem of the firewall that allows management of the amount of bandwidth per network interface that different types of traffic are permitted to use Each interface to be managed is assigned a total bandwidth that it should allow for incoming and outgoing traffic Classes are then defined for each interface each with its own min
311. llow only UI aes256 El aesi92 EI aes128 EI 3des Phase 2 Encryption Protocols Default allow only El aes256 El aes192 El aesizs El ades Compress data O ves No O Default Perfect Forwarding Secrecy yes O no O Default Connection key lifetime Default O o secs v L2TP O yes No Figure 16 9 Editing A VPN Connection Part 1 The Connection name field associates a name with the connection Do not embed whitespace in the name The At IPsec startup field determines what happens to the connection after Openswan starts and includes the options Ignore Add connection Start Connection Route and Default A value of Ignore will cause the connection to be ignored A value of Add connection will cause the connection to be established when explicitly started via command line or the IPsec VPN Configuration menu Start Connection button If Start connection is chosen then the connection will be authorized when Openswan is started but not activated until an incoming request arrives A value of Route will cause a route and only the route for packets to be established discarding packets sent there which may be preferable to having them sent elsewhere based on a more general route e g a default route The Authenticate by fields select the authentication method If Default is selected the value in the Defaults for all connections record is used If rsasig is selecte
312. lls only up to eight TCP connections may be mapped to a single synchronous serial port This means that data received on the port will be transmitted to all configured TCP endpoints and all data received from the TCP endpoints will be transmitted on the synchronous port Another difference concerns framing Forwarding to and from asynchronous serial ports involves timeouts and pack characters in order to aid in framing or packetization for transmission on an IP network HDLC frames received on the synchronous port will be transmitted immediately on the TCP connection and incoming data on TCP connections are written directly to the port Note however that HDLC framing information is not preserved on transmission via TCP 25 2 Synchronous Serial Port Configuration The Synchronous Port Settings menu is accessed by clicking on Sync Serial in the Networking folder of the main Webmin menu Revision 1 14 1 226 RX1000 RX1100 25 Synchronous Serial Ports ia Synchronous Serial 011001 110011 1001111 Synchronous Port Settings Figure 25 1 Synchronous Serial Main Menu Note that the Serial Protocols server is disabled by default and may be enabled via the Bootup And Shutdown menu under the System folder of the main Webmin menu Note also that these menus configure only the physical parameters of the ports Protocol configuration must be done via the Serial Protocols Configuration menu This chapter describes the configuratio
313. logging can replace disk logging or can augment it Revision 1 14 1 307 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router If you wish to replace disk logging for some information type select the appropriate link under the System Logs sub menu Log Destination column Enter the URL of the logging host under the Syslog server on Module Index Edit System Log Log destination Log to Logging active e c e c c E File Named pipe Syslog server on Local users All logged in users Yes No var log auth log a Sync after each message logger xyy co Message types to log Facilities C fall x Many auth authpriv Priorities C None all Atorabove sl x 2 Ej s Many D None all C At or above zl si Save View logfile Delete Figure 34 41 Changing a Syslog entry to log remotely If you wish to remote log in addition to disk log some log type you must duplicate the log entry and the configure the logging host Duplicate the entry by using the Add a new system log link on the System Logs sub menu Finally you may forward all information to the remote logger by creating a new system log entry and specifying All Facilities and all priorities and checking the Syslog server on field with an appropriate address Revision 1 14 1 308 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 13 Upgrade System Software Upgrade System Upgrad
314. ltage level output ports PTP2 and PTP3 which may be configured as either pulse per second PPS or pulse width modulated PWM The signal can be used to synchronize intelligent devices to a high quality time source called the reference clock The router uses a global positioning satellite GPS receiver NTP or the router s local clock as the reference clock Revision 1 14 1 264 RX1000 RX1100 32 Configuring IRIGB And IEEE1588 32 1 2 2 Reference Clocks GPS provides the highest quality reference clock It will always be used when it is available but may require some time after boot before becoming acquired or GPS locked Typically GPS lock is usually acquired within five minutes of boot When GPS is the reference clock IRIG B timestamps are accurate to within ns If GPS has not yet locked and IEEE1588 is locked the router will use IEEE1588 server as a reference clock When IEEE1588 is synchronized IRIG B timestamps are accurate to within microsecond or sub microseconds If GPS and IEEE1588 have not yet locked the router will use an NTP server or peer as a reference clock NTP typically requires less than two minutes after boot to synchronize When NTP is the reference clock IRIG B timestamps can be accurate to within ms Before NTP is able to synchronize the router will use the local clock to obtain the time and will emit IRIG B timestamps on a one second basis 32 1 2 3 How The Router Selects A Reference Clo
315. ly or read write The Source IP field may be used to specify an IP address or range e g 10 0 0 0 24 from which access to this community name may be made The OID field further restricts access to an Object Identifier OID tree at or below a specified OID SNMP V3 User Names No 3 users are cuurently defined Add an SNMP 3 User User Name Access read only sl MAR No Authentication x OID Authentication Protocol MDS gt Authentication Passphrase fF Privacy Protocol DES gt Privacy Passphrase CY Add Figure 34 28 Access Control Menu SNMP V3 The second part of the Access control menu allows creation and deletion of V3 users The User Name field selects the name of the new user The Access field determines whether the community is read only or read write The Minimum Security field selects the level of security used by this user It may be No Authentication no authentication or encryption Authentication Only authentication by MD5 or SHA1 authentication methods no encryption or Authentication with Privacy authentication by MD5 or SHA1 encryption by DES or AES ciphers The OID field further restricts access to an Object Identifier OID tree at or below a specified OID The Authentication Protocol Authentication Passphrase Privacy Protocol and Privacy Passphrase fields configure the protocols and passphrases used depending on the Minimum Security field These settings are shared between agent a
316. made here will override those made through the web based management system Change Passwords Change Port IP Address Information Set Hostname Set Radius Authentication Disable SSH Server Disable Web Management Set Date Time And Timezone Display Hardware Information Restore A Previous Configuration lt 0k gt lt Cancel gt Figure 1 1 RuggedRouter Setup Main Menu The shell provides a number of configuration commands described below Revision 1 14 1 24 RX1000 RX1100 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router 1 3 1 Configuring Passwords The Change Passwords command changes the rrsetup and root account passwords These passwords should be changed before installing the router on the network Figure 1 2 RuggedRouter Setup Password Change Menu 1 3 2 Configuring IP Address Information The Change Port IP Address command configures port IP addresses and gateways Figure 1 3 RuggedRouter Interfaces Setup Menu Each port number X has a default address of 192 168 X 1 and a mask of 255 255 255 0 The Configure Default Gateway Settings command configures the default gateway The Configure DNS Client Settings command configures the DNS server address If the router is part of a domain enter the domain name in the Search Domain field BO 0 0 214 eng Lan Figure 1 4 RuggedRouter DNS Client Menu Revision 1 14 1 25 RX1000 RX1100 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router 1 3 3 Sett
317. me Relay PPP And T1 E1 T1 2 Loopback Loopback Settings Note A Digital loopback command causes test frames to be transmitted through the digital sections of the T1 E1 interface The frames are looped back immediately before the analog tranceivers received by the software and verified A Remote loopback command causes test frames to be transmitted through the analog tranceiver to the T1 E1 line and verifies frames received from the line You must arrange for the line to be remotely looped back e g Line loopback or employ a loopback stub for this test to succeed A Line loopback command causes frames received from the T1 E1 line to be looped back to the line A notification is presented for each frame received during this test A loopback test will take down the interface which may be undesirable when it is in use Select Loopback type No loop si Number of Loops 20 maximum 1000 Time to run test 20 maximum 240 sec Start Loopback Figure 7 11 T1 E1 Loopback Menu The loopback test provides a means to test the digital and analog hardware of your T1 E1 hardware and the T1 E1 line The sender transmits a number of frames which are looped back to it The returning frames are verified for correctness A digital loopback is started first verifying the digital section of the interface If a loopback stub is inserted in the interface jack a remote loopback will verify the interfaces digital and analog sections If the remo
318. mentioned groups New Webmin user names must contain only the characters a zA Z0 9 but must not begin with and must not conflict with any existing user or group name 3 3 RADIUS User Access Control Fundamentals Webmin provides the ability to authenticate against a RADIUS server in order to centralize the creation and maintenance of user accounts Multiple RuggedRouters may be configured to authenticate Webmin users using a common RADIUS server eliminating the need to replicate the effort of configuring the same user account information on many routers Revision 1 14 1 39 RX1000 RX1100 3 Configure Webmin Users H RuggedRouter is configured to use RADIUS to authenticate Webmin users in the Miscellaneous module under the Maintenance category the router will present the configured RADIUS server with the user name and password presented to a Webmin session for authentication If the RADIUS server authenticates the user it will return an indication of success along with the privilege level described above associated with the user A user successfully authenticated by a RADIUS server will have Webmin access corresponding to his her privilege level as configured for the user account on the RADIUS server For information on how to configure user accounts on a RADIUS server please refer to RADIUS Server Configuration Note A Webmin user will only be authenticated locally if a user account of that name has already been c
319. monly as PoE Power over Ethernet for providing electrical power over the twisted pair wiring most commonly used in Ethernet networks The obvious benefit is the ability to take advantage of previously unused copper in the 10 100Base T wiring configuration to provide power without requiring that new wiring be installed RuggedRouter can be provisioned to supply power according to IEEE standard 802 3af In order to provide PoE via all four RuggedRouter Ethernet ports the unit must be provisioned with a PoE power supply in place of the optional redundant power supply RuggedRouter implements PoE mode A supplying up to 400mA at up to 48V on pins 3 and 6 T568A pair 2 and return on pins 1 and 2 T568A pair 3 10 1 00Base T Pinout on RJ45 Underside Figure 34 36 PoE pinout on 10 100BaseT ports Revision 1 14 1 302 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 10 1 Power over Ethernet Menu Power over Ethernet Port Name Enabled Power Limit W Power Delivery Class Voltage Current mA Powertw Status letha Enabled 15 0 0 20 No ok jeth2 Enabled sl 15 0 0 20W Yes jo 52 566572 18 099423 0 951425 Ok etha Enabled x f15 0 0 20w No E h 8 Ok leth4 Enabled z 15 0 0 20W No Ok Save Refresh Figure 34 37 Power over Ethernet Menu This menu allows you to enable disable the Power over Ethernet function and set the power limitation on
320. n Stateful firewalling adds considerable complexity the firewalling process by tracking the state of each connection A stateful firewall also looks at each packet and apply tests but the tests applied or rules may be modified depending on packets that have already been processed This is called connection tracking Stateful firewalls can also recognize that traffic on connected sets of TCP UDP ports is from a particular protocol and manage it as a whole 14 2 2 Linux netfilter iptables And The Shoreline Firewall The RuggedRouter employs a stateful firewall system known as netfilter a set of loadable kernel modules that provides capabilities to allow session based packet examination The netfilter system is an interface built into the Linux kernel that allows the IP network stack to provide access to packets The netfilter system uses rulesets collections of packet classification rules that determine the outcome of examination of a specific packet The rules are defined by iptables a generic table structure syntax and utility program for the configuration and control of netfilter Revision 1 14 1 118 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall In practice an iptables rule file and a script are all that are needed to load the netfilter system with rules on upon router start up The iptables rules however are somewhat difficult to configure and manage The Shoreline Firewall often known as shorewall offers a m
321. n Menu This menu allows you to change an existing alert definition entry The Codepoint is the key part of the alert definition entry and does not allow to be changed The Category configures which category the alert definition entry belongs to The Name configures the name of the alert definition which will be displayed by Webmin login or email forwarder when an active alert exists The Subsystem configures which subsystem the alert definition entry belongs to The Severity configures the severity level of the alert The severity level is sorted from highest priority to lowest priority The Alarmable configures whether the matched alert should trigger the critical relay and alarm LED on the LED panel of the router The Enabled configures whether the alert system should monitor and record matched active alert If Enabled is not checked matching active alert will be ignored The Renotify Interval configures how often should the matched active alert be notified according to alert filter configuration setting If it is disabled no notification will be forwarded The Type configures type of the alert definition entry There are three types available Simple Shell and RMON Currently only the first two types are supported If users choose Shell type they should complete parameters under Parameters for Shell table The Parameters for Shell table allows user to configure additional parameters if the alert definition entry type is Shell
322. n down Instead T3 E3 software upgrades modify only the software on the disk You must schedule a reboot in order to run the new version of T3 software Revision 1 14 1 84 RX1000 RX1100 9 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And DDS 9 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And DDS 9 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuring Frame Relay and PPP Links e Viewing status and statistics e Upgrading software 9 1 1 DDS Fundamentals A Digital Data Services DDS line is a North American digital transmission method that operates at 56 Kbps synchronously over an unloaded 4 Wire metallic pair circuit The DDS line is typically a telephone grade network connection often called the local loop A Data Terminal Equipment DTE device attaches to the line and transmits data to the telephone company TELCO which routes the data to a remote DDS line A short haul synchronous data line driver known as a CSU DSU terminates the line and attaches to the DTE The DSU part of the DSU CSU manages the format of the data signal while the CSU manages electrical levels isolation and provides loopback to the TELCO RuggedCom DDS port provides an integrated DTE DSU and CSU 9 1 1 1 Location Of Interfaces And Labeling Unlike the Ethernet ports which are statically located the location of T1 E1 DDS and ADSL ports in your router depends upon the number of ports and how they were ordered Refer to the labeled hardware image as pre
323. n may be required to restart During the upgrade all existing Gauntlet protected connections will be closed 34 5 Backup And Restore The Backup And Restore system provides the following features System Backup And Restore Figure 34 10 System Backup And Restore e All configuration settings are saved in a configuration archive e Webmin configuration settings are saved in a Webmin configuration archive e Archives can be used to clone routers replicate a damaged resource or unwind a change e Archives can be created manually including user comments or by the Automatic nightly backup which captures all changes over the previous 24 hours e The nightly backup archives can be automatically transferred via scp or ftp to a designated server e The nightly backup archives are kept on the router for a configurable number of days and then deleted The most recently made archive is never destroyed Manually created archives are never destroyed e If you make a configuration change you later wish to reverse you can restore a previously made archive completely An archive difference tool is provided showing the difference between one archive and either another archive or the current configuration Changes in configuration can also be detected and unwound by applying the previous state of a router on a file by file basis Revision 1 14 1 285 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router e Archive filename is use
324. n required to run the Raw Socket protocol over the synchronous serial ports 25 2 1 Synchronous Port Settings Menu This menu displays the current configuration of each synchronous serial port on the router Help Synchronous Port Settings Port Cable Slot Baud rate Clock CTSRTS delay Type D 2 pper e4000 INTERNAL 150 ms R5232 Edit Sync Port 1 Parameters Port Cable Slot Baud rate Clock CTS RTS delay Type 2 R Upper fo Emma bm Fe Edit Sync Port 2 Parameters Figure 25 2 Synchronous Port Settings Menu The Port field denotes the system s port number for the specific synchronous serial port The Cable field lists the cable marking for the port The Slot field indicates whether the port is in the router s Upper or Lower expansion slot The Baud rate field sets the bit rate in bits s of transmitted data and the frequency in Hz of transmitted clock when the port is clocked internally see below The Clock field selects whether the port operates from the internal clock or using a received external clock signal The CTS RTS delay field sets the delay in milliseconds that RTS will follow CTS The Type field displays the port s interface type depending on the type of synchronous card installed Underneath each port displayed in the table a link named Edit Sync Port X Parameters leads to an editing menu for the corresponding port s parameters Revision 1 14 1 227 RX1000 RX1100 25 S
325. n table order for every packet unless a CONTINUE rule is matched in which case processing stops This can be used to improve efficiency in combination with the SAVE and RESTORE rules For example consider a TC Rules table organized roughly as follows and in the same order e A RESTORE rule is used to restore the connection s mark to a matching unmarked packet e A CONTINUE if the mark is non zero e Specific rules to check criteria to assign a mark and finally e A SAVE mark to connection if the mark is non zero ie a match was found above Using the above structure for the TC Rules table only the first packet of any tcp or udp connection will have to go through all the rules while every following packet will have its mark restored by the first rule and then CONTINUE skipping potentially many matching rules in the remainder of the table Revision 1 14 1 143 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN 16 Configuring IPsec VPN 16 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuring IPsec VPN Global Options e Creating VPN Connections e Configuring L2TPD e Enabling And Starting IPsec e Obtaining VPN Status 16 1 1 VPN Fundamentals IPsec Internet Protocol SECurity uses strong cryptography to provide both authentication and encryption services Authentication ensures that packets are from the right sender and have not been altered in transit Encryption prevents unauthorized reading of packet contents
326. n that is present in frames in order to support VLAN operation If an Ethernet frame is VLAN tagged the EtherType value immediately following the Source MAC address is set to 0x8100 denoting 802 1Q VLAN The next 2 bytes of the VLAN tag Revision 1 14 1 59 RX1000 RX1100 6 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces contain a 3 bit User Priority Field that may be used as a priority level for Ethernet frames a 1 bit Canonical Format Indicator CFI used to indicate the presence of a Routing Information Field RIF and finally the 12 bit VLAN Identifier VID which uniquely identifies the VLAN to which the Ethernet frame belongs These four bytes known as the VLAN tag are followed by the rest of the Ethernet frame starting with the length field 6 1 2 2 RuggedRouter Functions Supporting VLANs Functions Support Comments Static Route and Default Route Y Static Multicast Routing Y End To End backup Y PPPoE N Shorewall Firewall Y IPSec Y VRRP Y Traffic Prioritization Y Dynamic Routing Both OSPF and RIP support VLAN GRE Tunnel Y DHCP Server Y 6 1 3 PPPoE On Native Ethernet Interfaces Fundamentals RuggedRouter supports PPPoE Point to Point Protocol Over Ethernet over both external modems described here and internal interfaces described in the chapter PPPOE On ADSL The PPPOE On ADSL chapter contains more useful information on PPPOE Authentication Addresses DNS Se
327. n the add above or add below arrows in the Add column You may also edit a server by following its link under the Address field Reorder the servers by clicking on the arrows in the Move column 34 7 3 Edit RADIUS Server Parameters Help Edit Radius Server Parameters Radius Server Parameters Hostname IP 186 42 4 130 Port Number Default O Shared Secret eceeeoeeeeoo Timeout 10 1 20 Seconds Service WEBMIN z Bind Interface dummyO Save Test Delete Note The Bind Interface option applies to RADIUS requests for the WEBMIN service only The source IP address of these exchanges will be the IP address of the selected network interface Figure 34 33 RADIUS Authentication Server Parameters This menu configures tests and deletes RADIUS server entries The Hostname IP field configures the RADIUS server s IP address The Port Number field sets the port number used by the RADIUS server The default port for RADIUS is 1812 The Shared Secret field configures a unique password used to authenticate communications with this server Note that the shared secret must also be configured on the RADIUS server for the router being configured The Timeout field sets the maximum time in seconds to wait for responses from a RADIUS server before aborting the transaction with the current server When the timeout expires RuggedRouter will proceed to the next configured server if one has been configured to retry the trans
328. n the background Your RuggedCom support representative may ask you to enable and inspect this log Each one of the default logs above is represented in the System Logs Menu along with any others that may have been created Left unrestricted the logging system would consume all available disk space causing the router to fail The router limits the memory used by the logging system by storing logs in a volatile i e lost after a reboot file system which is limited in size Such a system will lose logging information when a power failure occurs too much logging is generated or as the result of a user commanded reboot The router deals with this problem by storing compressed versions of three key files messages auth log and critical to the permanent disk The log files are saved every 180 seconds and upon an orderly reboot The log files are restored during the next boot All other files but these are cleared 34 12 2 Remote Logging Remote logging often referred to as remote syslogging is the process of forwarding log entries to a remote host computer Remote logging enables central collation of logs and preserves logs in the events of security incidents Remote logging does not require any file storage on the router and as such does not suffer from loss of information around unplanned power failures On the other hand remote logging cannot record events that occur before network connectivity to the logging host is established Remote
329. n to dial automatically at boot or which connection to use as a backup for another link The Disconnect on idle timeout field specifies how long an established PPP connection will wait with no data traffic before it disconnects This option is only valid when the Dial on demand option is checked The PPP Username field determines the user name to use when connecting to the PPP server as specified by its operator The Password field determines the password to use when connecting to the PPP server The Dial type field determines the type of dialing system to use on the phone line Either DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency commonly known as Tone dialing or Pulse dialing Almost all phone systems support DTMF and DTMF is much faster at dialing DTMF is recommended whenever possible The Phonenumber field specifies the telephone number to dial to connect to the PPP server The Default Route checkbox enables automatically setting a default route using this interface whenever it connects If this is your primary network connection you probably want this option enabled The Use peer DNS checkbox enables automatically setting the DNS server entries that the PPP server recommends Enable this option unless you provide your own name servers Revision 1 14 1 105 RX1000 RX1100 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem The Maximum Dial Attempts field specifies the number of consecutive times that the modem will dial the phone number before
330. nabled but they will still age out faster If fast network recovery is desired use OSPF Revision 1 14 1 179 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing 17 2 5 4 RIP Networks Networks Neighbors Neighbor Action 10 128 10 244 Delete Add Networks Subnet x x x x x or Interface Action Add ethl gt Add Figure 17 20 RIP Networks Neighbors are specific routers with which to exchange routes using the RIP protocol This can be used when you want to explicitly control which routers are part of your RIP network Networks are used when you want to add any router that is part of a specific subnet or connected to a specific network interface to be part of your RIP network Both neighbors and networks can be used at the same time Note For point to point links T1 E1 links for example one must use neighbor entries to add other routers to exchange routes with Also note that RIP v1 does not send subnet mask information in its updates Any defined networks are restricted to the classic in the sense of Class A B and C networks RIP v2 does not have this failing 17 2 5 5 RIP Status This status menu shows various pieces of information about the current RIP status The status of each interface is shown the current database the current RIP neighbors and the current RIP routing table 17 2 5 6 View RIP Configuration This menu shows the current configuration f
331. nd for editing an existing one are the same only the title differs Create versus Edit Module Index Edit Subnet Subnet Details Subnet description Local Network l Network address 192 168 2 0 Netmask 255 255 255 0 _ Address ranges 192 168 2 101 192 168 2 200 Dynamic BOOTP Dynamic BOOTP g Shared network lt None gt gt Default lease time Default secs ze l Boot filename None C Maximum lease time Default 7 secs Boot file server This server Server name Default 7 Lease length for BOOTP ve 3 p Lease end for BOOTP e e Pelee Forever secs clients Never Dynamic DNS enabled Yes No Default Dynamic DNS domain name Default l Byname hhii Default 7 Dynamic DNS hostname From client domain _ Allow unknown clients C allow Deny Ignore Default Server is authoritative for this subnet C Yes Default No Disable NAK of option82 clients for this subnet C Yes Default No Hosts directly in this a Groups directly in this a subnet subnet Save Edit Client Options List Leases Delete Addanew host Add a new host group Address Pools for Subnet Pool Address Ranges Option 82 Clients clientname remote id circuit id Add an address pool SES SES 7 aaa we r The settings specific to the Create Edit Subnet menu are The Subnet description field is used to describe the subn
332. nd remote user Note that if authentication and privacy are both used but only the authentication passphrase is provided snmpd will use the authentication passphrase as the privacy passphrase Note also that if any notifications are enabled a read only user named internal will be automatically created to satisfy the requirements of the event MIB Revision 1 14 1 295 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 6 5 Trap Configuration Trap Generation Options Enable Authentication Traps T Enable link up down traps Apply Figure 34 29 Trap Configuration Menu Trap Options The Trap Configuration page manages SNMP trap destinations Under Trap Generation Options you may enable the generation of notifications on authentication failures or IP interface link up down events SNMP V1 and V2c Trap Destinations No 1 or 2c trap destinations are currently defined Add an SNMP 1 or 2c Trap Destination Type Vl Trap si IP Address Trap Community Add Figure 34 30 Trap Destinations V1 and V2c The SNMP V1 and V2c Trap Destinations part of the menu allows the creation and deletion of trap destinations The Type field specifies the exchange used with this destination either V1 trap V2c trap or V2c inform The IP address and Trap Community fields specifies the receivers IP address and community name Revision 1 14 1 296 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router
333. nections must traverse a firewall IKE messages and IPSec protected packets must be encapsulated as User Datagram Protocol UDP messages The encapsulation allows the original untranslated packet to be examined by IPSec 16 1 1 7 Other Configuration Supporting IPSec If the router is to support a remote IPSec client and the client will be assigned an address in a subnet of a local interface you must activate proxy ARP for that interface This will cause the router to respond to ARP requests on behalf of the client and direct traffic to it over its connection IPSec relies upon the following protocols and ports e protocol 51 IPSEC AH Authentication Header RFC2402 e protocol 50 IPSEC ESP Encapsulating Security Payload RFC2046 e UDP port 500 You must configure the firewall to accept connections on these ports and protocols See the Configuring The Firewall chapter Configuring The Firewall And VPN section for details 16 1 1 8 The Openswan Configuration Process Each VPN connection has two ends in the local router and the remote router The Openswan developers designed the configuration in such a way that the configuration record describing a VPN connection can be used without change at either end One side of the connection typically the local side is designated the left side and the other is designated the right side A convenient method is to configure both ends simultaneously having two browser windows up The rel
334. ned to the factory to have the software restored RuggedCom recommends minimizing the risk by using a standalone PC as the web server and by powering both the web server and the router using an uninterruptible power supply UPS Revision 1 14 1 321 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix C Installing Apache Web Server On Windows Appendix C Installing Apache Web Server On Windows Anumber of customers have asked for advice and instructions on setting up a web server on Windows RuggedCom recommends the Apache web server because it is secure robust easy to install and configure as well as being able to be installed on a wide variety of Windows platforms Begin by identifying a host computer and its physical and logical location on the network The Repository Server Requirements of the appendix Setting Up A Repository provide some guidance on host requirements The Apache installation process will prompt you for an IP address and domain name with which to serve the web pages Later in the install you will also need to provide the directory where the RuggedRouter releases will be kept Ensure that a web servers is not already installed Obtain Apache by visiting the web page of www apache org http www apache org Visit the HTTP Server portion of the web site and click on the Downloads page Identify the latest version of Apache and find its Win32 version usually under httpd binaries win32 You should be able to find a M
335. nenrssrrrnserrnnne 30 1 13 RuggedRouter Web Interface Main Menu Window sssssssssessssrneesesnesssrersssrrrnsrernnnernnenssene 31 1 14 LED Status Panel nsira cean E E E ERER beets 33 2 1 Webmin Configuration Menu 2eegtcetdeheEeegegeeeeee e telat awatenieeetdess 34 2 2 Webmin Configuration Menu IP Access Control cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 34 2 3 Webmin Configuration Menu Ports and Addresses AA 35 2 4 Webmin Configuration Menu Change Help Server c ccceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeetnaaeeees 36 2 5 Webmin Configuration Menu Logging s2ccc ccsci Geeta aioe 36 2 6 Webmin Configuration Menu Authentication ccccccceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeecaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeessiaaeeees 37 2 7 Webmin Events Log EE 38 3 1 Webmin USERS INRIA EE A0 3 2 eine WE EE 41 3 3 Current login SESSIONS MENU vasenvcccsscteeccnissnnceesnsccntneevieceenentusnecedenatentensedentecentgeneasnnuscestaedeneenery 41 3 4 Password Restrictions MenU arcs ceccccccceetcitsedanscontpdendacsangeiecdnans dh caste ceetteeasartesandanpeensadensacnteds 42 4 1 Bootup and Shutdown Part F sscisicacsisccortenctsccactaccaneaiee nee eee ered eee eee 45 4 2 Bootup and Shutdown Part sa 25s se 2 aces a Sie eee nnee nn nne 46 4 3 System Menu Change Password Commande 46 4 4 Scheduled Commands EE 47 4 5 Scheduled Commands Displaying a Commande 47 4 6 Webmin Scheduled Cron WEE 47 4 7 Creating a Cron JOb E 48 4 8 Scheduled C
336. network provider You will need the following settings in order to activate your modem Note that not all of these parameters are required by all network providers e Activation code also known as a subsidy lock e Phone Number or MDN Mobile Directory Number e MIN Mobile Identification Number often the same as the Phone Number e System ID or Home System ID e Network ID Click Activate 3 The Activation status field will display Activation is in progress Please wait until a success or failure is detected 4 Upon successful activation the Activation status field will automatically change to display Activation successful If it displays Actvation Failed please verify all activation settings or contact the network provider s service personnel 13 2 2 Cellular Modem Configuration The Cellular Modem Configuration menu provides information that is necessary to establish cellular network service and allows the configuration of parameters that are necessary for the modem to access the cellular network Revision 1 14 1 113 RX1000 RX1100 13 Configuring PPP And The Cellular Modem Necessary parameters are configured in the top part of the screen and modem information and status are displayed at the bottom under Modem Status a Cellular Modem Configuration Parameter value Description Access Point Name apn zerogravitywireless lAccess Point Name APN of Wireless Network
337. ng network interfaces for IPv4 routes eth eth2 eth3 eth4 wlclppp w2c1fr 16 Note This router has the following network interfaces for IPv6 routes eth1 eth2 eth3 eth4 Note Assign null to Interface field to install blackhole route Figure 5 4 Static Routes Note Modem PPP PPPoE on ADSL and any interface configured to obtain IP configuration via DHCP may also negotiate default gateways independently of this configuration menu The Network Mask field specifies the remote subnet field of a static route definition If this field is cleared the route will be deleted when Save is clicked The Network is specified in dotted quad notation and the Mask the number of bits in the subnet mask is an integer between 0 for a default route and 32 for a host route Note It is possible to create a route on a locally connected broadcast network i e without a gateway without also bringing up a corresponding IP address on that interface For example it would be possible to add 192 168 30 0 24 to eth1 which has an IP address of 10 0 1 1 but no corresponding alias address on the 192 168 30 0 24 subnet The Gateway field specifies the IP address of the next hop to which to forward traffic destined to the specified subnet If the gateway to a particular subnet is across a point to point link it is not necessary to specify a gateway but a network interface below must be specified The Interface field specifies the network interface
338. ng preferential treatment to certain classes of traffic It is important to note that prioritization can only be applied to outbound traffic Inbound traffic can not be prioritized The two key elements of prioritization are traffic queues and filters Each prioritized interface has its own unique set of these elements Note Traffic Prioritization works most effectively with WAN interfaces For LAN interfaces please use the Traffic Control interface 20 1 1 1 Priority Queues Prioritization establishes a number of queues each holding packets of differing priority When the interface is ready to transmit a packet it selects a packet from the highest priority queue first If the interface is busy transmitting when packets arrive they are enqueued in the appropriate queue If the interface is not transmitting when the frame arrives to be enqueued the frame is immediately transmitted Prioritization will not add additional delay to a stream of packets of differing priority Prioritization will simply reorder the sequence of transmission of packets to send higher priority packets first Note that it is possible in indefinitely stall the transmission of packets from a lower priority queue if a traffic from a higher queue saturates the interface Note The router mandates that you must have at least a low normal and high priority queue Additionally the high queue must be of higher priority than the normal queue which must be of
339. ng retries 23 5 Traceroute Menu Traceroute Hostname Verbose Output How many Hops 30 IT Lookup Addresses Packet Length 40 Use ICMP instead of UDP Interface Trace It Figure 23 5 Traceroute Menu The Hostname field accepts the host name or IP address to trace the route to Note that this may be an IPv4 or and IPv6 address The Verbose Output field causes ping to present the maximum of output The Lookup Addresses field causes ping to resolve IP addresses to domain names This can make ping behave very slowly if DNS is not properly configured Revision 1 14 1 205 RX1000 RX1100 23 Network Utilities The Use ICMP instead of UDP field causes traceroute to probe with ICMP packets The How many Hops field limits the maximum number of hops that traceroute will attempt to map The Packet Length field specifies the size of the data in the traceroute packet The Interface field specifies the network interface to obtain the source IP address for outgoing probe packets Otherwise the router will manually set the address based on the actual interface taken 23 6 Host Menu Host Hostname Type Network address A gt Nameserver Default e Timeout 10 Look Up Figure 23 6 Host Menu The Hostname field accepts the host name or IP address to ping The Type field selects the type of information to capture The Nameserver fields select the server to use to resolve with I
340. ng with the entire text of a login session Note Wherever possible the use of SSH is recommended over telnet since SSH encrypts both the authentication exchange and the session For information on the configuring the SSH server on RuggedRouter please refer to SSH Configuration There are some situations in which remote network access to the router is necessary and an SSH client is not readily available but a telnet client is Older computer systems or network terminal devices for example may support telnet and not SSH due in part to the fact that telnet itself has been in use for several decades and that it requires much fewer resources than does SSH One way to decrease the risk associated with running a telnet server on RuggedRouter is to configure the firewall to restrict telnet connections It would be advisable for example to allow telnet connections only from the LAN side of the router and prevent them from the WAN side 31 3 Telnet Server Configuration Help Telnet Server Configuration Telnet server configuration Listen on address C All addresses 10 128 10 247 eth1 T 192 168 74 1 eth4 x Save Start Telnet Server Click this button to start the Telnet Service This is the same as you start telnet service at bootup and shutdown menu Figure 31 1 Telnet Server Configuration Main Menu The Listen on address field and list are used to control which local router addresses the telnet serv
341. ng with the status of each one e A list of BGP neighbors along with statistics and state information for each one e Other statistics including known peers and memory usage Revision 1 14 1 171 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing 17 2 3 5 View BGP Configuration Help View BGP Configuration BGP show running config password ruggedquagga enable password ruggedquagga router bgp 200 bgp router id 192 168 1 1 bgp always compare med bgp deterministic med network 192 168 1 0 24 redistribute kernel metric 3 redistribute connected metric 2 redistribute rip metric 1 redistribute ospf metric 5 neighbor 192 168 6 1 remote as 300 neighbor 192 168 6 1 route map out192 168 6 1 out distance 24 123 1 2 13 24 route map in192 168 6 1 permit 1 set metric 20 set local preference 120 set weight 30 route map out192 168 6 1 permit 1 set metric 1 set local preference 200 set weight 15 line vty Figure 17 12 View BGP Configuration Menu This menu displays the text of the active configuration file for the BGP daemon 17 2 4 OSPF OSPF OSPF GC NET _ OSPF WORKS OSPF Global Parameters OSPF Interfaces Network Areas Figure 17 13 OSPF Menu This menu contains the configuration and status of OSPF on the router OSPF View OSPF Configuration The OSPF Global Parameters OSPF Interfaces and Network Areas menus configure OSPF The Status and
342. nk or by clicking on the add above or add below images in the Add field Reorder the policies by clicking on the arrows under the Move field Clicking on a link under the Action field will allow you to edit or delete the rule as shown below You may also make changes by manually editing the rule file Module Index Edit Firewall Rule Firewall rule details Action ACCEPT gt and log to syslog level lt Dontlog gt gt Source zone lt an gt gt J Only hosts in zone with addresses PO Destination zone or port omz d j JY Only hosts in zone with addresses 206 30 180 94 For DNAT or REDIRECT fill in the new destination address or port here Protocol lt Any gt gt Source ports DG Any e Ports or ranges G C ri Destination ports Ant pagar carana wem For DNAT or REDIRECT fill in the original destination port here Original destination address Soo Y for DNAT or REDIRECT Rate limit expression No limit Rule applies to user set DG allusers Save Delete Figure 14 12 Editing A Firewall Rule The following fields describe the information to match against an incoming connection request in order to apply this rule Revision 1 14 1 133 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall The Action field specifies the final action to take on incoming requests matching the rule The and log to syslog field determines whether logging will take place and at which logging level The Source z
343. nt address the router will answer on behalf of the client Revision 1 14 1 158 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing 17 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Enabling the Dynamic Routing Suite e Enabling and starting OSPF RIP and BGP e Configuring OSPF RIP and BGP e Obtaining OSPF RIP and BGP Status e OSPF and VRRP 17 1 1 Quagga RIP OSPF and BGP Dynamic routing is provided by the Quagga suite of routing protocol daemons Quagga provides three daemons for managing routing the core ripd ospfd and bgpd The core daemon handles interfacing with the kernel to maintain the router s routing table and to check link statuses It tells RIP OSPF and BGP what state links are in what routes are in the routing table and some information about the interfaces The ripd ospfd and bgpd daemons handle communications with other routers using the RIPv2 OSPF v2 and BGP protocols respectively and decide which routers are preferred to forward to for each network route known to the router In complex legacy networks RIP OSPF and BGP may be active on the same router at the same time Typically however one of them is employed 17 1 2 BGP Fundamentals The Border Gateway Protocol BGP RFC 4271 is a robust and scalable routing protocol BGP is designed to manage a routing table of up to 90000 routes and is therefore used in large networks or among gro
344. nterfaces prior to building the firewall 3 Set the default policies for traffic from zone to zone to be as restrictive as possible Has the local zone been been blocked from connecting to the DMZ or firewall Does the DMZ or firewall need to accept connections Which connections should be dropped and which reset What logs are kept 4 How is the network interface IP assigned i e dynamically or statically Do hosts at the central site need to know the local address 5 If your network interface IP is dynamically assigned configure masquerading 6 If your network interface IP is statically assigned configure Source Network address Translation SNAT If a sufficient number of IP addresses are provided by the ISP static NAT can be employed instead 7 If your hosts must accept sessions from the Internet configure the rules file to support Destination Network address Translation DNAT Which hosts need to accept connections from whom and on which ports 8 Configure the rules file to override the default policies Have external connections been limited to approved IP address ranges Have all but the required protocols been blocked 9 Ifyou are supporting a VPN add additional rules 10 Check the configuration using the Shorewall Firewall menu Check Firewall button 11 Activate the firewall It is usually a good idea to port scan the firewall after activation and verify that logging is functioning Revision 1 14 1 120 RX1000
345. ntlet net fw TCP any any e See also the Note on VRRP Firewall Rules and Gauntlet below e Apply the Shorewall configuration Revision 1 14 1 283 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router Using Webmin visit the Bootup and Shutdown menu and ensure that Shorewall is enabled to start at boot Start Shorewall Webmin access is now blocked until secure access through VPC is opened 34 4 2 2 Step 2 of 3 Gauntlet Configuration e Use rrsetup to define a Gauntlet passphrase and enable Gauntlet 34 4 2 3 Step 3 of 3 CCC Configuration e Use CCC to create a network router Refer to the Gauntlet CCC User Manual for details or use Help after connecting to the CCC Use VPC with an Administrator account to verify access to Webmin Using the CCC authorize users for defined devices behind a router Use VPC with a user account to connect to an authorized device Again refer to the Gauntlet VPC User Manual for more details or use VPC Help 34 4 2 4 Note on VRRP Firewall Rules and Gauntlet It may be necessary to specify additional firewall rules in order that certain protocols such as VRRP be accessible to the router without restriction by Gauntlet If for example the router is configured to be a member of a VRRP Virtual Router Group it must be able to accept VRRP communication from its peers The following firewall rule must be added after the ACCEPT rules to UDP ports 30000 and 30001 and before the rules under Gauntlet control
346. ntp drift Oct 8 11 32 23 localhost synchronized to LOCAL O stratum a3 o Oct 18 unze localhost kernel time syne disabled 0041 o Oct 1e 11 33 27 localhost synchronized to 217 112 91 209 men Oct 1e 11 48 32 localhost time reset 0 156804 5 Oct 18 mg localhost kernel time sync enabled ooo1 Oct 18 11 52 53 localhost synchronized to LOCAL O stratum a3 o Oct 1e 12 06 50 localhost synchronized to 217 112 91 209 enn Oct 1s 12 15 26 localhost synchronized to LOCAL O stratum 13 po re 12 15 26 localhost Refresh Figure 29 5 NTP Log The NTP Log menu displays the log of recent NTP events Revision 1 14 1 255 RX1000 RX1100 29 Configuring NTP 29 2 7 Viewing GPS Status IRIGB GPS Status refresh GPS Status Latitude Longitude GPS Lock Number of Satellites 3723 2475 12158 3416 No 07 Tracked Satellite Status Satellite ID Satellite Strength 07 42 02 43 26 42 27 42 09 42 04 41 15 42 refresh Figure 29 6 GPS Status If the router is equipped with a Precision Time Protocol card this page will shows the status of the GPS module The Latitude and Longitude fields show the current position of the GPS antenna The GPS Lock field show the GPS lock status The Number of Satellites shows how many satellites are currently being tracked by the GPS module The Tracked Satellite Status table shows the ID and signal strength of tracked satellites
347. ntrol which clients can get IP address from the pool See documentation for dhcpd3 for syntax and allowed values Very rarely needed The Allow unknown clients setting already handles the most common use of this option Revision 1 14 1 248 RX1000 RX1100 28 DHCP Relay 28 DHCP Relay 28 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with the use and configuration of RuggedRouter s DHCP Relay feature 28 1 1 DHCP Relay Fundamentals RuggedRouter can be configured to act as a DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP Relay Agent forwards DHCP and BOOTP requests from clients on one layer 2 network to one or more configured DHCP servers on other networks This allows one to implement some measure of isolation between DHCP clients and servers The DHCP Relay Agent is configured to listen for DHCP and BOOTP requests on particular Ethernet and VLAN network interfaces and to relay to a list of one or more DHCP servers When a request is received from client it forwards the request to each of the configured DHCP servers When a reply is received from a server it forwards the reply back to the originating client Note The current release of DHCP Relay Agent on RuggedRouter only supports operation on Ethernet interfaces It also does not support the Circuit ID and Remote ID Information sub options Note While DHCP Relay and DHCP Server may both be configured to run concurrently they may not be configured to run on the same netwo
348. number to use depends upon factors such as e The probability of a line failure e The number of RTUs and amount of traffic on the port e The cost of retransmitting the request from the server vs timing out and retransmitting at the master This cost is affected by the speed of the ports and of the network 24 1 5 4 ModBus Exception Handling If the Server Gateway receives a request for an unconfigured RTU it will respond to the originator with a special message called an exception type 10 A type 11 exception is returned by the server if the RTU fails to respond to requests Native TcpModbus polling packages will want to receive these messages Immediate indication of a failure can accelerate recovery sequences and reduce the need for long timeouts 24 1 5 5 TcoModbus Performance Determinants The following description provides some insight into the possible sources of delay and error in an end to end TcpModbus exchange Revision 1 14 1 215 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols Client Server Master Gateway Gateway RTU GE gt Transmission time from ES a J Master to Client Gateway la Mae Network transmission time a e Queuing time Transmission time from Server Gateway to RTU Pi e RTU think and transmission times to Server Gateway Network transmission time A EE EEN 8 KS Transmission time from Client Gateway to Master Ob eet OF J ER 9 a Time out Retran
349. o be displyed The Perform HEX ASCII dump field causes the data content of the captured packets to be displayed This option may generate a large capture data set The Verbosity fields specify the level of decoding which tcpdump supplies The Ignore hostname Only hostname selector causes traffic to or from from the specified address to be excluded or included to the exclusion of other traffic respectively One of the following three check boxes must be selected in order for filtering to take place If the SSH box is selected SSH traffic to or from the selected IP address will be excluded displayed If the Webmin traffic box is selected Webmin traffic to or from the selected IP address will be excluded displayed If the All traffic box is selected traffic to or from the selected IP address will be excluded displayed A typical usage of this filter is to dump all traffic on an interface and to prevent the user s own traffic from being displayed The Ignore protocols Only protocols selector excludes or displays traffic in the protocols specified in the accompanying check boxes The Ports to trace field specifies TCP UDP ports to trace Enter a list of port numbers separated by spaces to trace more than a single port Revision 1 14 1 207 RX1000 RX1100 23 Network Utilities 23 7 2 Frame Relay Link Layer Trace A WAN Interface Frame Relay Link Layer Trace A WAN Interface Interface to capture on w4fr16 sl Maximum packets captured
350. o the Webmin user interface Webmin accesses are authenticated first against the local user database If the user does not exist locally the root account for example is always defined locally then Webmin will attempt to authenticate the user via RADIUS The WEBMIN service allows the configuration of multiple operator accounts each logged separately and each with a different privilege level Please refer to Webmin User and Group Fundamentals for more detail on Webmin privilege levels The RADIUS server authenticating the WEBMIN service must also be configured to supply a privilege level field which is used to allow different levels of access to different users of the web management interface See RADIUS Server Configuration for more information on configuring the RADIUS server 34 7 2 RADIUS Authentication Configuration Help Radius Authentication Configure Radius Authentication Address Port Secret Timeout Services Bind Interface Move Add 205 133 87 42 default EEA 10 LOGIN none FTE 186 42 4 130 default Kie ul 10 WEBMIN dummy n Fe 198 44 160 1 default perez 10 PPP none Ei Ke Figure 34 32 RADIUS Authentication Main Menu Revision 1 14 1 299 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router RADIUS Authentication is configured from within the Maintenance menu Miscellaneous sub menu This menu allows you to add delete and RADIUS servers Add a server by by clicking o
351. oad Initially your RuggedRouter will have no previously saved configurations The factory defaults will always be available Once a configuration is selected the archive will be restored After the configuration is restored the router will reboot immediately Figure 1 11 Selecting a previously made configuration uaggedRouter Web The RuggedCom Web interface is provided by an enhanced version of the popular Webmin interface Start a web browser session and open a connection to the router by entering a URL that specifies its hostname or IP address e g h ttps 179 1 0 45 10000 Once the router is contacted start the login process by clicking on the Login link The resulting page should be similar to that presented below Enter the root user name and the appropriate password for that user then click on the Login button The router is shipped with a default administrator password of admin Once successfully logged in the user will be presented with the main menu Revision 1 14 1 29 RX1000 RX1100 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router Login to RuggedCom Webmin You must enter a username and password to login to the Webmin server on myrouter Username Password Login Clear Figure 1 12 Signing On To The Router With A Web Browser 1 4 2 SSL Certificate Warnings Your browser may complain about the SSL certificate that Webmin issues This happens because the default SSL certificate that
352. ollowed by the number of bits in the subnet address y and clicking Add Revision 1 14 1 107 RX1000 RX1100 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem 12 2 5 Modem Incoming Call Logs Incoming Call Logs Refresh 03 17 14 41 52 mgetty interim release 1 1 33 Apr10 03 17 03 17 03 17 14 41 52 check for lockfiles 14 41 52 locking the line 14 41 53 lowering DTR to reset Modem 03 17 14 41 53 send d d d d d dAT amp FS2 255 0d 03 17 14 41 56 waiting for ok found rg 03 17 14 41 56 send ATSO 0 0d 03 17 14 41 56 waiting for ok found 03 17 14 41 56 send ATW2L3MO 0d 03 17 03 17 14 41 56 waiting for OK found 14 41 56 send AT Od 03 17 14 41 56 waiting for ok found rg 03 17 14 41 57 waiting Refresh Figure 12 8 Incoming Call Logs This page shows the latest log entries for incoming calls This is mainly useful when trying to debug a problem with establishing incoming connections 12 2 6 Modem PPP Logs PPP Logs Refresh BEE EE EE Mar 17 17 19 22 chat 3192 0K Mar 17 17 19 22 chat 3192 got it 17 17 19 22 chat 3192 send ATDT1 M 17 17 19 22 chat 3192 expect CONNECT 17 17 19 22 chat 3192 M 17 17 19 31 chat 3192 ATDT1 M M 17 17 19 31 chat 3192 NO DIALTONE M Mar 17 17 19 31 chat 3192 failed Mar 17
353. on the load average should be less than 2 0 e The disk usage A disk usage higher than 92 requires attention e The memory usage indicating the amount of memory used by applications Under normal operation memory usage should be less than 60 e The chassis temperature e Any major alarms such as the failure of hardware components Revision 1 14 1 30 RX1000 RX1100 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router yrrs Webmin AlWebmin Configuration A Got Webmin Events Log PS 1 88 300VDC and 85 264VAC Rev c2 System C Bootup and Shutdown ETHL Ems SER 1 SER 2 SER 3 SER 4 change Password el E as l Toe Scheduled Commands Scheduled Cron Jobs woe SE zem Honam TE1 1 TE1 2 TE1 3 TE1 4 ystem Time Networking Network Configuration System summary Ethernet Version Webmin 1 160 2 rr224 in ROX1 10 0 SITE Serial Number RX1K 0805 0041 T3 User root Modem Remote IP 10 128 10 10 ADSL DDS AlShorewall Firewall IPsec VPN Uptime 17 07 07 up 16 min 1 user load average 0 46 0 26 0 15 75 Hostname ruggedrouter Time Fri Apr 27 17 07 03 2007 Dynamic Routing Disk Usage AIVRRP Memory Usage 15 D GRE Tunnels Temperature 34 5 C 94 1 F Traffic Prioritization Major Alarms none Network Utilities Servers IRIGB Serial Protocols AIDHCP Server INTP Server AISSH Server Maintenance Backup And Restore SISNMP Configuration Radius Authentication
354. on 1 14 1 155 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN The fourth group lines 30 39 describe connection describe VPN connections here openswantest The first line is particularly useful since it indicates the connection addresses subnets and that the connection is active erouted If there are no entries then the VPN hasn t been established at all If there are entries but no STATE_QUICK_R2 IPsec SA established lines then the IPSec parameters are configured but the tunnel hasn t been established This can be normal tunnels become active once the Phase 1 and Phase 2 security associations are created and this usually only occurs after traffic is flowing The associations then get torn down after a timeout period 16 2 10 IPSec X 509 Roaming Client Example This example details how to set up IPSec connections using X 509 certificates on the router The router will provide an IPSec gateway to a number of remote clients that connect via an Internet connection Each of the clients will fetch an IP address locally from a DHCP server and it is assumed but not required that network address translation will be applied at the client end Each of the clients should appear on the local network on a specific IP address In this example the clients are laptop PCs SS wlppp N Router PP EES Internet Remote Gateway ee 4 eth1 192 168 17 3 10 0 1 1 Local Network Laptop 10 0 0 0 8 IPSec Client
355. on is the address of the other end of the link and is usually assigned by the network administrator or Internet service provider The Description field attaches a description to the logical interface viewable from the network interfaces menu The Delete this logical interface button removes the currently selected interface Repetitive use of this button on other DLCls assigned to the channel will free the channel up 7 2 4 Editing A Logical Interface PPP zs Edit Logical Interface w1c1ppp T1 1 Channel 1 PPP Parameters Name Local Address Netmask Remote Address Vente Description wicdppp 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 2 2 2 2 T1 Internet link Save Delete Figure 7 7 Edit Logical Interface PPP The Local Address Netmask Remote Address and Description fields are as described in the previous section Some PPP implementations exist that are unable to negotiate the LCP Magic Number feature correctly The Disable Magic Number field disables PPP LCP negotiation of the Magic Number feature altogether Revision 1 14 1 73 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 7 2 5 T1 E1 Statistics When at least one logical interface is configured T1 E1 Link and logical interface statistics will be available These statistics are available from links on the T1 E1 WAN Interfaces menu Link Statistics are provided through the View Link Statistics link at the bottom of each interface table Frame Rela
356. ond set of gratuitous ARPs are sent This mechanism offers a second chance to teach the switching fabric and hosts of the new provider of a gateway address The Extra Interface to Monitor field causes VRRP to release control of the VRIP if the specified interface stops running This prevents the situation in which a host forwards information to a gateway router that itself has no way to forward the traffic Note The Extra Interface to Monitor field allows monitoring of both logical and physical network interfaces Examples of a physical interface include e a WAN port w1 e a channelized interface on a WAN port w1c1 Logical interfaces ultimately provide transport for IP on top of physical interfaces Examples of logical interfaces implemented on top of physical interfaces might include e a PPP interface on a channelized WAN port w1c1ppp e a Frame Relay interface on an unchannelized WAN port w1fr16 Revision 1 14 1 190 RX1000 RX1100 19 Configuring VRRP Generally one will need to monitor logical network interfaces as they participate directly in the IP network For the purposes of VRRP one generally wants to monitor status at the highest network layer that is practical e g IP layer 3 Note Monitoring a physical interface does not provide an aggregation of the status information of logical interfaces configured on top of it For example it could be that all the logical interfaces on a given physical interfa
357. one field specifies the zone from which the request originates The Destination zone or port field specifies the request s destination Each of the Source and Destination zones may use one of the defined zone names or one may select Other and specify a zone name in the text field to the right Both Source and Destination may be further qualified using the Only hosts in zone with addresses fields Multiple comma separated subnet IP or MAC addresses may be specified in the following way e Subnet 192 168 1 0 24 e IP 192 168 1 1 e IP range 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 25 e MAC 00 A0 C9 15 39 78 The Protocol field specifies the protocol tcp udp or icmp to match The Source ports and Destination ports fields specify TCP or UDP port numbers to match These fields are in the form of a list of comma separated port numbers or ranges of port numbers of the form first last The Original destination address field matches the request s destination IP address Note If you use are using DNAT to implement port forwarding enter the original destination address here and the forwarded address in the Destination zone or port fields Only hosts in zone with address sub field The Rate limit expression fields specify rate limit control of the form X sec or X min where X is the number of allowed requests in the time period A burst limit field Y where Y is the maximum consecutive number of requests and defaults to five if no
358. onfiguration 149 Showing Status 154 VRRP Fundamentals 186 keepalived 186 Revision 1 14 1 335 RX1000 RX1100
359. onfiguration Menu cccesecccceeeeseeeeeeeeseneeeenseneeeneeeeneeeeseneeeeennenaes 189 19 2 3 Editing A VRRP te ne 190 19 24 Editing A VRRP e EE 191 19 2 5 Viewing VRRP Instances Status ANEN 191 20 Traffic Prioritization ee EE EE hee Se a rc cata 193 20 1 IMFO CMICHON EE 193 20 1 1 Traffic Prioritization Fundamentals ergeet Eege ed 193 20 1 2 Prioritization Example EE 195 Revision 1 14 1 7 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 20 2 Configuring Traffic Ge EE 196 20 2 1 Traffic Prioritization Main Menu ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeees 196 20 2 2 Interface Prioritization Menu AA 196 20 2 3 Prioritization ee 198 21 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP eg egetrbu deen stecht Age Eed 199 AE D RE EE 199 22 Configuring Generic Routing Encapsulation 200 22 Te WMO CUICTIOM NEE 200 22 1 1 GRE ale Ee Eu 200 22 2 GRE Configuration WEE EEN 201 22 2 1 GRE EI BE EE 201 22 2 2 GRE Configuration Menu EE EE 201 23 Network Utilities ebe deeg eebe EEE eege ates htt een deatintan reseed eii 203 ves El tee te 203 23 2 Network Utilities Main Mem iicc scciitcescecdaceedenciingth cist atetsateneiedidesteeehidaaetadene eats 203 23 9 gt PING MENU crete eel nel ss ciel A A A E Se accede ete Getler 203 23 47 Ping Check Men EE 204 23 5 tracero te E aeri an a a e aa e ete E E i 205 23 6 Host Menu arsperet EEE K E EEA EAA EE AA NAKE 206 E een EE 206 23 7 1 Tcodump A Network
360. onfigure traffic based upon zones But the default policies cannot take into account criteria such as the type of protocol IP source destination addresses and the need to perform special actions such as port forwarding The Shorewall rules can accomplish this The Shorewall rules provide exceptions to the default policies In actuality when a connection request arrives the rules file is inspected first If no match is found then the default policy is applied Rules are of the form Action Source Zone Destination Zone Protocol Destination Port Source Port Original Destination IP Rate Limit User Group Actions are ACCEPT DROP REJECT DNAT DNAT REDIRECT REDIRECT CONTINUE LOG and QUEUE The DNAT REDIRECT CONTINUE LOG and QUEUE actions are not widely used used and are not described here Action Description ACCEPT Allow the connection request to proceed DROP The connection request is simply ignored No notification is made to the requesting client REJECT The connection request is rejected with an RST TCP or an ICMP destination unreachable packet being returned to the client DNAT Forward the request to another system and optionally another port REDIRECT Redirect the request to a local tcp port number on the local firewall This is most often used to remap port numbers for services on the firewall itself The remaining fields of a rule are as described below Action The a
361. ons Connection Remote 16 Connection Remote 20 Connection Service 2201 Add a new IPsec VPN connection Import connection from file Global options and policies Start Connection Select a connection from the list next to this button and click it to attempt its immediate establishment on Click this button to activate the current configuration by re starting the running OpenSwan IPsec server Remote_20 process Any established connections will be terminated 4Service_2201 Figure 16 3 IPsec VPN Configuration After Connections Have Been Created 16 2 3 Server Configuration pel Server Configuration Global VPN server settings NAT Traversal e Yes No Syslog logging level Default daemon error Log to facility auth with priority debug v Save Figure 16 4 Server Configuration The NAT Traversal fields enable and disable this feature Enable NAT Traversal if this router originates the VPN connection and the VPN connection passes through a firewall The Syslog logging level fields determines the facility and priority of log messages generated by Openswan Revision 1 14 1 149 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN 16 2 4 L2TPD Configuration RE L2TPD Configuration L2TPD Configuration Option Local IP Address 192 168 222 1 First Address in Remote IP Address Pool 192 168 222 10 Maximum Number of Remote IP Address fio Netmask of Remote IP Address Pool 255 255 0 0
362. or is used by a DHCP server running on the firewall The firewall will be configured to allow DHCP traffic to and from the interface even when the firewall is stopped You may also wish to use this option if you have a static IP but you are on a LAN segment that has a lot of laptops that use DHCP and you select the norfc1918 option see below Revision 1 14 1 129 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall The arp_filter option causes this interface to only answer ARP who has requests from hosts that are routed out of that interface Setting this option facilitates testing of your firewall where multiple firewall interfaces are connected to the same HUB Switch all interfaces connected to the single HUB Switch should have this option specified Note that using such a configuration is strongly recommended against The routeback option causes Shorewall to set up handling for routing packets that arrive on this interface back out the same interface The tepflags option causes Shorewall to make sanity checks on the header flags in TCP packets arriving on this interface Checks include Null flags SYN FIN SYN RST and FIN URG PSH these flag combinations are typically used for silent port scans Packets failing these checks are logged according to the TCP_FLAGS_LOG_LEVEL option in etc shorewall shorewall conf and are disposed of according to the TCP_FLAGS_ DISPOSITION option The norfc1918 option causes packets arriving on this in
363. or login field determines the maximum time from a connection request until login completes after which the client will be disconnected The Allow TCP forwardingfield specifies whether TCP forwarding is permitted If this option is set clients on a remote network can tunnel TCP connections to machines on the RuggedRouter s network The Allow connection to forwarded portsfield specifies whether remote hosts on the client network are allowed to connect to ports forwarded for the client 30 2 4 Access Control Access Control Network and login access control options Only allow users al C Lo EE Only allow members of groups af Deny users D None De N Deny members of groups None eee fa Figure 30 4 SSH Server Access Control Revision 1 14 1 259 RX1000 RX1100 30 Configuring SSH The Only allow users field specifies the users allowed to connect by SSH The specification can be a list of user name patterns separated by spaces Login is allowed only for user names that match one of the patterns and can be used as wild cards in the patterns Only user names are valid a numerical user ID is not recognized By default login is allowed for all users If the pattern takes the form USER HOST then USER and HOST are separately checked restricting logins to particular users from particular hosts The account selector Ea button can be used to build up a list of allowable users The Only allow mem
364. ord field sets the password to be used for the enable command of ospfd This is used by the telnet interface of ospfd to control access to the configuration The Telnet Password field sets the password to be used for telnet access to ospfd This is used as the login password of ospfd when locally telnetting to port 2604 of the router The ABR Type field select which method to use on area border routers to manage inter area routes Standard follows RFC2178 Cisco and IBM follow RFC3509 Shortcut is covered by the draft ietf ospf shortcut abr 00 txt document Standard requires all ABRs to have a backbone connection The other three methods allow for ABRs that do not have a backbone connection The Auto Cost Reference Bandwidth field sets the reference bandwidth used to calculate auto costs for OSPF interfaces The auto cost is the reference bandwidth divided by the interface bandwidth By default this is 100Mbit 1OMbit auto cost of 10 The interface cost is set in the Core Interface Revision 1 14 1 173 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing configuration for each interface The cost for each interface can also be set in the OSPF Interface configuration to override the auto cost calculation The Default Metric field sets the default metric to be used for OSPF routes which don t have another metric specified The Default Information Originate field wnen enabled causes the router to advertise its default route to the OSPF netw
365. ore convenient approach Shorewall is really just a front end to netfilter maintaining the information used to generate the iptables rules in a less complicated form Shorewall itself does not provide a graphical front end and instead assumes administrators will have a fair amount of familiarity with reading and editing Linux configuration files The RuggedRouter comes with a GUI front that simplifies some of the management aspects 14 2 3 Network Address Translation Network Address Translation NAT enables a LAN to use one set of IP addresses for internal traffic and a second set for external traffic The NAT function of netfilter makes all necessary IP address translations as traffic passes between the intranet and Internet NAT is often referred to in Linux as IP Masquerading NAT itself provides a type of firewall by hiding internal IP addresses More importantly NAT enables a network to use more internal IP addresses Since they re used internally only there s no possibility of conflict with IP addresses used by other organizations Typically your internal network will be setup to use one or more of the reserved address blocks described in RFC1918 namely 10 0 0 0 8 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 172 16 0 0 12 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 16 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 As packets with these address reach the NAT gateway their source address and source TCP UDP port number is recorded and the address port number is t
366. ork The Distance field sets the administrative distance to use for all routes unless overridden by other distance settings The Distance External field sets the administrative distance to use for all external routes backbone routes The Distance Inter area field sets the administrative distance to use for all routes between areas The Distance Intra area field sets the administrative distance to use for all routes within an area The Hostname field sets the hostname for the ospf daemon This value is only used as a a reference for convenience The telnet interface prompt will contain this hostname The router s system wide hostname is used if this field is left blank The Opaque LSA field controls the opaque LSA option This feature is covered in RFC2370 This feature is sometimes used to distribute application specific information through a network using OSPF LSAs The Passive Default option controls the default active passive state of new interfaces When enabled all new interfaces will be passive by default The passive state of individual interfaces is controlled from the OSPF Interfaces configuration The Refresh Timer field controls how frequently OSPF LSA refreshes occur The RFC 1583 Compatibility field controls support for RFC 1583 compatibility If this option is enabled OSPF will be compatible with the obsolete RFC 1583 version of OSPF By default it is compatible with RFC2178 version of OSPF only The Redistribute Connected f
367. ork interfaces menu The Delete button removes the currently selected interface 8 2 3 T3 E3 Statistics When at least one logical interface is configured T3 E3 Link and logical interface statistics will be available These statistics are available from links on the T3 E3 WAN Interfaces menu Link Statistics are available via the View T3 E3 X Link Statistics link at the bottom of each interface table Frame Relay and PPP statistics are available through Statistics links under the interface name column of each interface table Revision 1 14 1 83 RX1000 RX1100 8 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T3 E3 Link Frame Relay And PPP Interface Statistics are as described in detail in the T1 E1 Statistics section of the chapter on Chapter 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 The differences are that the T3 E3 link reports only only AIS LOS OOF and YEL alarms 8 2 4 Current Routes amp Interface Table The table provided by this command is the same one as described in the Networking menu Network Utilities sub menu It is also provided in the T3 E3 configuration menu as a convenience 8 2 5 Upgrading Software In some installations the only access to a RugegdRouter at a remote site may be viaaa T3 or E3 connection Usually a ROX system software upgrade will stop the system perform the upgrade and then restart it If the T3 E3 port were to be upgraded in this way the upgrade would fail as the T3 E3 link would be take
368. ot desired as the method for choosing the best link 17 1 5 8 OSPF Authentication OSPF authentication is used when it is desirable to prevent unauthorized routers from joining the OSPF network By enabling authentication and configuring a shared key on all the routers only routers which have the same authentication key will be able to send and receive advertisements within the OSPF network Authentication adds a small overhead due to the encryption of messages so is not to be preferred on completely private networks with controlled access 17 1 5 9 RIP Authentication RIP authentication is used when it is desirable to prevent unauthorized routers from joining the network RIP authentication is supported by per interface configuration or the use of key chains Revision 1 14 1 162 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing Separate key chains spanning different groups of interfaces and having separate lifespans are possible By enabling authentication and configuring a shared key on all the routers only routers which have the same authentication key will be able to send and receive advertisements within the RIP network 17 1 5 10 OSPF And Antispoofing Antispoofing is the process of discarding packets arriving on an interface because they match the subnet of another configure interface This is not a normal occurrence in conventional routing This situation can arise in OSPF when routers are multiply connected If for exampl
369. ots Channelized interface 1 2 3 4 24 abba kacht z Name Description Local Address Netmask Remote Address wicippp Up Feeder Station 6 192 168 100 1 255 255 255 255 192 168 100 2 wic2ppp Up Feeder Station 13 192 168 101 1 255 255 255 255 192 168 101 2 wic3ppp Up Feeder Station 19 192 168 102 1 255 255 255 255 192 168 102 2 wic4fri6 Up Main Control Center 185 42 16 101 255 255 255 255 145 7 81 221 wic4fri7 Up Backup Control Center 181 22 44 16 255 255 255 255 171 141 13 12 Edit T1 1 Parameters Figure 7 4 T1 E1 Network Interfaces After Interface Creation 7 2 1 2 Naming Of Logical Interfaces Webmin names the logical interfaces for you but allows you to provide a description All interfaces start with a w to identify them as wan interfaces followed by the physical interface number Unchannelized hardware interfaces supply only one channel that can be composed of a varying number of timeslots logical interface You may configure one PPP interface or up to 992 Frame Relay DLCI interfaces The next part of the identifier is either ppp or frX where X the frame relay channel number Channelized hardware allows more than one logical interface The next part of the identifier indicates the channel the interface uses with a c followed by the lowest channel used The final part of the identifier is either ppp or fr and the frame relay channel number Revis
370. ou may allow read and write access set community names enable traps and program the router to issue traps with a specific client address If your router is an RX1100 you may configure and activate the Snort Intrusion Detection system and the Gauntlet Security Appliance If you decide to forward daily email summaries you must configure a mail forwarder in the Maintenance menu Miscellaneous sub menu Outgoing Mail sub menu When your routers configuration is stable it is recommended that the configuration should be uploaded from the router and stored as a backup The Maintenance menu Backup And Restore sub menu will be useful Should you need to transfer files to or from the router the Maintenance menu Upload Download Files sub menu will be useful Further concerns such as ensuring robustness measuring and optimizing performance are dealt with by reading the guide fully Revision 1 14 1 22 RX1000 RX1100 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router 1 Setting Up And Administering The Router 1 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with the RuggedCom Serial Console interface the RuggedRouter Setup script and signing on to the Web interface This chapter describes the following procedures e Running the Setup Script e Signing on the Web Interface e Signing on to the Command Prompt e Restoring the default configuration 1 1 1 Access Methods You can access the router through the console Ethernet ports WAN ports
371. ough the Link Backup Status and the Link Backup Log link after the daemon has been started A link backup configuration can be tested through the Link Backup Test link Revision 1 14 1 182 RX1000 RX1100 18 Link Backup 18 2 2 Link Backup Configurations Halo Link Backup Configurations Name Main Interface Backup Interface Enabled eth1 gt eth2 etbi eth2 lyes Add new Apply Configuration This applies the current settings by restarting the link backup deamon Figure 18 3 Link Backup Configurations This menu displays existing main backup link relationships Following the links under the Name field to an existing pair will edit them or adds a new one The Apply Configuration button will apply changes by restarting the link backup daemon 18 2 3 Edit Link Backup Configuration Help Edit Link Backup Configuration Configure eth1 to eth2 link backup Name eth1 gt eth2 lv Enable this configuration lv Transfer default gateway Backup gateway fie2 168 2 254 J Bring up backup link on demand Main ping test target 10 128 10 222 Ping Interval ho Ping timeout 2 seconds Ping retry count Bo Startup delay 50 seconds Main path down timeout 50 seconds Main path up timeout e seconds Save EEE Figure 18 4 Edit Link Backup Configuration Set the Name field to supply an identification of the pair This field initially defaults to the main_link_name gt backu
372. ould be after a reboot Warning this may make your system inaccessible via the network and cut off access to Webmin Apply Configuration Figure 5 1 Network Configuration Menu This menu allows you to configure IP networking parameters Revision 1 14 1 50 RX1000 RX1100 5 Configuring Networking Select the Core Settings icon to configure kernel networking settings such as syncookies filtering Select the Dummy Interface in order to assign an IP Address to the router that is independent of its interfaces Select the Routing and Default Route icon to assign a gateway address Select the Static Multicast Routing icon to configure static multicast routes Select the DNS Client icon to point the router at a DNS server Select the Host Addresses icon to locally configure IP address hostname mappings Select the End To End Backup icon to configure an end to end backup connection Select the Current Routing amp Interface Table icon to view the routing table The Apply Configuration button serves to restore the permanently saved changes and restart Ethernet networking 5 3 1 Core Settings Help Core Settings Core Settings IP 6 Support O Yes No Ignore All ICMP ECHO requests yes No Ignore ICMP Broadcasts yes O No Syncookie Protection O Yes No Send ICMP Redirect ves O No Save and Apply Figure 5 2 Core Networking Settings This menu allows you to configure core networkin
373. ows you to define a classifier for the given value mask combination of an IP packet s TOS byte Value and mask are both specified in hexadecimal notation using the Ox prefix It is also possible to specify a diffserv marking or DSCP Diffserv Code Point These are typically quoted as 6 bit values and must be left shifted multiplied by 4 for use in the tos field For example a DSCP of 0x2E EF or Expedited Forwarding would be entered as 0xB8 0xFC 4 X Ox2E OxB8 and the two lowest order bits are masked by masking with OxFC Note ToS field matches take precedence over the assigned mark The Save button saves the class changes to the TC configuration The Delete button delete the class from the TC configuration 15 2 3 TC Rules This menu allows you to add edit or remove a traffic classification rule Add a new rule by selecting the Add a new traffic classification rule link or by clicking on the add above or add below images in the Add column Reorder rules by clicking on the arrows in the Move column Helps TC Rules Rules define which mark to assign to a packet and or connection based on various criteria Every rule is processed in order for each packet and every matching rule is applied to the packet or its connection unless a CONTINUE rule is matched in which case no further rules are processed for the packet Add a new traffic classification rule Mark Source Destination P
374. p_link_name The Enable this configuration field enables this backup The Transfer default gateway field causes the gateway to be transferred to the backup link upon failure of the main link path If the backup interface is point to point such as PPP the Backup gateway IP address can be automatically determined Non point to point interfaces such as Ethernet must be configured with one The Bring up backup link on demand option allows protocols such as DHCP to be used to fetch an address when required Revision 1 14 1 183 RX1000 RX1100 18 Link Backup The Startup Delay field configures the length of time to wait for the main link to come up at the start of day Note If Startup Delay is too low backup may be falsely triggered at start up The Ping Interval field configures how often pings are sent The Ping timeout field configures the duration before immediately retrying a ping The Ping retry count field configures the number of ping retries before construing a path failure Note The maximum time to discover a path failure is the length of the Ping Interval and the product of the Number of missed pings before fail over and the Ping timeout The Main path down timeout field specifies the number of seconds the main trunk must be down before starting the backup trunk The Main path up timeout field specifies the number of seconds the main trunk must have returned to service before stopping the backup trunk
375. packets 0 0 Number of CHAP packets 0 0 Number of IP packets 18322 58816 LCP Statistic Receive Transmit Number of Config Request pkts Number of Config Ack packets Number of Config Nack packets Number of Config Reject packets Number of Term Regst packets Number of Terminate Ack packets 3 3 D 0 0 0 Number of Code Reject packets 0 0 Olai oO oO oO ol oi o Number of Protocol Rej packets Number of Echo Request packets 58336 58336 Number of Echo Reply packets 0 0 0 Number of Discard Request packets 0 LCP Communications Errors Packets discarded unknown LCP code Received LCP packets too large Received packets invalid or out of sequence Configure Acks Received packets invalid Configure Maks or Configure Rejects o o o o o Configure Naks or Configure Rejects with bad Identifier General Communications Errors Number discards bad header Number discards unknown unsupported protocol oO w o Number discards unknown unsupported protocol too large for Protocol Reject Refresh Clear Statistics Figure 7 10 PPP Link Statistics 7 2 6 T1 E1 Loopback When at least one logical interface is configured a T1 E1 Loopback tests can be performed This menu can be reached from a link on the T1 E1 WAN Interfaces menu Revision 1 14 1 76 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Fra
376. pen the help text from a help server In this way the router does not waste large amounts of disk space storing help text and network bandwidth sending large web pages By default the router directs the browser to the same server used to upgrade the router This is as specified in the Maintenance menu Upgrade System sub menu Change Repository Server command This command allows you to disable Web management help use the upgrade repository server as well as specify a new server If you specify an alternate web server to host the help text you must install release specific help directories below the document root The menu suggests the currently expected directory The actual help files are provided with every release under the html directory at the repository server 2 2 3 Logging Module Index Webmin can be configured to write a log of web server hits in the standard CLF log file format If logging is enabled you can also choose whether IP addresses or hostnames are recorded and how often the log file is cleared When enabled logs are written to the file var Log webmin miniserv Llog When logging is enabled Webmin will also write a more detailed log of user actions to the file var log webmin webmin 1log This log can be viewed and analysed with the Webmin Actions Log module to see exactly what each Webmin user has been doing Webserver logging options Disable logging D Enable logging Jv Log resolved hostname
377. per interfaces may be configured to Auto negotiable 10 BaseT Half Duplex 10 BaseT Full Duplex 100 BaseT Half Duplex and 100 BaseT Full Duplex modes The Virtual LAN interfaces field displays how many VLAN interfaces are created on this interface and the link Add virtual lan interface allows you to add a VLAN interface on the physical interface 6 2 2 1 Virtual LAN Interfaces Click the link Add Virtual Lan Interface in order to create a VLAN interface Create Active Interface Active Virtual Lan Interface Parameters Name eth3 4 digits maximum IP Address Mask Status Up e Down Create Figure 6 4 Creating a Virtual Lan Interface The only new parameter is the VLAN ID which must be a numeric value between 1 and 4094 The VLAN ID will be presented automatically as 4 digits prefixed with 0 if the input is smaller than 4 digits For example if the input is 2 it will be automatically changed to 0002 6 2 3 Edit Boot Time Interfaces Edit Bootup Interface Boot Time Interface Parameters O None O From DHCP Name eth1 IP Address Mask 10 128 10 245 8 MTU Automatic Activate yes O no Proxy ARP O yes No Media Type Auto Negotiation Virtual Lan interfaces 0 Add virtual lan interface Save and Apply Figure 6 5 Editing a Boot Time Interface Revision 1 14 1 63 RX1000 RX1100 6 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces This menu allows you to make permanent changes to
378. porates a utility to perform a complete software reinstallation RuggedRouter persistent storage is implemented using Flash memory rewriting this memory is referred to as re flashing The ROX operating system software and the complete configuration are both stored in Flash memory The re flashing process overwrites the software and reverts the configuration to its factory defaults The re flashing utility provides an opportunity to restore a saved configuration archive Note In order to restore a configuration archive using the re flashing utility it must have been made on a router using the same version of ROX as is being re flashed B 2 Use Cases The typical method of upgrading ROX on a RuggedRouter is via the Upgrade System menu in Webmin but the re flashing utility provides an alternative mechanism that also allows one to downgrade to an older version of ROX Some examples of when to use the re flashing utility instead of the Webmin based upgrade follow e A network management authority may designate a particular version of ROX as the only one approved for use on the network Newer routers being added to a network may have a more recent firmware version than the approved one The older approved version of ROX would therefore need to be installed on new routers e A router that has become misconfigured or whose configuration is no longer trusted for some reason can be restored to a clean reference state by reinstalling ROX
379. protocols that run on them A table is presented for each interface Interface numbers are as described by the ADSL labels as shown in the home page chassis diagram The status of the physical interface its corresponding logical interface and link statistics are provided Revision 1 14 1 96 RX1000 RX1100 11 Configuring PPPoE Bridged Mode On ADSL This menu presents connection statuses but does not update them in real time Click on the Refresh this page link to update to the current status 11 2 2 Editing A Logical Interface PPPoE Module Index Edit Logical Interface Interface Parameters Convert this interface to bridged Description aDSL Link VPI 10 Attempt ATM Autoconfiguration vcr 35 PPPoE Username imycompany xyz com Password rrrrrrrrnl Defaultroute v Use peer DNS lv MTU 1452 Save delete Figure 11 3 Edit Logical Interface PPPoE This menu allows you to display and configure logical interface fields for PPPoE and to convert the interface to Bridged Mode By default interfaces are created with PPPoE If you want the interface to be Bridged Mode click on the Convert this interface to bridged link The Description field attaches a description to the logical interface viewable from the network interfaces menu The VPI field determines the VPI number the connection uses The default of 0 is correct for most providers The VCI field determines the VCI number the connection uses The d
380. quirements On the VPN Server Selection page enter the IP address of your RuggedRouter After the connection has been created double click the connection A Connect window will appear select Properties Select the Security tab You will need to disable L2TP PPP encryption unless you want double encryption using either of the following methods a In the Security tab click the IPSec Settings button enable the Use pre shared key for authentication checkbox and enter the pre shared key If you decide to use a certificate disable the Use pre shared key for authentication checkbox Select the Networking tab select L2TP IPSec VPN for Type of VPN c Click the OK button to save the Properties settings d Now you are back to Connect window enter your user name and password to begin the connection More information about how to import a certificate in Windows XP 2000 can be found at the link http Awww jacco2 dds nl networking openswan l 2tp html Certificates Revision 1 14 1 331 RX1000 RX1100 Index Index A Accounts root 23 rrsetup 23 ADSL Interfaces Bridged Mode Logical Interfaces 98 Configuration 96 Modem Modem Configuration 102 PPPoE Logical Interfaces 97 Upgrading Software 99 Apache Web Server 322 Authenticating Webmin sessions 37 C Cellular Modem 110 111 112 112 Configuration Backing Up and Restoring 285 285
381. r none in this field or leave it blank The Password field determines the password to use when connecting to the PPP server If the password is not required you can enter none in this field or leave it blank The Default Route checkbox enables automatically setting a default route using this interface whenever it connects If this is your primary connection you probably want this option enabled The Use peer DNS checkbox enables automatically setting the DNS server entries that the PPP server recommends Enable this option unless you provide your own name servers The Maximum Dial Attempts field specifies number of consecutive connection attempts the modem dial the phone number before it stops If the number is 0 it will never stop and dial until the connection is established Otherwise a Reconnect button will appear in the Modem Main Menu after specified number of consecutive failed connection attempts The Dial Interval field determines how many seconds to wait before re initiating the link after it terminates 13 2 5 PPP Logs PPP Connection Logs Refer to the chapter Configuring PPP and Modem for information 13 2 6 Current Route and Interfaces Table Refer to the chapter Configuring PPP and Modem for information Revision 1 14 1 117 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall 14 Configuring The Firewall 14 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Enabling Disabling Th
382. r definable and can include any of date time host name and or release version e Archives can be uploaded to the router and restored e A Configuration Rollback feature that allows users to safely make modifications under a safety net e A factory defaults file is included Note the following caveats e Chassis specific items such as serial number hardware inventory and MAC addresses are not saved e Log and history files are not saved e Information stored in the root and user accounts are not saved 34 5 1 General Configuration Help General Configuration General Configuration Options Automatic Nightly Backup Schedule At 00 Ka 100 el Archive Name Includes Date Time jv Hostname Router Version Archive Aging Remove after 5 1 30 Days Configuration Server Options Export Method C off scp rrp FTP Option Username jrouter42 Password freee E Use Anonymous SCP Option Username Bandwidth Limiting Disabled ei Show Router SSH Key Sieden oa Hostname IP 196 88 41 3 0 Directory archive router42 hae on eg Hostname IP 196 88 41 3 Directory webmin router42 Save Figure 34 11 Backup and Restore General Configuration This menu configures the backup system The Automatic Nightly Backup field specifies when the nightly backup is scheduled The automatic export to a server will start if enabled immediately after the backup completes The Archive Name Includes field selects
383. r networks Using this method the service provider or carrier supplies an OTASP dial string which ROX can use to contact the cellular network via the modem During this OTASP call the carrier authorizes and configures the modem for use on its network Note that an OTASP dial string typically begins with 228 Help D D Over The Air Account Activation Parameter Value Description Activation Dial 22899 Dial string to automatically activate account Over string The Air Activate Modem Status Type of Modem CDMA 1xRTT EV DO Rev p2410701 51098 Received Signal Strength Network Carrier ID gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 71 0 69 dBm Verizon Network technology currently in use Phone number 1xEV DO Revision A 9499102802 Electronic Serial Number ESN Activation status 0x6089E42B Activation successful Refresh Reset lt Return to Modem Main Menu Figure 13 3 Over The Air Account Activation 1 First establish an account with the help of a service representative of the cellular network provider 2 Enter the OTASP dial string supplied in the Activation Dial string field and click Activate 3 The Activation status field will display Activation is in progress Please wait until a success or failure is detected 4 Upon successful activation the Activation status field will automatically change to display Act
384. rance but different order numbers A complete set of descriptions is displayed on the console during boot and can be found after boot in the file var cache ruggedrouter inventory 6 1 1 1 LED Designations The RuggedRouter includes two sources of LED indicated information about Ethernet ports the front panel LEDs and the LED Panel A LED is associated with each port next to the Ethernet interface RJ45 socket This LED is off when the link is disconnected remains solidly on when the link is established and flashes briefly from on to off when traffic occurs The LED Panel also summarizes this information LEDs 1 4 reflect traffic on Ethernet port 1 4 LEDs 5 8 reflect the link status of the same ports 6 1 2 VLAN Interface Fundamentals A virtual LAN VLAN is a group of devices on one or more LAN segments that communicate as if they were attached to the same physical LAN segment VLANs are extremely flexible because they are based on logical instead of physical connections When VLANs are introduced all traffic in the network must belong to one or another VLAN Traffic on one VLAN cannot pass to another except through an intranetwork router or layer 3 switch The IEEE 802 1Q protocol specifies how traffic on a single physical network can be partitioned into VLANs by tagging each frame or packet with extra bytes to denote which virtual network the packet belongs to 6 1 2 1 VLAN Tag A VLAN tag is the identification informatio
385. ranslated to the public IP address and an unused port number on the public interface When the Internet host replies to the internal machine s packets they will be addressed to the NAT gateway s external IP at the translation port number The NAT gateway will then search its tables and make the opposite changes it made to the outgoing packets and forward the reply packets on to the internal machine Translation of ICMP packets happens in a similar fashion but without the source port modification NAT can be used in static and dynamic modes Static NAT masks the private IP addresses by translating each internal address to a unique external address Dynamic NAT translates all internal addresses to one or more external address es 14 2 4 Port Forwarding Port forwarding also known as redirection allows traffic coming from the Internet to be sent to a host behind the NAT gateway Previous examples have described the NAT process when connections are made from the intranet to the Internet In those examples addresses and ports were unambiguous Revision 1 14 1 119 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall When connections are attempted from the Internet to the intranet the NAT gateway will have multiple hosts on the intranet that could accept the connection It needs additional information to identify the specific host to accept the connection Suppose that two hosts 192 168 1 10 and 192 168 1 20 are located behind a NAT gatew
386. rce attacks The best way of addressing this problem is to restrict access to specific IP addresses or subnets By default IP access control allows all IP addresses to access Webmin If your router is being used on a completely private network or IP access control is being provided by the firewall you may leave IP Access Control disabled Select the Allow from all addresses field and Save If you wish to restrict access to a single address or subnet select the Only allow from listed addresses field Enter a single IP address or a subnetted address If you wish to deny access to a specific subnet select the Deny from listed addresses field Enter a single IP address or a subnetted address If DNS is configured you may allow and deny based upon hostname Partially qualified domain names such as foo com are acceptable The Resolve hostnames on every request field forces Webmin to perform a hostname lookup for every user access The result of this will be that a dynamically assigned IP with a DNS entry with a Dynamic DNS registrar will be able to be checked against the IP Access Control list just like a fixed address This method is useful for administrators who travel or simply don t have a fixed address at their normal location Note This is not efficient if you have more than a few domain names entered in the IP Access Control list due to the high overhead of performing a name lookup for every hostname in the list on every request
387. rds settings you are allowed to reuse an old password A Note on Regular Expressions The Password restriction mechanism in ROX uses PERL regular expression syntax For the definitive reference documentation on regular expressions in PERL please refer to e http perldoc perl org perlreref html e http perldoc perl org perlre html e http perldoc perl org perlretut html e htto perldoc perl org perlrequick html Revision 1 14 1 42 RX1000 RX1100 3 Configure Webmin Users If you do not have access to an Internet connection but do have a UNIX Linux system with PERL installed access the local manual pages by typing e man perlreref e man perlre e man perlretut e man perlrequick at the command line Root privilege is not required to access manual pages Revision 1 14 1 43 RX1000 RX1100 4 Configuring The System 4 Configuring The System 4 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with Enabling and disabling processes such as SSH and Web Management Changing the system password Shutting down and rebooting the system Scheduling one off and periodic commands Examining system logs Changing the hostname Changing the system time and timezone Revision 1 14 1 44 RX1000 RX1100 4 Configuring The System 4 2 Bootup And Shutdown Help Bootup and Shutdown Bootup and Shutdown etn Startat boot Goen H binas M NO mus sewer Server dhcp3 sap Yes No
388. reated in Webmin Note The Change Password Command can only be accessed via a locally defined user account 3 4 Webmin Users Menu Webmin Users Webmin Users Select all Invert selection Create a new Webmin user Webmin Users root E john Select all Invert selection Create a new Webmin user Delete Selected Webmin Groups Webmin Groups admin operator guest Passwor d Restrictions Figure 3 1 Webmin users menu This menu allows you to create change or delete a Webmin user to view and remove current login sessions and to set password restrictions Click the Select all link to select all manually created users Click the Invert selection link to deselect all manually created users Click the Create a new Webmin user link to create a new Webmin user Click on manually created user name to change its setting Click the Delete Selected button to delete selected users Click the View login sessions button to view all current login sessions Revision 1 14 1 40 RX1000 RX1100 3 Configure Webmin Users Click the Password Restrictions button to set the password restriction rules Note The accounts managed from this menu are local to the RuggedRouter and are not maintained on a RADIUS server even if one is configured 3 5 Edit Webmin User menu This menu allows you to change the user name group membership password and real name for a user account
389. rface is active or passive Passive interfaces do not send LSAs to other routers and are not part of an OSPF area The Authentication field controls the type of authentication to use when communicating with other routers It can be set to default which uses the routing package s default value null just check for message corruption or message digest which cryptographically signs each message with a shared key The Message Digest Keys table allow the addition and deletion of keys to use for areas connected to this interface when authentication is set to message digest 17 2 4 3 OSPF Network Areas Network Areas Network Areas Area ID A B C D Area Address Netmask A B C D M Action 0 0 0 0 192 168 2 0 24 Delete 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 0 24 Delete Add Figure 17 16 Network Areas OSPF uses areas to control which routes are distributed between routers To add a network to an area enter the area ID and the network address and netmask and click Add To delete an entry click the Delete button beside the entry All networks routes that are part of the same area will be distributed to other routers in the same area 17 2 4 4 OSPF Status This status menu shows various pieces of information about the current OSPF status The status of each interface is shown the current database the current OSPF neighbors and the current OSPF routing table 17 2 4 5 View OSPF Configuration This menu show
390. rk interface 28 2 Configuring DHCP Relay The DHCP Relay is disabled by default and may be enabled via the Bootup and Shutdown menu under the System folder Help DHCP Relay Configuration DHCP Relay Configuration ethl 192 168 54 3 eth2 Servers Interfaces eth3 Save Apply Configuration Click this button to apply configration This will restart the DHCP Relay Agent Figure 28 1 DHCP Relay Configuration This menu allows you to configure DHCP Relay Agent Revision 1 14 1 249 RX1000 RX1100 28 DHCP Relay The Servers field configures the list of DHCP servers to which DHCP BOOTP requests will be forwarded Note In general the DHCP servers configured here will themselves need to be configured to serve the subnets from which DHCP BOOTP client requests will be forwarded Refer to DHCP Shared Networks 239 for a brief discussion of the DHCP server configuration required to support Relay Agents The Interfaces field selects the network interfaces on which the relay agent will listen for DHCP BOOTP requests Select both the network interface to which clients and servers are attached The Save button will save the configuration permanently The Apply Configuration button will restart the DHCP Relay Agent with the saved configuration Revision 1 14 1 250 RX1000 RX1100 29 Configuring NTP 29 Configuring NTP 29 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with
391. rned by OSPF The Redistribute BGP fields control distribution of routes learned by BGP When enabled RIP will advertise routes learned by BGP The Passive Default option controls the default active passive state of new interfaces When enabled all new interfaces will be passive by default The passive state of individual interfaces is controlled from the RIP Interfaces configuration The Update timer field controls how often RIP sends out routing table updates The Timeout Timer field controls how long information stays in the routing table after it is received without an update The Garbage Collection Timer field controls how long expired entries are remembered before being purged 17 2 5 2 RIP Key Chains The Key Chains table configures authentication keys used on the interfaces By defining the keys in a key chain the same settings can be applied to multiple groups of interfaces Without key chains the same settings would have to be entered for each interface separately Key chains also allow multiple keys to be entered in a single key chain with a start time for when that key should become valid as well as the duration the key is valid This allows multiple keys to be set up with automatic transitions from one key to the next over time Akey consists of a key string which is the value used for authentication It also has the optional lifetime to accept RIP messages with the key and the optional lifetime to send RIP messages with t
392. rom an existing connection which we have already assigned a mark If still no mark is assigned it must be a new connection so we process the packet through all the remaining rules to determine the mark it should receive At the end we save the new mark to the connection so that any further packets for the connection do not have to go through all the rules again in order to save processing resources We mark all packets with no other matching rule to 4 since that represents the default class as defined in TC Classes This allows explicit traffic control of even unspecified network connections 15 2 Traffic Control Configuration Note Traffic Control is mutually exclusive of Traffic Prioritization Do not enable both of these features at once 15 2 1 TC Interfaces tcdevices Help TC Interfaces Each of the traffic classification interfaces on your system that you want Shorewall to manage should be listed on this page and with its maximum inbound and outbound bandwidths the link is capable of handling The loopback interface lo must never be listed Add a new traffic classification interface In bandwidth Out bandwidth 2000kbit 5000kbit Add mE Interface ethi Add a new traffic classification interface Manually Edit File Click this button to manually edit the Shorewall file etc shorewall tcdevices in which the entries above are stored Figure 15 1 TC Interfaces This Menu allows you to
393. rom the last display The difference is not a real time rate in bytes or packets per second 24 2 7 1 Protocol Specific Packet Error Statistics The Raw Socket Packet Errors field reflect the number of times that a network message was received and could not be enqueued at the serial port because of output buffering constraints This is usually symptomatic of a remote peer that uses a higher baud rate or local flow control Revision 1 14 1 223 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols 24 2 8 Serial Protocols Trace Menu Line Trace Specifying large numbers of ports entries and capture time can result in a greate deal of output Port Trace on ports 1 2 3 ai 4 a All Ports je Message RX TX Lk Hex dump Je Incoming Outgoing Connections E Maximum number of entries to capture 6 Maximum time in seconds to capture over 5 16 13 36 428 TCPCONN Opening connection to 10 0 10 2 50001 8964 for serial port 1 16 13 36 445 TCPCONN Opened connection to 10 0 10 2 50001 8964 for serial port 1 16 13 36 445 RAWSOCKET port 1 open info 8058a3c map 80551f0 buf length Oo 16 13 37 132 TCPCONN Rx Data 240b from 10 0 10 2 50001 8964 for serial port 1 16 13 37 133 RAWSOCKET Transmitting message on port 1 length 240 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 1234567890123456 37 38 39 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 32 7390123456739012 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 3456789012345678
394. ron Jobs menu displaying cron jODS sssssssssesssseneneenenrsserrrssernnrrnnnnnssernnsernn nee 48 A D System HostName sssini a E E RA ERE E nos E SE 49 410 System Uu 49 5 1 Network Configuration Menu ise icccscstecccasastectmndernaaanieionestpaned atenianchrnenianneieeeeniuiaenemmneienas 50 5 2 Core Networking Settings EE 51 5 3 Dummy un 52 94 Slate EE 53 5 5 Static Multicast Routing EE 55 5 6 DNS GIEN E 56 5 7 Ee e EE 56 9 8 End To End Backup EE 57 5 9 End To End Backup SE 58 6 1 Ethernet EE 61 6 2 Current and Boot Time Ethernet Configuration NENNEN 62 Revision 1 14 1 12 RX1000 RX1100 RuggedRouter 6 3 Editing a Network MLCT Ee 62 6 4 Creating a Virtual Lan Interface Ae 63 6 5 Editing a Boot Time Interface 2sekeuebegeekte EE ves cardhcewnede lines es ctacagivard dap aedes thee eee aeenaedoe 63 6 6 Creating alt Ethernet Bridge EE 64 6 7 List PPPOE lee 65 6 8 Editing a ee 65 6 9 Display PPP LOGS EE 66 Zt PAPEL Trunks And WMG Le 68 7 2 T1 E1 Network Interfaces Initial Configuration ceccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeessnaeeenseaes 69 7 3 T1 E1 Network Interfaces After Channel Creation 0 cccccccccceeeeeeeeeseeceeeeseecaeeeeeeseeeeetenneeees 69 7 4 T1 E1 Network Interfaces After Interface Creation ccccecccecesceeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeteneeeeeeeeneeees 70 7o Edit E Ra LEE 71 7 6 Editing A Logical Interface Frame Relay EEN 72 7 7 Edit Logical e ET NEE 73 ZS
395. rotocol Source Ports Destination Ports Test Length TOS Move Add A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ICMP Any echo request Any Any Any 4 Tt 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ICMP ng echo reply Any n ng TTL RESTORE 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n o 100 500 Any T T CONTINUE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 10 0xf0 1500 Any ke IK 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Am Any ng Minimize Delay 4F 4 T A 3 2 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 44 Any Any L ns Any TA CC 2 2 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 pp 54 53 I c ng Any TA C SAVE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Am 10 Any Any k IK amp 2 10 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 TCP Any 80 Any 512 oxfc titi 8 F 10 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 TCP Any 8080 Any 512 m TTL 3 0x0f CT 10 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 upp Any 1024 Any Any ng ae geb Add a new traffic classification rule Manually Edit File Click this button to manually edit the Shorewall file etc shorewall tcrules in which the entries above are stored Figure 15 5 TC Rules Revision 1 14 1 141 RX1000 RX1100 15 Traffic Control Clicking on a link in the Mark column will allow you to edit or delete a traffic classification rule as shown below The Manually Edit File button also allows you to make direct changes to the TC Rules configuration file Edit TC Rule TC rule details Mark set Packet x mark pa d in Default gt chain C Modify packet mark by AND gt in Default chain c SAVE gt connect
396. roup lt Phasel gt 40 3126 openswantest STATE_QUICK_I1 sent QI1 expecting QR1 EVENT_RETRANSMIT in 9s 41 3093 openswantest STATE_MAIN_R3 sent MR3 ISAKMP SA established EVENT_SA_REPLACE in 1050s newest ISAKMP 42 2997 openswantest STATE_QUICK_R2 IPsec SA established EVENT_SA_REPLACE in 19773s newest IPSEC eroute owner 43 2997 openswantest esp df9839e9 204 50 190 91 esp 8e2d7255 204 50 190 89 The IPsec Status button produces a window of text similar to that of the above figure except that line numbers have been inserted for purposes of illustration The first group lines 1 5 describes configured interfaces The second group lines 7 17 describes ESP capabilities In this group we can see encryption capabilities lines 7 13 and authentication capabilities lines 14 17 At least one set of values must match between the left and right hand side VPN devices This is also frequently referred to as the Phase 2 parameters because the data encryption process is the second and final thing to occur in establishing a VPN The third group lines 18 28 describes IKE capabilities and defines the various encrypted key exchange algorithms and their parameters At least one set of values must match between the left and right hand side VPN devices This is also frequently referred to as the Phase 1 parameters because the key exchange process is the first thing to occur in establishing a VPN Revisi
397. router 17 2 3 2 BGP Networks Helpu Networks Neighbors Remote AS Action Add a new neighbor Networks Subnet x x x x x or x x x x Action 1 ad ga Return to bgp Figure 17 9 BGP Networks Menu Revision 1 14 1 169 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing Neighbors are other BGP routers with which to exchange routing information One or more neighbors must be specified in order for BGP to operate To add a neighbor to the BGP network click on Add a new neighbor to configure its BGP attributes Networks may be specified in order to add BGP routers connected to the specified subnets Note that a network specification need not be a given valid entry in the routing table Since BGP is a border gateway protocol one would more typically enter a more general network specification here For example if a routed network inside the AS comprised many different Class C subnets 24 of the 192 168 0 0 16 range it would be more efficient to advertise the one Class B network specification 192 168 0 0 16 to one s BGP neighbors Note If BGP Neighbors are specified but no Networks are specified then the router will receive BGP routing information from its neighbors but will not advertise any routes to them 17 2 3 3 BGP Network Neighbor Configuration Help e H SEE BGP Configuration Parameter Value Describtion Possible values default value Neighbor IP 192 168 6 1
398. rs during N393 events which cause the channel to be inactive The N393 counter is valid at both the CPE and the Switch and is an event counter for measuring N392 The EEK Type field controls whether End to End Keepalive messages are sent while operating as a CPE device If this option is set to Off EEK is disabled If this option is set to Request EEK Revision 1 14 1 72 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 messages are sent every EEK Timer x T391 seconds This timer may be configured from 1 to 100 periods in duration Your network provider will inform you of what is proper for these parameters 7 2 3 2 Frame Relay DLCls The second table provides a listing of all DLCIs available on the channel Only the DLCI selected from the main menu can be edited although another DLCI can be added by following the Add another DLCI to this channel link The DLCI Number refers to the Data Link Connection Identifier This number should be provided to you by your provider The Local IP Address field defines the IP address for this logical interface The Netmask field displays the network address mask The value 255 255 255 255 indicates that the connection is point to point The Remote IP Address field defines the IP address for other side of this interface As most WAN links are of point to point type there is only one host connected to the other end of the link and its address is known in advance This opti
399. running over regular POTS telephone service The link is asymmetric supporting data transfer at up to 8 Mbps from the network and up to 1 Mbps to the network The actual bandwidth depends upon the distance between the router and telco central office the maximum distance of which may be up to 5480 m An ADSL card must connect to a central ADSL DSLAM for its connection ADSL shares ordinary telephone lines by using frequencies above the voice band ADSL and voice frequencies will interfere with each other If the line will be used for both data and voice a splitter should be installed to divide the line for DSL and telephone ADSL is almost always used to make a connection to the Internet via an ISP There are two methods for establishing the connection PPPoe and Bridged mode ADSL uses the ATM protocol to communicate with the central office DSLAM ATM uses virtual channels to route traffic and the DSL connection needs to know which virtual channels to use Most providers use VPI 0 and VCl 35 There are exceptions to this Some providers that use different settings are listed in the following table Provider VPI VC Typical Provider 0 35 Bell South 8 35 New Edge 0 38 Sprint 8 35 US West Qwest 0 32 1 2 PPPoE Bridged Mode Fundamentals In PPPoE Point to Point Protocol Over Ethernet the PPP dial up protocol is used with Ethernet over ADSL as the transport PPPoE supports the protocol layers and authent
400. rvers and MTU Issues Only one PPPoE interface can be created on each Ethernet Interface Each PPPoE interface name is assigned internally The name is pppX where X is 10 plus the native Ethernet interface the PPPoE is created upon e g a PPPoE on eth1 is ppp11 6 1 4 IPv6 on Ethernet Fundamentals By default IPv6 disabled on the router in which caselPv6 addresses may not be assigned to Ethernet interfaces IPv6 may be enabled via the IPv6 Support option in Core settings under the Network Configuration category If IPv6 is enabled on the router and link is asserted on a given ethernet port the system will automatically assign a link local address on that port beginning with Oxfe80 for example fe80 20a dcff fe1a e401 64 6 1 5 Bridge Fundamentals The router s Ethernet Bridging functionality implements IEEE 802 1d MAC bridging including STP Spanning Tree Protocol for the ability to interoperate with other STP capable bridges The bridge implemented in software appears to the router as an Ethernet interface and may be assigned an IP address statically or via DHCP Network services such as SSH DHCP NTP VRRP etc may be configured to run on the bridge interface Revision 1 14 1 60 RX1000 RX1100 6 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces Note Care must be taken when adding interfaces to the bridge Any network services running on the individual interfaces will need to be reconfigured to refer to the bridge int
401. ry to log in if the session timeout has expired in the meantime Revision 1 14 1 312 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router 34 13 6 Installing A New Package Install a New Package Select the location to install a new package from From local file From uploaded file Browse From ftp or http URL Install Figure 34 47 Installing A New Package The Install A New Package feature uploads and installs packages to the router Select the From local file option if you have already moved the package to the router through http ftp or scp You may either enter the full path from the root directory to the package or use the file selector B to identify the package Select the From uploaded file option if you have the file locally on your workstation You may either iBrowse enter the location of the file on your local file system browse selector the package to identify Select the From ftp or http URL if you know the network address of the package Complete the installation by selecting the install button 34 13 7 Pre upgrade Post upgrade scripts The pre upgrade and post upgrade scripting feature allows you to execute defined scripts on the router both before and after a software system upgrade The scripts execute before and after an actual upgrade only and not a dry run during which the packages to be updated are shown and not actually updated In the course of an upgrade the rout
402. s Information After Login Last Login System Information Router Status Extra Message After Login Webmin Banner Configuration Customize webmin login messages Session Header Default O PO Session Message Default O FO Username Default O FO Password Default O FO Login Button Default O FO Clear Button Default O PC Message when Login Fails Default O Poo Logout Message Default O Ir Message for Session Timeout Default O Poo Save Configuration Reset to Default Figure 34 38 Banner Configuration Menu This menu allows you to customize different aspects of each of the access methods to the RuggedRouter e Serial console login e SSH login e Webmin login The Login Banner Configuration menu customizes the messages seen prior to and after login via the serial console The Message Before Login field is the banner displayed above the login prompt The Information After Login fields select from among three utilities to display to he user on a successful login Revision 1 14 1 304 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router Last login causes information about the last login to be displayed what time from where and on what terminal the user last logged in System Information displays information about the running operating system kernel Router Status displays information on the ROX release Webmin version serial number uptime temperature disk memory and pending al
403. s Clear logfiles every 168 hours Log actions by all users root A Only log actions by E bal Use combined log format including referrer and user agent Log actions in all modules Bootup and Shutdown Change Passwords Command Shell Custom Commands ec ec Only log actions in Jv Log changes made to files by each action Save Disk and Network Filesystems v Figure 2 5 Webmin Configuration Menu Logging Revision 1 14 1 36 RX1000 RX1100 2 Webmin Configuration This menu allows you to log actions taken by Webmin administrators It is also possible to log actions based on the module where the actions are performed The Log resolved hostnames field will cause Webmin to provide a hostname rather than just an IP address for the client computer that performed an action The Clear logfiles every hours field causes Webmin to rotate its own logs and keep them from overfilling the disk with old logs Currently the Log actions by all users field should be left selected The Log changes made to files by each action field causes verbose logging and should be left enabled 2 2 4 Authentication Module Index Authentication When enabled password timeouts protect your Webmin server from brute force password cracking attacks by adding a continuously expanding delay between each failed login attempt for the same user When session authentication is enabled each logged in users ses
404. s e Configuring a pair of End To End Backup interfaces e Viewing routing tables 5 2 IPv6 Fundamentals Version 6 of the Internet Protocol IPv6 RFC 2460 has been designated to replace IPv4 throughout the Internet Some important changes that IPv6 introduces relative to IPv4 fall into the following categories e Addressing IPv6 addresses are four times the length of IPv4 addresses at 128 bits to be used as 64 bits of network and 64 bits of host address The larger address space allows much greater flexibility in hierarchical network definition and routing e Header Format The IPv6 packet header has been simplified relative to IPv4 in order to simplify and therefore speed the processing of packets by routing nodes It also features more efficiently encoded options and greater flexibility in creating extensions e Security Security has been designed into IPv6 rather than being treated as a component that must be added to existing IPv4 network stacks 5 3 Network Configuration Help ZC Network Configuration 2s Zs a a 2s EZE R 10 2124 10 2124 Ml KERNEL 10 2 103 DNS 10216 D D vd oe e oe d a Core Settings Dummy Interface Static Routes Static Multicast DNS Client Host Addresses End To End Backup Current Route amp Routing Interface Table Click this button to activate the current boot time interface and routing settings as they normally w
405. s for the built in Ethernet ports 7 For an RX1100 router the Gauntlet Security application may be configured with the passphrase allocated to the network the network address of the Command and Control Center CCC Note that you must also configure and activate the firewall before using the Gauntlet 8 Ensure that the date time and timezone fields are correctly set 9 If Web or SSH services will not be used these can be disabled from the setup shell 10 All further configuration is accomplished through the web management interface Attach the configuring host to one of the Ethernet ports configured above Point your web browser at the address for that port use https and specify a port number of 10000 e g https 192 168 1 1 10000 or otherwise if configured in step 4 Login with the root user and Revision 1 14 1 20 RX1000 RX1100 About this User Guide password configured above If RADIUS authentication is configured and a server is available you may also login via a RADIUS user Basic Web Based Configuration 11 12 14 15 Change the router password from the System menu Change Password sub menu If you are using the web management interface you may wish to restrict the allowed users to a specific subnet This can be done in the Webmin menu Webmin Configuration IP Access Control sub menu If you are planning to SSH in to the router you may wish to restrict the allowed users to a specific subnet T
406. s over Frame Relay Each Frame Relay interface provides a link between a local and peer station One of the stations must be configured as a Data Communications Equipment DCE device often known as the Switch while the peer station must be configured as a Data Terminal Equipment DTE device often known as Customer Premises Equipment CPE The DCE is responsible for managing the link advertising connections to the DTE and switching packets between connections The DTE raises individual connections and sends data on them When using a T1 E1 line to access a public Frame Relay provider configure the Router as a DTE Unlike PPP a Frame Relay link can provide multiple connections Each connection is identified by a Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI and must match at the DCE and DTE The use of multiple connections can support meshed network interconnections and disaster recovery Revision 1 14 1 67 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 7 1 1 2 Location Of Interfaces And Labeling Unlike the Ethernet ports which are statically located the location of T1 E1 DDS and ADSL ports in your router depends upon the number of ports and how they were ordered Refer to the labeled hardware image as presented in the Webmin home page To make labeling easy to understand all T1 E1 T3 DDS and ADSL ports are assigned a unique port number that relates to the LEDs on the status panel 7 1 1 3 LED Designations The R
407. s the current configuration file of OSPF 17 2 5 RIP RIP RIP ral RIP RIP RIP RIP Global Parameters RIP Interfaces Status View RIP Configuration Figure 17 17 RIP Menu Revision 1 14 1 176 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing This menu contains the configuration and status of RIP on the router The RIP Global Parameters and RIP Interfaces configure RIP The Status and View RIP Configuration menu display the actual status and configuration file contents of RIP 17 2 5 1 RIP Global Parameters Help RIP Global Parameters Parameter Value Description Possible values default value Enable Password CIIIIIIIIIII Enable password For configuration access string without spaces previous password Telnet Password eccoeeeooeooeo Telnet password For port 2602 access string without spaces previous password Hostname Identifier of router Often the DNS name of the router string without spaces no hostname Default Information Originate enable Advertise default route disabled Default Metric 2 Control distribution of default information 1 16 1 Distance Define an administrative distance unset 1 255 unset not used enable Redistribute Connected Redistribute routes for directly connected interfaces to RIP area routers enable disable 0 16 disabled unset metric enable Redistribute Static Redistribute stati
408. sable NAK If DHCP relay clients option 82 clients are used on the same subnet as the DHCP server some clients will immediately try to renew a lease right after receiving it by requesting a renewal directly from the DHCP server Since the DHCP server is only configured to provide that lease through a relay agent with the right option 82 fields added the server will send the client a NAK to disallow use of the lease Enabling this option disables this reject message so that the renewal request that the DHCP relay agent sends a moment later which the DHCP server accepts since it has the right option 82 fields added will be the only message for which the client receives a reply If the DHCP server and clients are not on the same subnet this option is not required The meaning of the value of many fields depends on the client s interpretation of the field so the actual meaning of a field is determined by the client See the documentation of the client to determine what values are required by the client for special options 27 1 2 Example DHCP Scenarios And Configurations 27 1 2 1 Single Network With Dynamic IP Assignment In this example the eth1 interface is provided with IP address 192 168 1 1 24 while addresses 192 168 1 101 through 192 168 1 200 are assigned to the clients The router serves as the default gateway 1 Enable eth1 in the Edit Network Interfaces menu 2 Click add a subnet and configure it for network address 192 16
409. seconds 26 2 3 GOOSE Tunnels Menu Help Edit GOOSE Tunnel GOOSE Tunnel Ethemet Interface eth2 0002 v Multicast Address 01 0c cd 01 00 00 Remote Daemon 172 16 0 1 Add a new Daemon Save Delete Figure 26 3 GOOSE Menu This menu displays configured GOOSE tunnels Edit the configuration of an existing tunnel by following the link under the Ethernet Interface field or create a new tunnel by clicking Add a new GOOSE tunnel Revision 1 14 1 233 RX1000 RX1100 26 Configuring Layer 2 Tunnels Help Edit GOOSE Tunnel GOOSE Tunnel Ethernet Interface eth2 0002 v Multicast Address 01 0c cd 01 00 00 Remote Daemon 172 16 0 1 Add anew Daemon Save Delete Figure 26 4 GOOSE Menu This menu configures a GOOSE tunnel The Ethernet Interface field configures suitable i e VLAN eligible interfaces to listen on for GOOSE frames You may set this field to none if the intent is simply to relay encapsulated traffic between remote tunnel endpoints The Multicast Address field configures the address to listen for The Remote Daemon and Add a new Daemon fields specify the IP addresses of remote daemons 26 2 4 Generic L2 Tunnels Menu Help L2 Tunnels Ethernet Interface Ethernet Type Remote Tunnel Addresses eth ISO jeth2 None ISO 10 0 32 1 Add anew L2 tunnel Figure 26 5 Generic L2 Tunnels Menu This menu displays configured GOOSE tunnels
410. sented in the Webmin home page To make labeling easy to understand all T1E1 T3 DDS and ADSL ports are assigned a unique port number that relates to the LEDs on the status panel 9 1 1 2 LED Designations The RuggedRouter indicates information about DDS ports on the LED Panel A pair of LEDs will indicate traffic and link status of the port Consult the section Using The LED Status Panel to determine which LEDs correspond to the port 9 2 DDS Configuration 8 mn j DDS S DDS Trunks And Logical Interfaces Current Route amp Interface Table Figure 9 1 DDS Trunks And Interfaces Revision 1 14 1 85 RX1000 RX1100 9 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And DDS This menu allows you to display and configure DDS Trunks The Current Routes menu will display the routes and status of the network interfaces 9 2 1 DDS Network Interfaces DDS WAN Interfaces DDS Trunks and Logical Interfaces Refresh this page DDS 1 Not Running Name Description Local Address Netmask Remote Address Assign a new Frame Relay logical interface Assign a new PPP logical interface Figure 9 2 DDS WAN Interfaces This menu allows you to display DDS trunks and configure the logical interfaces that run on them A table is presented for each interface Interface numbers are as described by the DDS labels as shown in the home page chassis diagram The status of both the physical interface and its corresponding logica
411. shorewall shorewall conf Revision 1 14 1 130 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall 14 6 3 Network Zone Hosts Module Index Create Zone Host Zone host details Zone local ei Interface fethl IP address or network 92 168 22 024 eier eier E IPsec zone Create Figure 14 6 Firewall Zone Hosts This menu allows you to add delete and configure interfaces hosting multiple zones Add a new zone host by selecting the Add a new zone host link or by clicking on the add above or add below images in the Add field Reorder the hosts by clicking on the arrows under the Move field The Zone field selects a zone that will correspond to a subnet on the interface in question The Interface field describes that interface and the IP address or network field describes the subnet Selecting the IPSEC zone Host Option field will identify that the traffic to host in this zone is encrypted The Save and Delete buttons will allow you to edit or delete the zone host You may also make changes by manually editing the policy 14 6 4 Default Policies Module Index Default Policies This page allows you to configure the default actions for traffic between different firewall zones They can be overridden for particular hosts or types of traffic on the Firewall Rules page Add a new default policy Source zone Destination zone Policy Syslog level Traffic limit Move Add loc net A
412. sion will be tracked by Webmin making it possible for idle users to be automatically logged out Be aware that enabling or disabling session authentication may force all users to re login Authentication and session options C Disable password timeouts Enable password timeouts 7 Block hosts with more than 3 failed logins for 300 seconds Jv Log blocked hosts logins and authentication failures to syslog Disable session authentication Enable session authentication Jv Auto logout after 90 Save o Figure 2 6 Webmin Configuration Menu Authentication minutes of inactivity This menu allows you to configure what Webmin will do when a number of failed logins from the same IP address occur If the Enable password timeouts field is selected the host will be blocked for the specified period of time If the Log blocked hosts logins and authentication failures to syslog field is selected warning messages will be added to the syslog Enabling the Enable session authentication field activating Auto logout after will cause an individual administrators session to be logged out after the specified period Revision 1 14 1 37 RX1000 RX1100 2 Webmin Configuration 2 2 5 Webmin Events Log Webmin Events Log Search the Webmin log for actions ec wc ww In any module At any time For today only Between Aen zi ES and Aen zi aa Which modified any file That modified
413. smissions og Ae complete Exception sent L e S Figure 24 1 Sources of Delay and Error in an End to End Exchange In step 1 the master issues a request to the Client Gateway If the Client Gateway validates the message it will forward it to the network as step 2 The Client Gateway can respond immediately in certain circumstances as shown in step 1a When the Client Gateway does not have a configuration for the specified RTU it will respond to the master with an exception using TcpModbus exception code 11 No Path When the Client Gateway has a configured RTU but the connection is not yet active it will respond to the master with an exception using TcpModbus exception code 10 No Response If the forwarding of TcoModbus exceptions is disabled the client will not issue any responses Steps 3a and 3b represents the possibility that the Server Gateway does not have configuration for the specified RTU The Server Gateway will always respond with a type 10 No Path in step 3a which the client will forward in step 3b Step 4 represents the possibility of queuing delay The Server Gateway may have to queue the request while it awaits the response to a previous request The worst case occurs when a number of requests are queued for an RTU that has gone offline especially when the server is programmed to retry the request upon failure Steps 5 8 represent the case where the request is responded to by the RTU and
414. sor Settings Preprocessor Options Status flow stats_interval 0 hash2 Enabled Disabled frag2 o b Enabled Disabled stream4 disable evasion_alerts detect_scans Enabled Disabled ES stream4_reassemble Ze http_inspect global iis_unicode_map unicode map 1252 e e T T c Enabled Enabled Disabled E c C Disabled http_inspect_server server default profile all ports 80 8080 8180 o Enabled rpc_decode 111 32771 e telnet_decode e Enabled sfportscan proto all memcap 10000000 sense level Enabled Save Changes Reset Changes Figure 33 6 Snort Preprocessors Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Preprocessors are plug in modules that operate on the captured packets Preprocessors perform a variety of transformations to make it easier for snort to classify packets The configuration of preprocessors is beyond the scope of this user guide 33 2 4 Alerts amp Logging Alerts generated by snort are stored by one of three methods as local syslog messages remotely sylogged messages and in an alert file Alerts amp Logging Logging Destination CS Local syslogging to Facility LOG_AUTH var log auth log si 8 Local Alert file var log snort alert User name to mail snort Alert file summaries to Save Changes Reset Changes Figure 33 7 Snort Alerts When the Local syslogging method is chosen the destination log file m
415. ssociated with the host entry The Fixed IP address field is the IP to assign to the matching client 27 2 6 DHCP Pool Configuration Note that the menu interfaces for creating a DHCP Address Pool Configuration and for editing an existing one are the same only the title differs Create versus Edit Edit Address Pool In subnet 192 168 2 0 255 255 255 0 i Address pool options Address ranges 192 168 2 11 192 168 2 11 Dynamic BOOTP Dynamic BOOTP Failover Peer None 7 l Clients to allow Clients to deny Default lease time Default secs Boot filename None Maximum lease time Default secs Boot file server This server Server name Default i Lease length for LO z e Lease end for LO e BOOTP clients Se S BOOTP clients Never Dynamic DNS A Dynamic DNS LO e enabled Yes 7 No Default SE Default Dynamic DNS reverse Default Dynamic DNS i 8 82 domain hostname Allow unknown clients allow Deny Ignore Default Option 82 clients Client Name Remote ID Circuit ID slav2p5 00 0A DC 11 22 33 00 02 00 05 Add an option82 client Save KR j Delete j Figure 27 6 DHCP Pool Configuration The settings specific to the Create Edit Address Pool menu are The Failover peer field is the IP address of a DHCP peer server if a fail over pool is created The Clients to allow deny field can be used to co
416. stalled and marked Inactive interface is not active e If a specified network interface does not exist e g an on demand modem PPP connection the static route will be installed and marked Inactive interface does not exist Delete routes by removing their Network Mask addresses before saving Note In order to redistribute static routes to other routers the Redistribute Static option must be enabled in the corresponding OSPF RIP or BGP configuration s Global parameters menu in Webmin 5 3 3 2 Other Static Routes This table will be shown if there are active static routes which were not configured manually in the Configured Static Routes table The Save to Configured Static Routes link next to each route entry in this table will make the corresponding route permanent Note There are situations where manually entered routes should not be converted e g routes dynamically added by IPsec and GRE tunnels Making these routes permanent may cause the daemons that add them to fail Revision 1 14 1 54 RX1000 RX1100 5 Configuring Networking 5 3 4 Static Multicast Routing Static Multicast Routing Configured Static Multicast Routes Route Multicast IP Address Input Interface Source IP Address Output Interface Comment 1 239 156 10 2 ethl 192 168 31 51 Jethz Installed 2 239 144 11 3 eth2 192 168 41 10 Iethi Installed 3 239 121 78 3 ethl 177 9 44 5 wi ppp pada ee cases WI MH Save Note Th
417. stalled in etc ipsec d crls The router s certificate must be installed in etc ipsec d certs It s public key file e g router key must be installed in etc ipsec d private and a line RSA router key Password where Password is the pass phrase that was used to generate the certificate must be added to the end of the etc ipsec secrets file Note The Maintenance Menu Upload Download Files sub menu provides a method to transfer the files directly to the indicated directories Enable IPSec from the Bootup and Shutdown menu Visit the IPSec VPN menu and generate a public key Visit the Server Configuration menu and associate the ipsecO interface with the desired interface the connection will arrive on here wippp Create a connection for the clients Set the parameters as follows Parameters Value Comments At IPsec Startup Add connection We wish to add the connection when the client starts it Authenticate by rsasig X 509 certificates provide RSA Revision 1 14 1 157 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN Parameters Value Comments Connection Type Tunnel Encryption Protocols As desired Compress Data As desired Perfect Forwarding Secrecy As desired Recommend yes NAT Traversal No Required when the router acts as a client and is behind a NAT firewall Left System Settings Router s side Public IP Address Address or hostname
418. stem logs are records of activities that have occurred on the router sorted into specific categories System logs can be invaluable when debugging configuration changes As such most of your use of the logs will likely consist simply of examining them Help System Logs Add a new system log Log destination Active Messages selected File var log messages Yes info notice warn auth authpriv none cron daemon none mail none View File var log syslog Yes auth authpriv none View File var log auth log Yes auth authpriv View File var log critical Yes crit View File var log kern log Yes kern View File var log cron log No cron File var log daemon log No daemon All users Yes 7 emerg Add a new system log Remote Syslog Source IP Bind Interface eth3 k Save Note This option is used to bind the selected interface IP address as source IP for remote syslog messages If none is selected it will use the output interface IP address as the source IP address Apply Changes Click this button to make the current configuration active by killing the running syslog process and restarting it Figure 34 40 System Logs The System Logs menu screen is used to configure the system logging process It consists primarily of a list of log destinations each of which may be a log file on the router itself a remote syslog server or one of several other dest
419. stics from the last display The difference is not a real time rate in bytes or packets per second Revision 1 14 1 236 RX1000 RX1100 26 Configuring Layer 2 Tunnels 26 2 6 Generic L2 Tunnel Statistics Menu Help L2 tunnel Statistics Refresh Continuous Display Ethernet Statistics Interface Rx Frames Tx Frames Rx Chars Tx Chars Errors ethi 1422 1444 85320 86640 D eth4 1444 1422 86640 85320 D Connection Statistics eth1 eth4 1444 1422 86640 85320 o eth4 ethi 1422 1444 85320 86640 o Interface Remote IP Rx Packets Tx Packets Rx Chars Tx Chars Errors Round Trip Times Remote IP Transmitted Received Minimum RTT Average RTT Maimum RTT std Deviation Refresh Continuous Display Clear RTT Statistics 4m Return to Layer 2 Tunnels Figure 26 9 Generic L2 Statistics Menu This menu presents statistics of tunneled L2 traffic The Ethernet Statistics table provides a record local Ethernet interface that is part of a tunnel configuration The number of historical received and transmitted characters as well as errors will be displayed The Connection Statistics table provides a record for each L2 tunnel that terminates on a local Ethernet interface or on a remote UDP IP connection The Round Trip Times table reflects the measured RTT to each remote daemon The minimum average maximum and standard deviation of times is presented Entries with
420. t 15 2 2 TC Classes De TC Classes Classes define the bandwidth available to specific types of traffic Exactly one class per interface must be flagged as default At most one class per interface can have the tcp ack flag set Each tos byte match is limited to one class per interface and tos byte matching overrides Mark matching A packet can be matched either by Mark or by tos byte Add a new traffic classification class Interface Mark to match Minimum rate Maximum rate Priority Options Move Add ethi 1 full 2 full 8 10 1 tos minimize delay tcp ack A ed ethi 2 200kbit 200kbit 2 default t T tL Add a new traffic classification class Manually Edit File Click this button to manually edit the Shorewall file etc shorewall tcclasses in which the entries above are stored Figure 15 3 TC Classes This menu allows you to add edit or remove a traffic classification class Please note that each class is associated with exactly one network interface Exactly one class for each interface must be designated as default Unmarked traffic packets which have not been assigned a mark value in the TC Rules menu or via VLAN 802 1p will be handled by the default class Classes can match packets either by their assigned mark or by their ToS field The ToS field takes precedence over the mark Revision 1 14 1 139 RX1000 RX1100 15 Traffic Control Add a new traffic class by selecting the Add a new
421. t In this way failures of network links within the cloud are discovered It is essential that the host always respond to the ping Another option is to configure a dummy address within the router and ping that address Revision 1 14 1 181 RX1000 RX1100 18 Link Backup A Network A A a E Figure 18 1 Link Backup Example The daemon will construe the main link as having failed even if its link status is up if the remote host fails to respond to configurable number of pings after waiting a configurable timeout for each ping 18 1 1 2 Use Of Routing Protocols And The Default Route If the main trunk is on a private network employ a routing protocol to ensure that an alternate route to end network is learned after the backup trunk is raised Ensure that OSPF RIP are configured to operate on the secondary trunk assigning it a higher metric cost than that of the main trunk If the main trunk is on a public network employ the transfer default route feature 18 2 Link Backup Configuration 18 2 1 Link Backup Main Menu Help Link Backup cal E mall 3 mu Link Backup Configurations Link Backup Logs Link Backup Status Test Link Backup Figure 18 2 Link Backup Main Menu Note that Link backup is disabled by default and may be enabled via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu Link backup can be configured through the Link Backup Configuration link Link backup status and logs can be viewed thr
422. t 1 at 5Mbit s and ensure that UDP source port 20000 traffic gets at least half the bandwidth while ICMP and TCP ACK packets should have high priority HTTP traffic gets at least 20 and at most 50 and all other traffic should get what is left over but only up to 50 of the bandwidth The three TC menus would be configured as follows 15 1 1 1 TC Interfaces Interface Inbound bandwidth Outbound bandwidth eth1 5000kbit 5000kbit 15 1 1 2 TC Classes Interface Mark Minimum Maximum Priority Options eth1 1 full 2 full 0 eth1 2 1kbit full 1 tcp ack eth1 3 full 5 full 5 10 2 eth1 4 1kbit full 5 10 3 default Revision 1 14 1 137 RX1000 RX1100 15 Traffic Control 15 1 1 3 TC Rules Mark Source Destination Protocol Source Port Dest Port Test Length TOS 2 Any Any ICMP Any Any Any Any Any RESTORE Any Any Any Any Any 0 Any Any CONTINUE Any Any Any Any Any 10 Any Any 1 Any Any UDP 20000 Any Any Any Any 3 Any Any TCP Any 80 Any Any Any 4 Any Any Any Any Any 0 Any Any SAVE Any Any Any Any Any 10 Any Any The rules first check non connection based protocol rules ICMP in this case in order to assign a mark For any packet that is still not marked we attempt to restore a saved mark for the connection If at this point the packet has a mark set we stop checking rules CONTINUE since it is either ICMP or a packet f
423. t configured The Rule applies to user set fields allow advanced users to match the rule against specific users and groups This matching only takes place when the source of the traffic is the firewall itself 14 6 7 Static NAT Module Index Static NAT The static network address translation entries in this table can be used to set up a 1 1 correspondence between an external address on your firewall and an RFC1918 address of a machine behind your firewall Static NAT is often used to allow connections to an internal server from outside your network Add a new static NAT entry External address External interface Internal address Move Add _ 204 62 138 24 wippp 10 0 0 1 Ur uy 204 62 138 25 wippp 10 0 0 2 t T A Add a new static NAT entry Manually Edit File Click this button to manually edit the Shorewall file etc shorewall nat in which the entries above are stored Figure 14 13 Static NAT Revision 1 14 1 134 RX1000 RX1100 14 Configuring The Firewall This menu allows you to add delete and static NAT translations Add a new translations by selecting the Add a new static NAT entry link or by clicking on the add above or add below images in the Add field Reorder the translations by clicking on the arrows under the Move field Clicking on a link under the External Address field will allow you to edit or delete the rule as shown below You may also make changes by manually editing the r
424. t here it defaults to using the Router ID set in Core Global Parameters If this last is not set either the Router ID defaults to a string containing the highest IP address assigned to an interface on the router in dotted quad notation It is recommended that this value be set to a unique fixed value on each router Note that for the new router id to take effect the routing daemon must be restarted 17 2 4 2 OSPF Interfaces OSPF Interface Configuration ethi Parameter Value blank default Description Possible values default value ce autocost beer Eder Bondi Gh es et uge Priority d Priority of interface 0 255 1 Hello Interval 10 Time between sending hello packets 1 65535 Seconds 10 Dead Interval 40 Time before considering a router dead 1 65535 Seconds 40 Retransmit Interval E Time between retransmits 3 65535 Seconds 5 Transmit Delay 1 Transmission delay 1 65535 Seconds 1 Passive Interface passive IT Control interface passive setting not passive ee F default EI Type of authentication to use default none message digest null default Save Message Digest Keys Key ID Message digest key Action D 2 E Figure 17 15 OSPF Interfaces Parameters specific to one interface are configured here Each interface on the router is listed Clicking on settings displays a menu of configuration options for that interface Clicking on status displays
425. tals A T1 is a communications circuit upon which has been imposed a digital signal 1 DS1 signaling scheme The scheme allows 24 timeslots of 64 Kops DSO information as well as 8 Kbps of signaling information to be multiplexed to a 1544 Kbps circuit The 24 DSOs can be used individually as standalone channels bonded into groups of channels or can be bonded to form a single 1536 Kbps channel referred to as a clear channel Not all channels need be used It is quite common to purchase N channels of 64Kbps bandwidth and leave the remainder unused this is known as fractional T1 The telephone network terminates the T1 line and maps each of the channels through the T1 network to a chosen T1 line Individual and bonded DSOs from more than one remote T1 can be aggregated into a full T1 line often referred to as central site concentration Whereas the T1 line itself is referred to as the physical interface groups of DSOs form channels and the protocols that run on the channels are known as a logical interfaces The RuggedRouter provides you the ability to operate Frame Relay or PPP over your logical interfaces An E1 is is a communications circuit conforming to European standards possessing 32 64 Kbps channels of which one is usually reserved for signaling information 7 1 1 1 Frame Relay Frame Relay is a packet switching protocol for use over the WAN The RuggedRouter provides the ability to construct point to point IP network connection
426. tart Recommendations The following description is included to aid those users experienced with communications equipment that may wish to attempt to configure the router without fully reading the guide 1 Locate mount the chassis in its final resting place and apply power 2 The router can be configured through its web management interface or for advanced users through ssh The default Ethernet addresses for ports one through four are 192 168 1 1 through 192 168 4 1 Two shell accounts rrsetup and root are provided Both accounts have a default password of admin The web management interface uses the root account password The rrsetup account provides a shell that configures such items as passwords addresses date time and services offered by the router The root account provides a full shell 3 Attach a PC running terminal emulation software to the RS232 port and apply power to the chassis default baud rate data bits parity 88400 8 n 1 no hardware software flow control Set the terminal type to VT100 Press ENTER to obtain a login prompt Initial Configuration Before Attaching To The Network 4 Login as the rrsetup user with password admin 5 Change the root and rrsetup passwords from the shell Record the passwords in a secure manner If RADIUS authentication will be employed configure at least one authentication server address 6 Configure the router s hostname IP address subnet mask and gateway addresse
427. te equipment is able to loop the entire T1 E1 line can be verified If the remote router is another RuggedCom router a starting a line loopback will verify both cards and the line This router will display the count of loopback frames as they arrive T1 E1 Interface T1 E1 Interface Sender Line Digital Loopback Test Loopback Test Remote Loopback Test Remote Loopback Test Digital Analog Analog Digital Figure 7 12 T1 E1 Loopback The Select Loopback Type field selects the loopback The Number of Loops field controls the frames sent during digital and remote loopback This parameter is not used during line loopback The Time to run test field limits the time the sender will transmit and the router running line loopback will wait Running a loop test on an active interface will immediately cause it to go down The loop test automatically initializes the trunk after completing the test Revision 1 14 1 77 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 7 2 7 Current Routes amp Interface Table The table provided by this command is as described in the Networking menu Network Utilities sub menu It is also provided here as a convenience 7 2 8 Upgrading Software For some customers access to remote sites in accomplished solely by a T1 or E1 connection Usually a software upgrade will stop the system being upgraded perform the upgrade and then restart it If T1 E1 was upgraded in this way t
428. ter 32 1 1 2 PTP Master Election PTP clocks exchange SYNC messages containing information which is used by the PTP Best Master Clock BMC algorithm Several factors will affect the choice of best master clock including the preferred master clock setting the clock identifier grandmaster settings and clock stability The clock identifier is the measure of PTP clock quality and is one of the following PTP Identifier Descrption GPS The PTP clock is a primary reference standard traceable to a recognized standard source of time such as GPS The router uses this identifier when GPS is locked Revision 1 14 1 263 RX1000 RX1100 32 Configuring IRIGB And IEEE1588 PTP Identifier Descrption NTP The PTP clock is a secondary reference standard clock The router uses this identifier when it has synchronized with remote NTP server DFLT After the router has power cycled but before any GPS or NTP locks have occurred PTP favors preferred masters over normal masters GPS over NTP over DFLT higher clock stability over lower clock stability 32 1 1 3 Synchronizing NTP from IEEE1588 If GPS is unavailable and PTP becomes a slave the NTP server will view the received IEEE1588 time as any other source of time The quality i e stratum of IEEE1588 information is determined by the type of clock source at the master the number of Boundary Clock hops and the measured network jitter The number of Boun
429. ter s URL configures the link to access this router This information will be used in the email forwarder which user can click on the link in the email to access the router The Default Filter Level for Webmin configures the lowest alert level to show on Webmin All active alerts higher priority than this level will be displayed on the Webmin home page The Default Filter Level for Command Line configures the lowest alert level to show when user login by console or ssh The Save button saves all changes of general configuration The Create New Filter button allows you to create a new forwarder filter for active alerts 34 2 2 1 Alert Filter Configuration Change Filter Configuration Filter Parameters Forward Destination Type EMail sl Forward Destination admin example com Filter Level Comparator Greater Than si Filter Level E Emergency J alert critical Error M Warning Notice Info Debug Use comma to seperate multiple email addresses Save Delete Figure 34 3 Alert Filter Configuration Menu Revision 1 14 1 277 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router This menu configures an alert filter which defines the forwarder destination for active alerts matching with defined filter level The Forward Destination Type configures the type of filter Currently only type Email is supported The Forward Destination configures the destination matching with the Forwarder Destination Type Note that multipl
430. terface and that have a source or destination address that is reserved in RFC 1918 to be dropped after being optionally logged The nobogons option causes packets arriving on this interface that have a source address reserved by the IANA or by other RFCs other than 1918 to be dropped after being optionally logged The routefilter option invokes the Kernel s route filtering anti spoofing facility on this interface The kernel will reject any packets incoming on this interface that have a source address that would be routed outbound through another interface on the firewall Note The routefilter option should not be enabled on interfaces that are part of a multipath routing configuration The proxyarp option causes Shorewall to set proxy arp for the interface Do not set this option if implementing Proxy ARP through entries in etc shorewall proxarp The maclist option causes all connection requests received on this interface to be subject to MAC address verification May only be specified for Ethernet interfaces The nosmurfs option causes incoming connection requests to be checked to ensure that they do not have a broadcast or multicast address as their source Any such packets will be dropped after being optionally logged according to the setting of SMURF_LOG_LEVEL in etc shorewall shorewall conf The logmartians option causes the martian logging facility will be enabled on this interface See also the LOG_MARTIANS option in etc
431. terface must be configured to be the default gateway on Ruggedrouter if the PPP Revision 1 14 1 100 RX1000 RX1100 12 Configuring PPP And the Embedded Modem client is configured to dial on demand the default gateway option will be enabled automatically At the beginning the PPP interface will be shown as being up but the link will not actually be connected Only when there is traffic to be transmitted via this PPP interface will the configured number be dialed and a connection initiated The Dial on Demand feature requires IP addresses to be configured on for both the local and the remote ends of the PPP connection used These addresses are required in order to instantiate PPP for the purpose of monitoring for traffic Note that the local address remote address or both may be overridden by the PPP server at the time a connection is actually established Note Do not configure the default gateway on the router if you decide to use PPP Dial on Demand 12 1 1 5 LED Designations The RuggedRouter provides a pair of LEDs to indicate information about the modem PPP connection PPP Link will be green when the modem PPP link is established It will flash while a connection is being established or a console dial in session is active PPP Data will flash green when there is traffic on the PPP link 12 2 PPP Modem Configuration Modem k T 7 mm me mm Modem Modem Modem Modem Modem Modem MN
432. that creates channels as shown below Channel Assigned time slots Channelized interface 1 1 2 2 Timeslots 3 24 are unused assign a new channel Channel Name Description Local Address Netmask Remote Address Assign a new Frame Relay logical interface Assign a new PPP logical interface Edit T1 1 Parameters Figure 7 3 T1 E1 Network Interfaces After Channel Creation Revision 1 14 1 69 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 Once all timeslots have been assigned to channels the Timeslots link will no longer appear Note that you do not have to assign all timeslots Assign Frame Relay or PPP to the channels by following the Assign Protocol links The resultant menus will allow you select the desired channel If you are assigning multiple DLCls assign the first DLCI used by that interface and configure the Frame Relay Link Parameters and that DLCls network parameters After assigning the first DLCI you may revisit the interface through the link under the Name field and add additional DLCls Once all channels have been assigned the Assign links will no longer appear as shown below Note that any of the Frame Relay interfaces on a channel in this case w1c4fr16 and wic4fr17 may be used to edit the Frame Relay Link Parameters T1 E1 WAN Interfaces T1 E1 Trunks Channels and Logical Interfaces Refresh this page T1i 1 Up Assigned time sl
433. the Protocol field specifies udp or tcp Revision 1 14 1 197 RX1000 RX1100 20 Traffic Prioritization The Protocol field specifies a protocol to match against currently either tcp udp icmp ospf vrrp or ipsec The Target Queue field selects one of the available priority queues 20 2 2 3 Prioritization Transmit Queue Length The WAN protocols supplied by the RuggedRouter rely upon transmit queues to ensure their efficiency Even as a packet is starting to be transmitted other packets can be lining up behind it Normally there is only one queue the transmit queue and packets are transmitted from it in the order in which they arrived The transmit queue is a means of enhancing performance Prioritization favors some packets over others by transmitting them with preference Prioritization works by establishing queues at the required priority levels filling the transmit queue with them in priority order The aim of establishing low latency for certain traffic is foiled when transmit queue lengths are large because multiple low priority packets may have queued before a high priority packet arrives at the router RuggedCom recommends that the transmit queue length be left at its minimum default value of 1 Higher values however may strike a balance between latency an performance 20 2 3 Prioritization Statistics Prioritization Statistics For wippp O 100 extra high 20 93 KB high Irrrrrrrrrtrrtrttrttrttrttrtrt 2
434. the Save Changes button 34 3 2 2 Retrieving an Industrial Defender Key Once the addresses are saved a key can be retrieved from the SEM unit To do so enter the correct password as specified on the SEM unit and then click Obtain a new key In case of error e g a password mismatch an error message to that effect will be shown at the top of the page Industrial Defender Agent General Configuration Key was succesfully obtained Industrial Defender Parameters Appliance Address 10 159 9 6 Source Address 10 159 9 8 Save Changes Industrial Defender already has an agent key for the current Appliance address Enter a required password and select Obtain a new key to replace the key if required Password Obtain a new key You can enable remote system logging to a SEM unit presently remote syslog to none Add remote system logging to the SEM unit ds Return to Industrial Defender Agent Figure 34 8 Industrial Defender Configuration key obtained 34 3 2 3 Configuring remote syslogging Once a key is successfully obtained from an SEM unit then remote syslogging to the SEM can be enabled by clicking on Add remote system logging to the SEM unit This will add an entry in the syslog configuration file to transmit system logs to the configured SEM If the SEM unit IP address changes it will be necessary to change the local configuration by stopping the idefender process see Bootup and Shutdown configuring and saving th
435. the next lowest queue Web traffic will be used to manage the router and switches and should be assigned to a still lower queue All other traffic can be assigned to a final queue In all four queues are required The system provides three basic queues high normal and low and a fourth the extra high can be manually added Traffic filters are inspected in the order in which they are entered To reduce load and improve performance the filters should be entered in an order which recognizes the most frequent traffic under normal conditions The best filter order is probably e match source port 502 gt queue high e match protocol OSPF gt queue extra high e match source port snmp gt queue extra high e match source port www gt queue normal e match source port 10000 gt queue normal e match source port ssh gt queue extra high e match source port telnet gt queue extra high e match source IP Mask 0 0 0 0 0 gt queue low Note that the snmp www ssh and telnet keywords are defined in the file etc services so we can use their mnemonics here We could also have used the raw port numbers 161 80 22 and 23 respectively The TcpModbus port number is not common and must be explicitly entered The Webmin port number of 10000 reflects the fact that web traffic from a router is issued on this port Each of the port base
436. the router id to use for the core daemon This value is used as a unique identifier for the dynamic routing protocol to identify which router sent which route advertisement By default it uses the highest IP assigned to an interface on the router It is recommended that this value be set to a unique fixed IP on each router Note that this value is used by both OSPF and by BGP if not overridden under the global configuration for each protocol 17 2 2 2 Core Interface Parameters Parameters specific to one interface are configured here Revision 1 14 1 166 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing Core Interface Configuration eth1 Parameter Value blank default Description Possible values default value Bandwidth 10000 Bandwidth to use in autocost calculation 1 10000000 kbps Save Figure 17 6 Core Interface Parameters Each interface on the router is listed Clicking on settings displays a menu of configuration options for that interface Clicking on status displays the current status of the interface including link state IP address and traffic counts Clicking Remove inactive interfaces purges the list of any interfaces which are no longer configured on the router The Bandwidth field sets the bandwidth value to assume for the interface when automatically calculating a cost for using the link on this interface By default all interfaces are treated as 10Mbit 10000 Kbps OSPF b
437. ther version 1 2 or both versions can be accepted By default both RIP versions are accepted The Send Version field controls which versions of RIP messages to send to other routers Either version 1 2 or both versions can be sent By default only RIP version 2 messages are sent The Authentication fields choose the authentication mode this port uses A port can either use no authentication use a specific authentication string used the same was as the string in a key or use a specific key chain s settings By default no authentication is used The Authentication mode field chooses the mode of authentication used Options are plain text the default MD5 following the RIP authentication RFC and MD5 using the method used by the old ripd implementation The Use Split Horizon field controls use of the RIP split horizon feature RIP v2 only It can be disabled or enabled and if enabled it can optionally enable the poisoned reverse feature Split horizon controls whether routes learned through an interface should be allowed to be advertised back out that interface By default RIP advertises all routes it knows about to everyone which makes it take a very long time for dropped links to age out of the network The split horizon prevents advertising those routes back out the same interface which helps to control this problem Some network topologies with rings of routers will still have some issues with aging out dead routes even with split horizon e
438. this menu which displays and configures T3 Trunk parameters including the option to use the interface in E3 mode Help Edit T3 Interface Interface T3 1 Parameters Convert this interface to E3 Framing CDI Line Decoding B3ZS Clocking Master v Save Figure 8 4 Edit T3 Interface The Framing field determines the framing format used Your line provider will indicate the correct format The Line Decoding field reflects the line encoding decoding scheme Almost all T3s now use B3ZS The Clocking field selects whether to accept or provide clock signal In normal use the central office provides the clock signal in which case the setting should be Normal It is also possible to connect to another router for example by using a cross over cable and selecting Master on one of the two routers to provide the clock signal The link Convert this interface to E3 reconfigures the interface for use as an E3 trunk Revision 1 14 1 81 RX1000 RX1100 8 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T3 E3 8 2 1 3 E3 Interface Parameters Help Edit E3 Interface Interface E3 1 Parameters Convert this interface to T3 Framing G 751 framing format Line Decoding HDB3 Clocking Normal Save Figure 8 5 Edit E3 Interface The Framing field determines the framing format used Your line provider will indicate the correct format The Line Decoding field reflects the line encoding decoding scheme Th
439. times at baud rates below 19200 Kbps and 256 char times 192 ms at baud rates above 19200 Kbps You may specify a larger value if you think your RTU will take longer to complete transmission than the calculated time The Turnaround field configures the amount of delay if any to insert after the transmissions of Modbus broadcast messages out the serial port The Turnaround must be between 1 and 1000 milliseconds inclusive of off The Retransmits field configures the number of times to retransmit the request to the RTU before giving up should the original attempt fail The Max Conns field configures the maximum number of incoming connections The Local Port field may be used to specify an alternate local TCP port number If this field is configured a single connection per serial port may be made to this alternate port number Note that TCP Modbus uses a default local port number of 502 There is no limit imposed on the number of connections to the default TCP port 24 2 6 DNP Menu Help DNP Settings Address leaming Aging Timer Max Conns Loc Port ethl vi Dong 1 20000 Save Changes a Return to Serial Protocols Figure 24 7 DNP Settings The Address Learning field may be set to Disabled or to an Ethernet interface name The Aging Timer sets the length of time which a learned DNP device in the Device Address Table may go without any DNP communication before it is removed from the table Revision 1
440. tion Order selector determines the order of sources for resolving domain names into IP addresses The Hosts file etc nosts can be populated with frequently used but unchanging addresses DNS refers to any configured DNS servers The DNS servers fields allow you to specify in order the servers from which to request Internet Domain Name resolution The Search domains field allow you to specify the domain names of primarily the domain of which the router is a member and secondarily other domains that may be used to search for an unqualified host name i e as though it were local If a domain name is not specified here the router will attempt to extract this information from the host addresses 5 3 6 Host Addresses Host Addresses IP Address Hostnames 192 168 12 12 leftside_controller 192 168 13 3 rtu9 Add a new host address Figure 5 7 Host Addresses This menu allows you to display and configure host addresses Host addresses are useful when a non changing IP address is often used or when DNS is not configured Follow the Add a new host address link to add an address 5 3 7 End To End Backup End To end backup is method of using two interfaces to ensure a reliable end to end connection between two routers using alternate routing without the need to configure routing protocols Revision 1 14 1 56 RX1000 RX1100 5 Configuring Networking The two interfaces are assigned as a primary secon
441. to authenticate Webmin user accounts for RuggedRouter 1 Create a group for each privilege level For example for the operator privilege level create a group named RADIUS _RuggedRouter_operator User accounts needing operator privileges would then be added to this group 2 Use the New Remote Access Policy Wizard to create a custom policy with the following settings e Policy conditions e NAS ldentifier matches webmin e Windows Group matches the group corresponding to the user s privilege level e Permission Grant remote access permission Revision 1 14 1 326 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix E RADIUS Server Configuration 3 Double click the newly created policy name In the popup window click the Edit Profile button AEPTest_other Properties 2 xi Settings Specify the conditions that connection requests must match Policy conditions N amp S Identifier matches webmin AND Windows Groups matches QSRULES Radius RuggedRouter root If connection requests match the conditions specified in this policy the associated profile will be applied to the connection Edit Profile Unless individual access permissions are specified in the user profile this policy controls access to the network If a connection request matches the specified conditions C Deny remote access permission Grant remote access permission Ok Cancel Apply Figure E 1 IAS Window Edit Remote Access Policy
442. to network booted clients Boot file server The IP address of the tftp server to boot from This only applies to network booted clients Server name The hostname of the boot server This only applies to network booted clients Revision 1 14 1 240 RX1000 RX1100 27 Configuring The DHCP server e Lease length for BOOTP clients How long the IP assigned to a BOOTP client should be considered valid e Lease end for BOOTP clients Cut off date for all BOOTP client leases e Dynamic DNS enabled Should DNS information be updated on the DNS server when a client receives an IP address e Dynamic DNS domain name The domain name to update dynamic DNS information in e Dynamic DNS hostname Use the specified hostname for clients or use the hostname supplied by the client e Dynamic DNS reverse domain The reverser DNS domain to update dynamic information in for the reverse DNS entry e Dynamic DNS reverse domain The reverser DNS domain to update dynamic information in for the reverse DNS entry Lesser used DHCP server configurations include e Allow unknown clients Should DHCP accept requests from clients it has never seen before or only from clients that have already received leases in the past e Server is authoritative If the server is authoritative it will send deny messages to any client which tries to renew a lease which the server knows the client shouldn t have e Option 82 Support 27 1 1 3 Option 82 Support with Di
443. tpdc utility program is used to query the NTP daemon about its current state and to request changes in that state The ntptrace utility is a utility trace a chain of NTP servers back to the primary source The ntp keygen utility can be used to generate secure public keys for authentication 29 2 NTP Configuration 29 2 1 NTP Server Main Menu NTP Server Generic Options Server list Peers list View NTP Status View NTP Log View GPS Status View GPS log Restart ntpd daemon Click this button to restart the ntpd client daemon This will apply configuration parameters Figure 29 1 NTP Server Revision 1 14 1 252 RX1000 RX1100 29 Configuring NTP Note that the NTP server is disabled by default and may be enabled via the System folder Bootup And Shutdown menu When enabled any configuration changes may be made to take effect by selecting the Restart ntpd daemon button The View GPS Status and View GPS log sub menus appear if the router is equipped with a Precision Time Protocol card 29 2 2 Generic Options NTP Generic Options INTP OPTIONS Multicast address gt Default Custom Broadcast Client No ei Custom address Save options Figure 29 2 NTP Generic Options Set the Broadcast Client option to Yes if you wish to act on NTP broadcast messages The default multicast address used for NTP is 224 0 1 1 Select a custom multicast address with the Custom address field if you wish to
444. traffic classification class link or by clicking on the add above or add below images in the Add column Clicking on a link in the Interface column will allow you to edit or delete a traffic classification class as shown below The Manually Edit File button also allows you to make direct changes to the TC Classes configuration file Edit TC Classes TC class details Interface fethi Mark to match hooo Minimum rate kbit gt full ah EG Maximum rate Kc kbit d full se fo Priority 1 SENATE default v tos minimize delay P tos maximize throughput E tos maximize reliability tos minimize cost tos normal service f tcp ack tos xx or xx yy where xx is two digit hex tos value and yy is two digit hex mask Save Delete Figure 15 4 Edit TC Classes The Interface field specifies which network interface this TC Class applies to The Mark to match field specifies what mark value this TC Class will match The mark may be in the range 1 255 in decimal or hex The Minimum rate field specifies the minimum bandwidth allocated to this class The Maximum rate field specifies the maximum bandwidth allocated to this class Bandwidth is specified in megabytes per second mbps megabits per second mbit kilobytes per second kbps kilobits per second kbit or bytes per second bps Alternately it can be specified as a fraction of the full port soeed defined in the TC Interfaces menu The Priority field sp
445. turn to this behavour if the configured address is not available when it starts Addresses to listen on Interface Name IP Address Listening lo 127 0 0 1 enabled disabled ethi 10 128 10 233 enabled disabled eth2 192 168 32 1 enabled disabled dummy 172 99 45 68 f ereniedes sabad New NOTE snmpd is currently configured to listen on all active IPV4 interfaces Figure 34 26 Network Addressing Configuration Menu Addresses to listen on The table of Addresses to listen on includes the list of currently configured and active IP addresses and whether the address is currently listened on The New field allows for the addition of other IP addresses Snmpd will use these addresses providing they are active at the time it starts By default snmpd listens on all interfaces 34 6 4 Access Control SNMP V1 and V2c Community Names Community Name Access Source IP oro Delete Add an SNMP 1 or v2c Community Name Community Name PO Access read only x Source IP Ir OID PO Add public read write Figure 34 27 Access Control Menu SNMP V1 and V2c Revision 1 14 1 294 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router The first part of the Access control page allows the creation and deletion of SNMP V1 and V2c community names The Community Name field selects the name of the community The Access field determines whether the community is read on
446. tus in real time Click on the Refresh Display button to update to the current status The entries under the Instance column reflect the name of VRRP instances existing as of the last restart of keepalived The entries under the Current State column reflect the state VRRP instances An instance can be in one of Master master for the VRIP Backup backup for the VRIP or Fault VRRP interface or Monitored interface is down The entries under the Time Of Change To Current State column reflect when the current state was entered The entries under the VRRP Interface State column reflect the link state of the interface that the instance runs upon The entries under the Monitored Interface State column reflect the link state of the monitored interface or none if an interface is not configured Revision 1 14 1 192 RX1000 RX1100 20 Traffic Prioritization 20 Traffic Prioritization 20 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Enabling Disabling Traffic Prioritization e Viewing Traffic Prioritization Statistics Note Traffic Prioritization has been retained in ROX for compatibility with older installations that may rely on it For new configurations please use the newer and more flexible Traffic Control facility instead 20 1 1 Traffic Prioritization Fundamentals The RuggedRouter is able to prioritize traffic transmitted on network interfaces including Ethernet T1E1 DSL and PPP ports givi
447. tware is provided in releases of the form rrX Y Z The platform release number X changes when new hardware platforms are released The major release number Y is increased Revision 1 14 1 309 RX1000 RX1100 34 Maintaining The Router when important new features are added This is called a Major release The minor release number Z is increased when minor functionality is added or bug repairs are made This is called a Minor release The RuggedRouter software is organized into a number of interdependent packages Each package contains all of the files necessary to implement a set of related commands or features such as a firewall or ssh client A router upgrade involves replacing some of these packages with newer versions and sometimes adding new packages The upgrade system handles these functions automatically 34 13 2 Upgrade to RX1100 Upgrade Inventory This router has an RX1000 order code In order to upgrade to an RX1100 contact your sales manager and provide them with following inventory record When your salesperson returns you an updated record overwrite the current record and press the Upgrade Inventory button A reboot will then be required BEGIN PGP SIGNED MESSAGE Created by RuggedCom Inc Final Test Product information 1D8DBOFGFYu1P23y a GSkdYRAmey AKCFC6x6acN1104JkbSBDvI XL hSHrwCeMy L CSDcLeG2P269nBqfR1 xXkSUE m4 c END PGP SIGNATURE 2 01 0001 Rugge 12 11
448. u creating a new connection and its icon Selecting the connection s icon from the IPsec main menu displays the same menu allowing editing and deletion An IPsec connection is composed of three types of information There is information about the local host the remote host and about the overall connection between them The configuration data has been designed in such a way that there are identical connection specifications on both ends Because of this connection specifications are written in terms of left and right participants rather than in terms of local and remote Which participant is considered left or right is arbitrary IPsec figures out which one it is being run on based on internal information The Create Edit Connection menu is reflects this organization by being split into three sections The first section IPsec VPN Connection Details describes parameters relating to the connection itself The next two sections Left System s Settings Right System s Settings describe IP networking parameters and RSA signatures at each peer These two sections are identical and are described once 16 2 8 1 IPSec VPN Connection Details Help Create Connection IPsec PN connection details Connection name Remote_16 At IPsec startup Start connection Authenticate by O Default rsasig O secret Connection type Tunnel host or network had Phase 1 Encryption Protocols Default a
449. ually Edit File Click this button to manually edit the Shorewall file etc shorewall interfaces in which the entries above are stored Figure 14 4 Firewall Network Interfaces This menu allows you to add delete and configure network interfaces Add a new interface by selecting the Add a new network interface link or by clicking on the add above or add below images in the Add field Reorder the interfaces by clicking on the arrows under the Move field Clicking on a link under the Interface field will allow you to edit or delete the interface Note that if you delete an interface you should remove any rules that reference it You may also make changes by manually editing the interfaces file Note If you use a WAN interface in the firewall the interface will be referred to by its name Some WAN changes such as changing the number of channels used by a T1 E1 logical interface will change the name Ensure that the entries in this menu reflect the correct interface names Edit Network Interface Network interface details Interface ethl bd Zone name LOCAL e Broadcast address O None Automatic O Options O arp_filter C routeback C tcpflags E dhcp C norfc1918 LJ nobogons O routefilter E proxyarp C maclist O nosmurfs oO logmartians Save Delete Figure 14 5 Editing Network Interface s Firewall Settings The dhep option should be selected if interface is assigned an IP address via DHCP
450. uggedRouter includes two sources of LED indicated information about T1 E1 lines the T1 E1 card itself and the LED Panel One LED is associated with each line next to the interface jack This LED is red when the link is disconnected flashes green when the link is connecting and remains solid green when the link is established The RuggedRouter also indicates information about T1 E1 ports on the LED Panel A pair of LEDs will indicate traffic and link status of the port Consult the section Using The LED Status Panel to determine which LEDs correspond to the port 7 1 1 4 Included With T1 E1 T1 E1 includes wanpipemon a utility that can capture traces from the T1 E1 line 7 2 T1 E1 Configuration ken ei m AA i GE d T1 E T1 E1 Trunks And Interfaces Current Route amp Interface Table Figure 7 1 T1 E1 Trunks And Interfaces This menu allows you to display and configure T1 or E1 Trunks as well as display the routes and status of the network interfaces Revision 1 14 1 68 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 7 2 1 T1 E1 Network Interfaces Help T1 E1 WAN Interfaces TUELL Trunks Channels and Logical Interfaces Refresh this page T1 1 Not Running Channel Assigned time slots Channelizedinterface ss si itsti SOSOS C 4 gp ene Channel Name Deseripgon Local Address Netmask Remote Address Assign ane
451. ule file Edit Static NAT Static NAT entry details External address 204 226 111 45 External interface wlclppp gt virtual Internal address 192 168 0 1 No IP alias E Active for all hosts E geg 08 Active for firewall system Mo Bee Save Delete Figure 14 14 Creating a Static NAT Entry The External address and Internal address fields specify the addresses to translate The External interface field specifies the interface to perform the translation upon The No IP alias field is used to tell the firewall not create the IP alias for the external address if it has not been created on the external interface yet The Active for all hosts field is used to specify whether access to the external IP from all firewall interfaces should undergo NAT Yes or yes or if only access from the interface in the INTERFACE column should undergo NAT The Active for firewall system field is used to specify whether packets originating from the firewall itself and destined for the EXTERNAL address are redirected to the internal ADDRESS 14 6 8 TC Traffic Control Interfaces Classes and Rules The Traffic Control subsystem of the firewall allows sophisticated management of the amount of bandwidth that different types of traffic are permitted to use on a given interface Please see Traffic Control for details 14 6 9 Actions When Stopped Module Index When Stopped By default when the Shorewall firewall is stopped it will deny access from a
452. undle 10 1 2 Notes on T1 E1 Channelization T1 E1 lines can be configured as channelized or unchannelized A more complete discussion of this topic than the one provided below can be found in the section on Strategy For Creating Interfaces In unchannelized mode an entire T1 E1 link is aggregated into one channel In the MLPPP Channel Setting table below unchannelized T1 E1 interfaces will be seen to have only one channel channel 1 In channelized mode more than one channel is defined for each T1 E1 interface The section on Strategy For Creating Interfaces describes the process of creating multiple channels on a T1 E1 interface Note that in order for PPP Multilink to operate optimally it is advisable to ensure that each link in the MLPPP bundle has the same bandwidth This means that the number of time slots the clocking mode and rate for each T1 E1 link that is used by PPP Multilink should be the same 10 2 Configuring PPP Multilink over T1 E1 In order to begin creating an MLPPP bundle click on T1 E1 in the Networking folder of the main Webmin menu T1 E1 Trunks and Interfaces will display the menu below Revision 1 14 1 91 RX1000 RX1100 10 Multilink PPP over T1 E1 Help T1 E1 WAN Interfaces T1 E1 Trunks Channels and Logical Interfaces Refresh this page T1 1 Not Running C channel lame ep LLocalAddress a Remow Address Assign anew Frame Relay logical interface Assign anew PPP logical interface
453. ups of networks which have common administrative and routing policies If BGP is used to exchange routing information between different networks it is called Exterior BGP EBGP Interior BGP IBGP is used to exchange routing information between routers within the same network 17 1 3 RIP Fundamentals The Routing Information Protocol determines the best path for routing IP traffic over a TCP IP network based on the number of hops between any two routers It uses the shortest route available to a given network as the route to use for sending packets to that network The RuggedRouter RIP daemon ripd is an RFC1058 compliant implementation of RIP support RIP version 1 and 2 RIP version 1 is limited to obsolete class based networks while RIP version 2 supports subnet masks as well as simple authentication for controlling which routers to accept route exchanges with Revision 1 14 1 159 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing RIP uses network and neighbor entries to control which routers it will exchange routes with A network is either a subnet or a physical broadcast capable network interface Any router that is part of that subnet or connected to that interface may exchange routes A neighbor is a specific router to exchange routes with specified by its IP address For point to point links T1 E1 links for example one must use neighbor entries to add other routers to exchange routes with The maximum number of hops between t
454. uring Dynamic Routing EE 159 le ee ele E 159 17 1 1 Quagga RIP OSPF and BGP E 159 e EE E F ndamentalS EE 159 17 1 RIP Fundamentals eegene dole acumen Cub ie ha netted atest teen aasat 159 17 1 4 OSPF Fundamentals Seege dee deed 160 17 1 5 Key OSPF And RIP Parameters ccccccceccceeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeneneseeees 161 17 1 6 OSPF And VRRP Example Network wsccsccunasteceeuapenveth os Manton e Seu sbciede 163 17 2 Dynamic Routing Configuration EE 165 e GE GE See 165 RE GC 166 172253 BGP la e ee EE 167 Fee OSI E 172 Eege ee ee eg 176 TG lol lee WEE EE 181 18 1 ATMO Dee EE 181 18 1 1 Link Backup Fundamentals siccccrss sectvedsruedetdecattadertyecs oped beubearindyatueceremecekeadabets 181 18 2 Link Backup Configuration tg24 coc seats cec tal ie ae avaict deaaeauded ted ccy saace eat sues eg ueatee 182 18 2 1 Link Backup Main Mem ectesieictiatericeteedes adios iotiase EE ENEE dE Enebege 182 18 2 2 Link Backup Configurations tactic cititacaccetachesceuune Ho send Bicalee atest tales 183 18 2 3 Edit Link Backup Configuration cic caceteiadeccticiceeel Eeer 183 18 24 Link Backup e EE 184 SZ pk Backup Status eci a a A A EEES 185 18 26 Fest LinKk B ck D EE 185 19 Config ring VRRP seein ee aeaa a aE REEE TEE a eSa NEEE e Ea 186 JEE HE EE E Ee 186 ISCH VRRP Fundamentals ssiri ariii apens ea eege aei 186 19 2 VRRP Config ratioM EE 189 19 21 VRRP Main Men aerar eaae ra aee a ENEA 189 19 2 2 VRRP C
455. uring Frame Relay PPP And DDS 9 2 7 Upgrading Software For some customers access to remote sites in accomplished solely by a DDS connection Usually a software upgrade will stop the system being upgraded perform the upgrade and then restart it If DDS port was upgraded in this way the upgrade would fail as the DDS link was taken down Instead DDS software upgrades modify only the software on the disk You must schedule a reboot in order to run the new version of DDS software Revision 1 14 1 90 RX1000 RX1100 10 Multilink PPP over T1 E1 10 Multilink PPP over T1 E1 10 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Multilink PPP in overview e Configuring Multilink PPP e Viewing MLPPP statistics 10 1 1 Multilink PPP Fundamentals The PPP Multilink Protocol also known as Multilink PPP is defined in Internet RFC 1990 Its purpose is to combine two or more PPP links into one so called bundle in order to provide more bandwidth to a point to point connection PPP Multilink must be supported on both sides of the link and may be used if there is more than one PPP link connecting the two endpoints It works by multiplexing data on a per packet basis to transmit across multiple PPP links Sequence numbering is used to attempt to preserve the order of packets transmitted across the bundle RuggedRouter is capable of running PPP Multilink over two or more T1 E1 links It is capable of defining only one MLPPP b
456. urrent Receive Sequence Number 0 Current N392 count D Current N393 count D Frame Relay Trunk Communications Errors I frames not transmitted after a tx int due to exessive frame length D I frames not transmitted after a tx int due to excessive throughput 0 Received frames discarded as they were either too short or too long o discarded I frames with unconfigured DLCI D discarded I frames due to a format error is App didn t respond to the triggered IRQ within the given timeout period 0 discarded In channel Signalling frames due to a format error D In channel frames received with an invalid Send Seq Numbers received O In channel frames received with an invalid Receive Seq Numbers o received Number of unsolicited responses from the Access Node D timeouts on the T391 timer 26978 consecutive timeouts on the T391 timer o osn that N392 error threshold was reached during N393 monitored o events Refresh Clear Statistics Information bytes transmitted 0 Figure 7 9 Frame Relay Statistics Note that the Frame Relay Trunk Statistics and Frame Relay Trunk Communications Errors tables are common to all Frame Relay DLCIs on the trunk Revision 1 14 1 75 RX1000 RX1100 7 Configuring Frame Relay PPP And T1 E1 7 2 5 3 PPP Interface Statistics wippp Statistics Protocols Statistic Receive Transmit Number of LCP packets 58342 58351 Number of PAP
457. urst field denotes the largest permissible burst and defaults to five if not configured 14 6 5 Masquerading Module Index Masquerading Entries on this page set up network address translation for traffic routed between some network and a particular interface Add a new masquerading rule Outgoing interface Network to masquerade SNAT address Add wippp Network on ethl 206 176 248 148 T 4 Add a new masquerading rule Manually Edit File Click this button to manually edit the Shorewall file etc shorewall masq in which the entries above are stored Figure 14 9 Firewall Masquerading And SNAT This menu allows you to add delete and configure masquerading and SNAT rules Add a new rule by selecting the Add a new masquerading rule link or by clicking on the add above or add below images in the Add field Reorder the policies by clicking on the arrows under the Move field Clicking on a link under the Outgoing interface field will allow you to edit or delete the rule as shown below You may also make changes by manually editing the rule file Module Index Edit Masquerading Rule Masquerading rule details Outgoing interface wlppp gt Iv Only for destination 100 1 1 1 Network to masquerade Subnet address Subnet on interface eth1 v P Except for networks SNAT address None D 206 176 248 148 Save Delete Figure 14 10 Editing A Masquerading Rule The Only for destination field
458. use a different addresses 29 2 3 Servers Configuration Help a NTP Server List IP ADDRESS VERSION KEY PREFERRED CHECK 0 debian pool ntp org Default 4 None No Contact pool ntp org Default 4 None No Contact 10 0 0 214 Default 4 None No Contact Create new Figure 29 3 NTP Server List The servers under the IP address column are used as primary synchronization devices Clicking on a link will allow you to edit that server By default the router includes the links 0 debian pool ntp org The 0 debian pool ntp org address selects a random low stratum server from a pool of ntp servers on the Internet If you are operating in a private network you will want to delete both of these addresses and substitute that of a locally known low stratum server The Version field indicates the version of the NTP protocol used to communicate with this host Change this only if it is known that the host requires a version other than 4 Revision 1 14 1 253 RX1000 RX1100 29 Configuring NTP The Key field provides an authentication key associated with this host The Preferred field determines whether this host is preferred over other hosts in the list The Check field link leads to a page that displays the result of an NTP query to this host Use this feature to determine if the configured host is active 29 2 4 Peers Configuration This menu allows you to enter and edit peers Peers are
459. uthentication 162 162 176 Fundamentals 160 160 Hello And Dead Intervals 161 175 Revision 1 14 1 333 RX1000 RX1100 Index Link Costs 162 167 173 Link Detect 162 Link State Advertisements 160 Neighbors 160 Operation With VRRP 164 Redistributing Routes 162 P Passwords Changing from Webmin 46 Changing through setup menu 25 Default 23 PPP Multilink 91 Multilink Configuring 91 PPPoE On ADSL Interfaces 94 On Native Ethernet Interfaces 64 Precision Time Protocol Card IRIGB outputs 264 NTP 252 PTP Master Election 263 PTP Network Roles 263 Prioritization Configuring 193 Filters 194 Fundamentals 193 Queues 193 Statistics 198 TOS Field 194 R Radius Authentication PPP connections 103 rrsetup 26 RADIUS Authentication Console Login 298 SCP 298 SFTP 298 Rebooting From Webmin 45 Via Led Panel 33 33 Repository Bandwidth Considerations 319 Server Requirements 317 Setting up 317 Router Software Re Flashing 320 Routing Protocols Ospfd daemon 159 159 Quagga 159 Zebra daemon 159 159 Routing table Viewing 58 209 S Scheduled Commands 47 47 Scheduled Cron Jobs 47 Security IP Access Control 34 SSH Access Control 259 Webmin listening address 35 Webmin Password 46 Serial Configuring 211 Synchronous Configuring 226 Serial Numbers 33 Sertrace 224 Services Enabling and Disabling from setup menu 26 Enabling And Disabling from Webmin 45 S
460. vity of serial ports in real time A port range may be specified to limit the output to specific ports The level of traffic to trace and the Revision 1 14 1 224 RX1000 RX1100 24 Configuring Serial Protocols type of decoding may be specified The tool may also be used to force the port to transmit an output test message The following is an example of sertrace use RuggedRouter sertrac h Trace Serial Protocol Server Activity Usage sertrace dtr p portrange serserver d protocol decode serserver t tcp level events serserver r raw packet display serserver p ports to capture e g 1 3 6 7 serserver s ports to send a test message out on when s Enter keys are pressed In the absence of parameters all decoding on all ports is provided RuggedRouter sertrac p ss 10 56 18 405 TCPCONN Listening on TCP Port 50002 from port 1 10 56 19 944 TCPCONN Connection opened from 10 0 10 236 4991 50002 s 10 56 47 497 RAWSOCKET Transmitting message on port 1 length 44 74 68 65 20 71 75 69 63 6b 20 62 72 6f 77 6e 20 the quick brown 66 6f 78 20 6a 75 6d 70 65 64 20 6f 76 65 72 20 fox jumped over 74 68 65 20 6c 61 7a 79 20 64 6f 67 the lazy dog 10 56 47 545 RAWSOCKET Received message on port 1 length 44 31ms by timer 74 68 65 20 71 75 69 63 6b 20 62 72 6f 77 6e 20 the quick brown 66 6f 78 20 6a 75 6d 70 65 64 20 6f 76 65 72 20 fox jumped over 74 68 65 20 6c 61 7a 79 20 64 6f 67 the lazy dog 10 56 47 5
461. w Frame Relay logical interface Assign anew PPP logical interface Assign new MLPPP logical interfaces Edit T1 1 Parameters Figure 7 2 T1 E1 Network Interfaces Initial Configuration This menu allows you to display and configure T1 E1 Trunk parameters Channels and the logical interfaces that run on them A table is presented for each interface Note that the interface number is the same regardless of whether it is a T1 or E1 interface Interface numbers are as described by the WAN labels as shown in the home page chassis diagram The status of the trunks physical and logical interfaces are shown This menu presents connection statuses but does not update them in real time Click on the Refresh this page link to update to the current status 7 2 1 1 Strategy For Creating Interfaces Initially each interface will be configured as T1 and will have a single channel that includes all timeslots 1 24 Channelized cards can have their timeslots reassigned to make additional channels Unchannelized cards may have timeslots removed from their single timeslot If the interface is to be an E1 convert it using the Edit T1 1 Parameters link If the interface is channelized and you need to have more than one channel construct the channel groups with the desired bandwidths This can be done by editing the single initially configured channel and removing timeslots The unassigned timeslots will be displayed on the main menu in a link
462. will detect the link being down and remove the direct route to the 1 1 2 0 24 VRRP on Router 2 will stop seeing messages from Router 1 elect itself master and will take over the gateway for the network Revision 1 14 1 164 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing OSPF on router 1 will notice the link being down and the route to 1 1 2 0 24 disappearing and will use information from router 2 install a route to 1 1 2 0 24 via Router 2 Router 3 will notice than Router 2 is now a more direct path to 1 1 2 0 24 network and start sending to Router 2 instead of Router 1 After the failure all routers still know how to reach the entire network and the clients on 1 1 2 0 24 can still send on the network using the same gateway address The clients will see only a MAC address change of the gateway and experience a few seconds of network outage When the link returns VRRP will switch back to the master and the routes will return to their normal state Note that if the Router 1 WAN link fails Router will see routes to Router3 via the Router 1 Router 2 WAN and Ethernet links If the faster Router 1 Router 2 Ethernet path fails Router 1 will fall back to the Router 1 Router 2 WAN link Note that it would not be useful to leave the Ethernet 1 1 2 0 24 subnets out of the area and turn on redistribute connected as OSPF would not use the subnets for routing 17 2 Dynamic Routing Configuration H Dynamic Routing BGP O
463. will help in providing the NTP time It is generally a good idea to configure one at least one server and peer The NTP daemon will know about the NTP servers and peers to use in three ways e It can be configured manually with a list of servers to poll e It can be configured manually with a list of peers to send to e It can look at advertisements issued by other servers on multicast or broadcast addresses Note that if multicasting or broadcasting is used it is strongly recommended to enable authentication unless you trust all hosts on the network NTP uses UDP IP packets for data transfer because of the fast connection setup and response times UDP offers The NTP protocol uses port UDP port 123 Note that if your router employs a firewall and acts as a client it must open UDP port 123 Additionally if the router acts as a server the firewall must allow connection requests on port 123 as well Revision 1 14 1 251 RX1000 RX1100 29 Configuring NTP 29 1 1 1 The NTP Sanity Limit The NTP daemon corrects the system time through two means stepping and slewing If the difference between the local clock and the reference chosen by NTP the offset is more than 128ms for a period of more than 900 seconds NTP will step or instantaneously correct the time If the time difference is less than 128ms NTP will slew the time by no more than 500 microseconds every second toward the correct time in such a way that to an applicat
464. wo points on a RIP network is 15 placing a limit on network size Link failures will eventually be noticed although it is not unusual for RIP to take many minutes for a dead route to disappear from the whole network Large RIP networks could take over an hour to converge when link or route changes occur For fast convergence and recovery OSPF is a much better choice RIP is a fairly old routing protocol and has mostly been superseded by OSPF 17 1 4 OSPF Fundamentals The Open Path Shortest First OSPF protocol routing determines the best path for routing IP traffic over a TCP IP network based on link cost and quality Unlike static routing OSPF takes link failures and other network topology changes into account Unlike the RIP routing protocol OSPF provides less router to router update traffic RuggedRouter routing protocols are supplied by the Quagga routing package The RuggedRouter OSPF daemon ospfd is an RFC 2178 compliant implementation of OSPFv2 The daemon also adheres to the RFC2370 Opaque LSA and RFC3509 ABR Types extensions OSPF network design usually involves partitioning a network into a number of self contained areas The areas are chosen to minimize intra area router traffic making more manageable and reducing the number of advertised routes Area numbers are assigned to each area All routers in the area are known as Area routers If traffic must flow between two areas a router with links in each area is selected to be
465. word Poe Default Route v Use Peer DNS V MTU 1452 Save Delete Figure 6 8 Editing a PPPoE Interface The PPPoE Username field determines the username to use when connecting to the PPPoE server as specified by your provider The Password field determines the password provided to the PPPoE server The Default Route checkbox enables automatically setting a default route using this interface whenever it connects If this is your primary connection you probably want this option enabled The Use peer DNS checkbox enables automatically setting the DNS server entries that the PPPoE server recommends Enable this option unless you provide your own name servers Revision 1 14 1 65 RX1000 RX1100 6 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces The MTU field defines the MTU size to request when connecting to the PPPoE server In some cases the PPPoE provider may provide a smaller MTU in which case the smaller setting will be used or it may refuse to alter the MTU and use whatever it considers to be the default The Save button will update all of the changes The current PPPoE link will be connected The Delete button will delete the PPPoE interface closing the current PPPoE link 6 2 7 PPP Logs PPP Logs Refresh Month Day Time Process Event Aug 18 09 23 59 pppd 2849 Plugin rp pppoe so loaded Aug 18 09 23 59 pppd 2857 pppd 2 4 4 started by root uid 0 Aug 18 09 24 00 pppd 2857 PPP session is 831 Aug 18 09 24 00
466. work Utilities The Hostname field accepts the host name or IP address to ping Note that this may be an IPv4 or and IPv6 address The Verbose Output field causes ping to present the maximum of output The Lookup Addresses field causes ping to resolve IP addresses to domain names This can make ping behave very slowly if DNS is not properly configured The Packet Size field specifies the size of the data in the ping packet The true length of the packet is 28 bytes larger due to IP ICMP overhead The Time between pings field limits the rate at which pings are sent The Pattern s to send Hex field specifies a pattern to fill the packet sent This is useful for diagnosing data dependent problems in a network For example specifying ff will cause the sent packet to be filled with all ones 23 4 Ping Check Menu The Ping Check utility is configured to ping an IP host If the configured host fails to respond to ping checks the utility performs a configured action in response For example if it is detected that a host across a PPP connection is no longer reachable one might wish to explicitly reset the PPP connection The main Ping Check menu displays a list of currently configured and active ping check entries aias Ping Check Index Interval sec Ping tries Remote IP address Action fa so la 211 193 21 45 logger pcheck Edit Add a new Ping check a Return to Network Utilities Figure 23
467. work will also be forwarded to any other remote daemons included in the group e The UDP port number for inter daemon communication must be the same throughout the network e Enabling Generic L2 Tunneling on an Ethernet interface does not interfere with other Layer 3 networking configuration on that interface e g firewall rules IP routing etc Revision 1 14 1 231 RX1000 RX1100 26 Configuring Layer 2 Tunnels Note Avoid network configurations where the daemons can form a traffic loop The simplest such configuration is a triangle network where each daemon forwards to two other routers Frames arriving at one router will start cycling in clockwise and counterclockwise directions To avoid such packet storms frames forwarded to the network are tagged with an initial time to live count The count is decremented at each relay to the network and prevents the frame from being relayed indefinitely 26 2 Layer 2 Tunnel Configuration 26 2 1 Layer 2 Tunnels Main Menu Halas Layer 2 Tunnels GOOSE L2 492 1 492 1 492 1 2 248 2 248 2 242 General GOOSE Tunnels L2 Tunnels GOOSE Statistics L2 tunnel Statistics Activity Trace Configuration Restart Layer 2 Tunnels daemon Click this button to restart the Layer 2 Tunnelss daemon with the current configuration This will restart all protocols Figure 26 1 Layer 2 Tunnels Main Menu Note that the Layer 2 Tunnel daemon is disabled by default
468. ximum number of connections to configure if the direction is outgoing The Remote IP field configures the address used when placing an outgoing connection The Remote Port field selects the TCP destination port used in outgoing connections The Local Port field selects the local TCP port to use to accept incoming connections When Max Conns is set to more than one and the call direction os outgoing a button labelled AddNewConns will appear in the Action column of the table to allow new outbound connections to be configured Revision 1 14 1 228 RX1000 RX1100 25 Synchronous Serial Ports When multiple oubound connections are configured and present in the table a Delete button will appear in the Action column of the table to allow additional connections to be deleted 25 3 Synchronous Serial Diagnostics Statistics and line tracing utilities are available for the synchronous serial ports via the Serial Protocols menu interfaces e For information on port statistics please refer to Serial Protocols Statistics Menu e For information on a menu for tracing Raw Socket protocol exchanges please refer to Serial Protocols Trace Menu e For information on a command line utility for tracing Raw Socket protocol exchanges please refer to Serial Sertrace Utility Revision 1 14 1 229 RX1000 RX1100 26 Configuring Layer 2 Tunnels 26 Configuring Layer 2 Tunnels 26 1 Introduction RuggedRouter is capable of extending t
469. y Revision 1 14 1 48 RX1000 RX1100 4 Configuring The System If you have multiple jobs the arrows in the Move column will alter the order in which they are presented 4 6 System Hostname Help System Hostname _ a oo Hosmame ruggedrouter Domain ocaldomain Save Figure 4 9 System Hostname The Hostname field modifies the hostname as presented in the web server and shell sessions The Domain field modifies the domain as presented in the web server and shell sessions The default is localdomain Note that the new hostname and domain settings will only appear in new sessions 4 7 System Time System Time ls m Ti Day Date Month Year Hour Friday 3 d J june sl 2005 x 10 si das ER 07 si Apply j Se WW 7 Ce E Timezone Canada East Saskatchewan Canada Mountain Canada Newfoundland Current location Canada Pacific Change timezone Figure 4 10 System Time This menu provides a method to set the router s time and timezone Note OSPF and RIP are sensitive to accurate system time If OSPF or RIP are enabled changing the time from this menu will cause them to be restarted Revision 1 14 1 49 RX1000 RX1100 5 Configuring Networking 5 Configuring Networking 5 1 Introduction This chapter familiarizes the user with e Configuring routing and gateways e Configuring DNS Dynamic Name Service e Entering host addresse
470. y Server field e g http 192 168 0 1 ruggedcom Set the Release Version field to rri Save the configuration and return to the Maintenance menu Set the Only show which packages would be upgraded radio button to No and click on the Upgrade Now button to start the upgrade Revision 1 14 1 324 RX1000 RX1100 Appendix E RADIUS Server Configuration Appendix E RADIUS Server Configuration This section describes the configuration procedures for two popular RADIUS servers FreeRADIUS and the Microsoft Windows Internet Authentication Service in order to create and manage accounts that are able to access resources on RuggedRouter There are four RADIUS attributes required for the configuration of accounts to access services on RuggedRouter The following table shows the RADIUS attributes required by RuggedRouter for accounts that are designated to use one or more of the webmin login ppp or ssh services RADIUS Attribute webmin login ppp ssh User ID required required required required Password required required required required NAS Identifier RuggedCom Privilege required level Every account to be authenticated on behalf of the RuggedRouter must have a user ID and password The RADIUS NAS ldentifier attribute may optionally be used to restrict which service an account may access e webmin e login ppp e ssh Accounts that do not specify a NAS lIdentifier attribute may
471. y and PPP statistics are available through Statistics links under the interface name column of each interface table 7 2 5 1 Link Statistics T1 1 Link Layer Statistics Receive Statistics Transmit Statistics Number of frames received 25520 Number of frames transmitted 23193 Number of bytes received 14639786 Number of bytes transmitted 6929719 Receive Throughput D Transmit Throughput 0 Received frames discarded too short D Transmit frames discarded length error 0 Received frames discarded too long 0 Transmit frames realigned 0 Received frames discarded link inactive 0 Receive Errors Transmit Errors Number of receiver overrun errors o Number of transmitter PCI errors o Number of receiver CRC errors o Number of transmitter PCI latency warnings 0 Number of receiver Abort errors o Number of transmitter DMA descriptor errors o Number of receiver corruption errors D Number of transmitter DMA descriptor length errors 0 Number of receiver PCI errors o Number of receiver DMA descriptor errors 0 Link Alarms ALOS OFF Los OFF RED OFF AIS OFF YEL OFF OOF OFF Refresh Clear Statistics Figure 7 8 T1 E1 Link Statistics The Link Alarms indicate ongoing problems ALOS LOS Loss of Signal This alarm indicates a complete absence of synchronization pulses on the line RED Red Alarm This is a local equipment alarm It indicates th
472. y default uses an automatic cost of 10 for all links by calculating is as reference bandwidth 100Mbit divided by the link bandwidth 10Mbit If a manual cost is assigned to the interface in OSPF this value is ignored RIP does not use this parameter 17 2 2 3 View Core Configuration This menu shows the current configuration file for the Core interfaces 17 2 3 BGP configuration geg BGP BGP BGP BGP BGP BGP Global Parameters Networks Status i View BGP Configuration K Return to dynamic routin Figure 17 7 BGP Main Configuration Menu This menu contains the configuration and status of BGP on the router The BGP Global Parameters and Networks menus configure BGP The Status and View BGP Configuration menus display the actual status and configuration file contents of BGP 17 2 3 1 BGP Global Parameters Note The AS ID defined below must be configured prior to any configuration of BGP networks or neighbors Revision 1 14 1 167 RX1000 RX1100 17 Configuring Dynamic Routing Help a BGP Global Parameters Parameter Value Description Possible values default value Enable password For configuration access string without spaces previous Enable Password 000000 o 9 iia Gel Telnet Password SSGSGCRSSSOBS Telnet Telnet password For port 2605 access string without spaces previous password Mion Identifier of router Often the DNS name of the router string without spaces no
473. y known so they can t be used with sites with dynamic IPs Revision 1 14 1 145 RX1000 RX1100 16 Configuring IPsec VPN 16 1 1 5 X509 Certificates When one side of the VPN connection is placed from a dynamic IP the so called roaming client X509 Certificates may be used to authenticate the connection Certificates are digital signatures that are produced by a trusted source namely a Certificate Authority CA For each host the CA creates an certificate that contains CA and host information and signs the certificate by creating a digest of all the fields in the certificate and encrypting the hash value with its private key The encrypted digest is called a digital signature The host s certificate and the CA public key are installed on all gateways that the host connects to When the gateway receives a connection request it uses the CA public key to decrypt the signature back into the digest It then recomputes its own digest from the plain text in the certificate and compares the two If both digests match the integrity of the certificate is verified it was not tampered with and the public key in the certificate is assumed to be the valid public key of the connecting host 16 1 1 6 NAT Traversal Historically IPSec has presented problems when connections must traverse a firewall providing Network Address Translation NAT The Internet Key Exchange IKE used in IPSec is not NAT translatable When IPSec con
474. y with queues You are not allowed to reorder queues in a way that violates the priority implicit in their name The Transmit Queue Length Selector allows you to make a tradeoff between latency and performance Remove prioritization by selecting the Delete and Apply button 20 2 2 1 Prioritization Queues wippp Queue Configuration Queue Configuration wippp Queue Name extra high Save and Apply Delete and Apply Figure 20 3 Prioritization Queue Configuration This menu allows you to edit the name of of a priority queue and to delete the queue If you delete a queue referenced by filters the filters will be adjusted to use the next lowest queue 20 2 2 2 Prioritization Filters wippp Filter Configuration Filter Configuration wippp Source IP Netmask Source Port Dest IP Netmask 172 123 44 86 Dest Port ssh Protocol Target Queue extra high v Save and Apply Delete and Apply Figure 20 4 Prioritization Filter Configuration This menu allows you to edit and delete traffic filters The Source IP Netmask and Dest IP Netmask fields specify the IP addresses and masks used to match an outgoing packet Use 0 0 0 0 0 to generate an all packets match The Source Port and Dest Port fields specify the port numbers used to match an outgoing packet You may specify either a raw number or a mnemonic as specified in the etc services file This setting matches both udp and tcp ports unless
475. ynchronous Serial Ports Sak Edit Synchronous Serial Port Port Bad rat Clock CTSRTS delay Type k 64000 INTERNAL 150 kee Save Changes Figure 25 3 Edit Synchronous Serial Port Parameters 25 2 2 Configuring Raw Socket On Synchronous Serial Ports In order to enable the Raw Socket protocol the desired synchronous serial port use the Assign Protocols submenu under the Serial Protocols menu refer to Assign Protocols Menu As noted above the Raw Socket protocol operates differently for synchronous and asynchronous ports The configuration for each also differs Help Raw Socket Note that changes are made immediately causing call placement to start Port Pack Char Pack Timer Tumaround Call Dir Max Conns Rem IP Rem Port Loc Port Action 1 off 1000 off IN ei 1 5000 2 off 1000 off JouT db 192 168 1 1 2o00 AddNewConns 2 off 1000 off OUT 2 192 168 1 1 3000 N A Delete Save Changes 4a Return to Serial Protocols Figure 25 4 Edit Synchronous Serial Raw Socket Parameters The Pack Char Pack Timer and Turnaround timer fields are unused and are ignored in the case of synchronous serial ports The Call Dir field configures whether to accept an incoming connection IN place an outgoing connection OUT or do both BOTH The Max Conns field configures the maximum number of incoming connections to permit when the call direction is incoming or the ma

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

RuggedRouter rugged router

RuggedRouter&reg;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

RuggedRouter®